Ansys Fluent Tutorial Guide

ANSYS, Inc. Release 2025 R1

Southpointe January 2025
2600 Ansys Drive
Canonsburg, PA 15317 ANSYS, Inc. and
[email protected] ANSYS Europe,
Ltd. are UL
http://www.ansys.com registered ISO
(T) 724-746-3304 9001: 2015
(F) 724-514-9494 companies.
Copyright and Trademark Information

© 2025 ANSYS, Inc. Unauthorized use, distribution or duplication is prohibited.

ANSYS, Ansys Workbench, AUTODYN, CFX, FLUENT and any and all ANSYS, Inc. brand, product, service and feature
names, logos and slogans are registered trademarks or trademarks of ANSYS, Inc. or its subsidiaries located in the
United States or other countries. ICEM CFD is a trademark used by ANSYS, Inc. under license. CFX is a trademark
of Sony Corporation in Japan. All other brand, product, service and feature names or trademarks are the property
of their respective owners. FLEXlm and FLEXnet are trademarks of Flexera Software LLC.

Disclaimer Notice

THIS ANSYS SOFTWARE PRODUCT AND PROGRAM DOCUMENTATION INCLUDE TRADE SECRETS AND ARE CONFID-
ENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY PRODUCTS OF ANSYS, INC., ITS SUBSIDIARIES, OR LICENSORS. The software products
and documentation are furnished by ANSYS, Inc., its subsidiaries, or affiliates under a software license agreement
that contains provisions concerning non-disclosure, copying, length and nature of use, compliance with exporting
laws, warranties, disclaimers, limitations of liability, and remedies, and other provisions. The software products
and documentation may be used, disclosed, transferred, or copied only in accordance with the terms and conditions
of that software license agreement.

ANSYS, Inc. and ANSYS Europe, Ltd. are UL registered ISO 9001: 2015 companies.

U.S. Government Rights

For U.S. Government users, except as specifically granted by the ANSYS, Inc. software license agreement, the use,
duplication, or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions stated in the ANSYS, Inc.
software license agreement and FAR 12.212 (for non-DOD licenses).

Third-Party Software

See the legal information in the product help files for the complete Legal Notice for ANSYS proprietary software
and third-party software. If you are unable to access the Legal Notice, contact ANSYS, Inc.

Published in the U.S.A.

Table of Contents
Using This Manual .................................................................................................................................... xxix
1. What’s In This Manual ...................................................................................................................... xxix
2. How To Use This Manual .................................................................................................................. xxix
2.1. For the Beginner ..................................................................................................................... xxix
2.2. For the Experienced User ........................................................................................................ xxix
3. Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual .............................................................................. xxix
1. Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold .......................................................................................................... 1
1.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 1
1.2. Prerequisites ..................................................................................................................................... 2
1.3. Problem Description ......................................................................................................................... 2
1.4. Setup and Solution ........................................................................................................................... 2
1.4.1. Preparation .............................................................................................................................. 3
1.4.2. Launching Ansys Fluent ........................................................................................................... 3
1.4.3. Meshing Workflow ................................................................................................................... 4
1.4.4. General Settings ..................................................................................................................... 17
1.4.5. Solver Settings ....................................................................................................................... 18
1.4.6. Models ................................................................................................................................... 19
1.4.7. Materials ................................................................................................................................ 19
1.4.8. Cell Zone Conditions .............................................................................................................. 20
1.4.9. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................. 20
1.4.10. Solution ............................................................................................................................... 25
1.5. Postprocessing ............................................................................................................................... 33
1.6. Summary ........................................................................................................................................ 46
2. Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold ............................................................................................ 47
2.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 47
2.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................... 48
2.3. Problem Description ....................................................................................................................... 48
2.4. Setup and Solution ......................................................................................................................... 48
2.4.1. Preparation ............................................................................................................................ 49
2.4.2. Reading the Solution .............................................................................................................. 49
2.4.3. Manipulating the Mesh in the Viewer ...................................................................................... 49
2.4.4. Adding Lights ........................................................................................................................ 51
2.4.5. Creating Isosurfaces ............................................................................................................... 55
2.4.6. Generating Contours .............................................................................................................. 58
2.4.7. Generating Velocity Vectors .................................................................................................... 62
2.4.8. Creating an Animation ........................................................................................................... 67
2.4.9. Creating a Scene With Multiple Graphics Features ................................................................... 72
2.4.10. Creating Exploded Views ...................................................................................................... 74
2.4.11. Animating the Display of Results in Successive Streamwise Planes ......................................... 77
2.4.12. Generating XY Plots .............................................................................................................. 80
2.4.13. Saving Picture Files ............................................................................................................... 83
2.4.14. Generating Volume Integral Reports ..................................................................................... 84
2.5. Summary ........................................................................................................................................ 85
3. Modeling Flow Through Porous Media ................................................................................................. 87
3.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................... 87
3.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................... 88
3.3. Problem Description ....................................................................................................................... 88
3.4. Setup and Solution ......................................................................................................................... 89
3.4.1. Preparation ............................................................................................................................ 89

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. iii
Tutorial Guide

3.4.2. Meshing Workflow ................................................................................................................. 89

3.4.3. General Settings ................................................................................................................... 107
3.4.4. Solver Settings ..................................................................................................................... 109
3.4.5. Models ................................................................................................................................. 110
3.4.6. Materials .............................................................................................................................. 111
3.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions ............................................................................................................ 112
3.4.8. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................ 116
3.4.9. Solution ............................................................................................................................... 118
3.4.10. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 124
3.5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 135
4. Modeling External Compressible Flow ............................................................................................... 137
4.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 137
4.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 137
4.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 138
4.4. Setup and Solution ....................................................................................................................... 139
4.4.1. Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 140
4.4.2. Meshing Workflow ............................................................................................................... 140
4.4.3. Mesh .................................................................................................................................... 152
4.4.4. Solver .................................................................................................................................. 155
4.4.5. Models ................................................................................................................................. 156
4.4.6. Materials .............................................................................................................................. 158
4.4.7. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................ 159
4.4.8. Operating Conditions ........................................................................................................... 162
4.4.9. Reference Values .................................................................................................................. 163
4.4.10. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 164
4.4.11. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 168
4.5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 179
5. Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow ................................................................................. 181
5.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 181
5.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 182
5.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 182
5.4. Setup and Solution ....................................................................................................................... 183
5.4.1. Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 183
5.4.2. Meshing Workflow ............................................................................................................... 184
5.4.3. Setting Up Domain ............................................................................................................... 192
5.4.4. Setting Up Physics ................................................................................................................ 194
5.4.5. Solving ................................................................................................................................ 208
5.4.6. Displaying the Preliminary Solution ...................................................................................... 219
5.4.7. Adapting the Mesh ............................................................................................................... 233
5.5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 245
6. Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing ............................................................................................ 247
6.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 247
6.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 248
6.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 248
6.4. Setup and Solution ....................................................................................................................... 248
6.4.1. Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 249
6.4.2. Geometry and Mesh ............................................................................................................. 249
6.4.3. General Settings ................................................................................................................... 270
6.4.4. Solver Settings ..................................................................................................................... 271
6.4.5. Models ................................................................................................................................. 272
6.4.6. Materials .............................................................................................................................. 273

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
iv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

6.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions ............................................................................................................ 273

6.4.8. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................ 273
6.4.9. Solution ............................................................................................................................... 275
6.4.10. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 282
6.5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 289
7. Modeling Hypersonic Flow ................................................................................................................. 291
7.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 291
7.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 291
7.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 292
7.4. Setup and Solution ....................................................................................................................... 292
7.4.1. Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 293
7.4.2. Meshing Workflow ............................................................................................................... 293
7.4.3. Mesh .................................................................................................................................... 305
7.4.4. Solver .................................................................................................................................. 307
7.4.5. Models ................................................................................................................................. 308
7.4.6. Materials .............................................................................................................................. 311
7.4.7. Operating Conditions ........................................................................................................... 312
7.4.8. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................ 312
7.4.9. Solution ............................................................................................................................... 317
7.4.10. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 327
7.4.11. Enable the Species Model ................................................................................................... 337
7.5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 351
8. Modeling Transient Compressible Flow .............................................................................................. 353
8.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 353
8.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 353
8.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 353
8.4. Setup and Solution ....................................................................................................................... 354
8.4.1. Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 354
8.4.2. Meshing Workflow ............................................................................................................... 355
8.4.3. Set Units .............................................................................................................................. 365
8.4.4. Solution ............................................................................................................................... 365
8.4.5. Models ................................................................................................................................. 366
8.4.6. Materials .............................................................................................................................. 369
8.4.7. Operating Conditions ........................................................................................................... 369
8.4.8. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................................ 370
8.4.9. Solution: Steady Flow ........................................................................................................... 373
8.4.10. Enabling Time Dependence and Setting Transient Conditions ............................................. 387
8.4.11. Specifying Solution Parameters for Transient Flow and Solving ............................................ 389
8.5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 392
9. Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent ............................................................................... 393
9.1. Introduction ................................................................................................................................. 393
9.2. Prerequisites ................................................................................................................................. 393
9.3. Problem Description ..................................................................................................................... 394
9.4. Setup and Solution ....................................................................................................................... 395
9.4.1. Preparation .......................................................................................................................... 395
9.4.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................... 395
9.4.3. Initialize the Parametric Study ............................................................................................... 396
9.4.4. Add Design Points ................................................................................................................ 398
9.4.5. Set Up Design Point and Parametric Reports ......................................................................... 399
9.4.6. Update Design Point Solutions ............................................................................................. 401
9.4.7. Generate Design Point and Parametric Simulation Reports .................................................... 403

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. v
Tutorial Guide

9.4.8. Compare Design Point Results .............................................................................................. 405

9.5. Summary ...................................................................................................................................... 413
10. Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent ............................................................................. 415
10.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 415
10.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 416
10.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 416
10.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 417
10.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 418
10.4.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 418
10.4.3. Applying Mesh Morphing ................................................................................................... 419
10.4.4. Initialize the Parametric Study ............................................................................................. 425
10.4.5. Set Up Design Point and Parametric Reports ....................................................................... 427
10.4.6. Create Design Points and Run an Optimization Study .......................................................... 429
10.4.7. Generate Design Point and Parametric Simulation Reports .................................................. 432
10.4.8. Compare Design Point Results ............................................................................................ 433
10.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 438
11. Using the Frozen Rotor Method ........................................................................................................ 439
11.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 439
11.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 439
11.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 439
11.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 440
11.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 441
11.4.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 441
11.4.3. Models ............................................................................................................................... 442
11.4.4. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 442
11.4.5. Cell Zone Conditions .......................................................................................................... 443
11.4.6. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 444
11.4.7. Turbomachinery Models ..................................................................................................... 445
11.4.8. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 447
11.4.9. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 452
11.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 455
11.6. Further Improvements ................................................................................................................ 456
12. Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow ..................................................... 457
12.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 457
12.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 458
12.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 458
12.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 458
12.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 459
12.4.2. Turbo Workflow .................................................................................................................. 459
12.4.3. Review Setup ..................................................................................................................... 475
12.4.3.1. Models and Materials ................................................................................................. 476
12.4.3.2. Cell Zone and Boundary Conditions ........................................................................... 476
12.4.3.3. Mesh Interfaces ......................................................................................................... 477
12.4.3.4. Named Expressions .................................................................................................... 478
12.4.4. Review Solution ................................................................................................................. 480
12.4.4.1. Report Definitions ..................................................................................................... 480
12.4.4.2. Solution Controls ....................................................................................................... 482
12.4.4.3. Residual Monitors ...................................................................................................... 483
12.4.4.4. Monitors .................................................................................................................... 484
12.4.4.5. Solution ..................................................................................................................... 485
12.5. Postprocessing ............................................................................................................................ 489

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
vi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

12.6. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 494

13. Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations ............................ 495
13.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 495
13.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 495
13.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 495
13.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 496
13.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 497
13.4.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 497
13.4.3. Solver Settings for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model ..................................................... 498
13.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 499
13.4.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 500
13.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model ............................................ 500
13.4.7. Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................... 501
13.4.8. Boundary Conditions for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model ............................................ 502
13.4.9. Solution of the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model ................................................................ 511
13.4.10. Postprocessing of the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model .................................................... 519
13.4.11. Solver Settings for the Transient Pitch Scale Model ............................................................ 523
13.4.12. Reference Values .............................................................................................................. 524
13.4.13. Interface Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model .................................................... 525
13.4.14. Cell Zone Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model ................................................... 527
13.4.15. Boundary Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model ................................................... 527
13.4.16. Solution Settings for the Transient Pitch Scale Model ......................................................... 528
13.4.17. Postprocessing for the Transient Pitch Scale Model ............................................................ 533
13.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 537
14. Using Sliding Meshes ........................................................................................................................ 539
14.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 539
14.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 539
14.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 540
14.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 540
14.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 541
14.4.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 541
14.4.3. General Settings ................................................................................................................. 541
14.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 545
14.4.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 546
14.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions .......................................................................................................... 548
14.4.7. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 551
14.4.8. Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................... 556
14.4.9. Mesh Interfaces .................................................................................................................. 556
14.4.10. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 558
14.4.11. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 579
14.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 584
15. Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes ................................................................................................. 585
15.1. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 585
15.2. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 586
15.3. Preparation ................................................................................................................................. 587
15.4. Mesh .......................................................................................................................................... 587
15.5. Overset Interface Creation ........................................................................................................... 591
15.6. Steady-State Case Setup .............................................................................................................. 594
15.6.1. General Settings ................................................................................................................. 594
15.6.2. Models ............................................................................................................................... 594
15.6.3. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 597

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. vii
Tutorial Guide

15.6.4. Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................... 597

15.6.5. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 597
15.6.6. Reference Values ................................................................................................................ 599
15.6.7. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 599
15.7. Unsteady Setup .......................................................................................................................... 605
15.7.1. General Settings ................................................................................................................. 605
15.7.2. Compile the UDF ................................................................................................................ 606
15.7.3. Dynamic Mesh Settings ...................................................................................................... 606
15.7.4. Report Generation for Unsteady Case ................................................................................. 608
15.7.5. Run Calculations for Unsteady Case .................................................................................... 610
15.7.6. Overset Solution Checking ................................................................................................. 611
15.7.7. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 611
15.7.8. Diagnosing an Overset Case ............................................................................................... 614
15.8. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 620
16. Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion ................................................................... 621
16.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 621
16.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 621
16.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 622
16.4. Background ................................................................................................................................ 622
16.5. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 622
16.5.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 623
16.5.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 623
16.5.3. General Settings ................................................................................................................. 623
16.5.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 626
16.5.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 630
16.5.6. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 633
16.5.7. Initial Reaction Solution ...................................................................................................... 638
16.5.8. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 641
16.5.9. NOx Prediction ................................................................................................................... 649
16.6. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 659
16.7. Further Improvements ................................................................................................................ 659
17. Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model ........................................................................................... 661
17.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 661
17.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 661
17.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 662
17.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 662
17.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 663
17.4.2. Meshing Workflow .............................................................................................................. 663
17.4.3. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 676
17.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 678
17.4.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 680
17.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions .......................................................................................................... 682
17.4.7. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 683
17.4.8. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 686
17.4.9. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................... 687
17.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 691
17.6. Further Improvements ................................................................................................................ 691
18. Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models ............................ 693
18.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 693
18.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 693
18.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 694

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
viii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

18.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 694

18.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 695
18.4.2. Meshing Workflow .............................................................................................................. 695
18.4.3. Solver Settings ................................................................................................................... 703
18.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 703
18.4.5. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 704
18.4.6. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 705
18.4.7. Postprocessing for the Eddy-Dissipation Solution ................................................................ 708
18.5. Steady Diffusion Flamelet Model Setup and Solution ................................................................... 714
18.5.1. Models ............................................................................................................................... 715
18.5.2. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 716
18.5.3. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 717
18.5.4. Postprocessing for the Steady Diffusion Flamelet Solution ................................................... 717
18.6. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 721
19. Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor .................................................................... 723
19.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 723
19.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 723
19.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 724
19.4. Background ................................................................................................................................ 724
19.5. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 724
19.5.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 725
19.5.2. Meshing Workflow .............................................................................................................. 725
19.5.3. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 736
19.5.4. Setting Up Physics .............................................................................................................. 738
19.5.5. Models ............................................................................................................................... 738
19.5.6. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 748
19.5.7. Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................... 749
19.5.8. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 750
19.5.8.1. Perforated Walls ......................................................................................................... 751
19.5.9. Cold Flow Solution ............................................................................................................. 755
19.5.10. Combustion Solution ........................................................................................................ 758
19.5.11. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 759
19.6. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 763
20. Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation ......................................................................................... 765
20.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 765
20.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 766
20.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 766
20.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 767
20.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 768
20.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh ......................................................................................... 768
20.4.3. General Settings ................................................................................................................. 771
20.4.4. Solver Settings ................................................................................................................... 772
20.4.5. Specifying the Models ........................................................................................................ 773
20.4.6. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 781
20.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions .......................................................................................................... 783
20.4.8. Specifying Boundary Conditions ......................................................................................... 785
20.4.9. Modify the Particle Properties ............................................................................................. 796
20.4.10. Flow Simulation ................................................................................................................ 797
20.4.11. Postprocessing the Solution Results .................................................................................. 805
20.5. SCR Specific Post Processing ....................................................................................................... 825
20.6. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 835

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. ix
Tutorial Guide

21. Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray ................................................................................................. 837

21.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 837
21.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 837
21.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 837
21.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 838
21.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 838
21.4.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 839
21.4.3. Solver ................................................................................................................................. 842
21.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 843
21.4.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 845
21.4.6. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 847
21.4.7. Initial Solution Without Droplets ......................................................................................... 853
21.4.8. Creating a Spray Injection ................................................................................................... 861
21.4.9. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 869
21.4.10. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 879
21.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 890
22. Using the VOF Model ......................................................................................................................... 891
22.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 891
22.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 891
22.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 891
22.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 893
22.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 893
22.4.2. Reading and Manipulating the Mesh ................................................................................... 894
22.4.3. General Settings ................................................................................................................. 898
22.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 901
22.4.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 902
22.4.6. Phases ................................................................................................................................ 904
22.4.7. Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................... 908
22.4.8. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 909
22.4.9. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 913
22.4.10. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 920
22.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 924
23. Modeling Cavitation .......................................................................................................................... 925
23.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 925
23.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 925
23.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 925
23.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 926
23.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 926
23.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh ......................................................................................... 927
23.4.3. Solver Settings ................................................................................................................... 928
23.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 929
23.4.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 931
23.4.6. Phases ................................................................................................................................ 934
23.4.7. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 938
23.4.8. Operating Conditions ......................................................................................................... 943
23.4.9. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 943
23.4.10. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 948
23.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 953
24. Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model ............................................................................................... 955
24.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 955
24.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 955

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
x of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

24.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 955

24.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 956
24.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 957
24.4.2. Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 957
24.4.3. Solver Settings ................................................................................................................... 958
24.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................... 959
24.4.5. Materials ............................................................................................................................ 960
24.4.6. Phases ................................................................................................................................ 961
24.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions .......................................................................................................... 962
24.4.8. Boundary Conditions .......................................................................................................... 963
24.4.9. Solution ............................................................................................................................. 964
24.4.10. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 966
24.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................... 972
25. Modeling Solidification ..................................................................................................................... 973
25.1. Introduction ............................................................................................................................... 973
25.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................... 973
25.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................... 973
25.4. Setup and Solution ..................................................................................................................... 974
25.4.1. Preparation ........................................................................................................................ 975
25.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh ......................................................................................... 975
25.4.3. Specifying Solver and Analysis Type .................................................................................... 976
25.4.4. Specifying the Models ........................................................................................................ 977
25.4.5. Defining Materials .............................................................................................................. 979
25.4.6. Setting the Cell Zone Conditions ......................................................................................... 981
25.4.7. Setting the Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................ 981
25.4.8. Solution: Steady Conduction ............................................................................................... 988
25.4.9. Solution: Transient Flow and Heat Transfer ........................................................................... 999
25.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1008
26. Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer ............................................... 1009
26.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1009
26.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1009
26.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1009
26.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1010
26.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1011
26.4.2. Mesh ................................................................................................................................ 1011
26.4.3. Solver Settings ................................................................................................................. 1012
26.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................. 1013
26.4.5. UDF .................................................................................................................................. 1014
26.4.6. Materials .......................................................................................................................... 1015
26.4.7. Phases .............................................................................................................................. 1016
26.4.8. Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................ 1020
26.4.9. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 1027
26.4.10. Postprocessing ............................................................................................................... 1039
26.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1042
26.6. References ................................................................................................................................ 1042
27. Modeling Ablation .......................................................................................................................... 1043
27.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1043
27.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1043
27.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1043
27.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1044
27.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1044

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xi
Tutorial Guide

27.4.2. Mesh ................................................................................................................................ 1045

27.4.3. Solver ............................................................................................................................... 1046
27.4.4. Models ............................................................................................................................. 1047
27.4.5. Materials .......................................................................................................................... 1049
27.4.6. Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................ 1050
27.4.7. Dynamic Mesh ................................................................................................................. 1054
27.4.8. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 1058
27.4.9. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 1071
27.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1074
28. Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent ............................................... 1075
28.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1075
28.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1075
28.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1076
28.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1076
28.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1076
28.4.2. Structural Model ............................................................................................................... 1078
28.4.3. Materials .......................................................................................................................... 1079
28.4.4. Cell Zone Conditions ........................................................................................................ 1081
28.4.5. Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................ 1082
28.4.6. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 1086
28.4.7. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 1089
28.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1090
29. Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent ............................................... 1091
29.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1091
29.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1091
29.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1092
29.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1092
29.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1092
29.4.2. Solver and Analysis Type ................................................................................................... 1095
29.4.3. Structural Model ............................................................................................................... 1096
29.4.4. Materials .......................................................................................................................... 1097
29.4.5. Cell Zone Conditions ........................................................................................................ 1098
29.4.6. Boundary Conditions ........................................................................................................ 1099
29.4.7. Dynamic Mesh Zones ....................................................................................................... 1102
29.4.8. Solution Animations ......................................................................................................... 1106
29.4.9. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 1117
29.4.10. Postprocessing ............................................................................................................... 1120
29.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1123
30. Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder .......................................................... 1125
30.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1125
30.2. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1125
30.3. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1126
30.3.1. Step 1: Preparation ........................................................................................................... 1126
30.3.2. Step 2: Define Observables ............................................................................................... 1127
30.3.3. Step 3: Compute the Drag Sensitivity ................................................................................ 1130
30.3.4. Step 4: Postprocess and Export Drag Sensitivity ................................................................. 1135
30.3.4.1. Drag Force Sensitivity Orientation for Plotting .......................................................... 1135
30.3.4.2. Boundary Condition Sensitivity ................................................................................ 1136
30.3.4.3. Momentum Source Sensitivity .................................................................................. 1136
30.3.4.4. Shape Sensitivity ..................................................................................................... 1138
30.3.4.5. Exporting Drag Sensitivity Data ................................................................................ 1140

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

30.3.5. Step 5: Compute Lift Sensitivity ......................................................................................... 1143

30.3.6. Step 6: Modify the Shape .................................................................................................. 1144
30.4. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1151
31. Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model .................................................. 1153
31.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1153
31.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1153
31.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1153
31.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1154
31.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1154
31.4.2. Reading and Scaling the Mesh .......................................................................................... 1155
31.4.3. NTGK Battery Model Setup ................................................................................................ 1155
31.4.3.1. Specifying Solver and Models ................................................................................... 1155
31.4.3.2. Defining New Materials for Cell and Tabs .................................................................. 1159
31.4.3.3. Defining Cell Zone Conditions .................................................................................. 1163
31.4.3.4. Defining Boundary Conditions ................................................................................. 1163
31.4.3.5. Specifying Solution Settings ..................................................................................... 1164
31.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution .................................................................................................. 1168
31.4.4. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 1170
31.4.5. Simulating the Battery Pulse Discharge Using the ECM Model ............................................ 1181
31.4.6. Using the Reduced Order Method (ROM) .......................................................................... 1183
31.4.7. External and Internal Short-Circuit Treatment .................................................................... 1184
31.4.7.1. Setting up and Solving a Short-Circuit Problem ........................................................ 1184
31.4.7.2. Postprocessing ........................................................................................................ 1186
31.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1192
31.6. Appendix .................................................................................................................................. 1192
31.7. References ................................................................................................................................ 1193
32. Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model .............................................................. 1195
32.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1195
32.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1195
32.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1195
32.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1196
32.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1196
32.4.2. Reading and Scaling the Mesh .......................................................................................... 1197
32.4.3. Battery Model Setup ......................................................................................................... 1198
32.4.3.1. Specifying Solver and Models ................................................................................... 1198
32.4.3.2. Defining New Materials ............................................................................................ 1203
32.4.3.3. Defining Cell Zone Conditions .................................................................................. 1206
32.4.3.4. Defining Boundary Conditions ................................................................................. 1207
32.4.3.5. Specifying Solution Settings ..................................................................................... 1208
32.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution .................................................................................................. 1212
32.4.4. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 1215
32.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1223
33. Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers ............................................. 1225
33.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1225
33.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1225
33.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1226
33.3.1. Background ...................................................................................................................... 1227
33.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1227
33.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1227
33.4.2. Mesh ................................................................................................................................ 1227
33.4.3. Model Setup ..................................................................................................................... 1228

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xiii
Tutorial Guide

33.4.3.1. Setting Up Physics ................................................................................................... 1228

33.4.3.2. Models .................................................................................................................... 1228
33.4.3.3. Materials .................................................................................................................. 1239
33.4.3.4. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................... 1240
33.4.3.5. Solution ................................................................................................................... 1241
33.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution .................................................................................................. 1244
33.4.4. Postprocessing ................................................................................................................. 1245
33.5. Summary .................................................................................................................................. 1251
34. Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials ............................................................................................ 1253
34.1. Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial .......................................................................... 1253
34.1.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1253
34.1.2. Problem Description ......................................................................................................... 1254
34.1.3. Setup ............................................................................................................................... 1255
34.1.3.1. Preparation .............................................................................................................. 1256
34.1.3.2. Mesh ....................................................................................................................... 1256
34.1.3.3. Enabling the Virtual Blade Model .............................................................................. 1259
34.1.3.4. Setup Units .............................................................................................................. 1260
34.1.3.5. Operating Conditions ............................................................................................... 1260
34.1.3.6. Physical Modeling .................................................................................................... 1261
34.1.3.7. Materials .................................................................................................................. 1264
34.1.3.8. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................... 1264
34.1.3.9. Reference Values ...................................................................................................... 1270
34.1.3.10. Solution Methods and Controls .............................................................................. 1271
34.1.3.11. Solution Initialization ............................................................................................. 1274
34.1.3.12. VBM Rotor Inputs ................................................................................................... 1276
34.1.3.13. Convergence Monitoring ....................................................................................... 1279
34.1.3.14. Post-processing Setup ............................................................................................ 1282
34.1.3.14.1. Cutting Planes for the Pressure Distributions .................................................. 1282
34.1.3.14.2. Cutting Planes for the VBM Results ................................................................. 1284
34.1.3.14.3. Curves for the Pressure Coefficient ................................................................. 1285
34.1.3.14.4. Custom Field Function ................................................................................... 1288
34.1.3.15. Saving Settings and Re-Launching .......................................................................... 1289
34.1.4. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 1289
34.1.4.1. Rotor Simulation with Fixed-Pitch Using EDM ........................................................... 1290
34.1.4.2. Rotor Simulation with Collective Trimming .............................................................. 1296
34.1.4.3. Rotor Simulation with Collective and Cyclic Trimming ............................................... 1298
34.1.4.4. Rotor Simulation With Fixed Pitch Using FDM ........................................................... 1302
34.1.4.5. Comparison with Experimental Results ..................................................................... 1308
34.1.4.5.1. Rotor Simulation with Fixed Pitch .................................................................... 1308
34.1.4.5.2. Rotor Simulation with Collective and Cyclic Trimming ...................................... 1310
34.1.5. Summary ......................................................................................................................... 1312
34.1.6. References ....................................................................................................................... 1312
34.2. Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial ............................................................................ 1313
34.2.1. Introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1313
34.2.2. Problem Description ......................................................................................................... 1313
34.2.3. Setup ............................................................................................................................... 1316
34.2.3.1. Preparation .............................................................................................................. 1317
34.2.3.2. Mesh ....................................................................................................................... 1317
34.2.3.3. Enabling the Virtual Blade Model .............................................................................. 1320
34.2.3.4. Setup Units .............................................................................................................. 1320
34.2.3.5. Operating Conditions ............................................................................................... 1321

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

34.2.3.6. Physical Modeling .................................................................................................... 1322

34.2.3.7. Materials .................................................................................................................. 1324
34.2.3.8. Boundary Conditions ............................................................................................... 1325
34.2.3.9. Reference Values ...................................................................................................... 1331
34.2.3.10. Solution Methods and Controls .............................................................................. 1332
34.2.3.11. Solution Initialization ............................................................................................. 1335
34.2.3.12. Rotor Inputs ........................................................................................................... 1337
34.2.3.13. Convergence Monitoring ....................................................................................... 1339
34.2.3.14. Post-processing Setup ............................................................................................ 1343
34.2.3.14.1. Cutting Plane for the Velocity Distributions .................................................... 1343
34.2.3.14.2. Cutting Plane Through Disk Zone for the VBM Data Distributions .................... 1344
34.2.4. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 1345
34.2.4.1. Propeller Simulation with Fixed-Pitch ....................................................................... 1345
34.2.4.2. Rotor Simulation with Pitch Trimming (Collective Trimming) ..................................... 1350
34.2.5. Summary ......................................................................................................................... 1353
34.2.6. References ....................................................................................................................... 1353
35. Fluent GPU External Aero Sedan ..................................................................................................... 1355
35.1. Introduction .............................................................................................................................. 1355
35.2. Prerequisites ............................................................................................................................. 1355
35.3. Problem Description ................................................................................................................. 1355
35.4. Setup and Solution .................................................................................................................... 1356
35.4.1. Preparation ...................................................................................................................... 1356
35.4.2. Reading the Fluent Case File Into the GPU Solver ............................................................... 1357
35.4.3. Models ............................................................................................................................. 1358
35.4.4. Solution ........................................................................................................................... 1359

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xv
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Figures
1.1. Manifold Geometry for Flow Modeling .................................................................................................... 2
1.2. Mass Flow Rate History ......................................................................................................................... 32
1.3. Residuals .............................................................................................................................................. 32
1.4. Pathlines Through the Manifold ............................................................................................................. 34
1.5. Scene Containing the Mesh and Pathlines Throughout the Manifold ...................................................... 38
1.6. Contours of Velocity Magnitude at the Outlet ........................................................................................ 41
1.7. Contours of Temperature at the mid-plane ............................................................................................ 44
1.8. Contours of Temperature on the Exhaust Manifold ................................................................................. 46
2.1. Manifold Geometry for Flow Modeling .................................................................................................. 48
2.2. Mesh Display of the Exhaust Manifold ................................................................................................... 51
2.3. Graphics Window with Default Lighting ................................................................................................ 53
2.4. Display with Additional Lighting: - Headlight Off .................................................................................... 54
2.5. Display with Additional Lighting ........................................................................................................... 55
2.6. Filled Contours of Temperature on the Mid-Plane-x and the Outlet ......................................................... 61
2.7. Filled Contours of Temperature for the Surface of the Manifold .............................................................. 62
2.8. Velocity Vectors in the Mid-Plane of the Manifold ................................................................................... 64
2.9. Velocity Vectors mid-plane in the z-direction ......................................................................................... 67
2.10. Filled Temperature Contours on the mid-plane-x, clip-z-inner and outlet-plane Surfaces ....................... 69
2.11. Filled Temperature Contours on the Mid-Plane, Inner-Clip, and Outlet-Plane Surfaces ........................... 71
2.12. Temperature Contours and Velocity Vectors Scene ............................................................................... 74
2.13. Exploded Scene Display of Temperature, Velocity, and Pathlines ........................................................... 77
2.14. Temperature Along a Solid Portion of the Manifold .............................................................................. 83
3.1. Catalytic Converter Geometry for Flow Modeling ................................................................................... 88
3.2. The Imported CAD Geometry for the Catalytic Converter ....................................................................... 92
3.3. Mesh for the Catalytic Converter Geometry in Fluent (Solver Mode) ..................................................... 109
3.4. Mass Flow Rate History ........................................................................................................................ 123
3.5. Velocity Vectors Through the Interior ................................................................................................... 131
3.6. Contours of Static Pressure Through the Interior .................................................................................. 133
3.7. Contours of Velocity Magnitude on the z=185, z=230, z=280, z=330, and z=375 Surfaces ...................... 135
4.1. Problem Specification ......................................................................................................................... 139
4.2. The Imported CAD Geometry for the Wing .......................................................................................... 142
4.3. The Entire Mesh .................................................................................................................................. 153
4.4. Magnified View of the Mesh Around the Wing ..................................................................................... 155
4.5. Contour Plot of y+ Distribution ............................................................................................................ 169
4.6. Contour Plot of Pressure ...................................................................................................................... 171
4.7. Contour Plot of Mach Number ............................................................................................................. 173
4.8. Contour Plot of x Component of Velocity ............................................................................................. 175
4.9. Plot of Velocity Vectors Downstream of the Shock ................................................................................ 177
4.10. XY Plot of x Wall Shear Stress ............................................................................................................. 179
5.1. Problem Specification ......................................................................................................................... 183
5.2. Convergence History of the Mass-Weighted Average Temperature ....................................................... 216
5.3. Residuals ............................................................................................................................................ 217
5.4. Predicted Velocity Distribution after the Initial Calculation ................................................................... 221
5.5. Predicted Temperature Distribution after the Initial Calculation ............................................................ 223
5.6. Velocity Vectors Colored by Velocity Magnitude ................................................................................... 225
5.7. Resized Velocity Vectors ...................................................................................................................... 226
5.8. Magnified View of Resized Velocity Vectors .......................................................................................... 227
5.9. Outlet Temperature Profile for the Initial Solution ................................................................................ 230
5.10. Contours of the Dynamic Head Custom Field Function ....................................................................... 232

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xvii
Tutorial Guide

5.11. Cells Marked for Adaption ................................................................................................................. 236

5.12. Alternative Display of Cells Marked for Adaption ................................................................................ 238
5.13. The Adapted Mesh ............................................................................................................................ 240
5.14. The Complete Residual History .......................................................................................................... 241
5.15. Convergence History of Mass-Weighted Average Temperature ........................................................... 241
5.16. Filled Contours of Temperature Using the Adapted Mesh ................................................................... 242
5.17. Outlet Temperature Profile for the Adapted Coupled Solver Solution .................................................. 243
5.18. Outlet Temperature Profiles for the Two Solutions .............................................................................. 245
6.1. Exhaust System Geometry for Flow Modeling ...................................................................................... 248
6.2. Manifold CAD Geometry for Flow Modeling ......................................................................................... 251
6.3. Residuals ............................................................................................................................................ 281
6.4. Mass Balance History ........................................................................................................................... 282
6.5. Pathlines Through the Manifold ........................................................................................................... 284
6.6. Contours of Velocity Magnitude Through the Manifold ........................................................................ 286
6.7. Scene Containing the Mesh and Contours Throughout the Manifold .................................................... 289
7.1. Problem Specification ......................................................................................................................... 292
7.2. The Imported CAD Geometry for the Capsule ...................................................................................... 295
7.3. View of the Mesh Around the Capsule ................................................................................................. 307
8.1. Problem Specification ......................................................................................................................... 354
8.2. The Imported CAD Geometry for the Nozzle ........................................................................................ 357
8.3. Mass Flow Rate History ........................................................................................................................ 380
8.4. 2D Nozzle Mesh after Adaption ........................................................................................................... 383
8.5. Mass Flow Rate History (Transient Flow) .............................................................................................. 392
9.1. Problem Schematic ............................................................................................................................. 394
9.2. Mesh Display of the Static Mixer .......................................................................................................... 396
9.3. The Design Point Table for the Initial Static Mixer Case ......................................................................... 397
9.4. The Case View and Parametric Study View for the Initial Static Mixer Case ............................................. 397
9.5. The Current Parameters for the Static Mixer Case ................................................................................. 398
9.6. The Design Point Table With Additional Design Points .......................................................................... 398
9.7. The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Design Point Settings ...................................................... 400
9.8. The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Parameter Report Settings .............................................. 401
9.9. The Status Column in the Design Point Table ....................................................................................... 402
9.10. The Run Status Category of the Parametric Ribbon ............................................................................ 402
9.11. The Transcript Window for DP1 ......................................................................................................... 402
9.12. The Monitors Window for DP1 .......................................................................................................... 403
9.13. The Residuals Window for DP1 .......................................................................................................... 403
9.14. Simulation Report for a Design Point (DP1) ........................................................................................ 404
9.15. Parametric Report ............................................................................................................................. 405
9.16. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (DP=0) ............................................................................. 406
9.17. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (All Design Points) ............................................................ 407
9.18. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of Temperatures on the Inlet
Plane) ....................................................................................................................................................... 408
9.19. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of Temperature at the Outlet) ......... 409
9.20. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of Wall Temperature) ...................... 410
9.21. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of Velocity) ..................................... 411
9.22. Elements of Comparison Plots ........................................................................................................... 412
9.23. Plot of Exit Temperature vs Inlet Velocity Value ................................................................................... 412
10.1. Problem Schematic ........................................................................................................................... 416
10.2. Mesh Display of the 2D Heat Exchanger Geometry ............................................................................. 419
10.3. Setting Fixed Wall Constraint Conditions ............................................................................................ 420
10.4. Setting Translating Wall Conditions (wall-1) ........................................................................................ 421

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

10.5. Setting Translating Wall Conditions (wall-2) ........................................................................................ 422

10.6. The Region Tab of the Parameterize and Explore Dialog Box ............................................................... 423
10.7. The Design Change Tab of the Parameterize and Explore Dialog Box .................................................. 424
10.8. Preview Morphing Dialog Box ........................................................................................................... 424
10.9. Preview of the Mesh Morphing Region .............................................................................................. 425
10.10. The Design Point Table for the Initial 2D Heat Exchanger Case .......................................................... 426
10.11. The Case View and Parametric Study View for the Initial 2D Heat Exchanger Case .............................. 426
10.12. The Current Parameters for the 2D Heat Exchanger Case .................................................................. 427
10.13. The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Design Point Settings .................................................. 428
10.14. The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Parameter Report Settings .......................................... 429
10.15. The Create Design Points and Optimize Using optiSLang Dialog Box ........................................... 430
10.16.The Design Point Table With Initial Optimization Study Design Point Data ......................................... 431
10.17. The Design Point Table With Final Optimization Study Design Point Data .......................................... 431
10.18.The Results of the Optimization Study Showing the Best Solution ..................................................... 432
10.19. Simulation Report for the Optimal Design Point (DP42) .................................................................... 432
10.20. Parametric Report ........................................................................................................................... 433
10.21. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (DP=0) ........................................................................... 434
10.22. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Select Design Points) ..................................................... 435
10.23. Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of Temperatures) .......................... 436
10.24. Static Temperature Distribution at the Exit for All Design Points ........................................................ 437
10.25. Velocity Magnitude Distribution at the Exit for All Design Points ....................................................... 437
11.1. Case Geometry ................................................................................................................................. 440
11.2. Convergence History of the Pump Head ............................................................................................ 452
11.3. Contours of Velocity Magnitude at the Outlet .................................................................................... 453
11.4. Contours of Static Pressure on the Walls ............................................................................................. 454
11.5. Contours of Static Pressure ................................................................................................................ 455
12.1. Case Geometry ................................................................................................................................. 458
12.2. The Turbo Workflow Category of the Preferences Dialog Box .............................................................. 461
12.3. Models and Materials Defined From the Turbo Workflow .................................................................... 476
12.4. Cell Zone Conditions Defined From the Turbo Workflow ..................................................................... 476
12.5. Boundary Conditions Defined From the Turbo Workflow .................................................................... 477
12.6. Mesh Interfaces Defined From the Turbo Workflow ............................................................................ 477
12.7. The Expression Manager Dialog Box .................................................................................................... 478
12.8. An Example of a Named Expression from the Turbo Workflow ................................................................. 479
12.9. An Example of the Report Definitions Dialog Box ................................................................................... 481
12.10. An Example of a Turbo-Specific Expression Report Definition ................................................................ 482
12.11. Residuals ........................................................................................................................................ 487
12.12. Isentropic Efficiency of the Compressor ........................................................................................... 487
12.13. Pressure Ratio ................................................................................................................................. 488
12.14. Total Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet ................................................................................................... 489
12.15. Contours of Velocity Magnitude (span=25) ...................................................................................... 491
12.16. Contours of Total Pressure (span=25) ............................................................................................... 492
12.17. Contours of Mach Number (span=25) .............................................................................................. 493
13.1. Case Geometry ................................................................................................................................. 496
13.2. Pressure Ratio ................................................................................................................................... 518
13.3. Outlet Mass Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................... 518
13.4. Efficiency .......................................................................................................................................... 519
13.5. Contours of Velocity Magnitude ........................................................................................................ 521
13.6. Contours of Static Pressure ................................................................................................................ 522
13.7. Contours of Static Temperature ......................................................................................................... 523
13.8. Pressure Ratio ................................................................................................................................... 531

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xix
Tutorial Guide

13.9. Outlet Mass Flow Rate ....................................................................................................................... 532

13.10. Efficiency ........................................................................................................................................ 532
13.11. Contours of Entropy ........................................................................................................................ 533
13.12. Contours of Velocity Magnitude ....................................................................................................... 535
13.13. Contours of Static Pressure .............................................................................................................. 536
13.14. Contours of Static Temperature ....................................................................................................... 537
14.1. Rotor-Stator Problem Description ...................................................................................................... 540
14.2. Rotor-Stator Display .......................................................................................................................... 542
14.3. Residual History for the First Revolution of the Rotor .......................................................................... 567
14.4. Mass Flow Rate at the Inlet During the First Revolution ...................................................................... 568
14.5. Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet During the First Revolution .................................................................... 569
14.6. Static Pressure at the Interface During the First Revolution ................................................................. 570
14.7. Mass Flow Rate at the Inlet During the Next 3 Revolutions ................................................................. 573
14.8. Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet During the Next 3 Revolutions ............................................................... 574
14.9. Static Pressure at the Interface During the Next 3 Revolutions ............................................................ 575
14.10. Static Pressure at a Point on The Stator Interface During the Final Revolution .................................... 579
14.11. FFT of Static Pressure at the Stator ................................................................................................... 582
14.12. Mean Static Pressure on the Outer Shroud of the Axial Compressor .................................................. 584
15.1. Schematic of Problem ....................................................................................................................... 586
15.2. Close View of Bay Area ...................................................................................................................... 587
15.3. Cell Marking on component .............................................................................................................. 618
15.4. Cell Marking on fluid-background ..................................................................................................... 618
15.5. Dead Cells in the Component ............................................................................................................ 619
15.6. Dead Cells in the Background ............................................................................................................ 620
16.1. Combustion of Methane Gas in a Turbulent Diffusion Flame Furnace .................................................. 622
16.2. The Quadrilateral Mesh for the Combustor Model .............................................................................. 625
16.3. Contours of Temperature ................................................................................................................... 642
16.4. Velocity Vectors ................................................................................................................................. 644
16.5. Contours of CH4 Mass Fraction .......................................................................................................... 645
16.6. Contours of O2 Mass Fraction ............................................................................................................ 646
16.7. Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction .......................................................................................................... 646
16.8. Contours of H2O Mass Fraction .......................................................................................................... 647
16.9. Contours of NO Mass Fraction — Prompt and Thermal NOx Formation ............................................... 653
16.10. Contours of NO Mass Fraction—Thermal NOx Formation ................................................................. 655
16.11. Contours of NO Mass Fraction—Prompt NOx Formation .................................................................. 656
16.12. The Custom Field Function Calculator Dialog Box ............................................................................. 657
16.13. Contours of NO ppm — Prompt NOx Formation ............................................................................... 658
17.1. Case Geometry ................................................................................................................................. 662
17.2. The Imported CAD Geometry for the Headlamp ................................................................................. 665
17.3. Graphics Display of Headlamp Mesh .................................................................................................. 678
17.4. Contour of Temperature on Inner Bezel .............................................................................................. 689
17.5. Contour of Radiation Intensity Normalized Standard Deviation on Inner Bezel .................................... 691
18.1. Can Combustor Geometry ................................................................................................................. 694
18.2. Scaled Residuals ................................................................................................................................ 707
18.3. Convergence History of Mass-Weighted Average CO2 on the Outlet ................................................... 708
18.4. Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction .......................................................................................................... 712
18.5. Contours of O2 Mass Fraction ............................................................................................................ 713
18.6. Contours of Static Temperature on the Combustor Walls .................................................................... 714
18.7. Contours of Mean Mixture Fraction .................................................................................................... 718
18.8. Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction .......................................................................................................... 719
18.9. Convergence History of Mass-Weighted Average CO2 on the Outlet ................................................... 721

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

19.1. 3D model gas turbine combustor with liquid fuel Combustion of Methane ......................................... 724
19.2. The Imported CAD Geometry for the Combustor ............................................................................... 727
20.1. Schematic of the selective catalytic reduction system ........................................................................ 767
20.2. Wall Surface Mesh Display ................................................................................................................. 770
20.3. Mixer Mesh Display ........................................................................................................................... 771
20.4. Scaled Residuals ................................................................................................................................ 803
20.5. Surface Monitor of Uniformity Index (Area–Weighted) for NH3 Mass Fraction at Catalyst Inlet ............. 803
20.6. Surface Monitor of Uniformity Index (Area–Weighted) for Mixture Velocity Magnitude at Catalyst In-
let. ............................................................................................................................................................ 804
20.7. Surface Monitor of Total Wall Film Mass at Each Wall Boundary. .......................................................... 804
20.8. Static Pressure Distribution on the System Walls. ................................................................................ 806
20.9. Static Pressure Distribution on the System Walls; Limited Range. ........................................................ 808
20.10. Static Temperature Distribution at the Two Internal Planes ............................................................... 813
20.11. Distribution of NH3 Mass Fraction on the Mixer Walls. ...................................................................... 815
20.12. Distribution of Wall Film Height on the External Walls of the SCR System. .......................................... 818
20.13.Tracks of Free and Wall Film Particles, Colored by Urea Mass Fraction and Scaled by Particle Diamet-
er. ............................................................................................................................................................. 822
20.14.Tracks of Wall Film Particles with H2O Content Practically Evaporated and Scaled by Particle Diamet-
er. ............................................................................................................................................................. 825
20.15. Contours of Overall Deposition Risk on the Walls of the SCR System. ................................................. 835
21.1. Problem Specification ....................................................................................................................... 838
21.2. Air-Blast Atomizer Mesh Display ........................................................................................................ 842
21.3. Scaled Residuals ................................................................................................................................ 857
21.4. Velocity Magnitude at Mid-Point of Atomizer Section ......................................................................... 860
21.5. Pathlines of Air in the Swirling Annular Stream ................................................................................... 861
21.6. Convergence History of Mass Fraction of ch3oh on Fluid .................................................................... 877
21.7. Convergence History of DPM Mass Source on Fluid ............................................................................ 878
21.8. Convergence History of Total Mass in Domain .................................................................................... 878
21.9. Convergence History of Evaporated Particle Mass .............................................................................. 879
21.10. Particle Tracks for the Spray Injection ............................................................................................... 881
21.11. Contours of DPM Temperature ......................................................................................................... 883
21.12. Contours of DPM Sauter Diameter ................................................................................................... 884
21.13. Vectors of DPM Mean Velocity Colored by DPM Velocity Magnitude .................................................. 886
21.14. Full Atomizer Display with Surface of Constant Methanol Mass Fraction ........................................... 889
21.15. Atomizer Display with Surface of Constant Methanol Mass Fraction Enhanced .................................. 890
22.1. Schematic of the Problem ................................................................................................................. 892
22.2. Default Display of the Nozzle Mesh .................................................................................................... 894
22.3. The Quadrilateral Mesh ..................................................................................................................... 895
22.4. Mesh Display of the Nozzle Mirrored and Upright .............................................................................. 898
22.5. Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 6 μs .................................................................................... 922
22.6. Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 12 μs ................................................................................... 923
22.7. Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 18 μs ................................................................................... 923
22.8. Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 24 μs ................................................................................... 924
22.9. Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 30 μs ................................................................................... 924
23.1. Problem Schematic ........................................................................................................................... 926
23.2. The Mesh in the Orifice ...................................................................................................................... 928
23.3. Contours of Static Pressure ................................................................................................................ 950
23.4. Mirrored View of Contours of Static Pressure ...................................................................................... 951
23.5. Contours of Turbulent Kinetic Energy ................................................................................................. 952
23.6. Contours of Vapor Volume Fraction .................................................................................................... 953
24.1. Problem Schematic ........................................................................................................................... 956

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxi
Tutorial Guide

24.2. Mesh Display of the Mixing Tank ........................................................................................................ 958

24.3. Residual History ................................................................................................................................ 965
24.4. Contours of Air Volume Fraction on the XZ plane ............................................................................... 968
24.5. Contours of Air Volume Fraction on the z=0.08 plane ......................................................................... 969
24.6. Vectors of Water Velocity Magnitude on the XZ plane ......................................................................... 970
24.7. Vectors of Air Velocity Magnitude on the XZ plane ............................................................................. 971
25.1. Solidification in Czochralski Model .................................................................................................... 974
25.2. Mesh Display .................................................................................................................................... 976
25.3. Contours of Temperature for the Steady Conduction Solution ............................................................ 997
25.4. Contours of Temperature (Mushy Zone) for the Steady Conduction Solution ...................................... 999
25.5. Contours of Temperature at t=0.2 s .................................................................................................. 1005
25.6. Contours of Liquid Fraction at t=0.2 s ............................................................................................... 1006
25.7. Contours of Temperature at t=5 s ..................................................................................................... 1007
25.8. Contours of Liquid Fraction at t=5 s ................................................................................................. 1008
26.1. Problem Schematic ......................................................................................................................... 1010
26.2. Mesh Display of the Fluidized Bed .................................................................................................... 1012
26.3. Initial Volume Fraction of Granular Phase (solids) .............................................................................. 1037
26.4. Plot of Mixture-Averaged Heat Transfer Coefficient in the Cell Next to the Heated Wall Versus Time .... 1039
26.5. Contours of Static Pressure .............................................................................................................. 1041
26.6. Contours of Volume Fraction of Solids .............................................................................................. 1042
27.1. Problem Schematic ......................................................................................................................... 1044
27.2. Wedge Mesh Display ....................................................................................................................... 1046
27.3. Scaled Residuals .............................................................................................................................. 1069
27.4. History of the Drag Force on the Ablation Wall ................................................................................. 1070
27.5. History of the Averaged Pressure on the Ablation Wall ...................................................................... 1070
27.6. History of the Maximum Z Coordinate of the Ablation Wall ............................................................... 1071
27.7. Contours of Static Pressure .............................................................................................................. 1073
27.8. Contours of Mach Number .............................................................................................................. 1074
28.1. Problem Schematic ......................................................................................................................... 1076
28.2. Velocity Magnitude on the Symmetry Plane ..................................................................................... 1078
28.3. Contours of Total Displacement ....................................................................................................... 1090
29.1. Problem Schematic ......................................................................................................................... 1092
29.2. Steady-State Velocity Magnitude ..................................................................................................... 1094
29.3. Duct with Mirroring ......................................................................................................................... 1095
29.4. The Vertex Average Displacement of the Flap's Point Surface ............................................................ 1120
29.5. Contours of Velocity Magnitude ....................................................................................................... 1122
29.6. Contours of Total Displacement ....................................................................................................... 1122
29.7. The Mesh of the Displaced Flap ....................................................................................................... 1123
30.1. Mesh Close to the Cylinder Surface .................................................................................................. 1127
30.2. Contours of Velocity Magnitude ....................................................................................................... 1127
30.3. Adjoint Observables Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 1128
30.4. Manage Adjoint Observables Dialog Box ......................................................................................... 1128
30.5. Adjoint Observables Dialog Box ....................................................................................................... 1130
30.6. Adjoint Solution Controls Dialog Box ............................................................................................... 1131
30.7. Adjoint Residual Monitors Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 1133
30.8. Adjoint Residual Monitors Dialog Box .............................................................................................. 1134
30.9. Run Adjoint Calculation Dialog Box .................................................................................................. 1134
30.10. Residuals for the Converged Solution ............................................................................................. 1135
30.11. Adjoint Postprocess Options Dialog Box ........................................................................................ 1135
30.12. Adjoint Reporting Dialog Box ........................................................................................................ 1136
30.13. Contours Dialog Box When Plotting Adjoint Fields ......................................................................... 1137

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

30.14. Adjoint Sensitivity to Body Force X-Component Contours .............................................................. 1138

30.15. Vectors Dialog Box ........................................................................................................................ 1139
30.16. Shape Sensitivity Colored by Sensitivity to Mass Sources (Cell Values) ............................................. 1140
30.17.The Design Tool Dialog Box ............................................................................................................ 1141
30.18. Morphing Region Around Cylinder ................................................................................................ 1142
30.19.The Design Tool Dialog Box Objectives Tab ..................................................................................... 1143
30.20. Morphing Preview of Cylinder ........................................................................................................ 1149
30.21. Mesh After Deformation ................................................................................................................ 1150
31.1. Schematic of the Battery Cell Problem ............................................................................................. 1154
31.2. Model Options ................................................................................................................................ 1156
31.3. Conductive Zones ........................................................................................................................... 1157
31.4. Electric Contacts ............................................................................................................................. 1158
31.5. Residual History of the Simulation ................................................................................................... 1169
31.6. Report Plot of Discharge Curve at 1 C ............................................................................................... 1169
31.7. History of Maximum Temperature in the Domain ............................................................................. 1169
31.8. Contour Plot of Phase Potential for the Positive Electrode ................................................................. 1171
31.9. Contour Plot of Phase Potential for the Negative Electrode ............................................................... 1173
31.10. Contour Plot of Phase Potential for Passive Zones ........................................................................... 1175
31.11. Contour Plot of Temperature ......................................................................................................... 1177
31.12. Vector Plot of Current Density ........................................................................................................ 1179
31.13. NTGK Model: Discharge Curves ...................................................................................................... 1181
31.14. NTGK Model: Maximum Temperature in the Domain ...................................................................... 1181
31.15. Battery Pulse Discharge ................................................................................................................. 1183
31.16. Internal Short Circuit Region Marked for Patching .......................................................................... 1185
31.17. The Vector Plots of Current at the Positive Current Collectors .......................................................... 1189
31.18. The Vector Plots of Current at the Negative Current Collectors ........................................................ 1190
31.19. Contour Plot of Temperature ......................................................................................................... 1191
32.1. Schematic of the Battery Pack Problem ............................................................................................ 1196
32.2. Model Options ................................................................................................................................ 1199
32.3. Conductive Zones ........................................................................................................................... 1201
32.4. Electric Contacts ............................................................................................................................. 1202
32.5. Residual History of the Simulation ................................................................................................... 1213
32.6. Surface Report Plot of Discharge Curve at 200W .............................................................................. 1214
32.7. Volume Report Plot of Maximum Temperature in the Domain .......................................................... 1214
32.8. Vector Plot of Current Density .......................................................................................................... 1217
32.9. Contour Plot of Temperature ........................................................................................................... 1219
32.10. Ohmic Heat Generation Rate ......................................................................................................... 1221
32.11. Total Heat Generation Rate ............................................................................................................ 1223
33.1. Schematic of the Electrolyzer Problem ............................................................................................. 1226
33.2. The Electrolyzer Cross-Section ......................................................................................................... 1226
33.3. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Model Tab .......................................................................... 1229
33.4. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Parameters Tab ................................................................... 1231
33.5. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Collector .................................................................. 1232
33.6. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Flow Channel ........................................................... 1233
33.7. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Porous Layer ............................................................ 1234
33.8. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Catalyst Layer .......................................................... 1235
33.9. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Electrolyte Tab .................................................................... 1236
33.10. Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Electrolyte Tab .................................................................. 1238
33.11. Residual History of the Simulation ................................................................................................. 1245
33.12. Electric Potential Distribution ........................................................................................................ 1249
33.13. Volume fraction of gas phase ......................................................................................................... 1251

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxiii
Tutorial Guide

34.1. Simple Helicopter in the GIT Wind Tunnel Test Section ..................................................................... 1255
34.2. From Left to Right, the Three Components of the live1 Cell Zone: Int_Rotor, Int_live1 and Int_Live. .... 1258
34.3. General Disk Data Configuration Window ........................................................................................ 1278
34.4. Geometry Configuration Window .................................................................................................... 1278
34.5. Solution Residuals Configuration ..................................................................................................... 1279
34.6. Create Plane Surface Plane-y=0 ....................................................................................................... 1283
34.7. Create Plane Surface Plane-Disk ....................................................................................................... 1284
34.8. Iso-Surface Creation Panel ............................................................................................................... 1285
34.9. Iso-Clip Panel for the Creation of the Clip-Port Curve ........................................................................ 1286
34.10. Custom Field Function Configuration Panel .................................................................................... 1288
34.11. Convergence History ..................................................................................................................... 1291
34.12. Pressure Monitor Convergence History .......................................................................................... 1291
34.13. Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History .................................................................................... 1292
34.14. Pressure Distribution Contours on the Y=0 Plane ............................................................................ 1293
34.15. Pressure Distribution with Fixed Blade Pitch, Y=0 Cutting Plane ...................................................... 1294
34.16. Pressure Distribution with Fixed Blade Pitch, X=0.3 Cutting Plane ................................................... 1294
34.17. Setup Contours to Display the Vbm AoA Distribution for Main-Rotor .............................................. 1295
34.18. VBM AoA Distribution for Main-Rotor ............................................................................................. 1296
34.19. Convergence History with Collective and Cyclic Angles Trimming ................................................... 1301
34.20. Pressure Distribution with Collective and Cyclic Trimming,Y=0 Cutting Plane .................................. 1302
34.21. Pressure Distribution with Collective and Cyclic Trimming, X=0.3 Cutting Plane ............................... 1302
34.22. General Disk Data Configuration Window, FDM, Fixed Pitch ............................................................ 1304
34.23. Convergence History, FDM, Fixed Pitch ........................................................................................... 1306
34.24. Pressure Monitor Convergence History, FDM, Fixed Pitch ................................................................ 1306
34.25. Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History .................................................................................... 1307
34.26. Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Top and Bottom of the Fuselage ................................... 1310
34.27. Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Port and Starboard Sides of the Fuselage ..................... 1310
34.28. Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Top and Bottom of the Fuselage Obtained with Collective
and Cyclic Trimming ................................................................................................................................ 1311
34.29. Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Port and Starboard Sides of the Fuselage Obtained with
Collective and Cyclic Trimming ................................................................................................................ 1311
34.30. Simple Propeller, Modeled by an Actuator Disk (Green), Inside a Cylindrical Domain ........................ 1315
34.31. Radial Distribution of Blade Chord and Twist .................................................................................. 1316
34.32. Lift and Drag Coefficients of the Modified NACA 16016 Airfoil ........................................................ 1316
34.33. From Left to Right, the Three Components of the Disk Cell Zone: Int_Acdisk, Int_Disk and
Int_Disk:003 ............................................................................................................................................ 1319
34.34. General Disk Data Configuration Window ...................................................................................... 1338
34.35. Geometry Configuration Window .................................................................................................. 1339
34.36. Solution Residuals Configuration ................................................................................................... 1340
34.37. Convergence History with Fixed Pitch ............................................................................................ 1346
34.38. Pressure Monitor Convergence History with Fixed Pitch ................................................................. 1346
34.39. Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History .................................................................................... 1347
34.40. Display the Velocity Distribution on the Z = 0 Cutting Plane ........................................................... 1348
34.41. Velocity Magnitude Distribution Around the Actuator Disk, Z = 0 Cutting Plane .............................. 1349
34.42. Angle of Attack Distribution on the Actuator Disk .......................................................................... 1350
34.43. Convergence History with Collective Trimming .............................................................................. 1352
34.44. Pressure Monitor Convergence History with Collective Trimming .................................................... 1352
34.45. Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History .................................................................................... 1353
35.1. Problem Schematic ......................................................................................................................... 1356
35.2. Viscous Model Dialog Box ................................................................................................................ 1358
35.3. Solution Methods Task Page ............................................................................................................ 1359

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxiv of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Tutorial Guide

35.4. Residuals ........................................................................................................................................ 1362

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxv
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxvi of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
List of Tables
1. Mini Flow Chart Symbol Descriptions ...................................................................................................... xxx
3.1. Values for the Principle Direction Vectors ............................................................................................. 115
3.2. Values for the Viscous and Inertial Resistance ....................................................................................... 116
9.1. Design Point Settings for the Mixing Tank ............................................................................................ 398
15.1. Meaning of Values ............................................................................................................................. 616
20.1. Values for the Principle Direction Vectors ........................................................................................... 784
20.2. Values for the Viscous and Inertial Resistance ..................................................................................... 785
22.1. Ink Chamber Dimensions .................................................................................................................. 892
34.1. Geometric Data and Operating Conditions ...................................................................................... 1254
34.2. Values from the Fixed-Pitch Solution ................................................................................................ 1297
34.3. Comparison Between Global Rotor Results Obtained Using EDM and FDM ....................................... 1307
34.4. Propeller Geometric Data and Operating Conditions ........................................................................ 1314
34.5. Geometric Characteristics of the Propeller Blade .............................................................................. 1315
34.6. Values From the Fixed-Pitch Solution ............................................................................................... 1350

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxvii
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxviii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Using This Manual
This preface is divided into the following sections:
1. What’s In This Manual
2. How To Use This Manual
3.Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual

1. What’s In This Manual

The Ansys Fluent Tutorial Guide contains a number of tutorials that teach you how to use Ansys Fluent to
solve different types of problems. In each tutorial, features related to problem setup and postprocessing
are demonstrated.

2. How To Use This Manual

Depending on your familiarity with computational fluid dynamics and the Ansys Fluent software, you
can use this tutorial guide in a variety of ways.

It is important to note that Fluent Tutorials that use a .dsco file for geometry require Discovery to be
installed in order to load the files in Fluent.

2.1. For the Beginner

If you are a beginning user of Ansys Fluent you should first read and solve Tutorial 1, in order to fa-
miliarize yourself with the interface and with basic setup and solution procedures. You may then
want to try a tutorial that demonstrates features that you are going to use in your application.

You may want to refer to other tutorials for instructions on using specific features, such as custom
field functions, mesh scaling, and so on, even if the problem solved in the tutorial is not of particular
interest to you.

2.2. For the Experienced User

If you are an experienced Ansys Fluent user, you can read and/or solve the tutorial(s) that demonstrate
features that you are going to use in your application.

You may want to refer to other tutorials for instructions on using specific features, such as custom
field functions, mesh scaling, and so on, even if the problem solved in the tutorial is not of particular
interest to you.

3. Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual

Several typographical conventions are used in this manual’s text to help you find commands in the
user interface.

• Different type styles are used to indicate graphical user interface items and text interface items. For
example:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxix
Using This Manual

Iso-Surface dialog box

surface/iso-surface text command

• The text interface type style is also used when illustrating exactly what appears on the screen to
distinguish it from the narrative text. In this context, user inputs are typically shown in boldface. For
example,
solve/initialize/set-fmg-initialization

Customize your FMG initialization:

set the number of multigrid levels [5]

set FMG parameters on levels ..

residual reduction on level 1 is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 1 is: [10] 100

residual reduction on level 2 is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 2 is: [50] 100

• Mini flow charts are used to guide you through the ribbon or the tree, leading you to a specific option,
dialog box, or task page. The following tables list the meaning of each symbol in the mini flow charts.

Table 1: Mini Flow Chart Symbol Descriptions

Symbol Indicated Action

Look at the ribbon

Look at the tree

Double-click to open task page

Select from task page

Right-click the preceding item

For example,

Setting Up Domain → Mesh → Transform → Translate...

indicates selecting the Setting Up Domain ribbon tab, clicking Transform (in the Mesh group box)
and selecting Translate..., as indicated in the figure below:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxx of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual

And

Setup → Models → Viscous Model → Realizable k-epsilon

indicates expanding the Setup and Models branches, right-clicking Viscous, and selecting Realizable
k-epsilon from the Model sub-menu, as shown in the following figure:

And

Setup → Boundary Conditions → velocity-inlet-5

indicates opening the task page as shown below:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. xxxi
Using This Manual

In this manual, mini flow charts usually accompany a description of a dialog box or command, or a
screen illustration showing how to use the dialog box or command. They show you how to quickly
access a command or dialog box without having to search the surrounding material.

• In-text references to File ribbon tab selections can be indicated using a "/". For example
File/Write/Case... indicates clicking the File ribbon tab and selecting Case... from the Write submenu
(which opens the Select File dialog box).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
xxxii of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 1: Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
1.1. Introduction
1.2. Prerequisites
1.3. Problem Description
1.4. Setup and Solution
1.5. Postprocessing
1.6. Summary

1.1. Introduction

Licensing Capability:

This tutorial is fully supported at all licensing levels.

This tutorial illustrates the setup and solution of a three-dimensional turbulent fluid flow and heat
transfer problem in a manifold. The manifold configuration is encountered in the automotive industry.
It is often important to predict the flow field and temperature field in the area of the mixing region in
order to properly design the junction.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following in Ansys Fluent:

• Use the Watertight Geometry guided workflow to:

– Import a CAD geometry

– Generate a surface mesh

– Cap inlets and outlets

– Extract a fluid region

– Generate a volume mesh

• Set up appropriate physics and boundary conditions.

• Calculate a solution.

• Review the results of the simulation.

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing the solution results
for a turbulent flow within a manifold:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

1.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

1.3. Problem Description

The manifold modeled here is shown in Figure 1.1: Manifold Geometry for Flow Modeling (p. 2). Hot
air flows through the three inlets at 925 K and the same inlet velocity of 10 m/s, and then exits through
the outlet. Convective heat transfer takes place between the fluid and the manifold.

Figure 1.1: Manifold Geometry for Flow Modeling

1.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
1.4.1. Preparation
1.4.2. Launching Ansys Fluent
1.4.3. Meshing Workflow
1.4.4. General Settings
1.4.5. Solver Settings
1.4.6. Models
1.4.7. Materials
1.4.8. Cell Zone Conditions
1.4.9. Boundary Conditions
1.4.10. Solution

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
2 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the exhaust_manifold.zip file .

2. Unzip exhaust_manifold.zip to your working directory.

The Discovery CAD file manifold.dsco can be found in the folder. In addition, the manifold.pm-
db file is available for use on the Linux platform.

1.4.2. Launching Ansys Fluent

1. From the Windows Start menu, select Start > Ansys 2025 R1 > Fluid Dynamics > Fluent 2025
R1 to start Fluent Launcher.

Fluent Launcher allows you to decide which version of Ansys Fluent you will use, based on your
geometry and on your processing capabilities.

2. Ensure that the proper options are enabled.

a. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

b. Ensure that the Double Precision option is selected.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 3
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

c. Set Processes to 4 under the Parallel (local Machine).

Note:

Fluent will retain your preferences for future sessions.

3. Set the working folder to the one created when you unzipped manifold.zip.

a. Enter the path to your working folder for Working Directory by double-clicking the text box
and typing.

Alternatively, you can click the browse button ( ) next to the Working Directory text box
and browse to the directory, using the Browse For Folder dialog box.

4. Click Start to launch Ansys Fluent.

1.4.3. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
4 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow com-
pleting all tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow.

2. Import the CAD geometry (manifold.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. For File Format, keep the default setting of CAD.

c. For Units, keep the default setting as mm.

d. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(manifold.dsco).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 5
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

e. Select Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window, and allow you to proceed
onto the next task in the workflow.

Note:

Alternatively, you can use the ... button next to File Name to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

3. Add local sizing.

a. In the Add Local Sizing task, you are prompted as to whether or not you would like to add
local sizing controls to the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
6 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default setting of no.

c. Click Update to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 7
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

b. For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default settings.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

c. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Describe the geometry.

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
8 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Since a fluid region is extracted from the solid model and capping surfaces are added,
the default settings are appropriate.

b. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Cover any openings in your geometry.

Select the Enclose Fluid Regions (Capping) task where you can cover or cap any openings in
your geometry in order to later extract the enclosed fluid region.

a. Create a cap for the inlets.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 9
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

i. In the Name field, assign a name for the capping surface (for example, inlet) to be
assigned to all of the manifold's inlets.

ii. For the Zone Type, keep the default setting of velocity-inlet.

iii. For the Select By field, keep the default setting of label.

iv. In the list of labels, select in1, in2, and in3 for the openings that you want to cover.

For occasions when the list of items is long, you can use the Filter Text option and use
an expression such as in* to show only items starting with "in". Alternatively, you can
use the Use Wildcard option to list and pres-select matching items. See Filtering Lists and
Using Wildcards for more information.

The graphics window indicates the selected items.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
10 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

v. Click Create Cap(s) to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

b. Create a cap for the outlet.

i. In the Name field, assign a name for the capping surface (for example, outlet) to
be assigned to the manifold's outlet.

ii. For the Zone Type, change the setting to pressure-outlet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 11
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

iii. For the Select By field, keep the default setting of label.

iv. In the list of labels, select out1 for the outlet that you want to cover.

v. Click Create Cap(s) to complete this task.

Now, all of the openings in the geometry are covered.

7. Create the fluid region.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
12 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Create Regions task, where you can determine the number of fluid regions that
need to be extracted. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the number of fluid regions to extract
automatically.

b. For the Estimated Number of Fluid Regions, keep the default selection of 1.

c. Click Create Regions.

8. Update your regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 13
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review the names and types of the various
regions that have been generated from your imported geometry, and change them as needed.

b. Keep the default settings, and click Update Regions.

Aside from fluid regions and solid regions, you can also have voids within your geometry that are
designated as dead regions. As you can see, there are four dead regions that correspond to the
four bolt holes near the outlet, a solid region and a fluid region.

Once the regions have been updated, the fluid region is displayed by default in the graphics window.
You can use the Draw Regions button to display other options, such as drawing just the solid region,
just the dead regions, or all regions.

9. Add boundary layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
14 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

b. Keep the default settings, and click Add Boundary Layers.

10. Generate the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 15
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

a. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, where you can set properties of the volume mesh.

b. Keep the default settings, and click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the manifold
geometry. Once complete, the mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is
automatically inserted with a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the
volume mesh.

11. Check the mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
16 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

12. Save the mesh file (manifold.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

13. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a high-quality mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can
now switch to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

1.4.4. General Settings

In the Mesh group box of the Domain ribbon tab, set the units for length..

Domain → Mesh → Units...

This opens the Set Units dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 17
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

1. Select length under Quantities.

2. Select mm under Units.

3. Close the Set Units dialog box.

1.4.5. Solver Settings

In the Solver group box of the Physics ribbon tab, retain the default selection of the steady pressure-
based solver.

Physics → Solver → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
18 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1.4.6. Models
1. Enable heat transfer by activating the energy equation.

Setup → Models → Energy On

2. Retain the default k-ω SST turbulence model.

You will use the default settings for the k-ω SST turbulence model, so you can enable it directly from
the tree by right-clicking the Viscous node and choosing SST k-omega from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Viscous Model → SST k-omega

1.4.7. Materials
Change the default material of Aluminum to cast iron.

1. Create solid material properties for Cast Iron.

Setup → Materials → Solid → aluminum Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 19
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

a. Change the name of the material to be cast-iron.

b. Clear the Chemical Formula field.

c. Change the Density to 7150 kg/m3.

d. Change the Cp to 460 J/kg K.

e. Change the Thermal Conductivity to 50 W/(m-K).

f. Click Change/Create and overwrite the aluminum material.

g. Click Yes to replace the aluminum material.

h. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

1.4.8. Cell Zone Conditions

Ordinarily, you would set up the cell zone conditions for the CFD simulation using the Zones group
box of the Physics ribbon tab.

The properties of air for the fluid zone and cast-iron for the solid zone will be used.

1.4.9. Boundary Conditions

1. Set the velocity, turbulence, and thermal boundary conditions for the first inlet (inlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
20 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 10 m/s for Velocity Magnitude.

b. In the Turbulence group box, select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification
Method drop-down list.

c. Enter 10 % for the Turbulent Intensity.

d. Enter 40 mm for the Hydraulic Diameter.

e. Click the Thermal tab

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 21
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

f. Enter 925 [K].

g. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Apply the same conditions to the other inlets (inlet1, and inlet2).

a. Select inlet from the Boundary Conditions node of the Outline View, right-click and select
Copy from the context menu.

This opens the Copy Conditions dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
22 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Select inlet _1 and inlet_2 from the To Boundary Zones list.

c. Click Copy, click OK in the confirmation prompt, and close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions at the outlet (outlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet Edit...

a. Retain the default setting of 0 for Gauge Pressure.

b. In the Turbulence group box, select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification
Method drop-down list.

c. Enter a value of 10% for the Backflow Turbulent Intensity.

d. Enter 40 mm for the Backflow Hydraulic Diameter.

e. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

4. Set the wall heat transfer boundary conditions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 23
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → solid_up:1 Edit...

a. Select Convection under Thermal Conditions.

b. Enter 10 for the Heat Transfer Coefficient.

c. Enter 300 for the Free Stream Temperature.

d. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

5. Apply the same conditions to the other walls (in1, in2, in3, and out1).

a. Select solid_up:1 from the Boundary Conditions node of the Outline View, right-click and
select Copy from the context menu.

This opens the Copy Conditions dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
24 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Select in1, in2, in3, and out1 from the To Boundary Zones list.

c. Click Copy, click OK in the confirmation prompt, and close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

6. Retain the remaining default (wall and interior) boundary conditions.

1.4.10. Solution
1. Specify the discretization schemes.

In the Solution ribbon tab, click Methods... (Solution group box).

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 25
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

Retain the default settings.

2. Create a surface report definition of the velocity at the outlet (outlet).

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Facet Maximum...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
26 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note:

You can also access the Surface Report Definition dialog box by right-clicking Report
Definitions in the tree (under Solution) and selecting New/Surface Report/Facet
Maximum... from the menu that opens.

a. Enter point-vel for the Name of the report definition.

b. Enable Report File, Report Plot, and Print to Console in the Create group box.

During a solution run, Ansys Fluent will write solution convergence data in a report file, plot the
solution convergence history in a graphics window, and print the value of the report definition to
the console.

c. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

d. Select outlet from the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 27
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

The new surface report definition point-vel will appear under the Solution/Report Definitions
tree item. Ansys Fluent also automatically creates the following items:

• point-vel-rfile (under the Solution/Monitors/Report Files tree branch)

• point-vel-rplot (under the Solution/Monitors/Report Plots tree branch)

3. Monitor the mass flow rate at the inlets.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Flux Report → Mass Flow Rate...

a. Enter mass-in for the Name of the report definition.

b. Select Mass Flow Rate under Options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
28 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Select in1, in2, in3, as well as inlet, inlet_1, inlet_2 from the Boundaries selection list.

d. Enable Report File, Report Plot, and Print to Console in the Create group box.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Flux Report Definition dialog
box.

The new surface report definition mass-in will appear under the Solution/Report Definitions
tree item. Ansys Fluent also automatically creates the following items:

• mass-in-rfile (under the Solution/Monitors/Report Files tree branch)

• mass-in-rplot (under the Solution/Monitors/Report Plots tree branch)

4. Monitor the total mass flow rate through the entire domain.

Perform the same procedure as described above, naming the report mass-tot, and selecting all
boundaries.

5. Monitor the mass balance.

Use expressions to create a report definition for the mass balance using existing report definitions.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Expression...

This opens the Expression Report Definition dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 29
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

a. Enter mass-bal for the Name of the expression.

b. Select mass-tot from the Report Definitions drop-down list on the right.

c. Type the / operand.

d. Select mass-in from the Report Definitions drop-down list on the right.

e. Enable Report File, Report Plot, and Print to Console in the Create group box.

f. Click OK to save the expression definition.

6. Initialize the flow field using the Initialization group box of the Solution ribbon tab.

Solution → Initialization

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
30 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Standard from the Method list.

b. Click Initialize.

7. Save the case file (manifold_solution.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

8. Start the calculation by adjusting the time scale factor to 5 and requesting 100 iterations in the
Solution ribbon tab (Run Calculation group box).

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Change the Time Scale Factor to 5.

b. Enter 100 for No. of Iterations.

c. Click Calculate to begin the iterations.

As the solution progresses, the mass flow rate graph flattens out, as seen in Figure 1.2: Mass Flow
Rate History (p. 32).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 31
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

Figure 1.2: Mass Flow Rate History

d. Similarly, the residuals history will be plotted in the Scaled Residuals tab in the graphics
window (Figure 1.3: Residuals (p. 32)).

Figure 1.3: Residuals

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
32 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

9. Save the case and data files (manifold_solution.cas.h5 and manifold_solu-

tion.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

1.5. Postprocessing
1. Display path lines highlighting the flow field (Figure 1.4: Pathlines Through the Manifold (p. 34)).

Results → Graphics → Pathlines → New...

a. Keep the default of pathlines-1 for the Name.

b. Select Particle Variables... and Time from the Color by drop-down lists.

c. Set the Path Skip value to 5.

d. Select Accuracy Control from the Options list.

e. Select inlet, inlet_1, and inlet_2 from the Release from Surfaces list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Pathlines dialog box.

The new pathlines-1 definition appears under the Results/Graphics/Pathlines tree branch. To edit
your surface definition, right-click it and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 33
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

Figure 1.4: Pathlines Through the Manifold

2. Create two clipped surfaces through the manifold geometry.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Clip...

a. Create Surface 1

i. Enter clip-x-coordinate for Name.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
34 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

ii. Select Mesh... and X-Coordinate from the Clip to Values of drop-down lists.

iii. Select solid_up:1 from the Clip Surface list.

iv. Click Compute.

v. Keep the Min value at its minimum setting, and adjust the Max value to be at its halfway
point.

vi. Click Create.

The new clip-x-coordinate definition appears under the Results/Surfaces tree branch. To edit
your surface definition, right-click it and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

b. Create Surface 2

i. Enter clip-z-coordinate for Name.

ii. Select Mesh... and Z-Coordinate from the Clip to Values of drop-down lists.

iii. Select solid_up:1 from the Clip Surface list.

iv. Click Compute.

v. Keep the Min value at its minimum setting, and adjust the Max value to be at -44.0 .

vi. Click Create and close the Iso-Clip dialog box.

The new clip-z-coordinate definition appears under the Results/Surfaces tree branch. To edit
your surface definition, right-click it and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

3. Create a scene containing the mesh and the path lines.

Results → Scene New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 35
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

a. Keep the default scene-1 for the Name.

b. Enable the pathlines-1 graphics object.

c. Create a new mesh object to add to the scene.

i. Click New Object and select Mesh to open the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
36 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

ii. Ensure that Edges is selected under the Options list.

iii. Select clip-x-coordinate under the Surfaces list.

iv. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

The new mesh-1 definition appears under the Results/Graphics/Mesh tree branch. The new
object also appears in the Scene dialog box.

d. In the Scene dialog box, set the Transparency of mesh-1 to 50.

e. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 37
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

Figure 1.5: Scene Containing the Mesh and Pathlines Throughout the Manifold

4. Create and define contours of velocity magnitude at the outlet along with the mesh.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
38 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

a. Enter contour-velocity for the Name.

b. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Select outlet from the Surfaces list.

d. Disable Node Values under Options.

e. Enable Draw Mesh under Options.

This displays the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 39
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

In the Mesh Display dialog box, deselect all surfaces, select the out1 surface, click Display and
close the dialog.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
40 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

Figure 1.6: Contours of Velocity Magnitude at the Outlet

5. Create an iso-surface through the manifold geometry.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

a. Enter mid-plane-z for Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Z-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Select fluid1 and solid_up from the From Zones... list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 41
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

d. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the Z extents of the domain.

e. Enter -44 for the Iso-Values.

f. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

6. Create and define a contour of temperature along the mid-plane.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-temperature for the Name.

b. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Select inlet, inlet_1, inlet_2, mid-plane-z, outlet, and out1 from the Surfaces list.

d. Enable Draw Mesh under Options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
42 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

In the Mesh Display dialog box, deselect all surfaces, select the clip-z-coordinate surface, click
Display and close the dialog.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 43
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

Figure 1.7: Contours of Temperature at the mid-plane

7. Create and define a contour of temperature for the manifold geometry.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
44 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

a. Enter contour-temperature-manifold for the Name.

b. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Select the Wall group from the Surfaces list.

Click to deselect all surfaces. Click and select Surface Type under Group By to list the surfaces
by type, as shown above.

d. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 45
Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold

Figure 1.8: Contours of Temperature on the Exhaust Manifold

8. Save the case and data files (manifold_solution.cas.h5 and manifold_solution.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

You will use these case and data files in Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold (p. 47).

1.6. Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to import a CAD geometry, generate a volume mesh, and set up, solve,
and postprocess a CFD problem involving air flow and heat transfer through a manifold all within a
single Ansys Fluent interface.

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing the solution results
for a turbulent flow within a manifold:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
46 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 2: Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
2.1. Introduction
2.2. Prerequisites
2.3. Problem Description
2.4. Setup and Solution
2.5. Summary

2.1. Introduction

Licensing Capability:

This tutorial is fully supported at all licensing levels.

This tutorial demonstrates the postprocessing capabilities of Fluent using a 3D model of an exhaust
manifold with high temperature flows passing through. The flow through the manifold is turbulent and
involves conjugate heat transfer.

The heat transfer involves conduction in the manifold and conduction and convection in the exhaust
fluid. The physics of conjugate heat transfer such as this are common in many engineering applications,
including the design of vehicle engines.

In this tutorial, you will read the case and data files that you created in performing the "Fluid Flow in
an Exhaust Manifold" tutorial and perform a number of postprocessing exercises.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Add lights to the display at multiple locations.

• Create surfaces for the display of 3D data.

• Display filled contours of temperature on several surfaces.

• Display velocity vectors.

• Create animations.

• Create a scene.

• Display results on successive slices of the domain.

• Display pathlines.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 47
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

• Plot quantitative results.

• Overlay and explode a display.

2.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the Fluid Flow in an Exhaust
Manifold (p. 1) tutorial found in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent tree and
ribbon structure. Some steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

2.3. Problem Description

The problem considered is shown schematically in Figure 2.1: Manifold Geometry for Flow Model-
ing (p. 48). The configuration consists of three inlets and one outlet. Hot exhaust gases are pushed
through each inlet and mix before leaving through the outlet. Conjugate heat transfer takes place
between the manifold and the surrounding ambient air.

As shown in the figure, air at 10 m/s is pushed through each inlet at a gas temperature of 900 K. The
outlet has a static pressure of 0 Pa.

Figure 2.1: Manifold Geometry for Flow Modeling

2.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
2.4.1. Preparation
2.4.2. Reading the Solution
2.4.3. Manipulating the Mesh in the Viewer
2.4.4. Adding Lights
2.4.5. Creating Isosurfaces

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
48 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2.4.6. Generating Contours

2.4.7. Generating Velocity Vectors
2.4.8. Creating an Animation
2.4.9. Creating a Scene With Multiple Graphics Features
2.4.10. Creating Exploded Views
2.4.11. Animating the Display of Results in Successive Streamwise Planes
2.4.12. Generating XY Plots
2.4.13. Saving Picture Files
2.4.14. Generating Volume Integral Reports

2.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Navigate to the working directory where you completed the "Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold"
tutorial.

2. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

3. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

4. Select 3D under Dimension.

5. Enable Double Precision under Options.

6. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

2.4.2. Reading the Solution

1. Read in the case and data files manifold_solution.cas.h5 and manifold_solu-
tion.dat.h5.

File → Read → Case & Data...

When you select the case file, Fluent will read the data file automatically.

2.4.3. Manipulating the Mesh in the Viewer

1. Display the mesh surfaces.

Results → Graphics → Mesh → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 49
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

a. Select the Edges option and retain the default Faces option in the Options group box.

b. Deselect all surfaces an then select all the wall surfaces by selecting the Wall surface type.

Click to deselect all surfaces. Click and select Surface Type under Group By to list the
surfaces by type, as shown above.

c. Click Save/Display.

2. Rotate and adjust the magnification of the view.

Drag the middle mouse button to rotate the view. Drag the middle mouse button with the Shift key
pressed to adjust the magnification until you obtain an enlarged display of the exhaust manifold, as
shown in Figure 2.2: Mesh Display of the Exhaust Manifold (p. 51).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
50 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.2: Mesh Display of the Exhaust Manifold

3. Display the mesh faces.

a. Disable Edges in the Options group box.

b. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

2.4.4. Adding Lights

1. Add lighting effects.

The default light settings add a white light at the position (1, 1, 1). The default light is defined in the
Lights dialog box by the Light ID 0 with Direction vectors (X, Y, Z) as (1, 1, 1).

View → Graphics → Lights...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 51
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

a. Make sure that the Light On option is enabled.

b. Retain the selection of Automatic from the Lighting Method drop-down list.

Flat is the most basic lighting whereas Gouraud gives better color gradation. Note that Gouraud
rounds off corners, and so should be used with caution on highly angular geometries.

c. Click Apply and close the Display Options dialog box.

Shading will be added to the surface mesh display (Figure 2.3: Graphics Window with Default
Lighting (p. 53)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
52 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.3: Graphics Window with Default Lighting

2. Add lights in two directions, (-1, 1, 1) and (-1, 1, -1).

View → Graphics → Lights...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 53
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

You can also open the Lights dialog box by clicking the Lights... button in the Display Options dialog
box.

a. Set Light ID to 1.

b. Enable Light On.

c. Enter -1, 1, and 1 for X, Y, and Z respectively in the Direction group box.

d. Retain the selections of Automatic in the Lighting Method and Headlight On drop-down
lists.

e. Click Apply.

The Headlight On option provides constant lighting effect from a light source directly in front of
the model, in the direction of the view. You can turn off the headlight by selecting Off in the
Headlight On drop-down list (the results of this action are shown in Figure 2.4: Display with Addi-
tional Lighting: - Headlight Off (p. 54)).

Figure 2.4: Display with Additional Lighting: - Headlight Off

f. Similarly, add a second light (Light ID= 2 with Light On enabled) with a Direction of (-1, 1,
-1). Click Apply.

The result will be more softly shaded display (Figure 2.5: Display with Additional Lighting (p. 55)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
54 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.5: Display with Additional Lighting

g. Close the Lights dialog box.

Extra:

You can use the left mouse button to rotate the ball in the Active Lights window to gain
a perspective view on the relative locations of the lights that are currently active, and see
the shading effect on the ball at the center.

You can also change the color of one or more of the lights by selecting the color from the
Color drop-down list or by moving the Red, Green, and Blue sliders.

2.4.5. Creating Isosurfaces

To display results in a 3D model, you will need surfaces on which the data can be displayed. Fluent creates
surfaces for all boundary zones automatically.

You can define additional surfaces for viewing the results, such as a plane in Cartesian space. In this exercise,
you will create a plane cutting through the middle of the manifold, and at the outlet. You can use these
surfaces to display the temperature and velocity fields.

1. Create iso-surfaces of constant coordinates.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 55
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

a. Enter outlet-plane for New Surface Name.

Tip:

When you are creating multiple postprocessing surfaces, it can be helpful to group

surfaces by type for viewing in lists (Click and select Surface Type under Group
By). All iso-surfaces will be grouped together.

b. Select Mesh... and Y-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the Y extents of the domain.

d. Enter -125.0188 for the Iso-Values.

e. Click Create.

2. Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
56 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter mid-plane-x for New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and X-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the Y extents of the domain.

d. Enter -174 for the Iso-Values.

e. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

3. Create clipped surfaces through the inner manifold geometry.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Clip...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 57
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

a. Enter clip-z-inner for Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Z-Coordinate from the Clip to Values of drop-down lists.

c. Select solid_up:1:446 from the Clip Surface list. Note the number may be different due to
mesh generation.

d. Click Compute.

e. Enter -44 for the Min value and leave the Max value at its maximum.

f. Click Create and close the Iso-Clip dialog box.

The new clip-z-inner definition appears under the Results/Surfaces tree branch. To edit your
surface definition, right-click it and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

2.4.6. Generating Contours

1. Display filled contours of temperature on the mid-plane and the outlet (Figure 2.6: Filled Contours
of Temperature on the Mid-Plane-x and the Outlet (p. 61)). Access the contour plot that was
defined in the simulation tutorial for this case.

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-temperature Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
58 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Click to deselect all surfaces.

b. Click and select Surface Type under Group By (if surfaces are not already grouped by
type).

c. Select mid-plane-x and outlet-plane (under Iso-Surface in the Surfaces selection list.)

d. Enable Draw Mesh under Options.

This displays the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 59
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

In the Mesh Display dialog box, deselect all surfaces and select the clip-x-coordinate surface.

e. Enable Edges option in the Options group box.

f. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialogue box.

h. Rotate and adjust the magnification of the view by dragging the middle mouse button and
dragging the middle mouse button with the Shiftkey, respectively, to obtain the view as shown
in Figure 2.6: Filled Contours of Temperature on the Mid-Plane-x and the Outlet (p. 61).

Tip:

If the model disappears from the graphics window at any time, or if you are having
difficulty manipulating it with the mouse, do one of the following:

• Click the Fit to Window button in the graphics toolbar.

• Open the Views dialog box by right-clicking Graphics in the tree (under
Results) and selecting Views... from the menu that opens, and then use

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
60 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

the Default button to reset the view. You could also click Camera... in this
dialog box to open the Camera Parameters dialog box, where you could
select orthographic from the Projection drop-down list to reduce the
likelihood of zooming through the geometry.

• Press the Ctrl + L to revert to a previous view.

The inlet streams don't mix in the manifold as shown by the inlet streams not mixing together.

Figure 2.6: Filled Contours of Temperature on the Mid-Plane-x and the Outlet

In Figure 2.6: Filled Contours of Temperature on the Mid-Plane-x and the Outlet (p. 61), the high tem-
peratures in the exhaust stream drastically increase the temperature of the cast iron manifold. You
can also display other quantities such as velocity magnitude or pressure using the Contours dialog
box.

2. Display filled contours of temperature for the surface of the manifold(Figure 2.7: Filled Contours
of Temperature for the Surface of the Manifold (p. 62)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-temperature-manifold Edit...

a. Deselect Global Range.

b. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialogue box.

c. Click the Fit to Window button in the graphics toolbar.

d. The surface of the manifold heats up to over 700 K from from an initial temperature of 300 K (Fig-
ure 2.7: Filled Contours of Temperature for the Surface of the Manifold (p. 62)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 61
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

Figure 2.7: Filled Contours of Temperature for the Surface of the Manifold

Tip:

You can increase/decrease the size of the colormap by dragging the corners of the box
that appears when you hover over the colormap.

2.4.7. Generating Velocity Vectors

Velocity vectors provide an excellent visualization of the flow through the manifold, depicting details of
the flow structure.

1. Display velocity vectors on the mid-plane through the manifold (Figure 2.8: Velocity Vectors in the
Mid-Plane of the Manifold (p. 64)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
62 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter velocity-vector for Vector Name.

b. Confirm that Velocity is selected under Vectors of and that Color by is set to Velocity... and
Velocity Magnitude.

c. Ensure Global Range, Auto Range, and Auto Scale are the only enabled Options.

d. Enter 1 for Scale.

e. Click to deselect all surfaces from the Surfaces selection list and then select mid-plane-
x.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

g. Orient the view to display the vectors.

2. Rotate and adjust the magnification of the view to match (Figure 2.8: Velocity Vectors in the Mid-
Plane of the Manifold (p. 64)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 63
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

Figure 2.8: Velocity Vectors in the Mid-Plane of the Manifold

3. Plot velocity vectors along the mid z-direction plane manifold coloured by temperature (Fig-
ure 2.9: Velocity Vectors mid-plane in the z-direction (p. 67)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

a. Enter velocity-vector-2 for Vector Name.

b. Enable Draw Mesh in the Options group box to open the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
64 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Ensure that Faces is enabled and that Edges is disabled in the Options group box.

ii. Deselect all surfaces and select clip-z-coordinate from the Surfaces selection list.

iii. Click the Colors... button to open the Mesh Colors dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 65
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

A. Select By Type in the Options group box.

B. Select surface from the Types selection list.

C. Select light-blue from the Colors selection list and close the Mesh Colors dialog box.

iv. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

c. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

d. Enter 0.5 for Scale.

e. Deselect all surfaces.

f. Select mid-plane-z from the Surfaces selection list.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

h. Rotate the view and increase the magnification to obtain the view as shown in Figure 2.9: Ve-
locity Vectors mid-plane in the z-direction (p. 67).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
66 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.9: Velocity Vectors mid-plane in the z-direction

2.4.8. Creating an Animation

Using Fluent, you can animate the solution.

You will display the surface temperature distribution on the inner part of the manifold along with the
temperatures of the outlet flow and mid-plane flow. You will also create the key frames and view the
transition between the key frames, dynamically, using the animation feature.

1. Display filled contours of surface temperature on the mid-plane, inner-clip, and outlet-plane.
(Figure 2.10: Filled Temperature Contours on the mid-plane-x, clip-z-inner and outlet-plane Sur-
faces (p. 69)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-temperature Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 67
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

a. Select Banded from the Coloring group box.

b. Retain the selection of Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-
down lists.

c. Deselect all surfaces.

d. Select clip-z-inner, mid-plane-x, and outlet-plane from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

f. Reorient the display as needed to obtain the view shown in Figure 2.10: Filled Temperature
Contours on the mid-plane-x, clip-z-inner and outlet-plane Surfaces (p. 69).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
68 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.10: Filled Temperature Contours on the mid-plane-x, clip-z-inner and outlet-plane Sur-
faces (p. 69) shows the high temperature exhaust heating the walls of the manifold.

Figure 2.10: Filled Temperature Contours on the mid-plane-x, clip-z-inner and outlet-plane
Surfaces

2. Create the key frames by changing the point of view.

Results → Animation → Scene Animation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 69
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

You will use the current display (Figure 2.10: Filled Temperature Contours on the mid-plane-x, clip-z-
inner and outlet-plane Surfaces (p. 69)) as the starting view for the animation (Frame = ).

a. Click Add in the Key Frames group box to create the first frame for your animation.

This will store the current display as Key-1.

b. Magnify the view to focus on the outlet region.

c. Enter 100 for Frame in the Key Frames group box.

d. Click Add to create the one-hundredth frame for your animation.

This will store the new display as Key-100.

The magnified view will be the one-hundredth key frame of the animation, with intermediate displays
(2 through 99) to be filled in during the animation.

e. Rotate the view and adjust the magnification so that the backside of the manifold is visible
from an angle (Figure 2.11: Filled Temperature Contours on the Mid-Plane, Inner-Clip, and
Outlet-Plane Surfaces (p. 71)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
70 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.11: Filled Temperature Contours on the Mid-Plane, Inner-Clip, and Outlet-Plane
Surfaces

f. Enter 200 for Frame.

g. Click Add to create the two-hundredth frame for your animation.

This will store the new display as Key-200.

Note:

You can check the display view of any of your saved key frames by selecting it in
the Keys list.

3. View the scene animation by clicking the play button ( ) in the Playback group box.

While effective animation is best conducted on high-end graphics workstations, you can view scene
animations on any workstation. If the graphics display speed is slow, the animation playback will take
some time and will appear choppy, with the redrawing very obvious. On fast graphics workstations,
the animation will appear smooth and continuous and will provide an excellent visualization of the
display from a variety of spatial orientations. On many machines, you can improve the smoothness
of the animation by enabling the Double Buffering option in the Display Options dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 71
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

To produce a slower animation, increase the number of frames between the key frames. The more
sparsely you place your key frames, the more transition frames Fluent creates between the key frames
and therefore stretching out your animation.

Extra:

You can change the Playback Mode if you want to auto repeat or auto reverse the

animation. When you are in either of these modes, you can click the stop button ( )
to stop the continuous animation.

4. Close the Animate dialog box.

2.4.9. Creating a Scene With Multiple Graphics Features

Scenes allow you to display multiple graphics plots in a single window.

1. Create a scene displaying contours and vector plots in a single window.

a. Edit contour-temperature to use the clip-z-inner and outlet-plane as the display surface.
Click Save/Display.

b. Edit velocity-vector to use the mid-plane-z as the display surface and reduce the Scale to 1.
Click Save & Display.

c. Open the previously created scene scene-1.

Results → Scene → scene-1 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
72 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Deselect any previously selected graphics objects.

e. Select contour-temperature and velocity-vector.

f. In the Scene dialog box, set the Transparency for contour-temperature to 30.

g. Click Save & Display to create the scene and display it in the graphics window, and close the
Scene dialog box.

h. Drag the velocity vector colormap to the left of the graphics window and drag the temperature
colormap to the bottom of the graphics window and modify the orientation and zoom of the
scene to match Figure 2.12: Temperature Contours and Velocity Vectors Scene (p. 74).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 73
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

i. Figure 2.12: Temperature Contours and Velocity Vectors Scene

2.4.10. Creating Exploded Views

The Scene Description dialog box stores each display that you request and allows you to manipulate the
displayed items individually. This capability can be used to generate exploded views, in which results are
translated or rotated out of the physical domain for enhanced display. As shown in the Scene Description
dialog box, you can experiment with this capability by displaying side-by-side velocity vectors, pathlines,
and temperature contours.

1. Create a Scene comprised of various graphical features.

a. Edit velocity-vector to use the clip-z-inner as the display surface and reduce the Scale to 1.
Click Save & Display.

b. Open the Scene dialog box.

Results → Scene New...

c. Enable the features pathlines-1, velocity-vector, and contour-temperature.

d. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

2. Transform the features to form an exploded view.

View → Graphics → Compose...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
74 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the temperature contour plots in the Names list.

b. Click Display... in the Geometry Attributes group box and disable the Nodes option.

c. Click Apply and close the Display Properties dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 75
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

d. Click Transform... in the Geometry Attributes options box.

e. Enter 135 for Y in the Translate group box.

f. Click Apply and close the Transformations dialog box.

g. In the Scene Description dialog box, deselect all names and select velocity_vector.

h. Click Transform..., and in the Transformations dialog box, enter 100 for Z under the Translate
heading.

i. Click Apply and close both the Transformations dialog box and the Scene Description dialog
box.

j. Click, drag and drop the color maps as shown.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
76 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.13: Exploded Scene Display of Temperature, Velocity, and Pathlines

2.4.11. Animating the Display of Results in Successive Streamwise Planes

You may want to march through the flow domain, displaying a particular variable on successive slices of
the domain. While this task could be accomplished manually, plotting each plane in turn, or using the
Scene Description and Animate dialog boxes, here you will use the Sweep Surface dialog box to facilitate
the process. To illustrate the display of results on successive slices of the domain, you will plot contours of
temperature on planes along the z-axis.

1. Delete the vectors and temperature contours from the display.

Click the Close Tab button ( ) to clear the graphics window (located on the upper right-hand
side of the graphics window tab).

2. Generate contours of temperature and sweep them through the domain along the X axis.

Results → Animation → Sweep Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 77
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

a. Change X to be 0 and Z to be 1.

b. Click Compute.

c. Retain the default value of -0.1018252 m for Initial Value in the Animation group box.

d. Retain 0.01345717 m for Final Value.

Warning:

The units for the initial and final values are in meters, regardless of the length
units being used in the model. Here, the initial and final values are set to the
Min Value and Max Value, to generate an animation through the entire do-
main.

e. Enter 200 for Frames.

f. Select Contours from the Display Type selection list and click Properties to open the Contours
dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
78 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

ii. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

iii. Deselect all surfaces and select clip-x-coordinate from the Surfaces drop-down list.

iv. Click OK to close the Contours dialog box.

g. Click Animate and close the Sweep Surface dialog box.

You will see the temperature contour plot displayed at 200 successive streamwise planes. Fluent will
automatically interpolate the contoured data on the streamwise planes between the specified end
points. Especially on high-end graphics workstations, this can be an effective way to study how a flow
variable changes throughout the domain.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 79
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

2.4.12. Generating XY Plots

XY plotting can be used to display quantitative results of your CFD simulations. Here, you will complete
the review of the manifold heat transfer simulation by plotting the temperature variation through a solid
portion of the manifold.

1. Define the rake along which to plot results.

Results → Surface → Create → Line/Rake...

a. Enter rake-solid for New Surface Name.

b. Select rake from the Type drop-down list.

c. Enter 100 for the Number of Points option.

d. Enter the coordinates of the rake using a starting coordinate of (-145, -105, -44) and an
ending coordinate of (-120, -105, -44) in the End Points group box.

These coordinates define a line through a solid portion of the manifold located slightly above the
outlet.

e. Click Create and close the Line/Rake Surface dialog box.

2. Plot the temperature distribution along the rake through a solid region. (Figure 2.14: Temperature
Along a Solid Portion of the Manifold (p. 83)).

Results → Plots → XY Plot → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
80 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter xy-plot for XY Plot Name.

b. Retain the default Plot Direction of (1, 0, 0).

c. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Y Axis Function drop-down lists.

d. Select rake-solid from the Surfaces selection list.

This will plot temperature vs. the X coordinate along the selected rake (rake-solid).

e. Click the Axes... button to open the Axes - Solution XY Plot dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 81
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

i. Retain the selection of X in the Axis list.

ii. Select general in the Type group box.

iii. Retain the value 10 under Size.

iv. Set Precision to 3.

v. Click Apply and repeat for Y.

vi. Click Apply and close the Axes - Solution XY Plot dialog box.

f. Click Save/Plot and close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

The temperature distribution (Figure 2.14: Temperature Along a Solid Portion of the Manifold (p. 83))
shows that the solid portion of the manifold saw similar temperatures through the thickness.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
82 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 2.14: Temperature Along a Solid Portion of the Manifold

g. Save the case file (manifold_solution.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

2.4.13. Saving Picture Files

You can save picture files of the graphics window in many different formats, including PostScript, encap-
sulated PostScript, TIFF, PNG, PPM, JPEG, VRML and window dumps. Here, the procedure for saving a color
PostScript file is shown.

Click the Save Picture icon- in the toolbar to open the Save Picture dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 83
Fluent Postprocessing : Exhaust Manifold

1. Select JPEG from the Format list.

2. Retain the default selection of Color from the Coloring list.

3. Click the Save... button to open the Select File dialog box.

a. Enter a name for Hardcopy File.

b. Click OK to close the Select File dialog box.

4. Close the Save Picture dialog box.

2.4.14. Generating Volume Integral Reports

Reports of volume integrals can be used to determine the volume of a particular fluid region (that is, a
fluid zone), the sum of quantities, or the maximum and minimum values of particular variables. Here we
will use the volume integral reports to determine the mass of the air in the manifold and the maximum
temperature of the manifold.

Results → Reports → Volume Integrals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
84 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

1. Select Mass from the Report Type list.

2. Select fluid1 from the Cell Zones selection list.

3. Click Compute to calculate the total mass of the air in the manifold.

The mass of the air in the fluid1 cell zone is displayed.

4. Select Maximum in the Report Type group box.

5. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

6. Select solid_up from the Cell Zones selection list.

The maximum temperature in the solid_up cell zone is displayed.

7. Repeat the previous operation to determine the minimum temperature in the solid_up cell zone.

The maximum and minimum temperatures are an important characteristic of exhaust manifold design.

2.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated the use of many of the extensive postprocessing features available in Fluent.

For more information on these and related features, see reporting alphanumeric data and displaying
graphics in the Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 85
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
86 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 3: Modeling Flow Through Porous Media
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
3.1. Introduction
3.2. Prerequisites
3.3. Problem Description
3.4. Setup and Solution
3.5. Summary

3.1. Introduction

Licensing Capability:

This tutorial is fully supported at all licensing levels.

Many industrial applications such as filters, catalyst beds, and packing, involve modeling the flow through
porous media. This tutorial illustrates how to set up and solve a problem involving gas flow through
porous media.

The industrial problem solved here involves gas flow through a catalytic converter. Catalytic converters
are commonly used to purify emissions from gasoline and diesel engines by converting environmentally
hazardous exhaust emissions to acceptable substances. Examples of such emissions include carbon
monoxide (CO), nitrogen oxides (NOx), and unburned hydrocarbon fuels. These exhaust gas emissions
are forced through a substrate, which is a ceramic structure coated with a metal catalyst such as platinum
or palladium.

The nature of the exhaust gas flow is a very important factor in determining the performance of the
catalytic converter. Of particular importance is the pressure gradient and velocity distribution through
the substrate. Hence, CFD analysis is useful for designing efficient catalytic converters. By modeling the
exhaust gas flow, the pressure drop and the uniformity of flow through the substrate can be determined.
In this tutorial, Ansys Fluent is used to model the flow of nitrogen gas through a catalytic converter
geometry, so that the flow field structure may be analyzed.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following in Ansys Fluent:

• Use the Watertight Geometry guided workflow to:

– Import a CAD geometry

– Generate a surface mesh

– Cap inlets and outlets

– Extract a fluid region

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 87
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

– Generate a volume mesh

• Set up a porous zone for the substrates with appropriate resistances.

• Calculate a solution for gas flow through the catalytic converter using the pressure-based solver.

• Plot pressure and velocity distribution on specified planes of the geometry.

For more information about using the guided workflows, see Getting Started with the Fluent Guided
Workflows in the Fluent User's Guide.

3.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

3.3. Problem Description

The catalytic converter modeled here is shown in Figure 3.1: Catalytic Converter Geometry for Flow
Modeling (p. 88). The nitrogen flows through the inlet with a uniform velocity of 125 m/s and 800K,
passes through a pair of ceramic monolith substrates with square-shaped channels, and then exits
through the outlet.

Figure 3.1: Catalytic Converter Geometry for Flow Modeling

While the flow in the inlet and outlet sections is turbulent, the flow through the substrates is laminar
and is characterized by inertial and viscous loss coefficients along the inlet axis. The substrates are im-
permeable in other directions. This characteristic is modeled using loss coefficients that are three orders
of magnitude higher than in the main flow direction.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
88 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
3.4.1. Preparation
3.4.2. Meshing Workflow
3.4.3. General Settings
3.4.4. Solver Settings
3.4.5. Models
3.4.6. Materials
3.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions
3.4.8. Boundary Conditions
3.4.9. Solution
3.4.10. Postprocessing

3.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the catalytic_converter.zip file .

2. Unzip catalytic_converter.zip to your working directory.

The Discovery CAD file catalytic_converter.dsco can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Enable Double Precision under Solver Options.

6. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

3.4.2. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 89
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. For more information, see Understanding Task States in the Fluent User's Guide).
All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow completing all
tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow. For more information, see
Customizing Workflows in the Fluent User's Guide.

2. Import the CAD geometry (catalytic_converter.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. For File Format, keep the default setting of CAD.

c. For Units, keep the default setting as mm.

d. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(catalytic_converter.dsco).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
90 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Select Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window (Figure 3.2: The Imported
CAD Geometry for the Catalytic Converter (p. 92)), and allow you to proceed onto the next task in
the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 91
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

Figure 3.2: The Imported CAD Geometry for the Catalytic Converter

Note:

Alternatively, you can use the ... button next to File Name to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button. For more information, see Editing Tasks in the Fluent
User's Guide.

3. Add local sizing.

a. In the Add Local Sizing task, you are prompted as to whether or not you would like to add
local sizing controls to the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
92 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

In this tutorial, we will add local sizing in and around the sensor, since that is an area where we
require a more refined mesh. Later, we will apply settings for a coarser surface mesh elsewhere.

b. At the prompt for adding local sizing, select yes.

c. Specify Curvature for the Size Control Type.

d. Enter sensor for the Name of the size control.

e. Specify 0.1 for the Local Min Size.

f. Specify 1.2 for the Max Size

g. Select the faces in and around the sensor in the list, specifically, sensing_element-65-
solid, sensor_innertube-67-solid, and sensor_protectiontube-66-solid1.

For occasions when the list of items is long, you can use the Filter Text option and use an expression
such as in* to show only items starting with "in". Alternatively, you can use the Use Wildcard
option to list and pres-select matching items. See Filtering Lists and Using Wildcards for more in-
formation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 93
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

Select the Use Wildcard option and enter sens* in the text field to filter out the other labels
and automatically select the desired labels.

h. Click Add Local Sizing to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
94 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Specify 1.5 for the Minimum Size.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

c. Specify No for the Separate Out Boundary Zones by Angle? option.

d. Select Advanced Options to expose additional settings.

e. Specify 0.895 for the Quality Improve Skewness Limit.

f. Specify 0.95 for the Quality Improve Collapse Skewness Limit.

g. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Describe the geometry.

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 95
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Select The geometry consists of both fluid and solid regions and/or voids option under
Geometry Type, since this model contains both fluid and solids, and potential voids.

b. Select Yes for the Will you cap openings and extract fluid regions? prompt, since we
plan on adding capping surfaces and extracting a fluid.

c. Select Yes for the Change all fluid-fluid boundary types from 'wall' to 'internal'?
prompt, since we are modeling flow through the entire geometry, and any interior wall
boundaries between potential fluid regions should be interior boundaries to allow the
flow to pass.

Remember that there are two regions within the catalytic converter that will ultimately represent
porous regions.- surrounded by other non-porous fluid regions For now, we will consider all
of these internal regions as fluid regions and change them accordingly in the Ansys Fluent
solver.

d. Keep the rest of the default settings for this task.

e. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Cover any openings in your geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
96 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Select the Enclose Fluid Regions (Capping) task, where you can cover, or cap, any openings in
your geometry in order to later extract the enclosed fluid region.

a. Create a cap for the inlet.

i. Enter inlet for the Name of the capping surface to be assigned to the manifold's
inlet.

ii. For the Zone Type, keep the default setting of velocity-inlet.

iii. In the list of labels, select in1 for the opening that you want to cover (or right-click
the surface of the inlet in the graphics window).

The graphics window indicates the selected items.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 97
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

iv. Click Create Cap(s) to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

Once completed, this particular task will return you to a fresh task in order to assign
additional capping surfaces, if necessary. We will proceed to assign a cap for the re-
maining opening and assign it to be an outlet.

b. Create a cap for the outlet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
98 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enter outlet for the Name of the capping surface to be assigned to the manifold's
outlet.

ii. For the Zone Type, change the setting to pressure-outlet.

iii. In the list of labels, select out1 for the outlet that you want to cover (or right-click the
surface of the inlet in the graphics window).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 99
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

iv. Click Create Cap(s) to complete this task.

Now, all of the openings in the geometry are covered.

7. Confirm and update the boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Update Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and confirm
and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the
correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

b. All the proposed boundaries are correct, so click Update Boundaries. and proceed to the next
task.

8. Create the fluid region.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 101
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Select the Create Regions task, where you can determine the number of fluid regions that
need to be extracted. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the number of fluid regions to extract
automatically.

b. For the Estimated Number of Fluid Regions, enter a value of 3.

We anticipate that there will be fluid regions located at the inlet, the outlet, and the fluid region
between the substrates.

c. Click Create Regions.

The extracted fluid regions are displayed in the graphics window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

9. Update your regions.

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review and change the tabulated names and
types of the various regions that have been generated from your imported geometry, and
change them as needed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 103
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

We can see that the three fluid regions are defined, however, the two regions of the individual
substrates are identified as solid regions. We can change their designations here in this task, and
provide them with useful names.

b. Change the two substrate solid regions to be fluid regions, and rename them, in the table.

i. Under Region Name, locate the honeycomb-solid1 region, double-click and rename
the region to fluid:substrate:1.

ii. For that specific region, under Region Type, select fluid from the drop-down menu.

c. Repeat the procedure for the honeycomb_af0-solid1 region, renaming it to fluid:sub-

strate:2.

d. Click Update Regions to update your settings.

10. Add boundary layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

For the Add Boundary Layers task, ensure yes is selected at the prompt as to whether or not
you want to define boundary layer settings. In this task, you can define specific details for
capturing the boundary layer in and around your geometry.

b. Keep the default settings, and click Add Boundary Layers.

11. Generate the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 105
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, where you can set properties of the volume mesh
itself.

b. Keep the default settings, and click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the manifold
geometry. Once complete, the mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is
automatically inserted with a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the
volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

12. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

13. Save the mesh file (catalytic_converter.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

14. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a high-quality mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can
now switch to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

3.4.3. General Settings

In the Mesh group box of the Domain ribbon tab, set the units for length..

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 107
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

Domain → Mesh → Units...

This opens the Set Units dialog box.

1. Select length under Quantities.

2. Select mm under Units.

3. Close the Set Units dialog box.

4. Examine the mesh.

Rotate the view and zoom in to get the display shown in Figure 3.3: Mesh for the Catalytic Converter
Geometry in Fluent (Solver Mode) (p. 109).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 3.3: Mesh for the Catalytic Converter Geometry in Fluent (Solver Mode)

3.4.4. Solver Settings

Retain the default solver settings.

Physics → Solver → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 109
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

3.4.5. Models
1. Allow temperatures to be considered in the calculations by enabling the energy model.

You can enable the calculation of temperatures directly from the tree by right-clicking the Energy
node and choosing On from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Energy On

2. Retain the default k-ω SST turbulence model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

You will use the default settings for the k-ω SST turbulence model, so you can enable it directly from
the tree by right-clicking the Viscous node and choosing SST k-omega from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Viscous Model → SST k-omega

3.4.6. Materials
Add nitrogen to the list of fluid materials by copying it from the Fluent Database of materials.

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit...

a. Click the Fluent Database... button to open the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 111
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

i. Select nitrogen (n2) in the Fluent Fluid Materials selection list.

ii. Click Copy to copy the information for nitrogen to your list of fluid materials.

iii. Close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

b. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

3.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions

1. Set the cell zone conditions for the first fluid zone (fluid:1).

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → fluid:0 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 113
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Select nitrogen from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

2. Perform the same operation for the other fluid zones (fluid:1 and fluid:3).

3. Set the cell zone conditions for the first substrate (fluid:substrate:1).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select nitrogen from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Enable Porous Zone to activate the porous zone model.

c. Enable Laminar Zone to solve the flow in the porous zone without turbulence.

d. Click the Porous Zone tab.

i. Make sure that the principal direction vectors are set as shown in Table 3.1: Values for the
Principle Direction Vectors (p. 115).

Ansys Fluent automatically calculates the third (Z direction) vector based on your inputs for
the first two vectors. The direction vectors determine which axis the viscous and inertial resistance
coefficients act upon.

Table 3.1: Values for the Principle Direction Vectors

Axis Direction-1 Vector Direction-2 Vector

X 1 0
Y 0 1
Z 0 0

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 115
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

ii. For the viscous and inertial resistance directions, enter the values in Table 3.2: Values for
the Viscous and Inertial Resistance (p. 116).

Direction-1 and Direction-2 are set to arbitrary large numbers. These values are several orders
of magnitude greater than that of the Direction-3 flow and will make any radial flow insignific-
ant.

Scroll down to access the fields that are not initially visible.

Table 3.2: Values for the Viscous and Inertial Resistance

Direction Viscous Resistance (1/m2) Inertial Resistance (1/m)

Direction-1 1e+06 1000
Direction-2 1e+06 1000
Direction-3 1e+03 1000

e. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

4. Repeat these steps for the other substrate (fluid:substrate:2).

3.4.8. Boundary Conditions

1. Set the velocity and turbulence boundary conditions at the inlet (inlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 125 m/s for Velocity Magnitude.

b. In the Turbulence group box, select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification
Method drop-down list.

c. Enter 5% for the Turbulent Intensity.

d. Enter 500mm for the Hydraulic Diameter.

e. Click the Thermal tab and enter 800 K for the Temperature of the incoming fluid.

f. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions at the outlet (outlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet Edit...

a. Retain the default setting of 0 for Gauge Pressure.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 117
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

b. In the Turbulence group box, select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification
Method drop-down list.

c. Retain the default value of 5% for the Backflow Turbulent Intensity.

d. Enter 500 mm for the Backflow Hydraulic Diameter.

e. Click the Thermal tab and enter 800 K for the Backflow Total Temperature of the outgoing
fluid.

f. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

3. Retain the remaining default (wall and interior) boundary conditions.

3.4.9. Solution
1. Specify the discretization schemes.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Retain the default settings.

2. Enable the plotting of the mass flow rate at the outlet.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass Flow Rate

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 119
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Enter surf-mon-1 for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Select Outlet in the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

3. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Standard under Method.

Warning:

Standard is the recommended initialization method for porous media simulations.

The default Hybrid method does not account for the porous media properties, and
depending on boundary conditions, may produce an unrealistic initial velocity field.
For porous media simulations, the Hybrid method should only be used when the
Maintain Constant Velocity Magnitude option is enabled in the Hybrid Initializ-
ation dialog box.

b. Click Options... to open the Solution Initialization task page, which provides access to further
settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 121
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Select inlet from the Compute from drop-down list in the Solution Initialization task
page.

b. Retain the default settings for standard initialization method.

c. Click Initialize.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Save the case file (catalytic_converter.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

5. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 150 for No. of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate to begin the iterations.

The mass flow rate graph flattens out, as seen in Figure 3.4: Mass Flow Rate History (p. 123). Since
the mass flow rate has stabilized after 150 iterations, the solution can be said to have reached
convergence.

Figure 3.4: Mass Flow Rate History

6. Save the case and data files (catalytic_converter.cas.h5 and catalytic_convert-

er.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 123
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

3.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Display the wall surfaces.

Results → Graphics → Mesh... → New...

a. Deselect all items in the Surfaces selection list, and make sure that only Wall category of
surfaces is selected.

b. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

2. Set the lighting for the display.

View → Display → Options...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Make sure Lights On is enabled in the Lighting Attributes group box.

b. Retain the selection of Automatic from the Lighting drop-down list.

c. Click Apply and close the Display Options dialog box.

3. Set the transparency for the wall surfaces.

View → Graphics → Compose...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 125
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Select all surfaces in the Names selection list.

b. Click the Display... button in the Geometry Attributes group box to open the Display
Properties dialog box.

i. Disable Edges, Perimeter Edges, and Nodes in the Visibility group box.

ii. Make sure that the Red, Green, and Blue sliders are set to the maximum position (that is,
255).

iii. Set the Transparency slider to 70.

iv. Click Apply and close the Display Properties dialog box.

c. Click Apply and close the Scene Description dialog box.

4. Create a surface passing through the geometry for postprocessing purposes.

Results → Surface → Create → Plane...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter y=-425 as the New Surface Name.

b. Select ZX Plane from the Method drop-down list.

c. Enter -425 for Y.

d. Click Create.

5. Create cross-sectional planes at locations throughout the domain: in the inlet prior to the first
substrate, within the first substrate, in the fluid zone between the substrates, within the second
substrate, and just after the second substrate in the outlet.

Results → Surface → Create → Plane...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 127
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Enter z=185 as the New Surface Name.

b. Select XY Plane from the Method drop-down list.

c. Enter 185 for Z.

d. Click Create.

e. Repeat these steps for the remaining surfaces at z=230, z=280, z=330, and z=375, and close
the Plane Surface dialog box.

6. Display velocity vectors on the y=-425 surface (Figure 3.5: Velocity Vectors Through the Interi-
or (p. 131)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter vector-vel for Vector Name.

b. Disable Global Range under Options.

c. Enable Draw Mesh in the Options group box to open the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 129
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

i. Make sure that Wall is selected in the Surfaces selection list.

ii. Set the Transparency slider to 70.

iii. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

d. Assign a value of 0.006 for Scale.

e. Select y=-425 in the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

g. Repeat the procedure in step 3 to set the transparency for the wall surfaces.

h. Rotate the view and adjust the magnification to get the display shown in Figure 3.5: Velocity
Vectors Through the Interior (p. 131).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 3.5: Velocity Vectors Through the Interior

The flow pattern shows that the flow enters the catalytic converter as a jet, with recirculation on
either side of the jet. As it passes through the porous substrates, it decelerates and straightens out,
and exhibits a more uniform velocity distribution. This allows the metal catalyst present in the
substrates to be more effective.

7. Display filled contours of static pressure on the interior plane (Figure 3.6: Contours of Static Pressure
Through the Interior (p. 133)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 131
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Enter contour-pressure for Contour Name.

b. Make sure that Filled, Node Values, and Boundary Values are enabled in the Options group
box.

c. Enable Draw Mesh to open the Mesh Display dialog box.

a. Make sure that Wall is selected in the Surfaces selection list.

b. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

d. Make sure that Pressure... and Static Pressure are selected from the Contours of drop-down
lists.

e. Select y=-425 in the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

The pressure changes rapidly in the middle section, where the fluid velocity changes as it passes through
the porous substrates. The pressure drop can be high, due to the inertial and viscous resistance of the
porous media.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 3.6: Contours of Static Pressure Through the Interior

8. Display filled contours of the velocity magnitude on the z=185, z=230, z=280, z=330, and z=375
surfaces (Figure 3.7: Contours of Velocity Magnitude on the z=185, z=230, z=280, z=330, and z=375
Surfaces (p. 135)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 133
Modeling Flow Through Porous Media

a. Enter contour-vel-mag for Contour Name.

b. Make sure that Filled, Node Values, and Boundary Values are enabled in the Options group
box.

c. Disable Global Range in the Options group box.

d. Enable Draw Mesh to open the Mesh Display dialog box.

a. Make sure that Wall is selected in the Surfaces selection list.

b. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

e. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

f. Select z=185, z=230, z=280, z=330, and z=375 in the Surfaces selection list, and deselect all
others.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 3.7: Contours of Velocity Magnitude on the z=185, z=230, z=280, z=330, and z=375
Surfaces

The velocity profile becomes more uniform as the fluid passes through the porous media. The velocity
is higher at the center (the area in red) just before the nitrogen enters the substrates and then decreases
as it passes through and exits the second substrate. The area in green, which corresponds to a moderate
velocity, increases in extent.

9. Save the case and data file.

File → Write → Case & Data...

3.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to set up and solve a problem involving gas flow through porous media
in Ansys Fluent. You also learned how to perform appropriate postprocessing. Flow non-uniformities
were easily identified through images of velocity vectors and pressure contours.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 135
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 4: Modeling External Compressible Flow
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
4.1. Introduction
4.2. Prerequisites
4.3. Problem Description
4.4. Setup and Solution
4.5. Summary

4.1. Introduction

Licensing Capability:

This tutorial is fully supported at all licensing levels.

The purpose of this tutorial is to compute the turbulent flow past a transonic wing at a nonzero angle
of attack. You will use the k-ω SST turbulence model.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Creation of capsule mesh using Watertight Geometry workflow.

• Model compressible flow (using the ideal gas law for density).

• Set boundary conditions for external aerodynamics.

• Use the k-ω SST turbulence model.

• Calculate a solution using the pressure-based coupled solver with global time step selected for the
pseudo time method.

• Check the near-wall mesh resolution by plotting the distribution of .

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing the solution results
for a turbulent flow within a manifold:

4.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 137
Modeling External Compressible Flow

4.3. Problem Description

The problem considers the flow around a wing at an angle of attack α=3.06° and a free stream Mach
number of 0.8395 (M∞=0.8395). The flow is transonic, and has a shock near the mid-chord (x/c 0.20) on
the upper (suction) side. The wing has a mean aerodynamic chord length of 0.64607 m, a span of 1.1963
m, an aspect ratio of 3.8, and a taper ratio of 0.562. The geometry of the wing is shown in Figure 4.1: Prob-
lem Specification (p. 139).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 4.1: Problem Specification

4.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 139
Modeling External Compressible Flow

4.4.1. Preparation
4.4.2. Meshing Workflow
4.4.3. Mesh
4.4.4. Solver
4.4.5. Models
4.4.6. Materials
4.4.7. Boundary Conditions
4.4.8. Operating Conditions
4.4.9. Reference Values
4.4.10. Solution
4.4.11. Postprocessing

4.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the external_compressible.zip file .

2. Unzip external_compressible.zip to your working directory.

The Discovery CAD file wing.dsco can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Enable Double Precision under Options.

6. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

4.4.2. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. For more information, see Understanding Task States in the Fluent User's Guide).
All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow completing all
tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow. For more information, see
Customizing Workflows in the Fluent User's Guide.

2. Import the CAD geometry (wing.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. For Units, keep the default setting as mm.

c. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(wing.dsco).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 141
Modeling External Compressible Flow

d. Click Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window (Figure 3.2: The Imported
CAD Geometry for the Catalytic Converter (p. 92)), and allow you to proceed onto the next task in
the workflow.

Figure 4.2: The Imported CAD Geometry for the Wing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The wing geometry has been encased in a half-spherical, half-cylindrical volume with 25m of space
in all directions.

Note:

Alternatively, you can use the ... button next to File Name to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

3. Add local sizing.

a. In the Add Local Sizing task, you are prompted as to whether or not you would like to add
local sizing controls to the faceted geometry.

In this tutorial, we will add local sizing around the wing and a region past the trailing edge, since
they are areas where we require a more refined mesh. Later, we will apply settings for a coarser
surface mesh elsewhere.

i. At the prompt for adding local sizing, select yes.

ii. Enter wing-facesize for the Name of the size control.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 143
Modeling External Compressible Flow

iii. Retain Face Size for the Size Control Type.

iv. Specify 10 for the Target Mesh Size.

v. Select wing_bottom and wing_top.

b. Click Add Local Sizing task, you are prompted as to whether or not you would like to add
local sizing controls to the faceted geometry.

You can now see the wing task in the workflow, which can be selected to change its settings. The
Add Local Sizing task can still be used to add more local sizing controls to the geometry.

i. At the prompt for adding local sizing, select yes.

ii. Enter wing-edge-facesize for the Name of the size control.

iii. Retain Face Size for the Size Control Type.

iv. Specify 2 for the Target Mesh Size.

v. Select wing_edge.

c. Click Add Local Sizing.

You can now see the wing task in the workflow, which can be selected to change its settings. The
Add Local Sizing task can still be used to add more local sizing controls to the geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select Body Of Influence for the Size Control Type.

ii. Enter wing-boi for the Name of the size control.

iii. Specify 5 for the Target Mesh Size.

iv. Select wing-boi.

v. Click Add Local Sizing to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 145
Modeling External Compressible Flow

b. Specify 2 for the Minimum Size.

c. Specify 1000 for the Maximum Size.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

d. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Describe the geometry.

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select The geometry consists of only fluid regions with no voids option under Geo-
metry Type, since this model contains only the fluid region.

b. Keep the rest of the default settings for this task.

c. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Confirm and update the boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 147
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Select the Update Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and confirm
and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the
correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

b. All the proposed boundaries are correct, so click Update Boundaries. and proceed to the next
task.

7. Update your regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review and change the tabulated names and
types of the various regions that have been generated from your imported geometry, and
change them as needed.

We can see that the only defined region is the fluid region.

b. The proposed region type is correct, so click Update Regions to update your settings.

8. Add boundary layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 149
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

For the Add Boundary Layers task, ensure yes is selected at the prompt as to whether or not
you want to define boundary layer settings. In this task, you can define specific details for
capturing the boundary layer in and around your geometry.

b. Specify 12 for Number of Layers.

Many boundary layers are desired to model a well resolved flow near the wall.

c. Click Add Boundary Layers.

9. Generating the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, where you can set properties of the volume mesh
itself.

b. Select the poly-hexcore for Fill With.

c. Specify 512 for Max Cell Length.

d. Enable Advanced Options to expose additional options that are required for this task.

Select yes for Check Self Proximity.

e. Click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the wing geometry..
The mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is automatically inserted with
a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 151
Modeling External Compressible Flow

10. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

11. Save the mesh file (wing.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

12. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can now switch
to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation. Note that to obtain more accurate
solutions a higher quality mesh should be used.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

4.4.3. Mesh
1. Examine the mesh (Figure 4.3: The Entire Mesh (p. 153) and Figure 4.4: Magnified View of the Mesh
Around the Wing (p. 155)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 4.3: The Entire Mesh

To examine the cells of the mesh around the wing, display the mesh with edges enabled and the
far-field boundary disabled.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 153
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Enable Edges in the Options group box.

b. Ensure All is selected in the Edge Type group box.

c. Deselect pressure-farfield from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

e. Zoom in on the region around the wing, as shown in Figure 4.4: Magnified View of the Mesh
Around the Wing (p. 155).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 4.4: Magnified View of the Mesh Around the Wing

The cells near the surface have a relatively higher resolution and high aspect ratios, to account for the
flow around the wing.

Extra:

You can use the right mouse button to probe for mesh information in the graphics
window. If you click the right mouse button on any node in the mesh, information will
be displayed in the Ansys Fluent console about the associated zone, including the
name of the zone. This feature is especially useful when you have several zones of the
same type and you want to distinguish between them quickly.

4.4.4. Solver
1. Set the solver settings.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 155
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Retain the default selection of Pressure-Based from the Type list.

The pressure-based solver with the Coupled option for the pressure-velocity coupling is a good
alternative to density-based solvers of Ansys Fluent when dealing with applications involving high-
speed aerodynamics with shocks. Selection of the coupled algorithm is made in the Solution
Methods task page in the Solution step.

4.4.5. Models
1. Select the k-ω SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of k-omega (2 eqn) in the Model list.

b. Retain the default selection of SST in the k-omega Model list.

c. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 157
Modeling External Compressible Flow

4.4.6. Materials
The default Fluid Material is air, which is the working fluid in this problem. The default settings need to
be modified to account for compressibility and variations of the thermophysical properties with temperature.

1. Set the properties for air, the default fluid material.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air Edit...

a. Select ideal-gas from the Density drop-down list.

The Energy Equation will be enabled.

b. Select sutherland from the Viscosity drop-down list to open the Sutherland Law dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Retain the default selection of Three Coefficient Method in the Methods list.

ii. Click OK to close the Sutherland Law dialog box.

The Sutherland law for viscosity is well suited for high-speed compressible flows.

c. Click Change/Create to save these settings.

d. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

While Density and Viscosity have been made temperature-dependent, Cp (Specific Heat) and Thermal
Conductivity have been left constant. For high-speed compressible flows, thermal dependency of the
physical properties is generally recommended. For simplicity, Thermal Conductivity and Cp (Specific
Heat) are assumed to be constant in this tutorial.

4.4.7. Boundary Conditions

Setup → Boundary Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 159
Modeling External Compressible Flow

1. Set the boundary conditions for pressure_farfield.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Setup → Boundary Conditions → pressure_farfield → Edit...

a. Retain the default value of 0 Pa for Gauge Pressure.

Note:

The gauge pressure in Ansys Fluent is always relative to the operating pressure,
which is defined in a separate input (see below).

b. Enter 0.8395 for Mach Number.

c. Enter 0.998574 and 0.053382 for the X-Component of Flow Direction and Z-Component
of Flow Direction, respectively.

These values are determined by the 3.06° angle of attack: cos 3.06° 0.998574 and sin 3.06° 0.053382

d. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in the
Turbulence group box.

e. Retain the default value of 5% for Turbulent Intensity and 10 for Turbulent Viscosity Ratio.

The viscosity ratio should be between 1 and 10 for external flows.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 161
Modeling External Compressible Flow

f. Click the Thermal tab and enter 255.56 K for Temperature.

g. Click Apply and close the Pressure Far-Field dialog box.

4.4.8. Operating Conditions

1. Set the operating pressure.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Operating Conditions...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The Operating Conditions dialog box can also be accessed from the Cell Zone Conditions task page.

a. Enter 80600 Pa for Operating Pressure.

The operating pressure should be set to a meaningful mean value in order to avoid round-off errors.
The absolute pressure must be greater than zero for compressible flows. If you want to specify
boundary conditions in terms of absolute pressure, you can make the operating pressure zero.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

For information about setting the operating pressure, see the Fluent User's Guide.

4.4.9. Reference Values

1. Set the reference values that are used to compute the pressure coefficient.

Setup → Reference Values

The reference values are used to non-dimensionalize physical quantities used for postprocessing. The
dimensionless pressure coefficient will be used in future steps.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 163
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Select pressure_farfield from the Compute from drop-down list.

Ansys Fluent will update the Reference Values based on the boundary conditions at the far-field
boundary.

4.4.10. Solution
1. Set the solution parameters.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Retain the default settings.

2. Enable residual plotting during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 165
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box and click OK to close the Residual
Monitors dialog box.

3. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the default selection of Hybrid Initialization from the Initialization Methods group
box.

b. Click Initialize to initialize the solution.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Save the case files (wing.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

5. Start the calculation by requesting 150 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 5 for the Time Scale Factor.

The Time Scale Factor allows you to further manipulate the computed time step size calculated by
Ansys Fluent. Larger time steps can lead to faster convergence. However, if the time step is too
large it can lead to solution instability.

b. Enter 150 for Number of Iterations.

c. Click Calculate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 167
Modeling External Compressible Flow

6. Save the case and data files (wing.cas.h5 and wing.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

4.4.11. Postprocessing
1. Plot the distribution on the wing (Figure 4.5: Contour Plot of y+ Distribution (p. 169)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-yplus for Contour Name.

b. Disable Node Values in the Options group box.

c. Select Turbulence... and Wall Yplus from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select wing_bottom, wing_edge, and wing_top from the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Note:

The values of are dependent on the resolution of the mesh and the Reynolds number
of the flow, and are defined only in wall-adjacent cells. The value of in the wall-ad-
jacent cells dictates how wall shear stress is calculated.

The equation for is

(4.1)
where is the distance from the wall to the cell center, is the molecular viscosity,
is the density of the air, and is the wall shear stress.

For this tutorial, the relatively coarse mesh was prepared with a target max value of
~100, as indicated in Figure 4.5: Contour Plot of y+ Distribution (p. 169).

Figure 4.5: Contour Plot of y+ Distribution

2. Plot the pressure distribution on the wing (Figure 4.6: Contour Plot of Pressure (p. 171)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 169
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Enter contour-pressure for Contour Name.

b. Enable Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. Select Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select fluid_symmetry, wing_bottom, wing_edge, and wing_top from the Surfaces

selection list.

e. Click Save/Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 4.6: Contour Plot of Pressure

3. Create a plane near the shock region.

Results → Surface → Create → Plane...

a. Enter plane-zx for New Surface Name.

b. Select ZX Plane from the Method drop-down lists.

c. Enter 1.11 m for Y.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 171
Modeling External Compressible Flow

This value corresponds to the y-coordinate at around the shock region near the tip of the wing.
Alternatively, you can click Select with Mouse to select a point from the graphics window.

d. Click Create and close the Plane Surface dialog box.

4. Plot the Mach number distribution on the wing near the shock region (Figure 4.7: Contour Plot of
Mach Number (p. 173)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-mach for Contour Name.

b. Enable Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. Select Velocity... and Mach Number from the Contours of drop-down list.

d. Select plane-zx from the From Surface selection list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

f. Zoom in on the region around the wing, as shown in Figure 4.7: Contour Plot of Mach Num-
ber (p. 173).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 4.7: Contour Plot of Mach Number

Note the discontinuity, in this case a shock, on the upper surface of the wing in Figure 4.7: Contour
Plot of Mach Number (p. 173) at about x/c 0.20.

5. Display filled contours of the component of velocity (Figure 4.8: Contour Plot of x Component
of Velocity (p. 175)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 173
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Enter contour-x-vel for Contour Name.

b. Ensure Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Enable Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Velocity... and X Velocity from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select plane-zx from the From Surface selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Note the flow reversal downstream of the shock in Figure 4.8: Contour Plot of x Component of Velo-
city (p. 175).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 4.8: Contour Plot of x Component of Velocity

6. Plot velocity vectors (Figure 4.9: Plot of Velocity Vectors Downstream of the Shock (p. 177)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 175
Modeling External Compressible Flow

a. Enter vector-vel for Vector Name.

b. Enter 0.05 for Scale.

c. Select Velocity... and X Velocity from the Color by drop-down lists.

d. Select plane-zx from the From Surface selection list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

f. Zoom in on the flow above the upper surface at a point downstream of the shock, as shown
in Figure 4.9: Plot of Velocity Vectors Downstream of the Shock (p. 177).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 4.9: Plot of Velocity Vectors Downstream of the Shock

Flow reversal is clearly visible in Figure 4.9: Plot of Velocity Vectors Downstream of the Shock (p. 177).

7. Create iso-surfaces near the shock region.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

a. Enter iso-y-bottom for New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Y-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Select wing_bottom from the From Surface selection list.

d. Click Compute and enter 1.11 m for Iso-Values.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 177
Modeling External Compressible Flow

This value corresponds to the y-coordinate at the shock region near the tip of the wing.

e. Click Create.

f. Similarly, create a surface iso-y-top from the wing_top surface.

g. Close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

8. Plot the component of wall shear stress on the wing near the shock region (Figure 4.10: XY Plot
of x Wall Shear Stress (p. 179)).

Results → Plots → XY Plot → New...

a. Enter xy-x-shear-stress for XY Plot Name.

b. Select Wall Fluxes... and X-Wall Shear Stress from the Y Axis Function drop-down lists.

c. Select iso-y-bottom and iso-y-top from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Save/Plot and close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

As shown in Figure 4.10: XY Plot of x Wall Shear Stress (p. 179), the large, adverse pressure gradient in-
duced by the shock causes the boundary layer to separate. The point of separation is where the wall
shear stress vanishes. Flow reversal is indicated here by negative values of the x component of the wall
shear stress.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 4.10: XY Plot of x Wall Shear Stress

9. Save the case file (wing.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

4.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated how to set up and solve an external aerodynamics problem using poly-
hexcore meshing, the pressure-based coupled solver with under-relaxation from a pseudo time method
and the k-ω SST turbulence model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 179
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 5: Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing
Elbow
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
5.1. Introduction
5.2. Prerequisites
5.3. Problem Description
5.4. Setup and Solution
5.5. Summary

5.1. Introduction
This tutorial illustrates the setup and solution of a three-dimensional turbulent fluid flow and heat
transfer problem in a mixing elbow. The mixing elbow configuration is encountered in piping systems
in power plants and process industries. It is often important to predict the flow field and temperature
field in the area of the mixing region in order to properly design the junction.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Use the Watertight Geometry guided workflow to:

– Import a CAD geometry

– Generate a surface mesh

– Describe the geometry

– Generate a volume mesh

• Launch Ansys Fluent.

• Read an existing mesh file into Ansys Fluent.

• Use mixed units to define the geometry and fluid properties.

• Set material properties and boundary conditions for a turbulent forced-convection problem.

• Create a surface report definition and use it as a convergence criterion.

• Calculate a solution using the pressure-based solver.

• Visually examine the flow and temperature fields using the postprocessing tools available in Ansys
Fluent.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 181
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

• Change the solver method to coupled in order to increase the convergence speed.

• Adapt the mesh based on the temperature gradient to further improve the prediction of the temper-
ature field.

5.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial assumes that you have little or no experience with Ansys Fluent, and so each step will be
explicitly described.

5.3. Problem Description

The problem to be considered is shown schematically in Figure 5.1: Problem Specification (p. 183). A
cold fluid at 20° C flows into the pipe through a large inlet, and mixes with a warmer fluid at 40° C that
enters through a smaller inlet located at the elbow. The pipe dimensions are in inches and the fluid
properties and boundary conditions are given in SI units. The Reynolds number for the flow at the larger
inlet is 50,800, so a turbulent flow model will be required.

Note:

Since the geometry of the mixing elbow is symmetric, only half of the elbow must be modeled
in Ansys Fluent.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 5.1: Problem Specification

5.4. Setup and Solution

To help you quickly identify graphical user interface items at a glance and guide you through the steps
of setting up and running your simulation, the Ansys Fluent Tutorial Guide uses several type styles and
mini flow charts. See Typographical Conventions Used In This Manual (p. xxix) for detailed information.

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for running this tutorial in serial:
5.4.1. Preparation
5.4.2. Meshing Workflow
5.4.3. Setting Up Domain
5.4.4. Setting Up Physics
5.4.5. Solving
5.4.6. Displaying the Preliminary Solution
5.4.7. Adapting the Mesh

5.4.1. Preparation
1. Download the introduction.zip file .

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 183
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

2. Unzip introduction.zip to your working directory.

3. The Discovery CAD file elbow.dsco can be found in the folder.

4. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

5. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

5.4.2. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow com-
pleting all tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow.

2. Import the Discovery CAD geometry (elbow.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. For Units, select in from the drop-down list.

c. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(elbow.dsco).

d. Select Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window, and allow you to proceed
onto the next task in the workflow.

Note:

Alternatively, you can use the ... button next to File Name to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 185
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

3. Add local sizing.

a. In the Add Local Sizing task, you are prompted as to whether or not you would like to add
local sizing controls to the faceted geometry.

b. For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default setting of no.

c. Click Update to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Specify 0.3 for Maximum Size.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

c. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Describe the geometry.

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 187
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Since the geometry defined the fluid region. Select The geometry consists of only fluid
regions with no voids for Geometry Type.

b. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Update Boundaries Task

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. For the Selection Type field, select label.

b. For the wall-inlet boundary, change the Boundary Type field to wall.

c. Click Update Boundaries to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

7. Update your regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 189
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review the names and types of the various
regions that have been generated from your imported geometry, and change them as needed.

b. Keep the default settings, and click Update Regions.

8. Add Boundary Layers.

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Keep the default settings, and click Add Boundary Layers.

9. Generate the volume mesh.

a. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, where you can set properties of the volume mesh.

b. Select the poly-hexcore for Fill With.

c. Click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the manifold
geometry. Once complete, the mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is
automatically inserted with a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the
volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 191
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

10. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

11. Save the mesh file (elbow.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

12. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a high-quality mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can
now switch to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

5.4.3. Setting Up Domain

In this step, you will perform the mesh-related activities using the Domain ribbon tab (Mesh group
box).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will report the results of the mesh check in the console.
Domain Extents:
x-coordinate: min (m) = -2.000000e-01, max (m) = 2.000000e-01
y-coordinate: min (m) = -2.250000e-01, max (m) = 2.000000e-01
z-coordinate: min (m) = 0.000000e+00, max (m) = 4.992264e-02
Volume statistics:
minimum volume (m3): 1.541854e-11
maximum volume (m3): 5.483098e-07
total volume (m3): 2.500657e-03
Face area statistics:
minimum face area (m2): 3.010069e-08
maximum face area (m2): 7.873946e-05
Checking mesh.....................................
Done.

The mesh check will list the minimum and maximum x, y, and z values from the mesh in the default
SI unit of meters. It will also report a number of other mesh features that are checked. Any errors
in the mesh will be reported at this time. Ensure that the minimum volume is not negative, since
Ansys Fluent cannot begin a calculation when this is the case.

Note:

The minimum and maximum values may vary slightly when running on different plat-
forms.

2. Set the working units for the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Scale...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 193
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Select in from the View Length Unit In drop-down list to set inches as the working unit for
length.

b. Confirm that the domain extents are as shown in the previous dialog box.

c. Close the Scale Mesh dialog box.

The working unit for length has now been set to inches.

Note:

Because the default SI units will be used for everything except length, there is no need
to change any other units in this problem. The choice of inches for the unit of length
has been made by the actions you have just taken. If you want a different working unit
for length, other than inches (for example, millimeters), click Units... in the Domain
ribbon tab (Mesh group box) and make the appropriate change in the Set Units dialog
box.

5.4.4. Setting Up Physics

In the steps that follow, you will select a solver and specify physical models, material properties, and
zone conditions for your simulation using the Physics ribbon tab.

1. In the Solver group box of the Physics ribbon tab, retain the default selection of the steady
pressure-based solver.

Physics → Solver → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Set up your models for the CFD simulation using the Models group box of the Physics ribbon
tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 195
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Note:

You can also use the Models task page, which can be accessed from the tree by ex-
panding Setup and double-clicking the Models tree item.

a. Enable heat transfer by activating the energy equation.

In the Physics ribbon tab, enable Energy (Models group box).

Physics → Models → Energy

Note:

You can also double-click the Setup/Models/Energy tree item and enable the energy
equation in the Energy dialog box.

b. Enable the - turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Retain the default selection of k-omega from the Model list.

ii. Retain the default selection of SST in the k-omega Model group box.

iii. Enable the Production Limiter check box in the Options group.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 197
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

iv. Click OK to accept all the other default settings and close the Viscous Model dialog box.

Note that the Viscous... label in the ribbon is displayed in blue to indicate that the Viscous
model is enabled. Also Energy and Viscous appear as enabled under the Setup/Models
tree branch.

Note:

While the ribbon is the primary tool for setting up and solving your problem,
the tree is a dynamic representation of your case. The models, materials, condi-
tions, and other settings that you have specified in your problem will appear in
the tree. Many of the frequently used ribbon items are also available via the
right-click functionality of the tree.

3. Set up the materials for the CFD simulation using the Materials group box of the Physics ribbon
tab.

Create a new material called water using the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

a. In the Physics ribbon tab, click Create/Edit... (Materials group box).

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Click the Fluent Database... button to access pre-defined materials.

c. Select water-liquid (h2o < l >) from the Fluent Fluid Materials selection list and click Copy,
then close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 199
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

d. Ensure that there are now two materials (water-liquid and air) defined locally by examining
the Fluent Fluid Materials drop-down list.

Both the materials will also be listed under Fluid in the Materials task page and under the Mater-
ials tree branch.

e. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

4. Set up the cell zone conditions for the fluid zone (fluid) using the Zones group box of the Physics
ribbon tab.

a. In the Physics tab, click Cell Zones (Zones group box).

Physics → Zones → Cell Zones

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

This opens the Cell Zone Conditions task page.

b. Double-click fluid in the Zone list to open the Fluid dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 201
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Note:

You can also double-click the Setup/Cell Zone Conditions/fluid tree item in order
to open the corresponding dialog box.

c. Select water-liquid from the Material Name drop-down list.

d. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

5. Set up the boundary conditions for the inlets, outlet, and walls for your CFD analysis using the
Zones group box of the Physics ribbon tab.

a. In the Physics tab, click Boundaries (Zones group box).

Physics → Zones → Boundaries

This opens the Boundary Conditions task page where the boundaries defined in your simula-
tion are displayed in the Zone selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note:

To display boundary zones grouped by zone type (as shown previously), click the

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 203
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Toggle Tree View button ( ) in the upper right corner of the Boundary Condi-
tions task page and select Zone Type under Group By.

Here the zones have names that were previously given during the meshing process. It is good
practice to give boundaries meaningful names in a meshing application to help when you set
up the model. You can also change boundary names in Fluent by simply editing the boundary
and making revisions in the Zone Name text box.

b. Set the boundary conditions at the cold inlet (cold-inlet).

Tip:

If you are unsure of which inlet zone corresponds to the cold inlet, you can
probe the mesh display using the right mouse button or the probe toolbar

button ( ) as described previously in this tutorial. The information will be

displayed in the Ansys Fluent console, and the zone you probed will be auto-
matically selected from the Zone selection list in the Boundary Conditions
task page.

i. Double-click cold-inlet to open the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

ii. Retain the default selection of Magnitude, Normal to Boundary from the Velocity Spe-
cification Method drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

iii. Enter 0.4 [m/s] for Velocity Magnitude.

iv. In the Turbulence group box, select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specific-
ation Method drop-down list.

v. Retain the default value of 5 [%] for Turbulent Intensity.

vi. Enter 4 [inches] for Hydraulic Diameter.

The hydraulic diameter is defined as:

where is the cross-sectional area and is the wetted perimeter.

vii. Click the Thermal tab.

viii.Enter 293.15 [K] for Temperature.

ix. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

Note:

You can also access the Velocity Inlet dialog box by double-clicking the
Setup/Boundary Conditions/cold-inlet tree item.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 205
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

c. In a similar manner, set the boundary conditions at the hot inlet (hot-inlet), using the values
in the following table:

Setting Value
Velocity Specification Method Magnitude, Normal to Boundary
Velocity Magnitude 1.2 [m/s]
Specification Method Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter
Turbulent Intensity 5 [%]
Hydraulic Diameter 1 [inch]
Temperature 313.15 [K]

d. Double-click outlet in the Boundary Condition selection list and set the boundary conditions
at the outlet, as shown in the following figure.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note:

• You do not need to set a backflow temperature in this case (in the Thermal tab)
because the material properties are not functions of temperature. If they were,
a flow-weighted average of the inlet conditions would be a good starting value.

• Ansys Fluent will use the backflow conditions only if the fluid is flowing into the
computational domain through the outlet. Since backflow might occur at some
point during the solution procedure, you should set reasonable backflow condi-
tions to prevent convergence from being adversely affected.

e. For the wall of the elbow (wall-elbow) and the wall of the hot inlet (wall-inlet), retain the
default value of 0 W/m2 for Heat Flux in the Thermal tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 207
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

5.4.5. Solving
In the steps that follow, you will set up and run the calculation using the Solution ribbon tab.

Note:

You can also use the task pages listed under the Solution tree branch to perform solution-
related activities.

1. Select a solver scheme.

a. In the Solution ribbon tab, click Methods... (Solution group box).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Retain the default settings.

2. Enable the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 209
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. In the Solution ribbon tab, click Residuals... (Reports group box).

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Note:

You can also access the Residual Monitors dialog box by double-clicking the
Solution/Monitors/Residual tree item.

b. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Retain the default value of 0.001 for the Absolute Criteria of continuity.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

Note:

By default, the residuals of all of the equations solved for the physical models enabled
for your case will be monitored and checked by Ansys Fluent as a means to determine
the convergence of the solution. It is a good practice to also create and plot a surface
report definition that can help evaluate whether the solution is truly converged. You
will do this in the next step.

3. Create a surface report definition of average temperature at the outlet (outlet).

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass-Weighted Average...

Note:

You can also access the Surface Report Definition dialog box by right-clicking Report
Definitions in the tree (under Solution) and selecting New/Surface Report/Mass-
Weighted Average... from the menu that opens.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 211
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Enter outlet-temp-avg for the Name of the report definition.

b. Enable Report File, Report Plot, and Print to Console in the Create group box.

During a solution run, Ansys Fluent will write solution convergence data in a report file, plot the
solution convergence history in a graphics window, and print the value of the report definition to
the console.

c. Set Frequency to 3 by clicking the up-arrow button.

This setting instructs Ansys Fluent to update the plot of the surface report, write data to a file, and
print data in the console after every 3 iterations during the solution.

d. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

e. Select outlet from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

The new surface report definition outlet-temp-avg will appear under the Solution/Report
Definitions tree item. Ansys Fluent also automatically creates the following items:

• outlet-temp-avg-rfile (under the Solution/Monitors/Report Files tree branch)

• outlet-temp-avg-rplot (under the Solution/Monitors/Report Plots tree branch)

4. Examine the report file settings of the created report definition (outlet-temp-avg-rfile).

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → outlet-temp-avg-rfile Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The Edit Report File dialog box is automatically populated with data from the outlet-temp-avg
report definition.

a. Verify that outlet-temp-avg is in the Selected Report Definitions list.

If you had created multiple report definitions, the additional ones would be listed under Available
Report Definitions , and you could use the Add>> and <<Remove buttons to manage which
were written in this particular report definition file.

b. (optional) Edit the name and location of the resulting file as necessary using the File Name
field or Browse... button.

c. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

5. Create a convergence condition for outlet-temp-avg.

Solution → Reports → Convergence...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 213
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Click the Add button.

b. Enter con-outlet-temp-avg for Conditions.

c. Select outlet-temp-avg from the Report Definition drop-down list.

d. Enter 1e-5 for Stop Criterion.

e. Enter 20 for Ignore Iterations Before.

f. Enter 15 for Use Iterations.

g. Enable Print.

h. Set Every Iteration to 3.

i. Click OK to save the convergence condition settings and close the Convergence Conditions
dialog box.

These settings will cause Fluent to consider the solution converged when the surface report definition
value for each of the previous 15 iterations is within 0.001% of the current value. Convergence of the
values will be checked every 3 iterations. The first 20 iterations will be ignored, allowing for any initial
solution dynamics to settle out. Note that the value printed to the console is the deviation between
the current and previous iteration values only.

6. Initialize the flow field using the Initialization group box of the Solution ribbon tab.

Solution → Initialization

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of Hybrid from the Method list.

b. Click Initialize.

7. Save the case file (elbow1.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

8. Start the calculation by requesting 150 iterations in the Solution ribbon tab (Run Calculation
group box).

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Enter 150 for No. of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

Note:

By starting the calculation, you are also starting to save the surface report data at
the rate specified in the Surface Report Definition dialog box. If a file already exists
in your working directory with the name you specified in the Edit Report File dialog
box, then a Question dialog box will open, asking if you would like to append the
new data to the existing file. Click No in the Question dialog box, and then click
OK in the Warning dialog box that follows to overwrite the existing file.

As the calculation progresses, the surface report history will be plotted in the outlet-temp-
avg-rplot tab in the graphics window (Figure 5.2: Convergence History of the Mass-Weighted
Average Temperature (p. 216)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 215
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Figure 5.2: Convergence History of the Mass-Weighted Average Temperature

Similarly, the residuals history will be plotted in the Scaled Residuals tab in the graphics
window (Figure 5.3: Residuals (p. 217)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 5.3: Residuals

Note:

You can monitor the two convergence plots simultaneously by right-clicking a tab
in the graphics window and selecting SubWindow View from the menu that opens.
To return to a tabbed graphics window view, right-click a graphics window title
area and select Tabbed View.

Since the residual values vary slightly by platform, the plot that appears on your screen may
not be exactly the same as the one shown here.

The solution will be stopped by Ansys Fluent when any of the following occur:

• the surface report definition converges to within the tolerance specified in the Conver-
gence Conditions dialog box

• the residual monitors converge to within the tolerances specified in the Residual
Monitors dialog box

• the number of iterations you requested in the Run Calculation task page has been
reached

In this case, the solution is stopped when the convergence criterion on outlet temperature is
satisfied. The exact number of iterations for convergence will vary, depending on the platform
being used. An Information dialog box will open to alert you that the calculation is complete.
Click OK in the Information dialog box to proceed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 217
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

9. Examine the plots for convergence (Figure 5.2: Convergence History of the Mass-Weighted Average
Temperature (p. 216) and Figure 5.3: Residuals (p. 217)).

Note:

There are no universal metrics for judging convergence. Residual definitions that are
useful for one class of problem are sometimes misleading for other classes of problems.
Therefore it is a good idea to judge convergence not only by examining residual levels,
but also by monitoring relevant integrated quantities and checking for mass and energy
balances.

There are three indicators that convergence has been reached:

• The residuals have decreased to a sufficient degree.

The solution has converged when the Convergence Criterion for each variable has
been reached. The default criterion is that each residual will be reduced to a value
of less than 10–3, except the energy residual, for which the default criterion is 10–6.

• The solution no longer changes with more iterations.

Sometimes the residuals may not fall below the convergence criterion set in the case
setup. However, monitoring the representative flow variables through iterations may
show that the residuals have stagnated and do not change with further iterations.
This could also be considered as convergence.

• The overall mass, momentum, energy, and scalar balances are obtained.

You can examine the overall mass, momentum, energy and scalar balances in the
Flux Reports dialog box. The net imbalance should be less than 0.2 % of the net
flux through the domain when the solution has converged. In the next step you will
check to see if the mass balance indicates convergence.

10. Examine the mass flux report for convergence using the Results ribbon tab.

Results → Reports → Fluxes...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Ensure that Mass Flow Rate is selected from the Options list.

b. Select cold-inlet, hot-inlet, and outlet from the Boundaries selection list.

c. Click Compute.

The individual and net results of the computation will be displayed in the Results and Net Results
boxes, respectively, in the Flux Reports dialog box, as well as in the console.

The sum of the flux for the inlets should be very close to the sum of the flux for the outlets. The net
results show that the imbalance in this case is well below the 0.2% criterion suggested previously.

d. Close the Flux Reports dialog box.

11. Save the data file (elbow1.dat.h5).

File → Write → Data...

In later steps of this tutorial you will save additional case and data files with different suffixes.

5.4.6. Displaying the Preliminary Solution

In the steps that follow, you will visualize various aspects of the flow for the preliminary solution using
the Results ribbon tab.

1. Display filled contours of velocity magnitude on the symmetry plane (Figure 5.4: Predicted Velocity
Distribution after the Initial Calculation (p. 221)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 219
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Enter contour-vel for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Ensure that Node Values and Boundary Values are enabled in the Options group box.

d. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

e. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

f. Select symmetry-xyplane from the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

g. Click Save/Display to display the contours in the active graphics window. Clicking the blue
z-axis arrow in the axis triad will orient the view with the z-axis, and clicking the Fit to Window

icon ( ) will cause the object to fit exactly and be centered in the window.

Note:

If you cannot see the velocity contour display, select the appropriate tab in the
graphics window.

h. Close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 5.4: Predicted Velocity Distribution after the Initial Calculation

Extra:

When you probe a point in the displayed domain with the right mouse button or the
probe tool, the level of the corresponding contour is highlighted in the colormap in
the graphics window, and is also reported in the console.

2. Create and display a definition for temperature contours on the symmetry plane (Figure 5.5: Pre-
dicted Temperature Distribution after the Initial Calculation (p. 223)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

You can create contour definitions and save them for later use.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 221
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Enter contour-temp for Contour Name.

b. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Select symmetry-xyplane from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

The new contour-temp definition appears under the Results/Graphics/Contours tree branch.
To edit your contour definition, right-click it and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 5.5: Predicted Temperature Distribution after the Initial Calculation

3. Display velocity vectors on the symmetry plane (Figure 5.8: Magnified View of Resized Velocity
Vectors (p. 227)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 223
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Enter vector-vel for Vector Name.

b. Select symmetry-xyplane from the Surfaces selection list.

c. Click Save/Display to plot the velocity vectors.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 5.6: Velocity Vectors Colored by Velocity Magnitude

The Auto Scale option is enabled by default in the Options group box. This scaling sometimes
creates vectors that are too small or too large in the majority of the domain. You can improve
the clarity by adjusting the Scale and Skip settings, thereby changing the size and number
of the vectors when they are displayed.

d. Enter 4 for Scale.

e. Set Skip to 2.

f. Click Save/Display again to redisplay the vectors.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 225
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Figure 5.7: Resized Velocity Vectors

g. Close the Vectors dialog box.

h. Zoom in on the vectors in the display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 5.8: Magnified View of Resized Velocity Vectors

i. Zoom out to the original view.

Clicking the Fit to Window icon, , will cause the object to fit exactly and be centered in
the window.

4. Create a line at the centerline of the outlet. For this task, you will use the Surface group box of
the Results tab.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 227
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Enter z=0_outlet for New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Z-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute to obtain the extent of the mesh in the z-direction.

The range of values in the z-direction is displayed in the Min and Max fields.

d. Retain the default value of 0 inches for Iso-Values.

e. Select outlet from the From Surface selection list.

f. Click Create.

The new line surface representing the intersection of the plane z=0 and the surface outlet
is created, and its name z=0_outlet appears in the From Surface selection list.

Note:

• After the line surface z=0_outlet is created, a new entry will automatically be
generated for New Surface Name, in case you would like to create another sur-
face.

• If you want to delete or otherwise manipulate any surfaces, click Manage... to

open the Surfaces dialog box.

g. Close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

5. Display and save an XY plot of the temperature profile across the centerline of the outlet for the
initial solution (Figure 5.9: Outlet Temperature Profile for the Initial Solution (p. 230)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Results → Plots → XY Plot → New...

a. Enter xy-outlet-temp for XY Plot Name.

b. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Y Axis Function drop-down lists.

c. Select the z=0_outlet surface you just created from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Save/Plot.

e. Enable Write to File in the Options group box.

The button that was originally labeled Save/Plot will change to Write....

f. Click Write....

i. In the Select File dialog box, enter outlet_temp1.xy for XY File.

ii. Click OK to save the temperature data and close the Select File dialog box.

g. Close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 229
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Figure 5.9: Outlet Temperature Profile for the Initial Solution

6. Define a custom field function for the dynamic head formula ( ).

User Defined → Field Functions → Custom...

a. Select Density... and Density from the Field Functions drop-down lists, and click the Select
button to add density to the Definition field.

b. Click the X button to add the multiplication symbol to the Definition field.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Field Functions drop-down lists, and
click the Select button to add |V| to the Definition field.

d. Click y^x to raise the last entry in the Definition field to a power, and click 2 for the power.

e. Click the / button to add the division symbol to the Definition field, and then click 2.

f. Enter dynamic-head for New Function Name.

g. Click Define and close the Custom Field Function Calculator dialog box.

The dynamic-head tree item will appear under the Parameters & Customization/Custom
Field Functions tree branch.

7. Display filled contours of the custom field function (Figure 5.10: Contours of the Dynamic Head
Custom Field Function (p. 232)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-dynamic-head for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 231
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

c. Disable Boundary Values in the Options group.

d. Select Custom Field Functions... and dynamic-head from the Contours of drop-down lists.

Tip:

Custom Field Functions... is at the top of the upper Contours of drop-down

list.

e. Select symmetry-xyplane from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 5.10: Contours of the Dynamic Head Custom Field Function

Note:

You may need to change the view by zooming out after the last vector display, if you
have not already done so.

8. Save the settings for the custom field function by writing the case and data files (elbow1.cas.h5
and elbow1.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Ensure that elbow1.cas.h5 is entered for Case/Data File.

Note:

When you write the case and data file at the same time, it does not matter whether
you specify the file name with a .cas or .dat extension, as both will be saved.

b. Click OK to save the files and close the Select File dialog box.

c. Click OK to overwrite the files that you had saved earlier.

5.4.7. Adapting the Mesh

For the first run of this tutorial, you have solved the elbow problem using a fairly coarse mesh. The
elbow solution can be improved further by refining the mesh to better resolve the flow details. Ansys
Fluent provides a built-in capability to easily adapt (locally refine) the mesh according to solution
gradients. In the following steps you will adapt the mesh based on the temperature gradients in the
current solution and compare the results with the previous results.

1. Define Cell Registers to adapt the mesh in the regions of high temperature gradient.

Solution → Cell Registers New → Field Variable...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 233
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

a. Select Cells More Than from the Type drop-down list.

b. Select Curvature from the Derivative Option drop-down list.

c. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Curvature of drop-down list.

d. Click Compute.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Ansys Fluent will update the Minimum and Maximum values to show the minimum and maximum
temperature gradient. The Average temperature gradient and Standard Deviation will also be
displayed.

e. Enter a value of 0.0015 for the Cells having value more than.

A general rule is to use about 10% of the maximum gradient when setting the value for refinement.

f. Click Save and close the Field Variable Register dialog box.

2. Set up mesh adaption using the Cell Registers. For this task, you will use the Adapt group box
in the Domain ribbon tab.

Domain → Adapt → Manual...

a. Select the previously defined curvature_0 cell register from the Refinement Criterion drop-
down lists.

Ansys Fluent will not coarsen beyond the original mesh for a 3D mesh. Hence, it is not necessary
to select the Coarsening Criterion in this instance.

b. Click Adapt.

c. Click Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 235
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Ansys Fluent will display the cells marked for adaption in the graphics window (Figure 5.11: Cells
Marked for Adaption (p. 236)).

Figure 5.11: Cells Marked for Adaption

Extra

You can change the way Ansys Fluent displays cells marked for adaption (Figure 5.12: Al-
ternative Display of Cells Marked for Adaption (p. 238)) by performing the following steps:

i. Click Display Options... in the Manual Mesh Adaption dialog box to open the
Display Options - Adaption dialog box.

ii. Enable Draw Mesh in the Options group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The Mesh Display dialog box will open.

iii. Ensure that only the Edges option is enabled in the Options group box.

iv. Select All from the Edge Type list.

v. Select all of the items except z=0_outlet from the Surfaces selection list.

vi. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

vii. Click OK to close the Display Options - Adaption dialog box.

viii.Click Display in the Manual Mesh Adaption dialog box.

ix. Rotate the view and zoom in to get the display shown in Figure 5.12: Alternative
Display of Cells Marked for Adaption (p. 238).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 237
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Figure 5.12: Alternative Display of Cells Marked for Adaption

x. After viewing the marked cells, rotate the view back and zoom out again.

xi. Click Close to close the Manual Mesh Adaption dialog box.

3. Display the adapted mesh (Figure 5.13: The Adapted Mesh (p. 240)).

Domain → Mesh → Display...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Disable Faces in the Options group box.

b. Select All from the Edge Type list.

c. Deselect all of the highlighted items from the Surfaces selection list except for symmetry-
xyplane.

Tip:

To deselect all surfaces, click the Deselect All Shown button ( ) at the top of
the Surfaces selection list. Then select the desired surface from the Surfaces selec-
tion list.

d. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 239
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

Figure 5.13: The Adapted Mesh

4. Request an additional 150 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation → Calculate

The solution will converge as shown in Figure 5.14: The Complete Residual History (p. 241) and Fig-
ure 5.15: Convergence History of Mass-Weighted Average Temperature (p. 241).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 5.14: The Complete Residual History

Figure 5.15: Convergence History of Mass-Weighted Average Temperature

5. Save the case and data files for the solution with an adapted mesh (elbow2.cas.h5 and el-
bow2.dat.h5).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 241
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

File → Write → Case & Data...

a. Enter elbow2.cas.h5 for Case/Data File.

b. Click OK to save the files and close the Select File dialog box.

The files elbow2.cas.h5 and elbow2.dat.h5 will be saved in your default folder.

6. Display the temperature distribution (using node values) on the revised mesh using the temper-
ature contours definition that you created earlier (Figure 5.16: Filled Contours of Temperature Using
the Adapted Mesh (p. 242)).

Right-click the Results/Graphics/Contours/contour-temp tree item and select Display from the
menu that opens.

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-temp Display

Figure 5.16: Filled Contours of Temperature Using the Adapted Mesh

7. Display and save an XY plot of the temperature profile across the centerline of the outlet for the
adapted solution (Figure 5.17: Outlet Temperature Profile for the Adapted Coupled Solver Solu-
tion (p. 243)).

Results → Plots → XY Plot → xy-outlet-temp Edit...

a. Click Save/Plot to display the XY plot.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 5.17: Outlet Temperature Profile for the Adapted Coupled Solver Solution

b. Enable Write to File in the Options group box.

The button that was originally labeled Save/Plot will change to Write....

c. Click Write....

i. In the Select File dialog box, enter outlet_temp2.xy for XY File.

ii. Click OK to save the temperature data.

d. Close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

8. Display the outlet temperature profiles for both solutions on a single plot (Figure 5.18: Outlet
Temperature Profiles for the Two Solutions (p. 245)).

a. Open the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Results → Plots → Data Sources...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 243
Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow

b. Click the Load File... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Select outlet_temp1.xy and outlet_temp2.xy.

Each of these files will be listed with their folder path in the bottom list to indicate that they
have been selected.

Tip:

If you select a file by mistake, simply click the file in the bottom list and
then click Remove.

ii. Click OK to save the files and close the Select File dialog box.

c. Select the folder path ending in outlet_temp1.xy from the Curve Information selection list
(Curves group box).

d. Enter Before Adaption in the lower-right text-entry box.

e. Click the Change Legend Entry button.

The item in the Legend Entries list for outlet_temp1.xy will be changed to Before Adaption. This
legend entry will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the XY plot generated in a later step.

f. In a similar manner, change the legend entry for the folder path ending in outlet_temp2.xy
to be Adapted Mesh.

g. Click Plot and close the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Figure 5.18: Outlet Temperature Profiles for the Two Solutions (p. 245) shows the two temperature profiles
at the centerline of the outlet. It is apparent by comparing both the shape of the profiles and the pre-
dicted outer wall temperature that the solution is highly dependent on the mesh and solution options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Specifically, further mesh adaption should be used in order to obtain a solution that is independent
of the mesh.

Figure 5.18: Outlet Temperature Profiles for the Two Solutions

5.5. Summary
A comparison of the convergence speed for the SIMPLE and Coupled pressure-velocity coupling schemes
indicates that the latter converges much faster. With more complex meshes, the difference in speed
between the two schemes can be significant.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 245
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 6: Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
6.1. Introduction
6.2. Prerequisites
6.3. Problem Description
6.4. Setup and Solution
6.5. Summary

6.1. Introduction
This tutorial illustrates the setup and solution of a three-dimensional turbulent fluid flow in a manifold
exhaust system. The manifold configuration is encountered in the automotive industry. It is often im-
portant to predict the flow field in the area of the mixing region in order to properly design the junction.
You will use the Fault-tolerant Meshing guided workflow, which unlike the watertight workflow used
in Fluid Flow in an Exhaust Manifold (p. 1), is appropriate for geometries with imperfections, such as
gaps and leakages.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following in Ansys Fluent:

• Use the Fault-tolerant Meshing guided workflow to:

– Import a CAD geometry and manage individual parts

– Generate a surface mesh

– Cap inlets and outlets

– Extract a fluid region

– Define leakages

– Extract edge features

– Setup size controls

– Generate a volume mesh

• Set up appropriate physics and boundary conditions.

• Calculate a solution.

• Review the results of the simulation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 247
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing the solution results
for a turbulent flow within a manifold:

6.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

6.3. Problem Description

The manifold modeled here is shown in Figure 6.1: Exhaust System Geometry for Flow Modeling (p. 248).
Air flows through the three inlets with a uniform velocity of 1 m/s, and then exits through the outlet.

Figure 6.1: Exhaust System Geometry for Flow Modeling

A small pipe is placed in the main portion of the manifold where edge extraction will be considered.
There is also a known small leakage included that will be addressed in the meshing portion of the tu-
torial to demonstrate the automatic leakage detection aspects of the meshing workflow.

6.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
6.4.1. Preparation
6.4.2. Geometry and Mesh
6.4.3. General Settings

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

6.4.4. Solver Settings

6.4.5. Models
6.4.6. Materials
6.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions
6.4.8. Boundary Conditions
6.4.9. Solution
6.4.10. Postprocessing

6.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the exhaust_system.zip file .

2. Unzip exhaust_system.zip to your working directory.

The CAD file exhaust_system.fmd can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Enable Double Precision under Options.

6. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

6.4.2. Geometry and Mesh

In this step, we will use Ansys Fluent's guided workflow to import a CAD geometry, and perform
various enhancements so that we can generate a complete surface and volume mesh for a complete
CFD analysis.

1. Start the Fault-tolerant Meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Fault-tolerant Meshing workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 249
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow com-
pleting all tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow.

2. Import the CAD geometry (exhaust_system.fmd).

a. Select the Import CAD and Part Management task.

b. For CAD File, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(exhaust_system.fmd).

c. Perform some selective part management.

i. Select Custom for Create Meshing Objects.

Using the Custom option allows you load the CAD objects, and selectively pick and choose
which parts you want to include in your CFD simulation as meshing objects. Selecting the One
per part option would load the CAD geometry and automatically create meshing objects for
every part.

ii. For Display Unit, keep the default setting as mm.

iii. Click the Load button.

This will load the CAD file's content into the CAD Model tree below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note:

Items in the model trees that are checked indicate an object that is displayed
in the graphics window. Using the check boxes is not the same as selecting a
object in the tree to perform a particular operation.

Figure 6.2: Manifold CAD Geometry for Flow Modeling

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 251
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

iv. In the CAD Model tree, select the first part (main), hold the Shift button and select the
last part (object1), thereby selecting all of the parts.

You can also select the parts you require in the graphics window.

v. Holding down the left mouse button, drag the collection of parts and drop them onto the
Meshing Model tree.

The parts in the CAD Model tree will become grayed out and will appear in the Meshing
Model tree. If you make a mistake, you can right-click the appropriate node in the Meshing
Model tree, and select the Restore to Cad Model option from the context menu, and the parts
will be restored to the CAD Model tree.

Note:

You can also select objects in the graphics window and add them to the tree.

Make sure that you select the check box for the top-level node in the Meshing Model tree to
view all of the parts of the meshing model in the graphics window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click Create Meshing Objects at the bottom of the task.

This will update the task, create meshing objects with the designated properties based on the se-
lected portions of the CAD model. This will also display the geometry in the graphics window, and
allow you to proceed onto the next task in the workflow.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

3. Provide a description for the geometry and the flow characteristics.

a. In the Describe Geometry and Flow task, you are prompted for more information about the
geometry and flow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 253
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

b. Select Internal flow through the object for the Flow Type.

c. Enable Advanced Options to expose additional options that are required for this task.

Many workflow tasks have advanced options that you may want to inspect before updating a task.

d. Select Yes for the Extract edge features? prompt.

This particular geometry has a few areas that will require special feature extraction treatment.

e. Click Describe Geometry and Flow to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

4. Cover any openings in your geometry.

Select the Enclose Fluid Regions (Capping) task, where you can cover, or cap, any openings in
your geometry in order to later extract the enclosed fluid region.

a. Create a cap for one of the inlets.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. In the Name field, enter inlet_1 for the name of the capping surface to be applied
to one of the manifold's inlets.

ii. For the Zone Type field, choose velocity-inlet.

iii. For the Select By field, choose zone.

iv. In the list of zones, select inlet.1 as the opening that you want to cover.

For occasions when the list of items is long, you can use the Filter Text option and use
an expression such as in* to show only items starting with "in". Alternatively, you can
use the Use Wildcard option to list and pres-select matching items. See Filtering Lists and
Using Wildcards for more information.

The graphics window indicates the selected item.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 255
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

v. Click Create Cap(s) to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

Once completed, this particular task will return you to a fresh task in order to assign
additional capping surfaces, if necessary. We will proceed to assign a cap for the re-
maining openings.

b. Repeat the previous steps, creating a cap called inlet_2 for the inlet.2 zone, and another
cap called inlet_3 for the inlet zone.

This will cover all of the manifold's inlets.

Alternatively, you could also have selected all three inlet zones and created a single cap for all
three inlets.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Create a cap for the outlet.

i. In the Name field, enter outlet_1 for the name of the capping surface to be applied
to the manifold's outlet.

ii. For the Zone Type field, choose pressure-outlet.

iii. For the Select By field, specify zone.

iv. In the list of zones, select outlet for the outlet that you want to cover.

v. Click Create Cap(s) to complete this task.

Now, all of the openings in the geometry are covered.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 257
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

5. Extract edge features.

In the Extract Edge Features task, you can set various properties for the extraction of features
in your geometry.

In this tutorial, we will create a single extraction object to capture the features between the smaller
pipe and the main manifold.

Create a feature extraction object based on intersection loops between the smaller pipe and the
main manifold.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Keep the default Name as edge-group-1

ii. Select Intersection Loops for the Extraction Method Using field.

iii. Select main and flow_pipe in the Objects list.

iv. Keep the default Intersected By setting as collectively.

This will localize the feature extraction to the intersection of the small pipe (flow_pipe)
with the main manifold (main).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 259
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

v. Click Extract Edge Features to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Identify regions.

In the Identify Regions task, you can choose the various regions that you want to use in your
simulation.

In this tutorial, we will identify the internal fluid region as well as the external (void) region outside of
the geometry. The external void region will be useful in identifying any potential leakages from within
the fluid region to the outer domain.

a. Identify the fluid region.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. For the Identify any fluid or void region(s)? prompt, keep the default setting of yes.

ii. Keep the default Name as fluid-region-1

iii. Keep the default Define Location Using setting as Centroid of Objects.

iv. Keep the default Region Type setting as fluid.

v. Set the Select By setting to zone.

vi. Select main.1 in the list of zones.

vii. Click Identify Region.

Once completed, this particular task will return you to a fresh task in order to identify ad-
ditional regions, if necessary. We will proceed to identify a void region.

b. Identify the region outside the geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 261
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

i. Change the Region Type setting to void.

ii. Keep the default Name as void-region-1

iii. Keep the default Define Location Using setting as Centroid of Objects.

iv. Keep the default Select By setting as object.

v. Select main, inlet_1, inlet_2, and inlet_3 in the list of objects.

This will ensure that the void region is located properly based on the centroid of the selected
objects.

vi. Click Identify Region to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

7. Define thresholds for any potential leakages.

In the Define Leakage Threshold task, you can choose to define a threshold for when leakages
within your geometry can be identified and automatically patched.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Specify yes at the prompt to define a leakage threshold.

In the case of this tutorial, we know there is a potential leakage (a small opening in the main
manifold in the neck of the outlet) that we want to define a threshold.

b. Keep the default Name as leakage-1

c. Keep the default Select By: as identified region

d. Select void-region-1 from the Regions list.

e. Keep the default value of 6.4 mm for the Maximum Leakage Size.

f. Click Preview Leakages.

This will display a cut plane through the domain that you can adjust using the Leakage Plane
controls. Use the Location slider and the Orientation fields to identify any potential leakages with
the current settings.

g. Adjust the Location slider to a value of 30 mm.

h. Change the Orientation setting to Y.

Rotate the display and examine the mesh. Note that there are no leakages present.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 263
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

i. Click Define Leakage Threshold to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

8. Review your region settings.

a. In the Update Region Settings task, you can review and revise a table of settings for the
defined regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. For the Displayed Regions field, select Identified Regions, as a means of simplifying the
listing to only show previously identified regions.

c. For fluid-region-1, change the Volume Fill setting from hexcore to tet, since, for internal
flow, we are interested only in using tetrahedral cells.

To change the setting in the table, double-click the cell to expose the drop-down menu options.

d. Keep the Volume Fill setting for void-region-1 set to none.

This is done since we do not want to consider the void region, however, we want to use the Leakage
Size threshold of 6.4 mm to detect any leakages from the fluid region into the void region when
that threshold is exceeded.

e. Click Update Regions to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

9. Select options for controlling the mesh.

In the Choose Mesh Control Options task, you can determine how much control you want when
generating the mesh: either through size controls; and/or through boundary layer settings.

For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default settings in this task.

Click Choose Options.

This will create a Add Local Sizing task.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 265
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

a. For the Add Local Sizing task, keep the default size controls (default-curvature
and default-proximity) already populated with useful default settings.

10. Generate the surface mesh.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can customize how the surface mesh is created.

b. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings (calculate size fields, closing leakages, remeshing surfaces,
calculating regions, etc.) and proceed to generate a surface mesh for the manifold geometry. You
can visualize the surface mesh by selecting the Draw Mesh button at the bottom of the task, and
adjusting the clipping plane controls accordingly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

11. Confirm and update the boundaries.

a. Select the Update Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and confirm
and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the
correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 267
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

b. All the proposed boundaries are correct, so click Update Boundaries. and proceed to the next
task.

12. Add boundary layers.

For the Add Boundary Layers task, select yes at the prompt as to whether or not you want to
define boundary layer settings. In this task, you can define specific details for capturing the
boundary layer in and around your geometry.

i. Select Continuous from the Post Improvement Method list.

These default settings create a continuous boundary layer along the walls of the fluid region.

ii. Click Add Boundary Layers to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

13. Generate the volume mesh.

a. In the Generate the Volume Mesh task, you can customize how the volume mesh is created,
primarily defining the final skewness for the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Select the Enable Region Settings to view and edit volume fill settings, prior to actually
generating the fluid volume mesh.

c. Click Generate the Volume Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the manifold
geometry. Once complete, the mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is
automatically inserted with a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the
volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 269
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

14. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

15. Save the mesh file (exhaust_system.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

16. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a high-quality mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can
now switch to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

6.4.3. General Settings

In the Mesh group box of the Domain ribbon tab, set the units for length.

Domain → Mesh → Units...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

This opens the Set Units dialog box.

1. Select length under Quantities.

2. Select mm under Units.

3. Close the Set Units dialog box.

6.4.4. Solver Settings

In the Solver group box of the Physics ribbon tab, retain the default selection of the steady pressure-
based solver.

Physics → Solver

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 271
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

6.4.5. Models
1. Set up your models for the CFD simulation using the Models group box of the Physics ribbon
tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note:

You can also use the Models task page, which can be accessed from the tree by ex-
panding Setup and double-clicking the Models tree item.

2. Retain the default k-ω SST turbulence model.

You will use the default settings for the k-ω SST turbulence model, so you can enable it directly from
the tree by right-clicking the Viscous node and choosing SST k-omega from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Viscous Model → SST k-omega

6.4.6. Materials
Ordinarily, you would set up the materials for the CFD simulation using the Materials group box of
the Physics ribbon tab.

In this tutorial, we will keep the default fluid material of air.

6.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions

Ordinarily, you would set up the cell zone conditions for the CFD simulation using the Zones group
box of the Physics ribbon tab.

In this tutorial, we will keep the default assignment of air for the fluid zone.

6.4.8. Boundary Conditions

1. Set the velocity and turbulence boundary conditions for the first inlet (inlet-1).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet_1 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 273
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

a. Enter 1 m/s for Velocity Magnitude.

b. Keep the remaining default settings.

c. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Apply the same conditions for the other velocity inlet boundaries (inlet_2, and inlet_3).

3. Set the boundary conditions at the outlet (outlet-1).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet_1 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default setting of 0 for Gauge Pressure.

b. Keep the remaining default settings.

c. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

4. Retain the remaining default (wall and interior) boundary conditions.

6.4.9. Solution
1. Specify the discretization schemes.

In the Solution ribbon tab, click Methods... (Solution group box).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 275
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default settings for Solution Methods.

2. Monitor the mass flow rate at the inlets.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Flux Report → Mass Flow Rate...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 277
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

a. Enter mass-in for the Name of the report definition.

b. Ensure Mass Flow Rate is selected in the Options group box.

c. Select inlet_1, inlet_2, and inlet_3, from the Boundaries selection list.

d. Enable Report Plot and Print to Console in the Create group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Flux Report Definition dialog
box.

3. Monitor the total mass flow rate through the entire domain.

Perform the same procedure as described above, naming the report mass-tot, and selecting the
boundaries inlet_1, inlet_2, inlet_3, and outlet_1.

4. Monitor the mass balance.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Expression...

a. Enter mass-bal for the Name of the expression.

b. Select mass-tot from the Report Definitions drop-down list on the right.

c. Type the / operand.

d. Select mass-in from the Report Definitions drop-down list on the right.

e. Enable Report Plot and Print to Console in the Create group box.

f. Click OK to save the expression definition.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 279
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

5. Initialize the flow field using the Initialization group box of the Solution ribbon tab.

Solution → Initialization

a. Select Standard from the Method list.

b. Click Initialize.

6. Save the case file (exhaust_system.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

7. Start the calculation by requesting 100 iterations in the Solution ribbon tab (Run Calculation
group box).

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Enter 100 for No. of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate to begin the iterations.

As the solution progresses, the residuals history will be plotted in the Scaled Residuals tab
in the graphics window (Figure 6.3: Residuals (p. 281)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 6.3: Residuals

c. Similarly, the monitors will be plotted in their respective tabs in the graphics window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 281
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

Figure 6.4: Mass Balance History

The net mass imbalance is a small fraction (less than 0.5%) of the total mass flow rate through
the system, which indicates that the solution has converged.

8. Save the case and data files (exhaust_system.cas.h5 and exhaust_system.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

6.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Display path lines highlighting the flow field (Figure 6.5: Pathlines Through the Manifold (p. 284)).

Results → Graphics → Pathlines → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Keep the default of pathlines-1 for the Name.

b. Select Particle Variables... and Time from the Color by drop-down lists.

c. Enable Accuracy Control under Options.

d. Set the Path Skip value to 5.

e. Select inlet-1, inlet-2, and inlet-3 from the Release from Surfaces list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Pathlines dialog box.

The new pathlines-1 definition appears under the Results/Graphics/Pathlines tree branch. To
edit your surface definition, right-click it and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 283
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

Figure 6.5: Pathlines Through the Manifold

2. Create an iso-surface through the manifold geometry.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

a. Select Mesh... and X-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

b. Enter surf-x-coordinate for the Name.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Select fluid-region-1 from the From Zones list.

d. Click Compute.

e. Use the slider to locate the iso-surface in the middle of the geometry (approximately 380
mm).

f. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

The new surf-x-coordinate definition appears under the Results/Surfaces tree branch. To edit
your surface definition, right-click it and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

3. Create and define contours of velocity magnitude throughout the manifold along with the mesh.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-velocity for the Name.

b. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Select surf-x-coordinate from the Surfaces list.

d. Disable Node Values under Options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 285
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

e. Disable Global Range under Options.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 6.6: Contours of Velocity Magnitude Through the Manifold

4. Create a scene containing the mesh and the contours.

Results → Scene New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Keep the default scene-1 for the Name and Title.

b. Select contour-velocity under Graphical Objects.

c. Create a new mesh object to add to the scene.

i. Click New Object and select Mesh to open the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 287
Exhaust System: Fault-tolerant Meshing

ii. Select all of the surfaces under the Surfaces list, except the newly created surface.

iii. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

The new mesh-1 definition appears under the Results/Graphics/Mesh tree branch. The
new object also appears in the Scene dialog box.

d. In the Scene dialog box, set the Transparency to 90 for the mesh-1 graphical object.

e. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 6.7: Scene Containing the Mesh and Contours Throughout the Manifold

f. Save the case file (exhaust_system.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

6.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to import a faulty CAD geometry, add modifications and enhancements,
generate a volume mesh, and set up, solve, and postprocess a CFD problem involving air flow through
a exhaust system.

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing the solution results
for a turbulent flow within a manifold:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 289
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 7: Modeling Hypersonic Flow
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
7.1. Introduction
7.2. Prerequisites
7.3. Problem Description
7.4. Setup and Solution
7.5. Summary

7.1. Introduction
The purpose of this tutorial is to compute the flow around a re-entry capsule at hypersonic speed. The
simulated speed, trajectory, and ambient conditions are representative of such a vehicle as it passes
through the earth’s atmosphere at an altitude of approximately 50 [km].

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Creation of capsule mesh using Watertight Geometry workflow.

• Model hypersonic flow, using high-speed numerics, appropriate models for air properties, the two-
temperature model for energy to address thermal non-equilibrium, and the species model to address
the chemical non-equilibrium.

• Set boundary conditions for external aerodynamics.

• Use the k-ω SST turbulence model.

• Calculate a solution using the density-based coupled solver.

7.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Note:

Additional feature license is required to enable the use of this model. You need to have a
cfd_hsf license and the hsf library installed to use the two-temperature model. Please check
for availability in your installation and contact your Ansys representative to add the license
feature, if needed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 291
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

7.3. Problem Description

The problem considers the flow around a re-entry capsule at an angle of attack α=-25° and a free stream
Mach number of 17.0. The geometry of the capsule is shown in Figure 7.1: Problem Specification (p. 292),
which also shows the lift and drag directions for the given case. The flow around the capsule can be
assumed to be symmetric for this tutorial.

Figure 7.1: Problem Specification

7.4. Setup and Solution

In the tutorial setup, you will complete the following:

• Create a mesh on the re-entry capsule using the rapid meshing workflow.

• Setup, solve, and postprocess a steady-state non-reacting simulation using the density-based solver
with the Two-Temperature model.

• Increase the simulation complexity by modeling gas reactions using the Species model.

7.4.1. Preparation
7.4.2. Meshing Workflow
7.4.3. Mesh
7.4.4. Solver
7.4.5. Models
7.4.6. Materials
7.4.7. Operating Conditions
7.4.8. Boundary Conditions
7.4.9. Solution
7.4.10. Postprocessing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

7.4.11. Enable the Species Model

7.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the reentry_capsule.zip file .

2. Unzip reentry_capsule.zip to your working directory.

The Discovery CAD file CapsuleFlow.dsco can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Enable Double Precision under Options.

6. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

7.4.2. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 293
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. For more information, see Understanding Task States in the Fluent User's Guide).
All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow completing all
tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow. For more information, see
Customizing Workflows in the Fluent User's Guide.

2. Import the CAD geometry (CapsuleFlow.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. For Units, select m.

c. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(CapsuleFlow.dsco).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window and allow you to proceed
onto the next task in the workflow.

Figure 7.2: The Imported CAD Geometry for the Capsule

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 295
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

The capsule geometry has been enclosed in a suitable flow domain, which should provide distinct
regions of inflow and outflow for a range of angles of attack, and avoids having the bow shock
that forms in such flows from contacting the inflow surfaces..

Note:

Alternatively, the ... button next to File Name can be used to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

3. Add local sizing.

Local mesh sizing controls are added on the wall surfaces using face sizing, and in the flow volume
around the capsule using Bodies Of Influence (BOIs), in regions of flow of interest. Note that all
the mesh sizes, local and global, are coarser than would be typical for industrial use, in order to
ensure the mesh is not too large for tutorial purposes.

a. In the Add Local Sizing task, add local sizing controls to the faceted geometry by selecting
yes:

In this tutorial, we will add local sizing around the surfaces of the capsule, since they are areas
where we require a more refined mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. At the prompt for adding local sizing, select yes.

ii. Enter capsule for the Name of the size control.

iii. Specify 1.1 for the Growth Rate.

iv. Retain Face Size for the Size Control Type.

v. Specify 0.1 for the Target Mesh Size.

vi. Select Zone for the Select By.

vii. Select origin-capsule.

b. Click Add Local Sizing.

In the Add Local Sizing task, you can add more local sizing controls to the faceted geometry.
Two bodies included in the geometry model are used for this purpose: one frustum-shaped
body to refine the flow region around and just downstream in the wake of the capsule, and
a second, toroidal body running along the sharp corner at the outer radius of the capsule.

i. Select Body Of Influence for the Size Control Type.

ii. Retain the default boi_1 for the Name of the size control.

iii. Specify 1.1 for the Growth Rate.

iv. Specify 0.2 for the Target Mesh Size.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 297
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

v. Select Label for the Select By.

vi. Select capsuleflow-boi1.

c. Click Add Local Sizing.

The Add Local Sizing task can still be used to add more local sizing controls to the geometry.

i. Retain the default boi_2 for the Name of the size control.

ii. Specify 1.1 for the Growth Rate.

iii. Specify 0.05 for the Target Mesh Size.

iv. Select capsuleflow-boi2.

v. Click Add Local Sizing to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

With the local sizing set as described above, the global surface mesh sizing only defines the largest
elements on other surfaces, farther away from the capsule, on the inflow, outflow, and symmetry
surfaces.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Specify 0.1 for the Minimum Size.

c. Specify 1 for the Maximum Size.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

d. Specify 1.1 for the Growth Rate.

e. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Describe the geometry.

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 299
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Select The geometry consists of only fluid regions with no voids option under Geo-
metry Type, since this model contains only the fluid region.

b. Keep the rest of the default settings for this task.

c. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Confirm and update the boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Update Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and confirm
and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the
correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

b. Select pressure-far-field for the inflow boundary.

c. Select pressure-outlet for the outflow boundary.

d. Select symmetry for the sym boundary.

e. All the proposed boundaries are correct, click Update Boundaries and proceed to the next
task.

7. Update your regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 301
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review and change the tabulated names and
types of the various regions that have been generated from your imported geometry and
change them as needed.

We can see that the only defined region is the fluid region.

b. The proposed region type is correct, so click Update Regions to update your settings.

8. Add boundary layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

For the Add Boundary Layers task, ensure yes is selected at the prompt as to define boundary
layer settings. In this task, you can define specific details for capturing the boundary layer in
and around your geometry.

b. Select last-ratio for the Offset Method Type.

c. Retain the default last_ratio_1 for the Name of the size control.

d. Specify 30 for Number of Layers.

Many boundary layers are desired to model a well resolved flow near the wall.

e. Specify 1 for Transition Ratio.

f. Specify 0.001 for First Height.

g. Click Add Boundary Layers.

9. Generating the volume mesh.

With the local sizing set as described above, including bodies of influence, the global volume
mesh sizing only defines the largest elements in the flow domain. In this case, the maximum is
set to be consistent with the specified global surface mesh sizing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 303
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, to set properties of the volume mesh.

b. Select the polyhedra for Fill With.

c. Specify 1.1 for Growth Rate.

d. Specify 1 for Max Cell Length.

e. Retain the default selection of Enable Parallel Meshing.

f. Click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the geometry..
The mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is automatically inserted with
a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

10. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

11. Save the mesh file (CapsuleFlow.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

12. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can now switch
to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation. Note that to obtain more accurate
solutions a higher quality mesh should be used.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

7.4.3. Mesh
1. To examine the cells of the mesh around the capsule display the mesh with edges and faces en-
abled and the far-field boundary disabled.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 305
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Enable Edges in the Options group box.

b. Ensure All is selected in the Edge Type group box.

c. Select capsule and sym from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

e. Zoom in on the region around the capsule, as shown.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 7.3: View of the Mesh Around the Capsule

The cells near the surface have a relativlely higher resolution and high aspect ratios, to account for
the flow around the capsule.

7.4.4. Solver
1. Set the solver settings.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 307
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Select Density-Based from the Type group box.

7.4.5. Models
1. Select to solve the Energy Equation and with it the Two-Temperature Model option. In the two-
temperature model, one temperature is representative of the translational and rotational energy
of the air molecules, and the other of their vibrational and electronic energy. Accounting for this
thermal non-equilibrium is important for accurate simulations of hypersonic flows, most importantly
in the predictions of surface heat transfer and temperatures.

Setup → Models → Energy Edit...

a. Select the Two-Temperature Model in the Energy Modes group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Click OK to close the Energy dialog box.

2. Retain the default k-ω SST turbulence model.

You will use the default settings for the k-ω SST turbulence model, so you can enable it directly from
the tree by right-clicking the Viscous node and choosing SST k-omega from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Viscous Model → SST k-omega

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 309
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Ensure that Compressibilty Effects is selected in the Options group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Click OK to close the Viscous model dialog box.

7.4.6. Materials
The default Fluid Material is air, which is the working fluid in this problem. For hypersonic flows it is im-
portant to account for compressibility and variations of the thermophysical properties with temperature.
This is done automatically when selecting to use the two-temperature model, to ensure that appropriate
properties are used.

1. Set the properties for air, the default fluid material.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air Edit...

Retain the default properties for air that are set automatically in conjunction with the selection
of the Two-temperature Model:

a. ideal-gas for Density.

b. Select Boltzmann-kinetic-theory for Specific Heat.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 311
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

c. eucken-relation for Thermal Conductivity.

d. blottner-curve-fit for Viscosity.

e. Click the Change/Create button to save your change.

f. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

7.4.7. Operating Conditions

1. Set the operating pressure.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Operating Conditions...

The Operating Conditions dialog box can also be accessed from the Cell Zone Conditions task page.

a. Enter 0 Pa for Operating Pressure.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

For information about setting the operating pressure, see the Fluent User's Guide.

7.4.8. Boundary Conditions

Set the momentum and energy boundary conditions.

1. Set the boundary conditions for far-field boundary.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inflow Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 25 Pa for Gauge Pressure.

b. Enter 17 for Mach Number.

c. Enter 0.90630778 and -0.42261826 for the X-Component of Flow Direction and Y-
Component of Flow Direction, respectively.

These values are determined by the -25° angle of attack: cos -25°= 0.90630778 and sin -25° = -
0.42261826.

d. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in the
Turbulence group box.

e. Enter a value of 1% for Turbulent Intensity and 1 for Turbulent Viscosity Ratio.

f. Click the Thermal tab and enter 250 K for Temperature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 313
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

g. Click Apply and close the Pressure Far-Field dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for the outflow boundary.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → outlet → outflow Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 25 Pa for Gauge Pressure.

b. Select Average Pressure Specification.

c. Select Weak for the Averaging Method.

d. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in the
Turbulence group box.

e. Retain the default value of 1% for Turbulent Intensity and 1 for Turbulent Viscosity Ratio.

f. Click the Thermal tab and enter 250 K for Temperature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 315
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

g. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for capsule wall.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → capsule Edit...

a. Click the Thermal tab and enter 1500 K for Temperature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

7.4.9. Solution
1. Turn on high speed numerics in the TUI.

a. Press Enter in the console to get the command prompt (>).

b. Enter the text commands as shown in the box:

/solve/set/high-speed-numerics enable y
Enabling adaptive high-speed numerics for all Mach.
Reducing AMG termination criterion for flow (<0.01)
Activating divergence prevention
Activating limiter filter
Activating high-speed numerics

c. Enter the text commands as shown in the box:

/solve/set/cafsm y 100

2. Set the solution method parameters.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 317
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Retain the default Implicit for the Formulation drop-down list.

b. Select AUSM (Advection Upstream Splitting Method) from the Flux Type drop-down list.

c. Select Green-Gauss Node Based from the Gradient drop-down list in the Spatial Discretiza-
tion group box.

d. Select Second Order Upwind for Flow and Two-Temperature Model in the Spatial Discret-
ization group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Select First Order Upwind for Turbulent Kinetic Energy and Specific Dissipation Rate in
the Spatial Discretization group box.

f. Select Warped-Face Gradient Correction.

g. Select Higher Order Term Relaxation.

h. Select Convergence Acceleration For Stretched Meshes.

3. Set the solution control parameters.

Solution → Solution → Controls...

a. Click Limits... to open the Solution Limits dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 319
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

b. Enter 20000 for the Maximum Static Temperature.

c. Click OK to close the Solution Limits dialog box.

4. Create a force report definition to plot and write the drag force on the capsule

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Force Report → Drag...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter drag-force for Name.

b. Select Drag Force in the Report Output Type group box.

c. Enter 0.9063078 for X and -0.4226183 for Y in the Force Vector group box.

d. Select capsule in the Zones selection list.

e. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

f. Click OK to close the Drag Report Definition dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 321
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

5. Similarly, create a force report definition for the lift force on the capsule.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Force Report → Lift...

a. Enter lift-force for Name.

b. Select Lift Force in the Report Output Type group box.

c. Enter 0.4226183 for X and 0.9063078 for Y in the Force Vector group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Select capsule in the Zones selection list.

e. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

f. Click OK to close the Lift Report Definition dialog box.

6. Create a flux report definition for the total heat transfer on the capsule

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Flux Report → Total Heat Transfer Rate...

a. Enter heat-flux for Name.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 323
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

b. Select capsule in the Zones selection list.

c. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

d. Click OK to close the Flux Report Definition dialog box.

7. Enable residual plotting during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Select Show Advanced Options to open the panel.

b. Select Scale and Compute Local Scale in the Residual Values group box.

c. Select local scaling from the Reporting Option drop down list.

d. Select Absolute under Convergence Criterion.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box and click OK to close the Residual
Monitors dialog box.

8. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

a. Select Standard Initialization from the Initialization Methods group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 325
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

b. Select Inflow from the Compute From drop down list.

c. Click Initialize to initialize the solution.

d. Run the Full Multigrid (FMG) initialization.

FMG initialization often facilitates an easier start-up of a calculation, especially for hypersonic flows
in which extremely strong variations and gradients are present, and the initialized solution must
adapt to reflect the given boundary conditions. Use of FMG initialization usually minimizes the
need for users to take other measures at start-up, such as gradually ramping up the CFL (Courant
Friedrichs Lewy) number, thereby reducing the number of iterations for convergence.

i. Press Enter in the console to get the command prompt (>).

ii. Enter the text commands and input responses as shown in the boxes. Accept the default
values by pressing Enter when no input response is given:

solve/initialize/set-fmg-initialization

Customize your FMG initialization:

set the number of multigrid levels [5] 3

set FMG parameters on levels ..

residual reduction on level 1 is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 1 is: [100] 200

residual reduction on level 2 is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 2 is: [200] 400

residual reduction on level 3 [coarsest grid] is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 3 is: [400] 1000

Number of FMG (and FAS geometric multigrid) levels: 3

* FMG customization summary:
* residual reduction on level 0 [finest grid] is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 0 is: 1
* residual reduction on level 1 is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 1 is: 200
* residual reduction on level 2 is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 2 is: 400
* residual reduction on level 3 [coarsest grid] is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 3 is: 1000
* FMG customization complete
set FMG courant-number [0.75] 0.25
enable FMG verbose? [yes]

solve/initialize/fmg-initialization
Enable FMG initialization? [no] yes

Note:

Whenever FMG initialization is performed, it is important to inspect the FMG initialized

flow field using the postprocessing tools of Ansys Fluent. Monitoring the normalized
residuals, which are plotted in the console window, will give you an idea of the conver-
gence of the FMG solver. You should notice that the value of the normalized residuals

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

decreases. For more information about FMG initialization, including convergence

strategies, see the Fluent User's Guide.

9. Save the case files (CapsuleFlow.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

10. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 500 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

11. Save the case and data files (CapsuleFlow.cas.h5 and CapsuleFlow.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

7.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Plot the Mach number distribution on the symmetry plane. This is one way to get an overall picture
of the flow field and important flow features, such as the detached bow shock ahead of the capsule,
flow expansion around its outer edge, and the wake behind the capsule.

a. View → Display → Views..

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 327
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

i. Click Read and select the view file CapsuleFlow.vw.

ii. Select CapsuleFlow.vw from the Views selection list.

iii. Click Apply and close the Views dialog box.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-mach-sym for Contour Name.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

c. Select Velocity... and Mach Number from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select sym from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Select Draw Mesh.

f. On the Mesh Display dialog box that opens, select capsule from the Surfaces selection
list.

g. Select Edges from the Options group box.

h. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

i. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

2. Plot the total surface heat flux distribution on the capsule surface. The heat flux distribution on
the surfaces shows which parts of the capsule are predicted to experience the greatest thermal
load and hence would need to be correspondingly protected thermally. Keep in mind that, by
convention, the heat flux out of the flow solution domain is negative, so the largest thermal loads
have a negative sign.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-heat-flux for Contour Name.

b. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

c. Select Wall Fluxes... and Total Surface Heat Flux from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select capsule from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Save/Display.

f. Change the light orientation to better visulaize the capsule surface. View →
Graphics → Lights...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 329
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

g. Enter -1 for X in the Direction. group box

h. Click Apply and close the Lights dialog box.

i. Close the Contours dialog box.

j.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3. Plot the total surface heat flux distribution on the capsule surface.centerline.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-surface...

a. Enter capsule-centerline for New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Z-coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Enter 0 for Iso-Values.

d. Select capsule from the From Surfaces drop-down list.

e. Select fluid from the From Zones selection list.

f. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

g. Plot the heat flux along the capsule centerline. Results → Plots → XY Plot → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 331
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

i. Enter heat-flux-capsule-centerline for Contour Name.

ii. Select Wall Fluxes... and Total Surface Heat Flux from the Y Axis Function drop-
down lists.

iii. Select capsule-centerline from the Surfaces selection list.

iv. Enable Write to File in the Options group box to save the radial velocity profile.

v. Click the Write... button to open the Select File dialog box.

A. Enter heat-flux-capsule-centerline.xy in the XY File text entry box

and click OK.

Be sure to double check the location where the files are being saved to ensure they will
be saved where you intend.

vi. Close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Plot the ratio of the Translational-Rotation Temperature to Vibrational-Electronic Temperature on

the symmetry plane. This gives an indication of regions of thermal non-equilibrium in the flow,
which can are accounted for with the two-temperature model.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-ttr-tve for Contour Name.

b. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

c. Select Two-Temperature-Model... and Translational-Rotational over Vibrational-

Electronic Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select sym from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

f. View → Display → Views..

i. Select CapsuleFlow.vw from the Views selection list.

ii. Click Apply and close the Views dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 333
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

5. Another way to examine the thermal non-equilibrium is to define a line through the shock to the
surface of the capsule, along which to plot the two temperatures. We will define the line to be
approximately along a line representing the stagnation line, parallel to the trajectory of the capsule.

Results → Surface → Create → Line/Rake...

a. Enter stagnation-line for New Surface Name.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enter the values for x0, x1, y0, y1, z0, and z1 as follows:

End Points Value

x0 0.949
y0 0.97
z0 0
x1 1.855
y1 0.547
z1 0

c. Click Create and close the Line/Rake Surface dialog box.

6. Plot the Translational-Rotational Temperature and the Vibrational-Electronic Temperature on the

approximate stagnation line.

Results → Plots → XY Plot → New...

a. Enter ttr-stag-line for XY Plot Name.

b. Select Two Temperature Model... and Translational-Rotational Temperature from the Y

Axis Function drop-down lists.

c. Select stagnation-line from the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 335
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

d. Enable Write to File in the Options group box to save the translational-rotational temperature
profile.

e. Click the Write... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Enter ttr-stag-line.xy in the XY File text entry box and click OK.

Be sure to double check the location where the files are being saved to ensure they will be saved
where you intend.

f. Similarly write an xy plot file for the Vibrational-Electronic Temperature along the stagnation-
line named tve-stag-line.xy.

g. Close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

7. Compare the Translational-Rotational Temperature and the Vibrational-Electronic Temperature on

the approximate stagnation line.

a. Open the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Results → Plots → Data Sources...

b. Click the Load File... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Select ttr-stag-line.xy and tve-stag-line.xy.

ii. Click OK to save the files and close the Select File dialog box.

c. Select the folder path ending in ttr-stag-line.xy from the Curve Information selection list
(Curves group box).

d. Enter Translational-Rotational in the lower-right text-entry box.

e. Click the Change Legend Entry button.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The item in the Legend Entries list for ttr-stag-line.xy will be changed to Translational-Rotational.
This legend entry will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the XY plot generated in a later step.

f. In a similar manner, change the legend entry for the folder path ending in tve-stag-line.xy
to be Vibrational-Electronic.

g. Enter Ttr & Tve Temperature for the Title and Legend Label.

h. Click Axes... and set the Precision to 2 and close the Axes - Plot Data Sources dialogue box.

i. Click Plot and close the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

8. Save the case file (CapsuleFlow.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

7.4.11. Enable the Species Model

So far, you have applied the two-temperature model to address the non-equilibrium in the species’
internal energy modes. In high-speed flows, chemical reactions occur when kinetic energy is transferred
to chemical energy through shock waves. The flow can be in chemical non-equilibrium when the
chemical reaction time scale is in the same order as the flow time scale. This chemical non-equilibrium
can be modeled using the Species model in Ansys Fluent.

Fluent has various built-in air mixtures that can be selected based on the flow field temperature. In
this tutorial, you will use the air-5species-park93 mixture since ionization effects are negligible due
to the moderate temperature. For more information about modelling hypersonic flows using the
species model, see Modeling Non-Equilibrium Gas Dissociation Using Finite Rate Chemistry in the
Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 337
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

1. Turn on the species model to address the chemical non-equilibrium in hypersonic flows.

Physics → Models → Species...

a. Select Species Transport in the Model list.

b. Select air-5species-park93 from the Mixture Material drop-down list.

c. Enable Volumetric in the Reactions group box.

d. Click OK to close the Species Model dialog box.

The imported mixture air-5species-park93 defines 5 species N2, O2, NO, N, O and Park93 reaction
mechanism.

2. a. Set the properties for the mixture materials.

Setup → Materials → Mixture → air-5species-park93 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Retain the default properties for air-5species-park93 that are set automatically in
conjunction with the selection of the Two-temperature Model.

ii. Click Change/Create to accept the material property settings.

iii. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

3. a. Set the boundary conditions for far-field boundary.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inflow Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 339
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

i. Click the Species tab and enter 0.233 for o2.

ii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Far-Field dialog box.

b. Set the boundary conditions for the outflow boundary.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → outlet → outflow Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Click the Species tab and enter 0.233 for o2.

ii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

4. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 341
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Select Standard Initialization from the Initialization Methods group box.

b. Select Inflow from the Compute From drop down list.

c. Click Initialize to initialize the solution.

d. Run the Full Multigrid (FMG) initialization.

FMG initialization often facilitates an easier start-up of a calculation, especially for hypersonic flows
in which extremely strong variations and gradients are present, and the initialized solution must

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

adapt to reflect the given boundary conditions. Use of FMG initialization usually minimizes the
need for users to take other measures at start-up, such as gradually ramping up the CFL (Courant
Friedrichs Lewy) number, thereby reducing the number of iterations for convergence.

i. Press Enter in the console to get the command prompt (>).

ii. Enter the text commands and input responses as shown in the boxes. Accept the default
values by pressing Enter when no input response is given:

solve/initialize/set-fmg-options/viscous-terms?y
solve/initialize/set-fmg-options/species-reactions?y
solve/initialize/set-fmg-initialization
Customize your FMG initialization:
set the number of multigrid levels [3]

set FMG parameters on levels ..

residual reduction on level 1 is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 1 is: [200] 200

residual reduction on level 2 is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 2 is: [400] 400

residual reduction on level 3 [coarsest grid] is: [0.001]

number of cycles on level 3 is: [1000] 1000

Number of FMG (and FAS geometric multigrid) levels: 3

* FMG customization summary:
* residual reduction on level 0 [finest grid] is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 0 is: 1
* residual reduction on level 1 is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 1 is: 200
* residual reduction on level 2 is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 2 is: 400
* residual reduction on level 3 [coarsest grid] is: 0.001
* number of cycles on level 3 is: 1000
* FMG customization complete
set FMG courant-number [0.25]
enable FMG verbose? [yes] yes

solve/initialize/fmg-initialization
Enable FMG initialization? [no] yes

5. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 900 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

6. Plot the mass fraction of n on the symmetry plane. This gives an indication of regions of chemical
non-equilibrium in the flow, which can be accounted for with the species model.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 343
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

a. Enter contour-n for Contour Name.

b. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

c. Select Species... and Mass Fraction of n from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select sym and capsule from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

f. View → Display → Views..

i. Select CapsuleFlow.vw from the Views selection list.

ii. Click Apply and close the Views dialog box.

7. Plot the Translational-Rotational Temperature on the approximate stagnation line.

Results → Plots → XY Plot → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter ttr-stag-line-reacting for XY Plot Name.

b. Select Two Temperature Model... and Translational-Rotational Temperature from the Y

Axis Function drop-down lists.

c. Select stagnation-line from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Save/Plot.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 345
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

e. Enable Write to File from the Options selection list.

f. Click the Write... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Enter ttr-stag-line-reacting.xy in the XY File text entry box and click OK.

Be sure to double check the location where the files are being saved to ensure they will be saved
where you intend.

ii. Close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

8. Compare the translational-rotational temperature on the approximate stagnation line between

the non-reacting and reacting conditions. This shows the effects of chemical reactions on the
temperature.

a. Open the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Results → Plots → Data Sources...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Click the Load File... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Select ttr-stag-line.xy and ttr-stag-line-reacting.xy.

ii. Click OK to save the files and close the Select File dialog box.

c. Select the folder path ending in ttr-stag-line.xy from the Curve Information selection list
(Curves group box).

d. Enter non-reacting in the lower-right text-entry box.

e. Click the Change Legend Entry button.

f. In a similar manner, change the legend entry for the folder path ending in ttr-stag-line-react-
ing.xy to be reacting.

g. Enter Ttr Temperature for the Title and Legend Label.

h. Click Plot and close the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

You can see that the reacting condition predicts a shorter shock standoff distance and a lower
peak temperature than the non-reacting condition since chemical reactions absorb heat, change
the thermodynamic states behind the shock, and alter the temperature profile.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 347
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

9. Plot the total surface heat flux distribution on the capsule surface.centerline.

Results → Plots → XY Plot → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter heat-flux-capsule-centerline-reacting for Contour Name.

b. Select Wall Fluxes... and Total Surface Heat Flux from the Y Axis Function drop-down lists.

c. Select capsule-centerline from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Save/Plot.

e. Enable Write to File in the Options group box to save the radial velocity profile.

f. Click the Write... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Enter heat-flux-capsule-centerline-reacting.xy in the XY File text entry

box and click OK.

Be sure to double check the location where the files are being saved to ensure they will be saved
where you intend.

g. Close the Solution XY Plot dialog box.

10. 10. Compare the total surface heat flux on the capsule centerline between the non-reacting and
reacting conditions. The comparison shows the effects of chemical reactions on the surface heat
flux.

a. Open the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Results → Plots → Data Sources...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 349
Modeling Hypersonic Flow

b. Click the Load File... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Select heat-flux-capsule-centerline.xy and heat-flux-capsule-centerline-reacting.xy.

ii. Click OK to save the files and close the Select File dialog box.

c. Select the folder path ending in heat-flux-capsule-centerline.xy from the Curve Information
selection list (Curves group box).

d. Enter non-reacting in the lower-right text-entry box.

e. Click the Change Legend Entry button.

f. In a similar manner, change the legend entry for the folder path ending in heat-flux-capsule-
centerline-reacting.xy to be reacting.

g. Enter Total Surface Heat Flux for the Title and Legend Label.

h. Click Plot and close the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

You can see that the reacting condition predicts a lower surface heat flux than the non-reacting
condition since chemical dissociation reactions absorb the thermal energy and reduces the
temperature in the shock layer.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

7.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated how to set up and solve the hypersonic flow around a re-entry capsule as
it passes through the upper atmosphere.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 351
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 8: Modeling Transient Compressible Flow
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
8.1. Introduction
8.2. Prerequisites
8.3. Problem Description
8.4. Setup and Solution
8.5. Summary

8.1. Introduction
In this tutorial, Ansys Fluent’s density-based implicit solver is used to predict the time-dependent flow
through a two-dimensional nozzle. As an initial condition for the transient problem, a steady-state
solution is generated to provide the initial values for the mass flow rate at the nozzle exit.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Calculate a steady-state solution (using the density-based implicit solver) as an initial condition for a
transient flow prediction.

• Define a transient boundary condition using an expression.

• Use automatic mesh adaption for both steady-state and transient flows.

• Calculate a transient solution using the second-order implicit transient formulation and the density-
based implicit solver.

8.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

8.3. Problem Description

The geometry to be considered in this tutorial is shown in Figure 8.1: Problem Specification (p. 354).
Flow through a simple nozzle is simulated as a 3D model. The nozzle has an inlet height of 0.2 m, and
the nozzle contours have a sinusoidal shape that produces a 20% reduction in flow area. Symmetry allows
only half of the nozzle to be modeled.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 353
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

Figure 8.1: Problem Specification

8.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
8.4.1. Preparation
8.4.2. Meshing Workflow
8.4.3. Set Units
8.4.4. Solution
8.4.5. Models
8.4.6. Materials
8.4.7. Operating Conditions
8.4.8. Boundary Conditions
8.4.9. Solution: Steady Flow
8.4.10. Enabling Time Dependence and Setting Transient Conditions
8.4.11. Specifying Solution Parameters for Transient Flow and Solving

8.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the transient_compressible.zip file .

2. Unzip transient_compressible.zip to your working directory.

The geometry file nozzle.dsco can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Disable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

8.4.2. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. For more information, see Understanding Task States in the Fluent User's Guide).
All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow completing all
tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow. For more information, see
Customizing Workflows in the Fluent User's Guide.

2. Import the CAD geometry (nozzle.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 355
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

b. For Units, select mm.

c. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(nozzle.dsco).

d. Click Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window and allow you to proceed
onto the next task in the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 8.2: The Imported CAD Geometry for the Nozzle

Note:

Alternatively, the ... button next to File Name can be used to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

3. In the Add Local Sizing task, retain the default no and click Update to complete this task and
proceed to the next task in the workflow.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

With the local sizing set as described above, the global surface mesh sizing only defines the largest
elements on other surfaces.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 357
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

b. Specify 2 for the Minimum Size.

c. Specify 30 for the Maximum Size.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

d. Specify 1.2 for the Growth Rate.

e. Select Curvature option under Size Functions.

f. Specify 18 for the Curvature Normal Angle.

g. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Describe the geometry.

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
358 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select The geometry consists of only fluid regions with no voids option under Geo-
metry Type, since this model contains only the fluid region.

b. Keep the rest of the default settings for this task.

c. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Confirm and update the boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 359
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Select the Update Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and confirm
and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the
correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

b. Select pressure-inlet for the inlet boundary type.

c. Click Update Boundaries and proceed to the next task.

7. Update your regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
360 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review and change the tabulated names and
types of the various regions that have been generated from your imported geometry and
change them as needed.

b. The proposed region type is correct, so click Update Regions to update your settings.

8. Add boundary layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 361
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

For the Add Boundary Layers task, ensure yes is selected at the prompt as to define boundary
layer settings. In this task, you can define specific details for capturing the boundary layer in
and around your geometry.

b. Specify 8 for the Number of Layers.

c. Specify 0.35 for the Transition Ratio.

d. Click Add Boundary Layers.

9. Generating the volume mesh.

With the local sizing set as described above, including bodies of influence, the global volume
mesh sizing only defines the largest elements in the flow domain. In this case, the maximum is
set to be consistent with the specified global surface mesh sizing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
362 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, to set properties of the volume mesh.

b. Select the poly-hexcore for Fill With.

c. Specify 1 for Buffer Layers.

d. Specify 0 for Peel Layers.

e. Specify 5 for the Min Cell Length.

f. Specify 20 for the Max Cell Length.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

g. Expand the Advanced Options task, to set properties of the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 363
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

h. Specify yes for Avoid 1/8 octree transtion?.

i. Click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the geometry..
The mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is automatically inserted with
a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the volume mesh.

10. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

11. Save the mesh file (nozzle.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

12. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can now switch
to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation. Note that to obtain more accurate
solutions a higher quality mesh should be used.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
364 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

8.4.3. Set Units

1. For convenience, change the unit of measurement for pressure.

The pressure for this problem is specified in atm, which is not the default unit in Ansys Fluent. You
must redefine the pressure unit as atm.

Domain → Mesh → Units...

a. Select pressure in the Quantities selection list.

Scroll down the list to find pressure.

b. Select atm in the Units selection list.

c. Close the Set Units dialog box.

8.4.4. Solution
1. Select the solver settings.

Setup → General → Density-Based

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 365
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Select Density-Based in the General task page (Solver group box, under Type).

The density-based implicit solver is the solver of choice for compressible, transonic flows without
significant regions of low-speed flow. In cases with significant low-speed flow regions, the pressure-
based solver is preferred. Also, for transient cases with traveling shocks, the density-based explicit
solver with explicit time stepping may be the most efficient.

b. Retain the default selection of Steady from the Time list.

Note:

You will solve for the steady flow through the nozzle initially. In later steps, you will
use these initial results as a starting point for a transient calculation.

8.4.5. Models
1. Enable the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
366 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Retain the default k-omega SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 367
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
368 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

8.4.6. Materials
1. Define the settings for air, the default fluid material.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air Edit...

a. Select ideal-gas from the Density drop-down list in the Properties group box, so that the
ideal gas law is used to calculate density.

Note:

Ansys Fluent automatically enables the solution of the energy equation when the
ideal gas law is used, in case you did not already enable it manually in the Energy
dialog box.

b. Retain the default values for all other properties.

c. Click the Change/Create button to save your change.

d. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

8.4.7. Operating Conditions

1. Define the operating pressure.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 369
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions...

a. Enter 0 atm for Operating Pressure.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

Since you have set the operating pressure to zero, you will specify the boundary condition inputs for
pressure in terms of absolute pressures when you define them in the next step. Boundary condition
inputs for pressure should always be relative to the value used for operating pressure.

8.4.8. Boundary Conditions

1. Define the boundary conditions for the nozzle inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet (pressure-inlet) Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
370 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 0.9 atm for Gauge Total Pressure.

b. Enter 0.7369 atm for Supersonic/Initial Gauge Pressure.

The inlet static pressure estimate is the mean pressure at the nozzle exit. This value will be used
during the solution initialization phase to provide a guess for the nozzle velocity.

c. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in the
Turbulence group box.

d. Enter 1.5% for Turbulent Intensity.

e. Retain the setting of 10 for Turbulent Viscosity Ratio.

f. Click Apply and close the Pressure Inlet dialog box.

2. Define the boundary conditions for the nozzle exit.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet (pressure-outlet) Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 371
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Enter 0.7369 atm for Gauge Pressure.

b. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in the
Turbulence group box.

c. Enter 1.5% for Backflow Turbulent Intensity.

d. Retain the setting of 10 for Backflow Turbulent Viscosity Ratio.

If substantial backflow occurs at the outlet, you may need to adjust the backflow values to levels
close to the actual exit conditions.

e. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
372 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

8.4.9. Solution: Steady Flow

In this step, you will generate a steady-state flow solution that will be used as an initial condition for the
time-dependent solution.

1. Define the solution parameters.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

a. Retain the default selection of Least Squares Cell Based from the Gradient drop-down list
in the Spatial Discretization group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 373
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

2. Modify the Courant Number.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

a. Enter 25 for the Courant Number.

Note:

The default Courant number for the density-based implicit formulation is 5. For re-
latively simple problems, setting the Courant number to 10, 20, 100, or even higher
value may be suitable and produce fast and stable convergence. However, if you
encounter convergence difficulties at the startup of the simulation of a properly
set up problem, then you should consider setting the Courant number to its default
value of 5. As the solution progresses, you can start to gradually increase the
Courant number until the final convergence is reached.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
374 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Retain the default values for the Under-Relaxation Factors.

3. Enable the plotting of residuals.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

4. Create the surface report definition for mass flow rate at the flow exit.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass Flow Rate...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 375
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Enter outlet-mdot for Name.

b. Select outlet in the Surfaces selection list.

c. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

Note:

When Report File is enabled in the Surface Report Definition dialog box, the mass
flow rate history will be written to a file. If you do not enable this option, the history
information will be lost when you exit Ansys Fluent.

d. Click OK to close the Surface Report Definition dialog box.

outlet-mdot-rplot and outlet-mdot-rfile are automatically generated by Fluent and appear

in the tree (under Solution/Monitors/Report Plots and Solution/Monitors/Report Files, re-
spectively).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
376 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Modify the output file name.

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → outlet-mdot-rfile Edit...

i. Enter steady-mdot-rfile.out for File Name.

ii. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

5. Save the case file (nozzle_ss.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

6. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

a. Keep the Method at the default of Hybrid.

b. Click Initialize.

7. Set up gradient adaption for automatic mesh refinement.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 377
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

You will enable automatic adaption so that the solver periodically refines the mesh in the vicinity of
the shocks as the iterations progress. The shocks are identified by their large pressure gradients.

Domain → Adapt → Automatic...

a. Select Aerodynamics... / Shock Indicator / Density-based from the Predefined Criteria

drop-down list.

b. Complete the setup in the Automatic Mesh Adaption dialog box.

i. Enter 20 for Frequency (iteration) of mesh adaption.

ii. Click OK to close the Automatic Mesh Adaption dialog box.

8. Start the calculation by requesting 400 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
378 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 400 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate to start the steady flow simulation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 379
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

Figure 8.3: Mass Flow Rate History

9. Save the case and data files (nozzle_ss.cas.h5 and nozzle_ss.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Note:

When you write the case and data files at the same time, it does not matter whether
you specify the file name with a .cas.h5 or .dat.h5 extension, as both will be
saved.

10. Click OK in the Question dialog box to overwrite the existing file.

11. Check the mass flux balance.

Important:

Although the mass flow rate history indicates that the solution is converged, you should
also check the mass flux throughout the domain to ensure that mass is being conserved.

Results → Reports → Fluxes...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
380 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of Mass Flow Rate.

b. Select inlet and outlet in the Boundaries selection list.

c. Click Compute and examine the values displayed in the dialog box.

Important:

The net mass imbalance should be a small fraction (for example, 0.1%) of the
total flux through the system. The imbalance is displayed in the lower right
field under Net Results. If a significant imbalance occurs, you should decrease
your residual tolerances by at least an order of magnitude and continue iterat-
ing.

d. Close the Flux Reports dialog box.

12. Review a mesh that resulted from the automatic adaption performed during the computation.

Results → Graphics → Mesh → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 381
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Enter mesh-adapted for Mesh Name.

b. Ensure that Edges and Faces are enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select symmetry from the Surfaces list.

d. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

The mesh after adaption is displayed in the graphics window (Figure 8.4: 2D Nozzle Mesh after
Adaption (p. 383)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
382 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 8.4: 2D Nozzle Mesh after Adaption

e. Zoom in by dragging the middle mouse button with the Shift key pressed to view aspects of
your mesh.

Notice that the cells in the regions of high pressure gradients have been refined.

13. Display the steady flow contours of static pressure.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 383
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Enter contour-pressure for Contour Name.

b. Select Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Contours of list.

c. Select symmetry from the Surfaces list.

d. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
384 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The steady flow prediction shows the expected pressure distribution, with low pressure near the nozzle
throat.

14. Display the steady-flow contours of mach number.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 385
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Enter contour-mach for Contour Name.

b. Select Velocity... and Mach Number from the Contours of list.

c. Select symmetry from the Surfaces list.

d. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
386 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

8.4.10. Enabling Time Dependence and Setting Transient Conditions

In this step you will define a transient flow by specifying a transient pressure condition for the nozzle.

1. Enable a time-dependent flow calculation.

Setup → General

Select Transient in the General task page (Solver group box, under Time).

2. The pressure at the outlet is defined as a wave-shaped profile, and is described by the following
equation:
(8.1)

where

= circular frequency of transient pressure (rad/s)

= mean exit pressure (atm)

In this case, rad/s, and atm.. To convert to SI units multiple by 101325 Pa

per atm..

3. Define the transient boundary conditions at the nozzle exit (outlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 387
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. Select Expressions from Gauge Pressure drop-down list.

Enter the following expression for the outlet pressure as a function of time.

(0.12*sin(2200[Hz]*t)+0.737)*101325.0[Pa]

b. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

4. Update the gradient adaption parameters for the transient case.

Domain → Adapt → Automatic...

a. Select Aerodynamics... / Shock Indicator / Density-based from the Predefined Criteria

drop-down list in the Automatic Mesh Adaption dialog box.

b. Enter 25 for Frequency (time-step).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
388 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Click OK to close the Automatic Mesh Adaption dialog box.

8.4.11. Specifying Solution Parameters for Transient Flow and Solving

1. Modify the mass_flowrate_out-rfile report file definition.

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → outlet-mdot-rfile Edit...

a. Enter trans-mdot-out-rfile.out for File Name.

b. Select time-step from the Get Data Every drop-down list.

c. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

2. Modify the mass_flowrate_out-rplot report plot definition.

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → outlet-mdot-rplot Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 389
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

a. For Get Data Every, retain the value of 1 and select time-step from the drop-down list.

b. Select time-step from the X-Axis Label drop-down list.

c. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

3. Save the transient solution case file (nozzle_uns.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

4. Define the time step parameters.

The selection of the time step is critical for accurate time-dependent flow predictions. Using a time
step of 2.85596 x 10-5 seconds, 100 time steps are required for one pressure cycle. The pressure cycle
begins and ends with the initial pressure at the nozzle exit.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
390 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 2.85596e-5 s for Time Step Size.

b. Enter 100 for Number of Time Steps.

c. Enter 10 for Max Iterations/Time Step.

d. Click Calculate to start the transient simulation.

By requesting 100 time steps, you are asking Ansys Fluent to compute one pressure cycle. The mass
flow rate history is shown in Figure 8.5: Mass Flow Rate History (Transient Flow) (p. 392).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 391
Modeling Transient Compressible Flow

Figure 8.5: Mass Flow Rate History (Transient Flow)

5. Optionally, you can review the effect of automatic mesh adaption performed during transient
flow computation as you did in steady-state flow case.

6. Save the transient case and data files (nozzle_uns.cas.h5 and nozzle_uns.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

8.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you modeled the transient flow of air through a nozzle. In doing so, you learned how
to:

• generate a steady-state solution as an initial condition for the transient case.

• set solution parameters for implicit time-stepping and apply a user-defined transient pressure
profile at the outlet.

• use mesh adaption to refine the mesh in areas with high pressure gradients to better capture
the shocks.

• automatically save solution information as the transient calculation proceeds.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
392 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 9: Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys
Fluent
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
9.1. Introduction
9.2. Prerequisites
9.3. Problem Description
9.4. Setup and Solution
9.5. Summary

9.1. Introduction
This tutorial illustrates how to perform a parametric analysis, or study, of a static mixer simulation
within Ansys Fluent. The analysis will take an existing Fluent case file with predefined input and output
parameters, and setup and solve various permutations that analyze a few changes to the parametric
variables, all within the Fluent interface. For more information about using Fluent to perform a parametric
analysis, refer to Performing Parametric Studies.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Start with a Fluent case and data file with input and output parameters.

• Define a series of additional cases (design points) where each represents a change to one or more
the parameters.

• Update the series of design points.

• Generate a simulation report for each design point.

• Review the simulation reports and perform a comparison of the results between design points.

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing a parametric study
in Fluent:

9.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed one or more of the introductory
tutorials (such as Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow (p. 181)) found in this manual and that
you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent tree and ribbon structure. Some steps in the setup and solution
procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 393
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

9.3. Problem Description

The problem being analyzed involves a static mixer with two inlets and an outlet.

Figure 9.1: Problem Schematic

Fluid enters through two inlets using conditions described by separate input parameter expressions for
the fluid velocity magnitude (inlet1_vel and inlet2_vel) and temperature (inlet1_temp and
inlet2_temp). The fluid exits the outlet of the mixer based on a pressure outlet condition with a
temperature of 300 Kelvin.

The input parameter expressions are initially set to the following constant values:

Input Value
Parameter
inlet1_vel 5
m/s
inlet1_temp 300
K
inlet2_vel 10
m/s

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
394 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

inlet2_temp 350
K

9.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
9.4.1. Preparation
9.4.2. Mesh
9.4.3. Initialize the Parametric Study
9.4.4. Add Design Points
9.4.5. Set Up Design Point and Parametric Reports
9.4.6. Update Design Point Solutions
9.4.7. Generate Design Point and Parametric Simulation Reports
9.4.8. Compare Design Point Results

9.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the parametric_mixer.zip file .

2. Unzip parametric_mixer.zip to your working directory.

The files Static_Mixer.cas.h5 and Static_Mixer.dat.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

9.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the case and data file (Static_Mixer.case.h5 and Static_Mixer.dat.h5).

File → Read → Case & Data...

As Fluent reads the case/data files, it will report the progress in the console.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 395
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

2. Examine the mesh (Figure 9.2: Mesh Display of the Static Mixer (p. 396)).

Extra:

You can use the right mouse button to check which zone number corresponds to each
boundary. If you click the right mouse button on one of the boundaries in the graphics
window, its zone number, name, and type will be printed in the Ansys Fluent console.
This feature is especially useful when you have several zones of the same type and you
want to distinguish between them quickly.

Figure 9.2: Mesh Display of the Static Mixer

9.4.3. Initialize the Parametric Study

Using you loaded case file with predefined input parameters, you can start the parametric study right
away.

1. Initialize the parametric study.

Parametric → Study → Initialize

2. Create a project file (Static_Mixer.flprj).

You will need to manage various files that get created for your parametric study, so Fluent will prompt
you to create a new project file to help manage the files that will be generated for each design point
run. Click Yes to proceed with creating a project file. Fluent will prompt you for the name and location

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
396 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

of the project file. For this tutorial, keep the default name as Static_Mixer.flprj and keep the
location as your current working folder.

Note:

Once you create a project file, you can revisit it at any time by opening the project file
using the File menu.

File → Parametric Project → Open...

3. Review the elements of the initial parametric study.

a. The Parametric Study tab that appears contains the Design Point Table with the currently
loaded case file (the "base case") with its input and output parameters.

Figure 9.3: The Design Point Table for the Initial Static Mixer Case

b. The Outline View now contains a Case View with a case-specific outline, along with a
Parametric Study View that contains access to the details of your case parameters.

Figure 9.4: The Case View and Parametric Study View for the Initial Static Mixer Case

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 397
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

c. Review details of the current case. To see the current parametric settings for the case,
enable the Show Current Case Parameters option under Parametric Study in the
Preferences dialog (File > Preferences...):

Figure 9.5: The Current Parameters for the Static Mixer Case

Here you can review the input and output parameters and their values and units.

9.4.4. Add Design Points

Having reviewed the parametric layout within Fluent, you can now add design points to your para-
metric study. For this tutorial, you will only vary the velocity at one of the two inlets, gradually increas-
ing the value to match the velocity at the other inlet. You will also use the design point table to set
various properties for each design point, such if the solution data is written, or if any simulation report-
specific data is saved.

Figure 9.6: The Design Point Table With Additional Design Points

1. Use the Parametric ribbon to add design points to your parametric study.

Parametric → Design Point → Add Design Point

Fluent will prompt you to ensure that you want to proceed, informing you that by adding a design
point, the state of the project will change (in case you wanted to preserve the current state of
the project). For this tutorial, you can click Continue Adding Design Point.

2. In a similar fashion, add four more design points until you have a total of six, including the base
design point (Base DP).

3. For each design point, make the following changes:

Table 9.1: Design Point Settings for the Mixing Tank

Design Point P2-inlet1_vel Enable Write Data?

DP1 6 m/s yes
DP2 7 m/s yes
DP3 8 m/s yes

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
398 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Design Point P2-inlet1_vel Enable Write Data?

DP4 9 m/s yes
DP5 10 m/s yes

When you later update these design points, Fluent will run each simulation using these settings and
you will then be able to review their solutions and compare the results of each simulation.

9.4.5. Set Up Design Point and Parametric Reports

As described in Performing Parametric Studies, Fluent can create simulation reports for your CFD
analysis. In a similar fashion, each design point run can have their own individual simulation report,
as well as an overall parametric report.

Note:

For this tutorial, you are not making any changes to the settings and organization of
the reports. If you were to make changes to how your reports are organized, however,
it is a good idea to review and change these settings as needed prior to updating the
design points in your parametric study.

1. Review the settings for the individual design point simulation reports that Fluent will create.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Design Point Report Settings

This opens the Simulation Report Outline task page. When the Current Report is set to Design
Point Settings, you can choose to include or exclude various portions of a typical simulation report
using the Report Sections tree.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 399
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 9.7: The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Design Point Settings

For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default settings.

2. Review the settings for the overall parametric report.

When the Current Report is set to Parametric Report, you can choose to include or exclude
various portions of a typical simulation report using the Report Sections tree.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Parametric Report

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
400 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 9.8: The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Parameter Report Settings

For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default settings.

For any given design point in the design point table, when the Capture Simulation Report Data
field is enabled, the information flagged in the Simulation Report Outline for that design point will
appear in the report.

9.4.6. Update Design Point Solutions

Now that the design points have been specified and the report settings have been reviewed, you
can proceed to running the individual solutions and updating your design points. For this tutorial,
you will use the default behavior and update each design point sequentially where each design point
is loaded and solved one after another. You will also see how you can monitor the status of your
various solutions as they progress.

1. Update all of the design points in your study.

Parametric → Update Options → Update All

As the calculations for each design point progresses, information is printed to the console and
the Status column in the Design Point Table updates accordingly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 401
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 9.9: The Status Column in the Design Point Table

You can also check the progress of your solution runs using the Run Status section of the Para-
metric ribbon.

Figure 9.10: The Run Status Category of the Parametric Ribbon

2. Monitor the progress of the calculation by viewing its transcript, residual plots, and plots of any
solution monitors that may exist.

a. View a transcript of a design point solution by right-clicking on the design point in the table
and selecting Show > Transcript from the context menu. The transcript will appear below the
design point table.

Figure 9.11: The Transcript Window for DP1

b. View a plot of any existing solution monitors by right-clicking on the design point in the table
and selecting Show > Monitors from the context menu. The monitor plot will appear below
the design point table. For this tutorial, the original case file already contains a solution mon-
itor definition (one for monitoring the average temperature at the outlet).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
402 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 9.12: The Monitors Window for DP1

c. View a plot of default residuals of a design point solution by right-clicking on the design point
in the table and selecting Show > Residuals from the context menu. The residual plot will
appear below the design point table.

Figure 9.13: The Residuals Window for DP1

9.4.7. Generate Design Point and Parametric Simulation Reports

Now that your design points are up-to-date in your parametric study, you can create and review
simulation reports for any or all of your design points.

1. Return to the Simulation Report Outline task page to generate an individual simulation report
for one or more design points.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Design Point Report Settings

2. Set the Current Report to DP1 Report and click Generate at the bottom of the task page.

Once generated, the report will be displayed in the Fluent interface, tabbed alongside the
graphics window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 403
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 9.14: Simulation Report for a Design Point (DP1)

You can perform the same operation for the other design points in the study (DP2 and DP3 for
instance, and even the Base DP).

Based on the default selections of what the report is comprised of, the report will have tabulated
information about a particular design point simulation settings. In addition, the report can include
plots and animations of the mesh, contours, vectors, and pathlines of common flow field quantities
(such as temperature, for instance).

3. Return to the Simulation Report Outline task page to generate an overall parametric report.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Parametric Report

4. Set the Current Report to Parametric Report and click Generate at the bottom of the task page.

Once generated, the report will be displayed in the Fluent interface, tabbed alongside the
graphics window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
404 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 9.15: Parametric Report

Based on the default selections of what the report is comprised of, the report will have tabulated
information about the design points and the base case simulation settings. In addition, the report
can include plots of the mesh, contours, vectors, and pathlines of common flow field quantities
(such as temperature, for instance).

9.4.8. Compare Design Point Results

Now that you have results for all design points, you can compare the results as part of your parametric
analysis. You can do this using the Parametric Report or by using Comparison Plots.

1. Use parametric reports to compare your results.

a. Return to the Simulation Report Outline task page to review the overall parametric report.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Parametric Report

Set the Current Report to Parametric Report and click View at the bottom of the task page.

b. In the Parametric Report, go to the Contours section and review the Contours of Static
Temperature plot that has been generated and included in the report.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 405
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 9.16: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (DP=0)

c. Use the slider to see the contour plot for the different design points in your study.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
406 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 9.17: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (All Design Points)

d. Click the Contours Comparison tab to view two plots side-by-side to compare them between
two different design point values.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 407
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 9.18: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of

Temperatures on the Inlet Plane)

Since there are multiple contour plots availble in the original analysis, they are also available
for each design point as well. Click the bottom slider to view other available contour plot
comparisons between different design points. For instance

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
408 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 9.19: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of

Temperature at the Outlet)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 409
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 9.20: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of Wall
Temperature)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
410 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 9.21: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of

Velocity)

For more information about comparing plots in your simulation reports, see Comparing Para-
metric Results.

2. Use comparison plots to compare the input and/or output parameter values as they vary with
each other or by design point.

Parametric → Comparison Plot → Create New

This opens the Parametric Plots dialog box where you can specify the details of a comparison
plot.

a. For the Name, enter Exit Temperature vs Inlet Velocity.

b. For the X Axis, select inlet1_vel.

c. For the Y Axis, select outlet-temp-avg-op.

d. Click Create to visualize the plot under the Design Point Table. A new plot is created in the
Parametric Study View under Plots.

e. Close the dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 411
Performing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 9.22: Elements of Comparison Plots

Figure 9.23: Plot of Exit Temperature vs Inlet Velocity Value

3. Save the case and data files (Static_Mixer.cas.h5 and Static_Mixer.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

4. Save the project file (Static_Mixer.flprj).

File → Parametric Project → Save...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
412 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

9.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated taking an existing singular Fluent case and data file set with input and output
parameters and developing a parametric study directly in the Ansys Fluent interface. Variations of those
input parameters were used to create different solutions for comparative analysis. Individual design
points were analyzed and simulation reports were generated for each design point and for the parametric
study itself. Finally, simulation reports and comparative plots were used to examine the changes of an
input variable per design point. For more information about using Fluent to perform a parametric
analysis, refer to Performing Parametric Studies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 413
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
414 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 10: Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys
Fluent
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
10.1. Introduction
10.2. Prerequisites
10.3. Problem Description
10.4. Setup and Solution
10.5. Summary

10.1. Introduction
This tutorial illustrates how to perform an optimized parametric analysis of a two-dimensional flow
simulation within Ansys Fluent using Ansys optiSLang. The analysis will take an existing Fluent case file
with predefined input and output parameters, and setup and solve various permutations that analyze
a few changes to the parametric variables, all within the Fluent interface. For more information about
using Fluent to perform an optimized parametric analysis, refer to Performing Parametric Studies.

Note:

An Ansys optiSLang license is requried for this tutorial.

Note:

Ansys optiSLang provides several ways to perform parametric optimizations, including One-
Click Optimization (OCO) and the more powerful Adaptive Metamodel of Optimal Prognosis
(AMOP) approach. For the sake of simplicity, this tutorial focuses on the OCO approach to
optimization. For more information, see Creating and Optimizing Designs of Experiments for
optiSLang.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Start with a Fluent case and data file with input and output parameters.

• Apply mesh morphing to define changes in the geometry and the mesh using input parameters.

• Use One-Click Optimization (OCO) and Ansys optiSLang within Fluent to define and generate a series
of additional cases (design points) where each represents a change to one or more of the parameters.

• Generate a simulation report for each design point.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 415
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

• Review the simulation reports and perform a comparison of the results between design points.

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing a parametric study
in Fluent:

10.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed one or more of the introductory
tutorials (such as Fluid Flow and Heat Transfer in a Mixing Elbow (p. 181)) found in this manual and that
you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent tree and ribbon structure. Some steps in the setup and solution
procedure will not be shown explicitly.

10.3. Problem Description

The problem being analyzed involves a two dimensional heat exchanger geometry with an inlet and
an outlet.

Figure 10.1: Problem Schematic

Fluid enters a two-dimensional heat exchanger through a single inlet using conditions described by
separate input parameter expressions for the fluid velocity magnitude (inlet_v) and temperature
(inlet_T). The fluid exits the outlet of the heat exchanger based on a pressure outlet condition with
a temperature of 300 Kelvin. The parametric analysis will study the best displacement of the cylinders
while studying the heat transfer and optimizing the pressure drop across the heat exchanger.

The input parameter expressions are initially set to the following constant values:

Input Value
Parameter
inlet_T 300
K

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
416 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

inlet_v 2.5
m/s
wall_1_dx 0m
wall_1_dy 0m
wall_2_dx 0m
wall_2_dy 0m

The following named expressions are defined as:

Named Expression Value

flow_energy {report-av-inlet-pressure}*{report-mass-flow-
rate}/1.225[kg/m^3]
heat_transfer_per_flow_en- {total_heat_transfer}/flow_energy
ergy
wall_T 500 K

The output parameters are defined accordingly:

Ouput Parameter Value

heat_transfer_per_flow_en- {total_heat_transfer}/flow_energy
ergy
min-orth-quality-op_v Volume report defintion of the minimal mesh orthogonal quality
for the fluid zone.
report-fx-1-op Force report defintion for the first wall.
report-fx-2-op Force report defintion for the second wall.
report-out-press-op Surface report defintion for the area-weighted average of the
staic pressure at the inlet.
report-out-temp-op Surface report defintion for the mass-weighted average of the
static temperature at the outlet.
total_heat_transfer Flux report definition for the total hat transfer rate for the circular
walls.

Note:

The OCO approach to optimization only allows you to have a single objective. Therefore, a
combined output parameter was defined to represent both the heat transfer and the pressure
drop. The objective defined allows you to maximize the combined output paramater.

10.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
10.4.1. Preparation
10.4.2. Mesh
10.4.3. Applying Mesh Morphing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 417
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

10.4.4. Initialize the Parametric Study

10.4.5. Set Up Design Point and Parametric Reports
10.4.6. Create Design Points and Run an Optimization Study
10.4.7. Generate Design Point and Parametric Simulation Reports
10.4.8. Compare Design Point Results

10.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the 2d_heat_exchanger_optimizer.zip file .

2. Unzip 2d_heat_exchanger_optimizer.zip to your working directory.

The files 2d_heat_exchanger.cas.h5 and 2d_heat_exchanger.dat.h5 can be found

in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

10.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the case and data file (2d_heat_exchanger.cas.h5 and 2d_heat_ex-
changer.dat.h5).

File → Read → Case & Data...

As Fluent reads the case/data files, it will report the progress in the console.

2. Examine the mesh (Figure 10.2: Mesh Display of the 2D Heat Exchanger Geometry (p. 419)).

Extra:

You can use the right mouse button to check which zone number corresponds to each
boundary. If you click the right mouse button on one of the boundaries in the graphics
window, its zone number, name, and type will be printed in the Ansys Fluent console.
This feature is especially useful when you have several zones of the same type and you
want to distinguish between them quickly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
418 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.2: Mesh Display of the 2D Heat Exchanger Geometry

10.4.3. Applying Mesh Morphing

For this particular tutorial, the parametric optimization is designed to determine the best location of
the circular walls in the heat exchanger under specific conditions. Such an analysis requires changes
to the geometry/mesh for each parametric design point. You can perform such changes in the geo-
metry/mesh directly in Fluent through the use of mesh morphing.

Note:

The following steps have been applied upon loading the case file. However, this section
is for demonstrative purposes to reveal what those steps were.

1. Define your design conditions.

Design → Geometry → Parameterize and Explore

a. Create a fixed wall constraint condition to be applied to the inlet, outlet and the symmetry
boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 419
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.3: Setting Fixed Wall Constraint Conditions

i. In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, in the Design Conditions tab, click Create...
to display the Create New Condition dialog box.

ii. In the Create New Condition dialog box, select fixed-walls-constraint and change the
Name to fixed-walls-constraint.

iii. Click OK to create the new condition and close the Create New Condition dialog box.

iv. In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, in the Design Conditions tab, for the new
fixed-walls-constraint condition, under Fixed Walls Condition, select the inlet, outlet,
symmetry-1, and symmetry-2 surfaces and click Apply.

b. Create a translating wall condition to be applied to one of the circular walls.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
420 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.4: Setting Translating Wall Conditions (wall-1)

i. In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, under Design Conditions, click Create... to
display the Create New Condition dialog box.

ii. In the Create New Condition dialog box, select translation and change the Name to
translation-wall-1.

iii. Click OK to create the new condition and close the Create New Condition dialog box.

iv. In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, for the new translation-wall-1 condition,
under Fixed Walls Condition, select the wall-1 surface.

v. Assign the wall_1_dx named expression for the X displacement.

vi. Assign the wall_1_dy named expression for the Y displacement.

vii. Click Apply.

c. Create a second translating wall condition to be applied to the other circular wall.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 421
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.5: Setting Translating Wall Conditions (wall-2)

i. In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, under Design Conditions, click Create... to
display the Create New Condition dialog box.

ii. In the Create New Condition dialog box, select translation and change the Name to
translation-wall-2.

iii. Click OK to create the new condition and close the Create New Condition dialog box.

iv. In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, for the new translation-wall-2 condition,
under Fixed Walls Condition, select the wall-2 surface.

v. Assign the wall_2_dx named expression for the X displacement.

vi. Assign the wall_2_dy named expression for the Y displacement.

vii. Click Apply.

2. Define your design region.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
422 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.6: The Region Tab of the Parameterize and Explore Dialog Box

In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, in the Region tab, under Region Extent, set the
following values:

X -0.025
Min m
X 0.225
Max m
Y -0.025
Min m
Y 0.075
Max m

3. Check and preview the mesh morphing settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 423
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.7: The Design Change Tab of the Parameterize and Explore Dialog Box

a. In the Parameterize and Explore dialog box, in the Design Change tab, review your settings
and, under Workflows, click Check to confirm your settings.

b. Once your settings are confirmed, under Mesh, click Preview... to visually inspect the mesh
morphing region extents using the Preview Morphing dialog box.

Figure 10.8: Preview Morphing Dialog Box

In the Preview Morphing dialog box, select all surfaces and click Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
424 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.9: Preview of the Mesh Morphing Region

Now that parameter-based changes in the mesh are accounted for through setting up mesh morphing,
you can proceed on to setting up and optimizing the parametric study.

10.4.4. Initialize the Parametric Study

Using your loaded case file with predefined input parameters, you can start the parametric study.

1. Initialize the parametric study.

Parametric → Study → Initialize

2. Create a project file (2d_heat_exchanger.flprj).

You will need to manage various files that get created for your parametric study, so Fluent will prompt
you to create a new project file to help manage the files that will be generated for each design point
run. Click Yes to proceed with creating a project file. Fluent will prompt you for the name and location
of the project file. For this tutorial, keep the default name as 2d_heat_exchanger.flprj and
keep the location as your current working folder.

Note:

Once you create a project file, you can revisit it at any time by opening the project file
using the File menu.

File → Parametric Project → Open...

3. Review the elements of the initial parametric study.

a. The Parametric Study tab that appears contains the Design Point Table with the currently
loaded case file (the "base case") with its input and output parameters.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 425
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.10: The Design Point Table for the Initial 2D Heat Exchanger Case

b. The Outline View now contains a Case View with a case-specific outline, along with a
Parametric Study View that contains access to the details of your case parameters.

Figure 10.11: The Case View and Parametric Study View for the Initial 2D Heat
Exchanger Case

c. Review details of the current case. To see the current parametric settings for the case,
enable the Show Current Case Parameters option under Parametric Study in the
Preferences dialog (File > Preferences...):

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
426 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.12: The Current Parameters for the 2D Heat Exchanger Case

Here you can review the input and output parameters and their values and units.

10.4.5. Set Up Design Point and Parametric Reports

As described in Performing Parametric Studies, Fluent can create simulation reports for your CFD
analysis. In a similar fashion, each design point run can have their own individual simulation report,
as well as an overall parametric report.

Note:

For this tutorial, you are not making any changes to the settings and organization of
the reports. If you were to make changes to how your reports are organized, however,
it is a good idea to review and change these settings as needed prior to updating the
design points in your parametric study.

1. Review the settings for the individual design point simulation reports that Fluent will create.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Design Point Report Settings

This opens the Simulation Report Outline task page. When the Current Report is set to Design
Point Settings, you can choose to include or exclude various portions of a typical simulation report
using the Report Sections tree.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 427
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.13: The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Design Point Settings

For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default settings.

2. Review the settings for the overall parametric report.

When the Current Report is set to Parametric Report, you can choose to include or exclude
various portions of a typical simulation report using the Report Sections tree.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Parametric Report

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
428 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.14: The Simulation Report Outline Task Page for Parameter Report Settings

For the purposes of this tutorial, you can keep the default settings.

For any given design point in the design point table, when the Capture Simulation Report Data
field is enabled, the information flagged in the Simulation Report Outline for that design point will
appear in the report.

10.4.6. Create Design Points and Run an Optimization Study

Having reviewed the parametric layout within Fluent, you can now add design points to your para-
metric study. For this tutorial, you will use the built-in optimization tools in Fluent to define a series
of design points.

Parametric → Design Point → Auto (with optiSLang) → Add Design Points...

This displays the Create Design Points Using optiSLang dialog box. Select the Create DOE and
Optimize option to display more options in the Create Design Points and Optimize Using optiSLang
dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 429
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.15: The Create Design Points and Optimize Using optiSLang Dialog Box

1. Edit the parameters.

a. De-activate the inlet_T, inlet_v, wall_1_dx, and wall_2_dx parameters in the table.

b. Set the Lower Bound for wall_1_dy to -0.025.

c. Set the Upper Bound for wall_2_dy to 0.025.

2. Edit the criteria.

Under Criteria, keep the New Criteria Type set to Objective, and click Add Objective to display
a new objective criteria. For the new criteria:

a. Set the Expression to heat_transfer_per_flow_energy.

The OCO approach to optimization only allows you to have a single objective. Therefore, a combined
output parameter was defined to represent both the heat transfer and the pressure drop. The ob-
jective defined allows you to maximize the combined output paramater.

b. Set the Criteria to MAX.

3. Edit the one-click optimization (OCO) settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
430 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Under Optimization Options, select One-Click and click Configure Settings to directly expose
additional optiSLang settings.

a. Set the Maximum Number of Design Evaluations to 50.

Once this field is set, a brief pause may occur as optiSLang updates the remaining fields.

b. Ensure that the Stop after the given number of design evaluations without improvement
option is to 10.

c. Ensure that the Fixed number of design evaluations per iteration option is set to 25.

4. Click Run Optimization Study.

Fluent will automatically run each design point simulation using these settings, generate data, and
update the design point table accordingly.

Figure 10.16: The Design Point Table With Initial Optimization Study Design Point Data

Once the optimization study is complete, you will then be able to review their solutions and
compare the results of each simulation.

Figure 10.17: The Design Point Table With Final Optimization Study Design Point Data

Click the Show Optimization Results button to display the tabulated display of the one-click
optimization study.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 431
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.18: The Results of the Optimization Study Showing the Best Solution

10.4.7. Generate Design Point and Parametric Simulation Reports

Now that your design points are up-to-date in your parametric study, you can create and review
simulation reports for any or all of your design points. For this tutorial, you will generate a design
point report for the solution that was identified as the optimal solution (DP42).

1. Return to the Simulation Report Outline task page to generate an individual simulation report
for one or more design points.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Design Point Report Settings

2. Set the Current Report to DP42 Report and click Generate at the bottom of the task page.

Once generated, the report will be displayed in the Fluent interface, tabbed alongside the
graphics window.

Figure 10.19: Simulation Report for the Optimal Design Point (DP42)

Based on the default selections of what the report is comprised of, the report will have tabulated
information about a particular design point simulation settings. In addition, the report can include
plots and animations of the mesh, contours, vectors, and pathlines of common flow field quantities
(such as temperature, for instance).

3. Return to the Simulation Report Outline task page to generate an overall parametric report.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Parametric Report

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
432 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Set the Current Report to Parametric Report and click Generate at the bottom of the task page.

Once generated, the report will be displayed in the Fluent interface, tabbed alongside the
graphics window.

Figure 10.20: Parametric Report

Based on the default selections of what the report is comprised of, the report will have tabulated
information about the design points and the base case simulation settings. In addition, the report
can include plots of the mesh, contours, vectors, and pathlines of common flow field quantities
(such as temperature, for instance).

10.4.8. Compare Design Point Results

Now that you have results for all design points, you can compare the results as part of your parametric
analysis. You can do this using the Parametric Report or by using Comparison Plots.

1. Use parametric reports to compare your results.

a. Return to the Simulation Report Outline task page to review the overall parametric report.

Parametric → Simulation Report → Parametric Report

Set the Current Report to Parametric Report and click View at the bottom of the task page.

b. In the Parametric Report, go to the Contours section and review the Contours of Static
Temperature plot that has been generated and included in the report.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 433
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.21: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (DP=0)

c. Use the slider to see the contour plot for the different design points in your study.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
434 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.22: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Select Design Points)

d. Click the Contours Comparison tab to view two plots side-by-side to compare them between
two different design point values.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 435
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

Figure 10.23: Contours Section of the Parametric Report (Contour Comparison of

Temperatures)

For more information about comparing plots in your simulation reports, see Comparing Para-
metric Results.

e. In the Parametric Report, go to the XY Plots section and review the static temperature (xy-
plot-temp-exit) and the velocity magnitude (xy-plot-vel-exit) plots that have been
generated and included in the report.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
436 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 10.24: Static Temperature Distribution at the Exit for All Design Points

f. Figure 10.25: Velocity Magnitude Distribution at the Exit for All Design Points

2. Save the case and data files (2d_heat_exchanger.cas.h5 and 2d_heat_ex-

changer.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

3. Save the project file (2d_heat_exchanger.flprj).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 437
Optimizing Parametric Analyses in Ansys Fluent

File → Parametric Project → Save...

10.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated taking an existing singular Fluent case and data file set with input and output
parameters and developing a optimization parametric study directly in the Ansys Fluent interface using
Ansys optiSLang. Since the parametric analysis involved geometry/mesh changes, Fluent's mesh
morphing capabilities were utilized. Fluent was used to easily set up a one-click optimization study
where variations of those input parameters were used to create different solutions for comparative
analysis. Individual design points were analyzed and simulation reports were generated for each design
point and for the parametric study itself. Finally, simulation reports were used to examine the changes
of an input variable per design point. For more information about using Fluent to perform a parametric
analysis, refer to Performing Parametric Studies.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
438 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 11: Using the Frozen Rotor Method
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
11.1. Introduction
11.2. Prerequisites
11.3. Problem Description
11.4. Setup and Solution
11.5. Summary
11.6. Further Improvements

11.1. Introduction
In this tutorial, you will setup a general fluid flow simulation to evaluate the performance of a centrifugal
pump with a vaneless volute using the Frozen Rotor method.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Set up a No Pitch-Scale interface using the turbo model.

• Describe wall motion and other boundary conditions.

• Specify appropriate solver settings.

• Add and monitor expressions.

• Calculate expressions and display contours.

11.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

11.3. Problem Description

The problem to be considered is the modeling of a centrifugal pump with a volute as shown in Fig-
ure 11.1: Case Geometry (p. 440). The pump impeller has 5 blades and rotates at a velocity of 1450 RPM.
The mass flow rate at the volute outlet is known to be 90 kg/s. A gauge total pressure of 0 pa is used
at the inlet. The simulation will be performed to determine the head generated by the pump, repres-
enting the overall pressure increase of the fluid.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 439
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

Figure 11.1: Case Geometry

11.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
11.4.1. Preparation

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
440 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

11.4.2. Mesh
11.4.3. Models
11.4.4. Materials
11.4.5. Cell Zone Conditions
11.4.6. Boundary Conditions
11.4.7.Turbomachinery Models
11.4.8. Solution
11.4.9. Postprocessing

11.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the pump_volute.zip file .

2. Unzip pump_volute.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file pump_volute.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

11.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file pump_volute.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

As Fluent reads the mesh file, it will report the progress in the console.

2. In the Mesh group box of the Domain ribbon tab, set the units for angular-velocity.

Domain → Mesh → Units...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 441
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

a. Select angular-velocity under Quantities.

b. Select rev/min under Units.

c. Close the Set Units dialog box.

11.4.3. Models
1. Enable the - SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

a. Retain the default k-omega SST turbulence model.

b. Click OK.

Compared to other two-equation models, the - SST turbulence model effectively predicts flow sep-
aration in turbomachinery, allowing for accurate evaluation of pump performance.

11.4.4. Materials
1. Add water to the list of materials.

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit...

a. Click Fluent Database... to open the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

b. Scroll down and select water-liquid (h2o <l>) from the list of materials.

c. Select Copy.

d. Close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box and the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

water-liquid appears under Materials > Fluid in the tree view.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
442 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

11.4.5. Cell Zone Conditions

1. Set the cell zone conditions for the impeller.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → impeller (fluid, id=36) Edit...

a. Set the Material Name to water-liquid.

b. Select Frame Motion.

c. Ensure values of (0, 0, 1) for X, Y, and Z in the Rotation-Axis Direction group box.

The impeller will rotate relative to the absolute frame. By default, the correct rotation is set (about
the z-axis).

d. For Rotational Velocity → Speed (rpm), specify 1450.

e. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

2. Set the cell zone conditions for the volute.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → volute (fluid, id=2) Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 443
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

a. Set the Material Name to water-liquid.

The volute is stationary in the absolute frame so no motion is required.

b. Ensure values of (0, 0, 1) for X, Y, and Z in the Rotation-Axis Direction group box.

c. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

11.4.6. Boundary Conditions

1. Set the boundary conditions for impeller-hub.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → impeller-hub (wall, id=3) Edit...

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Wall Motion Moving Wall
Motion Rotational

By default, the rotating wall is specified with a velocity of 0 relative to the impeller fluid zone.

Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for inblock-shroud (wall, id=14).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
444 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → inblock-shroud Edit...

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Wall Motion Moving Wall
Motion Absolute
Motion Rotational

The inblock shroud wall is stationary (velocity equal to 0) relative to the absolute reference frame.

Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for the inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet (pressure-inlet, id=15) Edit...

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Supersonic/Initial Gauge -100
Pressure
(pascal)

Click Apply and close the Pressure Inlet dialog box.

4. Set the boundary conditions for the outlet.

The outlet has been automatically set as an inlet by Fluent. You must first change this boundary
condition to a mass flow outlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → mass-flow-inlet-11 (mass-flow-inlet, id=11)

Type → mass-flow-outlet

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → mass-flow-outlet-11 (mass-flow-outlet, id=11)

Edit...

Rename the boundary zone to outlet.

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Mass Flow Rate 90 (kg/s)

Click Apply and close the Mass-Flow Outlet dialog box.

11.4.7. Turbomachinery Models

1. Enable the Turbo Models.

Domain → Turbomachinery and select Turbo Models.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 445
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

2. Create the turbo interfaces.

Domain → Turbomachinery → Turbo Create...

The Frozen Rotor method will be modeled using the No Pitch-Scale (NPS) interface which allows
for connecting a 360-degree interface to another 360-degree interface.

a. Enter nps for Mesh Interface.

b. Select interface-impeller-outlet from the Available Zone-1 selection list.

c. Select interface-volute-inlet from the Available Zone-2 selection list.

d. Enable the General Turbo Interface option in the Interface Options group box.

e. Select No Pitch-Scale in the Pitch-Change Types group box under General Turbo Interface.

f. Click Create/Edit and close the Create/Edit Turbo Interfaces dialog box.

3. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and will report the progress in the console. Make sure
that the reported minimum volume is a positive number.

Note that if this step is performed before creating the mesh interface, the check will fail because Fluent
will detect that the interface is missing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
446 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

11.4.8. Solution
1. Specify the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 447
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

a. Select Green-Gauss Node Based from the Gradient drop-down list in the Spatial Discretiza-
tion group box.

b. Enable the High Order Term Relaxation option.

c. Retain the default selections.

2. Create a surface report definition for total pressure at the outlet.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass-Weighted Average...

a. Enter p-out for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. Select Pressure... → Total Pressure from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. Select Outlet from the Surfaces selection list.

This automatically selects all the outlet boundary conditions that have been specified.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
448 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

3. Create a surface report definition for total pressure at the inlet.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass-Weighted Average...

a. Enter p-in for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. Select Pressure... and Total Pressure from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. Select Inlet from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

4. Create a surface report definition for blade pressure.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Integral...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 449
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

a. Enter p-blade for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. Select Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. Select blade from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report
Definition dialog box.

5. Create an expression for pump head.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Expression...

a. Enter the expression ({p-out} - {p-in}) / (998.2[kg/m^3] * 9.81[m/s^2]).

You can insert the report definitions you previously created using the Report Definitions drop-
down.

The expression uses 998.2 as the density of water [kg/m^3] and 9.81 as the acceleration of the
fluid due to gravity [m/s^2].

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
450 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enter head for Name.

c. Select Report Plot

d. Select Print to Console

e. Click OK to save the expression and close the Expression Report Definition dialog box.

6. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

a. Click More Settings... to open the Hybrid Initialization dialog box.

b. Select Absolute under Reference Frame.

c. Select Use Specified Initial Pressure on Inlets under Initialization Options.

d. Click Apply and close the Hybrid Initialization dialog box.

e. Click Initialize to initialize the solution.

7. Save the case file (pump_volute.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 451
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

8. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 10 for Time Scale Factor.

b. Enter 200 for Number of Iterations.

c. Click Calculate.

You can monitor the progression of the residuals and the pump head during the run.

Figure 11.2: Convergence History of the Pump Head

9. Save the case and data files (pump_volute.cas.h5 and pump-volute.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

11.4.9. Postprocessing
1. Determine the head generated from the pump

Solution → Reports → Definitions → Edit...

a. Select head and p-blade from the Report Definitions selection list.

b. Click Compute.

The head generated by the pump and pressure integral on the blade are printed to the console
and are approximately 20.7 [m] and 5650 [pascal m^2], respectively.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
452 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Create a contour showing the flow uniformity at the outlet.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-vel-out for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that the Filled option is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

d. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Deselect all surfaces and select Outlet from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Select Draw Mesh.

g. On the Mesh Display dialog box that opens, deselect all surfaces and select the Wall surface
type from the Surfaces selection list.

h. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

i. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box. Orient the view as shown in Fig-
ure 11.3: Contours of Velocity Magnitude at the Outlet (p. 453).

This gives an idea of how the fluid is exiting the volute.

Figure 11.3: Contours of Velocity Magnitude at the Outlet

3. Create a contour showing cross-sectional pressure.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 453
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

a. Enter contour-pressure-wall for Contour Name

b. Ensure that the Filled option is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

d. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

e. Ensure Pressure... and Static Pressure are selected from the Contours of drop-down lists.

f. Select Wall from the Surfaces selection list.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

The increasing pressure in the flow domain can be seen in the contour plot.

Figure 11.4: Contours of Static Pressure on the Walls

4. Create filled contours of static pressure.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-pressure for Contour Name

b. Ensure that the Filled option is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Ensure Pressure... and Static Pressure are selected from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select blade, impeller-hub and inblock-hub from the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
454 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Pressure distribution in the flow domain is plotted in graphics window.

Figure 11.5: Contours of Static Pressure

5. Save the case file (pump_volute.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

11.5. Summary
In this tutorial you completed a fluid flow simulation to evaluate the performance of a pump and volute.
You created a custom expression to determine the head generated by the pump. While a steady-state
simulation was used to model the pump performance using the frozen rotor method, this simulation
can be converted to a transient rotor stator simulation by following these steps:

• Switch the solver to transient

• In the impeller cell zone, change the motion from Frame Motion to Mesh Motion by clicking
on Copy to Mesh Motion

• In the Run Calculation panel, enter Time Step

You can watch a video of this case being set up, solved, and postprocessed at:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 455
Using the Frozen Rotor Method

11.6. Further Improvements

This tutorial guides you through the steps to reach a basic solution. You can explore what effect varying
certain parameters, such as impeller speed and outlet flow, have on the performance of the pump.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
456 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 12: Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis
Using the Turbo Workflow
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
12.1. Introduction
12.2. Prerequisites
12.3. Problem Description
12.4. Setup and Solution
12.5. Postprocessing
12.6. Summary

12.1. Introduction

Licensing Capability:

This tutorial is fully supported at all licensing levels.

In this tutorial, you will use the Ansys Fluent Turbo Workflow to setup a fluid flow simulation to eval-
uate the performance of a 1.5 stage compressor. Note that additional analysis of this same geometry
can be found in Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations (p. 495).

This tutorial illustrates the setup and solution of a three-dimensional fluid flow through the first three
rows of a one and a half stage axial compressor, courtesy of TFD Hannover. The compressor configuration
is encountered in the aerospace and turbomachinery industry. It is often important to predict the flow
field through the various components of a compressor in order to properly design the turbomachine.

The Turbo Workflow allows you to easily set up a turbomachinery analysis within Ansys Fluent where
you can describe the type of turbo machine and its configuration, import the geometry, and define
turbo-related mappings and physics conditions, before finally creating the turbo-specific topology and
reporting tools.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following in Ansys Fluent:

• Use the Turbo Workflow to:

– Describe and configure the turbomachinery

– Import the turbo-specific geometry

– Define the turbo-related mappings and physics conditions

– Create turbo-specific topology and reporting tools for postprocessing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 457
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

• Calculate a solution.

• Review the results of the simulation.

12.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

12.3. Problem Description

The problem to be considered is the modeling of a compressor with an inlet guide vane, rotor and
stator as shown in Figure 12.1: Case Geometry (p. 458). This geometry is the first three rows of the 4.5
stage axial Hannover compressor (Courtesy of TFD Hannover). The inlet guide vane has 26 vanes, the
rotor has 23 blades and rotates at a velocity of 17,100 RPM and the stator has 30 passages. The total
pressure at the inlet is 60,000 Pa and a radial equalibrium distribution of static pressure at the outlet,
with a static pressure of 60500 Pa at the outlet along the hub.

Figure 12.1: Case Geometry

12.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
12.4.1. Preparation

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
458 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

12.4.2.Turbo Workflow
12.4.3. Review Setup
12.4.4. Review Solution

12.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the turbo_workflow.zip file .

2. Unzip turbo_workflow.zip to your working directory.

The various components of the turbomachine (IGV.gtm , R1.gtm, and S1.gtm) can be found in
the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

12.4.2. Turbo Workflow

1. Start the Turbo Workflow.

a. In the Turbomachinery group box of the Domain ribbon tab, select Enable Workflow
under the Turbo Workflow drop-down button.

Domain → Turbomachinery → Turbo Workflow → Enable Workflow

b. In the Workflow tab, review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 459
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow com-
pleting all tasks.

2. Edit turbo-related preferences.

Ansys Fluent includes several useful settings in the Preferences dialog, some of which are specific to
the Turbo Workflow.

The Turbo Workflow partially involves setting up an association between cell and face zones and their
proper region assignments in the turbo topology. For turbo-related geometries with a large number
of components, these mappings can be more easily automated and optimized using the Preferences
dialog box where you can instruct Fluent to look for certain string configurations and in a certain order.

For the purposes of this tutorial, make the following changes to the Turbo Workflow preferences:

a. Open the Preferences dialog box and select Turbo Workflow.

File → Preferences

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
460 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 12.2: The Turbo Workflow Category of the Preferences Dialog Box

b. For Inlet Region, under Face Zone Mapping, change the default value to:
*inflow*, *in*

The change is to ensure *inflow* is searched for before *in* for inlet regions.

c. For Outlet Region, under Face Zone Mapping, change the default value to:
*outflow*, *out*

The change is to ensure *outflow* is searched for before *out* for outlet regions.

d. For Periodic 1 Region, under Face Zone Mapping, change the default value to:
*per*1*, *per*

The change is to ensure *per*1* is searched for before *per* for the first periodic region.

e. For Search Order, change the default order to:

*int*, *def*, *bld*, *blade*, *tip*2*, *tip*b*, *tip*out*, *tip*, *sym*, *per*1*, *per*2*, *per*b*, *high

Ensure the Search Order is correct and on a single line in the Preferences Dialog Dox, if using
a copy/paste command.

This change is to ensure that

• *bld* and *blade* are searched for before the tip components

• *per*1* is searched for in addition to *per*2*

• *inflow* and *outflow* are searched for before *in* and *out*

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 461
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

f. Click OK to save the preference settings, and close the dialog box.

These settings will persist until you change them in the Preferences dialog box.

3. Describe the turbomachinery component.

a. Select the Describe Component task.

b. For Component Type, select Axial Compressor.

c. For Component Name, enter hannover.

d. Keep the Number of Rows set to 3.

e. Edit the table accordingly:

i. For row 1, change the Name to igv, keep the Type as stationary, set the # Sectors
to 26, and set the End Wall Gap? to no.

ii. For row 2, change the Name to r1, keep the Type as rotating, set the # Sectors to 23,
and (since there is a tip gap in the rotor) set the End Wall Gap? to yes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
462 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

iii. For row 3, change the Name to s1, keep the Type as stationary, set the # Sectors to
30, and set the End Wall Gap? to no.

Note:

The table allows you to select a single row (or multiple rows using the Ctrl key) and
right-click to access the context menu where you can display the selected item(s)
in the graphics window, and easily change the Name, Type, # Sectors and the End
Wall Gap? settings.

You can visualize the machine you are planning to model using the schematic in the graphics
window.

f. Select Describe Component.

This will update the task and allow you to proceed onto the next task in the workflow.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

4. Define the scope of the blade-row analysis.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 463
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

In the Define Blade Row Scope step, to easily model a portion of the turbomachine, you can optionally
choose whether or not you want to include specific rows in the blade-row analysis (for example, you
can choose to model a single stage of a ten-stage compressor). To exclude any given row(s), select the
row and choose no in the Include Row? column. You can still describe the component with the full
ten stages, but in this task, you can choose whether to formally include certain rows or not. The only
caveat is that the selected included rows must be contiguous (for example, you may not want to include
the inlet or the outlet, but you should not exclude r1 alone as that would be incorrect.

For this tutorial, you will want to model the whole machine, so keep the default settings and click
Define Blade Row Scope.

5. Import the mesh file(s).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
464 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 465
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

a. Select the Import Mesh task.

b. For Mesh File Path, enter the path and file name(s) for the mesh that you want to import. For
this tutorial, there are three TurboGrid-generated GTM files: one for the inlet guide vane
(IGV.gtm), one for the rotor (R1.gtm), and one for the stator (S1.gtm).

Note:

You can also import mesh files where all components are defined in the same file.
The workflow only supports mesh files of *.msh*, .def, .cgns and *.gtm file
formats.

c. Select Import Mesh.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window, and allow you to proceed
onto the next task in the workflow.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

Note:

Alternatively, you can use the ... button next to Mesh File Path to locate your mesh
file(s), after which, the Import Mesh task automatically updates, displaying the
geometry in the graphics window.

Once the files are imported, they appear in the workflow where you can review each file and their
respective cell zones and surfaces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
466 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note:

You can display the mesh using the Mesh Display dialog, selecting faces along
with hub/blade/wall boundaries with or without the use of wildcards (such as *bld*
or *hub*) to more easily select blade and hub surfaces.

6. Associate the mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 467
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

a. Select the Associate Mesh task to review the default associations between the cell zones and
the rows.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
468 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Select the Use Wireframe for Highlighting check box to better visualize your cell zone(s).

c. Use the table to associate which fluid cell zone corresponds to a given row. Hovering over a
cell zone displays the zone in the graphics window.

d. For row 1 (igv) hold the Ctrl key and select the igv-inlet and the igv-passage-main cell
zones from the drop-down selection list.

e. For row 2 (r1) select the r1-passage-main cell zone from the drop-down selection list.

f. For row 3 (s1) select the s1-passage-main cell zone from the drop-down selection list.

g. Click Associate Mesh and proceed to the next task.

This will update the task, making the proper associations, and allow you to proceed onto the next
task in the workflow.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

7. Map regions.

a. Use the Map Regions task to review the associated face zones that have been mapped to the
corresponding cell zone.

b. Use the Select Cell Zone drop-down list to specify a cell zone.

c. Select the Use Wireframe for Highlighting check box to better visualize your cell zone(s).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 469
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

d. Use the table to review the list of associated face zone(s) for the selected cell zone. Be sure
to review all associations for all cell zones.

Based on the changes made earlier in the Preferences, the associations are properly identified.

e. Click Map Regions to perform the mapping and proceed to the next task.

8. Create the CFD model.

a. Use the Create CFD Model task to create a formal CFD model based on the geometry.

You can use this task to make copies of passages which will automatically copy, rotate, and merge
regions together. In this tutorial, you only want a single passage per row, so you can keep the #
Blades Per Sector and # Sectors to Modelset to 1 for each row.

b. Click Create CFD Model and proceed to the next task.

9. Define the turbo-related physics conditions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
470 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Use the Define Turbo Physics task to assign various turbomachinery-related physical conditions.

b. Set the Rotation Speed to 1790.708 rad/s.

c. Keep the Operating Pressure at 0 Pascal.

d. Set the Working Fluid to Air (ideal gas).

e. Click Define Turbo Physics and proceed to the next task.

10. Define the turbo-related region and zone boundary conditions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 471
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

a. Use the Define Turbo Regions and Zones task to assign various turbomachinery-related region-
based and zone-based boundary conditions.

b. Set the Inflow/Outflow Type to Pressure Inlet, Pressure Outlet.

c. Set the Gauge Total Pressure to 60,000 Pascal.

d. Set the Total Temperature to 288.15 Kelvin.

e. Set the Flow Direction to Normal to Boundary.

f. Set the Gauge Pressure to 60,500 Pascal.

g. Enable the Radial Equilibrium Pressure Distribution setting.

You can optionally use Merge Zones to choose to merge multiple blades per passage, however,
this can be ignored for this tutorial.

h. Click Define to assign the region and zone conditions, and proceed to the next task.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
472 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

11. Define the turbo-related topology.

a. Use the Define Turbo Topology task to review the region definitions for the hub, shroud,
and casing.

b. For the Topology Name, assign a name for the topology object, or use the default value.

c. Select the Use Wireframe for Highlighting check box to better visualize the topology definition.

d. Use the table to review the region assignments, hovering over the table cells to highlight them
in the graphics window for confirmation.

e. Click Define Turbo Topology to create the topology, and proceed to the next task.

12. Define turbo-specific iso-surfaces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 473
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

a. Use the Define Turbo Surfaces task to create turbo-specific iso-surfaces to facilitate postpro-
cessing.

b. Use the table to review the default surface assignments.

By default, you can create three iso-surfaces along specific constant span-wise locations, however,
you can add and remove as many as you want using the context menu.

c. For each of the default surfaces, change the Surface Name to be to include the span value
(twf_span_25, twf_span_50, and twf_span_75, respectively).

d. Click Define Turbo Surfaces to create the iso-surfaces, and proceed to the next task.

13. Create report definitions and monitors.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
474 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Use the Create Report Definitions & Monitors task to finalize the workflow and to create
postprocessing objects such as contour plots on the specified turbo-surfaces, as well as turbo-
specific report definitions and monitors, saving you the time and effort of having to manually
create them later in Fluent.

b. Use the table to review the default contour assignments. For any given Surface Name, you
can choose to Create Contours or not. For this tutorial, keep the default values.

c. Click Create to create the contour surface objects. At the same time, the workflow will also
automatically create several turbo-specific report definitions and monitors.

The solution will automatically initialize at the end of this step.

At this point, you have completed setting up the turbomachinery analysis using the Turbo Workflow.
You can now proceed with using Fluent to review the solver settings generated by the Turbo Workflow,
generate a solution, and postprocess your results.

12.4.3. Review Setup

As you review the contents of the Outline View, you can see that many of the model, material, cell
zone, and boundary condition settings have already been defined using sensible defaults through
the Turbo Workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 475
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

12.4.3.1. Models and Materials

The Turbo Workflow automatically sets the turbulence model to SST-k-omega, and assigns basic
material properties for your turbomachinery analysis.

Figure 12.3: Models and Materials Defined From the Turbo Workflow

12.4.3.2. Cell Zone and Boundary Conditions

The Turbo Workflow automatically creates appropriate cell zone conditions for the various compon-
ents.

Figure 12.4: Cell Zone Conditions Defined From the Turbo Workflow

In addition, the workflow automatically creates appropriate boundary conditions and populates
the Outline View accordingly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
476 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 12.5: Boundary Conditions Defined From the Turbo Workflow

12.4.3.3. Mesh Interfaces

The workflow also populates the Outline View with the appropriate mesh interfaces.

Figure 12.6: Mesh Interfaces Defined From the Turbo Workflow

By default, the workflow assigns all interfaces as mixing planes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 477
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

12.4.3.4. Named Expressions

The workflow also creates several named expressions, specific to the turbomachine analyses defined
in the workflow.

1. Double-click Named Expressions in the Outline View to open the Expression Manager where
you can view the expression created by the Turbo Workflow. You can also edit the expression
to make any modification for subsequent simulations. Select an expression from the Expressions
list to see details of the expression definition.

For example, select twf_p_ratio to review its details.

Figure 12.7: The Expression Manager Dialog Box

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
478 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. You can also double-click an expression in the Outline View to display the Expression dialog
box, where the expression is defined.

For example, double-click twf_p_ratio in the Outline View to display the Expression dialog box,
where the pressure ratio named expression is defined as the ratio of the outlet pressure and the inlet
pressure.

Figure 12.8: An Example of a Named Expression from the Turbo Workflow

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 479
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

12.4.4. Review Solution

12.4.4.1. Report Definitions

The workflow also automatically creates several report definitions, specific to the turbomachine
analyses defined in the workflow.

In the case of this axial compressor tutorial, the default report definitions created by the Turbo
Workflow include:

• isentropic-eff-compressor: the isentropic efficiency of the compressor

• p-ratio: the ratio of the outlet pressure to the inlet pressure

• tot-mflow-outlet: the total mass flow at the outlet

• To-inlet: the total temperature at the inlet

• To-outlet: the total temperature at the outlet

• Po-inlet: the total pressure at the inlet

• Po-outlet: the total pressure at the outlet

• mflow-outlet: the mass flow at the outlet

1. Double-click Report Definitions in the Outline View to see a summary of each report definition
in the Report Definitions dialog box.

Select p-ratio, for example, to see details of the its report definition, noting the creation and use of
named expressions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
480 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 12.9: An Example of the Report Definitions Dialog Box

2. Double-click a report definition in the Outline View to see a summary of the definition.

For example, double-click p-ratio in the Outline View to display the Expression Report Definition
dialog box where the pressure ratio between the outlet and the inlet is defined.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 481
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

Figure 12.10: An Example of a Turbo-Specific Expression Report Definition

Note that report files and report plots have also been created for use in your turbomachinery simu-
lation.

For more information about creating additional reports, see Solution of the Steady-State Mixing
Plane Model (p. 511) in Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simula-
tions (p. 495).

12.4.4.2. Solution Controls

Change the Solution Controls for the Momentum equation (setting it to 0.1) to allow for a simu-
lation run using a larger timescale.

Solution → Controls

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
482 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

12.4.4.3. Residual Monitors

No changes are required for the Residual monitor settings, however, you should note how the
settings have been changed from their default values and optimized for turbomachinery cases.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 483
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

12.4.4.4. Monitors
The workflow also creates several report files and report plots, specific to the turbomachine analyses
defined in the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
484 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

You will note the report files and plots correspond to the isentropic efficiency of the compressor,
the pressure ratio, and the total mass flow rate at the outlet.

12.4.4.5. Solution
1. Perform a hybrid initialization of the flow field using the Initialization group box of the Solution
ribbon tab.

Solution → Initialization

a. Select Hybrid from the Method list.

b. Click More Settings... to display the Hybrid Initialization dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 485
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

a. Set the Reference Frame to Absolute.

b. Under Initialization Options, select Use Specified Initial Pressure on Inlets.

c. Click Apply and close the Hybrid Initialization dialog box.

c. Note that the Initialize has already been performed as an automatic step in the Turbo
Workflow.

2. Save the case and data file (turbo_workflow.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case and data ...

3. Start the calculation in the Solution ribbon tab (Run Calculation group box).

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Change the Time Scale Factor to 10.

b. Enter 200 for No. of Iterations.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
486 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Click Calculate to begin the iterations.

d. The residuals history will be plotted in the Scaled Residuals tab in the graphics window
(Figure 12.11: Residuals (p. 487)).

Figure 12.11: Residuals

e. The isentropic efficiency of the compressor will also be plotted in a separate tab in the
graphics window (Figure 12.12: Isentropic Efficiency of the Compressor (p. 487)).

Figure 12.12: Isentropic Efficiency of the Compressor

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 487
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

f. The pressure ratio will also be plotted in a separate tab in the graphics window (Fig-
ure 12.13: Pressure Ratio (p. 488)).

Figure 12.13: Pressure Ratio

g. The total mass flow rate at the outlet will also be plotted in a separate tab in the graphics
window (Figure 12.14: Total Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet (p. 489)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
488 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

Figure 12.14: Total Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet

4. Save the case and data files (turbo_workflow.cas.h5 and turbo_workflow.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

12.5. Postprocessing
1. Review the generated contour plots (velocity magnitude, Mach number, and the total pressure)
along their span-wise locations.

Recall that the Turbo Workflow automatically creates contour plots at various span-wise locations, so
you can easily review the flow field. These plots are available in the Results section once the solution is
calculated.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 489
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

2. Review the contours of the velocity magnitude at the initial span-wise location.

Results → Graphics → Contours → twf_velmag_twf_span_25

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
490 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 12.15: Contours of Velocity Magnitude (span=25)

Perform the same operations for the other span-wise locations (twf_velmag_twf_span_50 and
twf_velmag_twf_span_75).

3. Similarly, review the contours of total pressure at the initial span-wise location (twf_tot-
press_twf_span_25).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 491
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

Figure 12.16: Contours of Total Pressure (span=25)

Perform the same operations for the other span-wise locations (twf_totpress_twf_span_50 and
twf_totpress_twf_span_75).

4. Similarly, review the contours of Mach number at the initial span-wise location
(twf_macnum_twf_span_25).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
492 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Postprocessing

Figure 12.17: Contours of Mach Number (span=25)

Perform the same operations for the other span-wise locations (twf_macnum_twf_span_50 and
twf_macnum_twf_span_75).

5. Compute and review the values for the named expressions.

In the Outline View, select all of the Named Expressions (selecting the first and then the last while holding
the Shift key) . Right-click and select Compute from the context menu. The values for the named expres-
sions will be tabulated in the console window.
------------------------------------------------------------------
Expression Value Unit
------------------------------------------------------------------
twf_OP 0 [kg m^-1 s^-2]
twf_Ps_s1_s1_s1_outflow_passage 60500 [kg m^-1 s^-2]
twf_Pt_igv_1_igv_1_igv_inflow_inblock 60000 [kg m^-1 s^-2]
twf_Tt_igv_1_igv_1_igv_inflow_inblock 288.15 [K]
twf_isentropic_eff_compressor 0.86127817 []
twf_model_num_passages 1 []
twf_omega 1790.708 [s^-1 rad]
twf_p_ratio 1.2339942 []
twf_tot_mflow_outlet -8.0308548 [kg/s]
twf_tot_num_passages 30 []
twf_vol_avg_gamma 1.3990095 []
------------------------------------------------------------------

6. Compute and review the values for the report definitions.

In the Outline View, select all of the Report Definitions (selecting the first and then the last while holding
the Shift key). Right-click and select Compute from the context menu. The values for the report definitions
will be tabulated in the console window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 493
Turbomachinery Setup and Analysis Using the Turbo Workflow

mflow-outlet
-------------------
Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
-------------------------------- -------------------
s1:s1-outflow-passage -0.26608587

Po-outlet
-------------------
Mass-Weighted Average [Pa]
-------------------------------- -------------------
s1:s1-outflow-passage 74276.727

Po-inlet
-------------------
Mass-Weighted Average [Pa]
-------------------------------- -------------------
igv.1:igv-inflow-inblock 60000

To-outlet
-------------------
Mass-Weighted Average [K]
-------------------------------- -------------------
s1:s1-outflow-passage 309.24999

To-inlet
-------------------
Mass-Weighted Average [K]
-------------------------------- -------------------
igv.1:igv-inflow-inblock 288.15

tot-mflow-outlet
-------------------
Expression [kg/s]
-------------------------------- -------------------
tot-mflow-outlet -7.9825762

p-ratio
-------------------
Expression
-------------------------------- -------------------
p-ratio 1.2379454

isentropic-eff-compressor
-------------------
Expression
-------------------------------- -------------------
isentropic-eff-compressor 0.85721193

7. Save the case and data files (turbo_workflow.cas.h5 and turbo_workflow.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

12.6. Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to use the Ansys Fluent Turbo Workflow to more easily set up a turbo-
based fluid flow simulation to evaluate the performance of a compressor. Note that additional analysis
of this same geometry can be found in Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient
Simulations (p. 495).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
494 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 13: Modeling Blade Row Interaction using
Steady-State and Transient Simulations
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
13.1. Introduction
13.2. Prerequisites
13.3. Problem Description
13.4. Setup and Solution
13.5. Summary

13.1. Introduction
In this tutorial, you will setup a fluid flow simulation to evaluate the performance of a 1.5 stage com-
pressor using a steady-state mixing plane simulation and then a transient pitch-scale simulation.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Set up a mixing plane and pitch scale turbo interface models to simulate flow in a compressor.

• Describe wall motion and other boundary conditions.

• Specify appropriate solver settings.

• Add and monitor expressions.

• Calculate expressions and display contours.

13.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

13.3. Problem Description

The problem to be considered is the modeling of a compressor with an inlet guide vane, rotor and
stator as shown in Figure 13.1: Case Geometry (p. 496). This geometry is the first three rows of the 4.5
stage axial Hannover compressor (Courtesy of TFD Hannover). The inlet guide vane has 26 vanes, the
rotor has 23 blades and rotates at a velocity of 17100 RPM and the stator has 30 passages. The total
pressure at the inlet is 60,000 pa and a gauge total pressure of 60500 Pa at the outlet. A steady-state

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 495
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

mixing plane and a transient rotor/stator pitch-scale simulations will be performed to determine the
efficiency of the compressor.

Figure 13.1: Case Geometry

13.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
13.4.1. Preparation
13.4.2. Mesh
13.4.3. Solver Settings for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model
13.4.4. Models
13.4.5. Materials
13.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model
13.4.7. Operating Conditions
13.4.8. Boundary Conditions for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model
13.4.9. Solution of the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model
13.4.10. Postprocessing of the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model
13.4.11. Solver Settings for the Transient Pitch Scale Model
13.4.12. Reference Values
13.4.13. Interface Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model
13.4.14. Cell Zone Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
496 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

13.4.15. Boundary Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

13.4.16. Solution Settings for the Transient Pitch Scale Model
13.4.17. Postprocessing for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

13.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the hannover_compressor.zip file .

2. Unzip hannover_compressor.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file hannover_1.5Stage.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

13.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file hannover_1.5Stage.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

As Fluent reads the mesh file, it will report the progress in the console.

1. Define the units for the model.

Setup → General → Units...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 497
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

a. Select angular-velocity from the Quantities selection list.

b. Select rev/min from the Units selection list.

c. Close the Set Units dialog box.

13.4.3. Solver Settings for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model

In the Solver group box of the Physics ribbon tab, retain the default selection of the steady pressure-
based solver.

Physics → Solver

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
498 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

13.4.4. Models
1. Set up your models for the CFD simulation using the Models group box of the Physics ribbon
tab.

2. Enable heat transfer by activating the energy equation.

Setup → Models → Energy On

3. Enable the - SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

a. Retain the default k-omega SST turbulence model.

b. Click OK.

Compared to other two-equation models, the - SST turbulence model effectively predicts flow sep-
aration in turbomachinery, allowing for accurate evaluation of performance.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 499
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

13.4.5. Materials
1. Set the properties for air, the default fluid material.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air Edit...

a. Select ideal-gas from the Density drop-down list.

b. Click Change/Create to save these settings.

c. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

13.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model
All fluid zones must be reviewed to ensure that the Rotation-Axis is specified correctly, as well as,
the Rotational Velocity for rotating zones.

1. Set the cell zone conditions for the b-rotor1.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → b-rotor1 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
500 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Frame Motion.

b. Ensure that the correct Rotation-Axis is specified.

c. For Rotational Velocity > Speed (rpm), specify 17100.

d. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box .

2. Ensure that the correct Rotation-Axis is specified for the a-igv and c-stator1 zones.

13.4.7. Operating Conditions

1. Set the operating pressure.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Operating Conditions...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 501
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

The Operating Conditions dialog box can also be accessed from the Cell Zone Conditions task page.

a. Enter 0 Pa for Operating Pressure.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

13.4.8. Boundary Conditions for the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model

1. Set the boundary conditions for the inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
502 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a.

i. Enter a value of 60000 Pa for Gauge Total Pressure.

ii. Enter a value of 58000 Pa for Supersonic/Initial Gauge Pressure.

iii. Select Normal to Boundary for the Direction Specification Method.

iv. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in
the Turbulence group box.

v. Retain the default value of 5% for Turbulent Intensity and 10 for Turbulent Viscosity
Ratio.

vi. Click the Thermal tab and enter 288.15 K for Temperature.

vii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for the outlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 503
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

a.

i. Enter a value of 60500 Pa for Gauge Pressure.

ii. Select From Neighbouring Cell for the Backflow Direction Specification Method.

iii. Enable Radial Equilibrium Pressure Distribution and Average Pressure Specification.

iv. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in
the Turbulence group box.

v. Retain the default value of 5% for Turbulent Intensity and 10 for Turbulent Viscosity
Ratio.

vi. Click the Thermal tab and enter 300 K for Temperature.

vii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
504 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3. By default, when the fluid zone is rotating, all the walls attached to the fluid zone will be rotating.
Since the rotor has a tip gap and the shroud is stationary in the absolute frame, we need to
modify the wall boundary condition for the rotor shroud. Set the wall boundary condition for rotor.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → rotor1-shroud Edit...

a.

i. Select Moving Wall for the Wall Motion.

ii. Select Absolute and Rotational for the Motion.

iii. Ensure that the correct Rotation-Axis is specified.

iv. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

4. Set the rotational periodic boundary conditions for the inlet guide vane, rotor and stator

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Symmetry → periodic_igv-per-side1_igv-per-side2 and

symmetry-15 Periodic...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 505
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
506 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a.

i. Enter a value of periodic_igv for Zone Name.

ii. Select Conformal for the Creation Method.

iii. Select Rotational as the Type for the Periodic Boundary Condition.

iv. Ensure that the correct Rotation-Axis is specified.

v. Click Create.

Similarly, create the periodic conditions for the rotor and stator.

a. Create the periodic_rotor by selecting periodic_rotor1-per-sdie2_rotor1-per-side-

1 and symmetry-18.

b. Create the periodic_stator by selecting periodic_stator1-per-side-1_stator1-per-

side2 and symmetry-27.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 507
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

5. Create a mixing plane interfaces between the inlet guide vane and rotor and between the rotor
and stator.

a. Enable the Turbo Models and define the topology of the flow domain.

Domain → Turbomachinery and select Turbo Models.

b. Open the Create/Edit Turbo Interfaces dialog box.

Domain → Turbomachinery → Turbo Create...

c. Create a mesh interface for the rotor tip gap.

i. Enter rotor1-tipgap-int for Interface Name.

ii. Select tip-r1-side1 for Interface Zone Side 1 and tip-r1-side2 for Interface Zone
Side 2.

iii. Click Create/Edit.

d. Create a mesh interface between the inlet guide vane and the rotor.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
508 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enter mpm1 for the Mesh Interface name.

ii. Select igv-r1-upstream for Interface Zone Side 1 and igv-r1-downstream for
Interface Zone Side 2.

iii. Select General Turbo Interface from the Interface Options group box.

iv. Select Mixing Plane for the Pitch-Change Types.

v. Click Create/Edit.

e. Create a mesh interface between the rotor and the stator.

i. Enter mpm2 for the Mesh Interface name.

ii. Select r1-s1-upstream for Interface Zone Side 1 and r1-s1-downstream for Inter-
face Zone Side 2.

iii. Select General Turbo Interface from the Interface Options group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 509
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

iv. Select Mixing Plane for the Pitch-Change Types.

v. Click Create/Edit.

vi. Close the Create/Edit Turbo Interfaces dialog box.

6. Define the Turbo Topology

Domain → Turbomachinery → Turbo Topology...

a. Enter topo1 for the Turbo Topology Name name.

b. Select igv-hub, rotor1-hub and stator1-hub for the Surfaces.

c. Select Shroud in the Boundaries group box and then select igv-shroud, rotor1-shroud
and stator1-shroud for the Surfaces.

d. Select Theta Periodic in the Boundaries group box and then select periodic_igv, peri-
odic_rotor and periodic_stator for the Surfaces.

e. Select Inlet in the Boundaries group box and then select inlet for the Surfaces.

f. Select Outlet in the Boundaries group box and then select outlet for the Surfaces.

g. Select Blade in the Boundaries group box and then select igv-vane, rotor1-blade and
stator1-vane for the Surfaces.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
510 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

h. Click Define and close the Turbo Topology dialog box.

13.4.9. Solution of the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model

1. Specify the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 511
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

Retain the default selection of Coupled from the Scheme drop-down list.

2. Create a surface report definition for quantities needed to calculate the compressor efficiency.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Area-Weighted Average...

a. Enter ave_po_in for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. Select Pressure... and Total Pressure from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. Select Inlet from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

Similarly, create surface report definitions for:

a. Area-Weighted Average... Total Pressure at the Outlet ave_po_out.

b. Area-Weighted Average... Total Temperature at the Inlet ave_to_in.

c. Area-Weighted Average... Total Temperature at the Outlet ave_to_out.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
512 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Mass Flow Rate... at the stator Outlet for one passage mfr_1psg_out.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass Flow Rate...

3. Create expression report definition for pressure ratio.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Expression...

a. Enter p-ratio for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. You can insert the report definitions you previously created using the Report Definitions drop-
down list under Select Operand Field Functions from and clicking Select.

c. Enter the expression {ave_po_out}/{ave_po_in}.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 513
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

d. Select Report Plot

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Expression Report
Definition dialog box.

4. Create an expression report definition for total mass out flow.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Expression...

a. Enter mfr_out_360 for Name.

b. Enter the expression {mfr_1psg_out}*30.

c. Select Report Plot

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
514 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click OK to save the expression and close the Expression Report Definition dialog box.

5. Create an expression report definition for compressor efficiency.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Expression...

a. Enter iso_efficency for Name.

b. Enter the expression (({ave_to_in}*({p-ratio}**(0.4/1.4)-1))/({ave_to_out}-

{ave_to_in}))*100.

c. Select Report Plot.

d. Click OK to save the expression and close the Expression Report Definition dialog box.

6. Specify the convergence criteria to be used for solution monitoring.

Solution → Reports → Residuals

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 515
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

a. Select Show Advanced Options to open the panel.

b. Select Scale and Compute Local Scale in the Residual Values group box.

c. Select local scaling from the Reporting Option drop-down list.

d. Select Absolute under Convergence Criterion.

e. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

7. Initialize the flow field using the Initialization group box of the Solution ribbon tab.

Solution → Initialization → More Settings...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
516 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Absolute in the Reference Frame group box.

b. Select Use Specified Initial Pressure on Inlets and click Apply to close the Hybrid Initializ-
ation dialog box.

c. Click Initialize.

8. Save the case file (hannover_1.5Stage.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

9. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 10 for Time Scale Factor.

b. Enter 100 for Number of Iterations.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 517
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

c. Click Calculate.

d. As the solution progresses, the plots of pressure ratio, outlet mass flow rate and the efficiency
all flatten out indicating the solution has converged.

Figure 13.2: Pressure Ratio

Figure 13.3: Outlet Mass Flow Rate

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
518 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 13.4: Efficiency

13.4.10. Postprocessing of the Steady-State Mixing Plane Model

The flow shows the typical behavior when solving the blade row using the mixing-plane model, the
wake from the upstream rows and the potential flow from the downstream rows are mixed out across
the interface.

1. Create spanwise surfaces for the inlet guide vane, rotor and stator.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 519
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

a. Create inlet guide vane spanwise surface

i. Enter igv-span=0.5 for Name.

ii. Select Mesh... and Spanwise Coordinate from the drop-down lists.

iii. Click Compute.

iv. Enter 0.5 for Iso-Values.

v. Select a-igv from the From Zones selection list.

vi. Click Create.

vii. In a similar manner, create spanwise surfaces for the rotor-span=0.5 and stator-
span=0.5 and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

2. Display velocity magnitude contours on the mid span.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
520 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 13.5: Contours of Velocity Magnitude

a. Enter contour-span=0.5-velmag for Contour Name.

b. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

c. Enable the Contour Lines option in the Options group box.

d. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select igv-span=0.5, rotor-span=0.5 and stator-span=0.5 from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Select Draw Mesh.

g. In the Mesh Display dialog box that opens, in the Options list ensure Faces are selected.

h. Select igv-hub, igv-vane, rotor1-blade, rotor1-hub, stator1-hub and stator1-

vane from the Surfaces selection list.

i. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

j. Click Compute.

k. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

3. Display static pressure contours on the mid span.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 521
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

Figure 13.6: Contours of Static Pressure

a. Enter contour-span=0.5-pressure for Contour Name

b. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

c. Enable the Contour Lines option in the Options group box.

d. Ensure Pressure... and Static Pressure are selected from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select igv-span=0.5, rotor-span=0.5 and stator-span=0.5 from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Select Draw Mesh.

g. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

h. Click Compute.

i. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

4. Display static temperature contours on the mid span.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
522 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 13.7: Contours of Static Temperature

a. Enter contour-span=0.5-temperature for Contour Name

b. Disable the Global Range option in the Options group box.

c. Enable the Contour Lines option in the Options group box.

d. Ensure Temperature... and Static Temperature are selected from the Contours of drop-down
lists.

e. Select igv-span=0.5, rotor-span=0.5 and stator-span=0.5 from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Select Draw Mesh.

g. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

h. Click Compute.

i. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

5. Save the case and data files (hannover_1.5Stage.cas.h5 and hannov-

er_1.5Stage.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

13.4.11. Solver Settings for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

In the Solver group box of the Physics ribbon tab, select transient.

Physics → Solver

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 523
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

13.4.12. Reference Values

Set the reference values as the inlet conditions. This will be needed to calculate entropy.

Setup → Reference Values

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
524 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

13.4.13. Interface Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

1. Modify the mixing plane interfaces between the inlet guide vane and rotor and between the rotor
and stator.

Setup → Mesh Interfaces → mpm1 Edit...

a. Create a mesh interface between the inlet guide vane and the rotor.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 525
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

i. Enter ps1 for the Mesh Interface name.

ii. Select Pitch-Scale for the Pitch-Change Types.

iii. Click Create/Edit.

b. Create a mesh interface between the rotor and the stator.

i. Select the mpm2 interface.

ii. Enter ps2 for the Mesh Interface name.

iii. Select Pitch-Scale for the Pitch-Change Types.

iv. Click Create/Edit.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
526 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

v. Close the Create/Edit Turbo Interfaces dialog box.

13.4.14. Cell Zone Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model
The rotor zone needs to modified to use mesh motion.

1. Modify the cell zone conditions for the b-rotor1.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → b-rotor1 Edit...

a. Click Copy to Mesh Motion.

b. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

13.4.15. Boundary Conditions for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

The pressure-average option is not recommended for unsteady simulations and may result in non-
physical pressure feedback.

1. Modify the Outlet boundary condition.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 527
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

a.

i. Disable the Average Pressure Specification.

ii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

13.4.16. Solution Settings for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

1. Specify the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
528 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Ensure Coupled is selected from the Scheme drop-down list in the Pressure-Velocity Coupling
group box.

b. Select Second Order Implicit from the Transient Formulation drop-down list.

2. Modify the report plots to use an exponential axis for the flow time.

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → iso_effiiciency-rplot Edit...

a. Ensure that Get Data Every in the Options group box is set to every time-step.

a. Click Axes... in the Plot Window group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 529
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

b. Select X in the Axis group box.

c. Select Exponential and set the Precision to 2.

d. Click Apply and close the Axes - Report Plots dialog box.

e. Click OK to close the Edit Report Plot dialog box.

Similarly, update the report plots for the mfr_out_360-rplot and p-ratio-rplot report plots.

3. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Select Period-Based from the drop-down list for Method in the Time Advancement group
box.

b. The rotor is running at 17100 rpm and has 23 passages. Therefore the period of the rotor is
0.000152555 seconds. Enter 0.000152555 for Period (s) in the Parameters group box.

c. Enter 40 for Time Steps per Period.

d. Enter 5 for the Total Periods.

e. Enter 10 for Max Iterations/Time Steps.

f. Click Calculate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
530 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

g. The plots of pressure ratio, outlet mass flow rate and the efficiency display the transient nature
of the solution. The fluctuation in the efficiency, mass flow rate and pressure-ratio is expected,
and is due to the blade passing interaction.

Figure 13.8: Pressure Ratio

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 531
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

Figure 13.9: Outlet Mass Flow Rate

Figure 13.10: Efficiency

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
532 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Save the case and data files (hannover_1.5Stage_trs.cas.h5 and hannov-

er_1.5Stage_trs.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

13.4.17. Postprocessing for the Transient Pitch Scale Model

Unlike in the steady-state mixing plane solution in transient simulation, the wake will cross the interface,
but since the pitch-scale model approximation is used we see discontinuity in the wake contours.
This can be seen by plotting contours of entropy.

1. Display entropy contours on the mid span.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Figure 13.11: Contours of Entropy

a. Enter contour-entropy for Contour Name

b. Disable the Global Range, Auto Range and Clip to Range option in the Options group box.

c. Select Temperature and Entropy from the Contours of drop-down list

d. Select igv-span=0.5, rotor-span=0.5 and stator-span=0.5 from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Compute.

f. Enter -7 for the Min and 80 for the Max.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 533
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

g. View → Display → Periodic Instancing...

i. Select a-igv.

ii. Select igv-span=0.5 from the Associated Surfaces selection list.

iii. Enter 2 for the Number of Repeats.

iv. Click Save and then click Display.

v. Select b-rotor1.

vi. Select rotor-span=0.5 from the Associated Surfaces selection list.

vii. Keep 23 for the Number of Repeats.

viii.Click Save and then click Display.

ix. Select c-stator1.

x. Select stator-span=0.5 from the Associated Surfaces selection list.

xi. Enter 2 for the Number of Repeats.

xii. Click Save and then click Display.

xiii. Close the Periodic Instancing... dialog box.

h. Click Save/Display.

2. Display velocity magnitude contours on the mid span.

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-span=0.5-velmag Display

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
534 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 13.12: Contours of Velocity Magnitude

a. Disable the Contour Lines in the Options group box.

b. Click Compute.

c. Click Save/Display.

3. Display static pressure contours on the mid span.

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-span=0.5-pressure Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 535
Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations

Figure 13.13: Contours of Static Pressure

a. Disable the Contour Lines in the Options group box.

b. Click Compute.

c. Click Save/Display.

4. Display static temperature contours on the mid span.

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-span=0.5-temperature Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
536 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 13.14: Contours of Static Temperature

a. Disable the Contour Lines in the Options group box.

b. Click Compute.

c. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

13.5. Summary
In this tutorial you completed a fluid flow simulation to evaluate the performance of a compressor.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 537
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
538 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 14: Using Sliding Meshes
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
14.1. Introduction
14.2. Prerequisites
14.3. Problem Description
14.4. Setup and Solution
14.5. Summary

14.1. Introduction
The analysis of turbomachinery often involves the examination of the transient effects due to flow in-
teraction between the stationary components and the rotating blades. In this tutorial, the sliding mesh
capability of Ansys Fluent is used to analyze the transient flow in an axial compressor stage. The rotor-
stator interaction is modeled by allowing the mesh associated with the rotor blade row to rotate relative
to the stationary mesh associated with the stator blade row.

For turbomachinery applications, it is recommended that connecting rotating and stationary zones
utilizes General Turbo Interfaces (GTI) which can handle any pitch-change model. To know more about
GTI interfaces see tutorial Modeling Blade Row Interaction using Steady-State and Transient Simulations
in the Fluent Tutorials (p. 495). This tutorial will show an alternative way of connecting rotating and sta-
tionary zones (using periodic repeat interface). While this tutorial is using a turbomachinery application
the outlined procedure can be used for other flow applications that require the connection of similar-
pitch rotating and stationary zones.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Create periodic zones.

• Set up the transient solver and cell zone and boundary conditions for a sliding mesh simulation.

• Set up the mesh interfaces for a periodic sliding mesh model.

• Sample the time-dependent data and view the mean value.

14.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 539
Using Sliding Meshes

14.3. Problem Description

The model represents a single-stage axial compressor composed of two blade rows. The first row is the
rotor with 16 blades, which is operating at a rotational speed of 37,500 rpm. The second row is the
stator with 32 blades. The blade counts are such that the domain is rotationally periodic, with a periodic
angle of 22.5 degrees. This enables you to model only a portion of the geometry, namely, one rotor
blade and two stator blades. Due to the high Reynolds number of the flow and the relative coarseness
of the mesh (both blade rows are composed of only 13,856 cells total), the analysis will employ the in-
viscid model, so that Ansys Fluent is solving the Euler equations.

Figure 14.1: Rotor-Stator Problem Description

14.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
14.4.1. Preparation
14.4.2. Mesh
14.4.3. General Settings
14.4.4. Models
14.4.5. Materials
14.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions
14.4.7. Boundary Conditions
14.4.8. Operating Conditions
14.4.9. Mesh Interfaces
14.4.10. Solution
14.4.11. Postprocessing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
540 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

14.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the sliding_mesh.zip file .

2. Unzip sliding_mesh.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file axial_comp.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

14.4.2. Mesh
1. Read in the mesh file axial_comp.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

14.4.3. General Settings

1. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and will report the progress in the console. Ensure
that the reported minimum volume is a positive number.

Warnings will be displayed regarding unassigned interface zones, resulting in the failure of the mesh
check. You do not need to take any action at this point, as this issue will be rectified when you define
the mesh interfaces in a later step.

2. Examine the mesh (Figure 14.2: Rotor-Stator Display (p. 542)).

Orient the view to display the mesh as shown in Figure 14.2: Rotor-Stator Display (p. 542). The inlet of
the rotor mesh is colored blue, the interface between the rotor and stator meshes is colored yellow,
and the outlet of the stator mesh is colored red.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 541
Using Sliding Meshes

Figure 14.2: Rotor-Stator Display

3. Define the units for the model.

Setup → General → Units...

a. Select angular-velocity from the Quantities selection list.

b. Select rev/min from the Units selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
542 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Select pressure from the Quantities selection list.

Scroll down the Quantities list to find pressure.

d. Select atm from the Units selection list.

e. Close the Set Units dialog box.

4. Change zones rotor-per-1 and rotor-per-3 from wall zones to periodic zones.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall

a. Click rotor-per-1 to select the tree item.

b. While holding down the Ctrl key, click rotor-per-3 to add the tree item to the selection.

Note:

The first zone that is selected will be used as the periodic zone, while the second
zone will be used as the shadow zone. Although it is not significant in this case,
the order in which the two zone pairs are selected may affect simulation results.

c. Right-click the selected tree items and select Periodic... to open the Create Periodic dialog
box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 543
Using Sliding Meshes

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
544 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Select Rotational in the Type group box.

e. Click Create to close the Create Periodic dialog box.

5. Similarly, change the following wall zone pairs to periodic zones:

Zone Pairs Respective Zone IDs

rotor-per-2 and rotor-per-4 12 and 11
stator-per-1 and stator-per-3 26 and 27
stator-per-2 and stator-per-4 24 and 25

14.4.4. Models
1. Enable the inviscid model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 545
Using Sliding Meshes

Setup → Models → Viscous Edit...

a. Select Inviscid in the Model list.

b. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

14.4.5. Materials
1. Specify air (the default material) as the fluid material, using the ideal gas law to compute density.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
546 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default entry of air in the Name text entry field.

b. Select ideal-gas from the Density drop-down list in the Properties group box.

c. Retain the default values for all other properties.

d. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

As reported in the console, Ansys Fluent will automatically enable the energy equation, since this is
required when using the ideal gas law to compute the density of the fluid.

2. Specify that it is a transient problem, to allow mesh motion.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 547
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Retain the default selection of Pressure-Based in the Type list.

b. Select Transient in the Time list.

14.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
548 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1. Set the cell zone conditions for the fluid in the rotor (fluid-rotor).

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → fluid-rotor → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 549
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enable Mesh Motion.

b. Click the Mesh Motion tab.

c. Retain the default values of (0, 0, 1) for X, Y, and Z in the Rotation-Axis Direction group box.

d. Enter 37500 rpm for Speed in the Rotational Velocity group box.

e. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

2. Set the cell zone conditions for the fluid in the stator (fluid-stator).

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → fluid-stator → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
550 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default values of (0, 0, 1) for X, Y, and Z in the Rotation-Axis Direction group box.

b. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

14.4.7. Boundary Conditions

1. Setup the rotor-inlet boundary condition.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → rotor-inlet → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 551
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enter 1.0 atm for Gauge Total Pressure.

b. Enter 0.9 atm for Supersonic/Initial Gauge Pressure.

For information about the Supersonic/Initial Gauge Pressure, see the Fluent User's Guide.

c. Click the Thermal tab and enter 288 K for Total Temperature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
552 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click Apply and close the Pressure Inlet dialog box.

2. Enter stator-outlet into the Zone field to filter the zone list.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → stator-outlet → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 553
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enter 1.08 atm for Gauge Pressure.

b. Enable Radial Equilibrium Pressure Distribution.

c. Click the Thermal tab and enter 288 K for Backflow Total Temperature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
554 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

Note:

The momentum settings and temperature you input at the pressure outlet will be used
only if flow enters the domain through this boundary. It is important to set reasonable
values for these downstream scalar values, in case flow reversal occurs at some point
during the calculation.

3. Retain the default boundary conditions for all wall zones.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 555
Using Sliding Meshes

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → rotor-blade-1 → Edit...

Note:

For wall zones, Ansys Fluent always imposes zero velocity for the normal velocity
component, which is required whether or not the fluid zone is moving. This condition
is all that is required for an inviscid flow, as the tangential velocity is computed as part
of the solution.

14.4.8. Operating Conditions

1. Set the operating pressure.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Operating Conditions...

a. Enter 0 atm for Operating Pressure.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

Since you have specified the boundary condition inputs for pressure in terms of absolute pressures,
you have to set the operating pressure to zero. Boundary condition inputs for pressure should always
be relative to the value used for operating pressure.

14.4.9. Mesh Interfaces

1. Disable the one-to-one interface creation method using the following text command, so that you
can create a mesh interface that uses the Periodic Repeats option.
define/mesh-interfaces/one-to-one-pairing? no

2. Create a periodic mesh interface between the rotor and stator mesh regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
556 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Open the Mesh Interfaces dialog box.

Setup → Mesh Interfaces New...

b. Click Manual Create... to open the Create/Edit Mesh Interfaces dialog box.

c. Enter int for Mesh Interface.

d. Enable Periodic Repeats in the Interface Options group box.

Enabling this option, allows Ansys Fluent to treat the interface between the sliding and non-sliding
zones as periodic where the two zones do not overlap.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 557
Using Sliding Meshes

e. Select rotor-interface from the Interface Zones Side 1 selection list.

Note:

In general, when one interface zone is smaller than the other, it is recommended
that you choose the smaller zone as Interface Zone 1. In this case, since both zones
are approximately the same size, the order is not significant.

f. Select stator-interface from the Interface Zones Side 2 selection list.

g. Click Create/Edit... and close the Create/Edit Mesh Interfaces dialog box.

h. Close the Mesh Interfaces dialog box.

3. Check the mesh again to verify that the warnings displayed earlier have been resolved.

Domain → Mesh → Perform Mesh Check

14.4.10. Solution
1. Set the solution parameters.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
558 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Select Coupled from the Pressure-Velocity Coupling group box.

2. Change the Solution Controls

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 559
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enter 0.5 for Momentum and Pressure in the Explicit Relaxation Factors group box.

b. Enter 0.9 for Temperature in the Under-Relaxation Factors group box.

3. Enable the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
560 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Ensure that the Plot is selected in the Options group box.

b. Enable Show Advanced Options and select relative from the Convergence Criterion drop-
down list.

c. Enter 0.01 for Relative Criteria for each Residual (continuity, x-velocity, y-velocity, z-velo-
city, and energy).

d. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

4. Enable the plotting of mass flow rate at the inlet (rotor-inlet).

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass Flow Rate...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 561
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enter surf-mon-1 for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Enter rotor-inlet in the Surfaces field to filter the list.

d. Select rotor-inlet from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

surf-mon-1-rplot and surf-mon-1-rfile that are automatically generated by Fluent appear in

the tree (under Solution/Monitors/Report Plots and Solution/Monitors/Report Files, respect-
ively).

5. Enable the plotting of mass flow rate at the outlet (stator-outlet).

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass Flow Rate...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
562 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter surf-mon-2 for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Enter stator-outlet in the Surfaces field to filter the list.

d. Select stator-outlet from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

surf-mon-2-rplot and surf-mon-2-rfile that are automatically generated by Fluent appear in

the tree (under Solution/Monitors/Report Plots and Solution/Monitors/Report Files, respect-
ively).

6. Enable the plotting of the area-weighted average of the static pressure at the interface (stator-
interface).

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Area-Weighted Average...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 563
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enter surf-mon-3 for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Retain the default selection of Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Field Variable drop-
down lists.

d. Enter stator-interface in the Surfaces field to filter the list.

e. Select stator-interface from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

surf-mon-3-rplot and surf-mon-3-rfile that are automatically generated by Fluent appear in

the tree (under Solution/Monitors/Report Plots and Solution/Monitors/Report Files, respect-
ively).

7. Initialize the solution using the values at the inlet (rotor-inlet).

Solution → Initialization → Options...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
564 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select rotor-inlet from the Compute from drop-down list.

b. Select Absolute in the Reference Frame list.

c. Click Initialize.

8. Save the initial case file (axial_comp.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

9. Run the calculation for one revolution of the rotor.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 565
Using Sliding Meshes

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 6.6667e-6 s for Time Step Size.

The time step is set such that the passing of a single rotor blade is divided into 15 time steps. There
are 16 blades on the rotor. Therefore, in each time step the rotor rotates 360/16/15=1.5 degrees.
With a rotational speed of 37,500 rpm (225,000 deg/sec), 1.5 degrees of rotation takes 1.5 / 2.25e5
= 6.6667e-6 sec.

b. Enter 240 for Number of Time Steps.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
566 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

There are 16 blades on the rotor, and each rotor blade period corresponds to 15 time steps (see
above). Therefore, a complete revolution of the rotor will take 16*15=240 time steps.

c. Retain the default setting of 20 for Max Iterations/Time Step.

d. Click Calculate.

The residuals jump at the beginning of each time step and then fall at least two to three orders of
magnitude. Also, the relative convergence criteria is achieved before reaching the maximum iteration
limit (20) for each time step, indicating the limit does not need to be increased.

Figure 14.3: Residual History for the First Revolution of the Rotor

10. Examine the flow variable histories for the first revolution of the rotor (Figure 14.4: Mass Flow Rate
at the Inlet During the First Revolution (p. 568), Figure 14.5: Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet During
the First Revolution (p. 569), and Figure 14.6: Static Pressure at the Interface During the First Revolu-
tion (p. 570)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 567
Using Sliding Meshes

Figure 14.4: Mass Flow Rate at the Inlet During the First Revolution

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
568 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 14.5: Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet During the First Revolution

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 569
Using Sliding Meshes

Figure 14.6: Static Pressure at the Interface During the First Revolution

The flow variable histories show that the large variations in flow rate and interface pressure that occur
early in the calculation are greatly reduced as time-periodicity is approached.

11. Save the case and data files (axial_comp-0240.cas.h5 and axial_comp-0240.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Note:

It is a good practice to save the case file whenever you are saving the data file
especially for sliding mesh model. This is because the case file contains the mesh
information, which is changing with time.

Note:

For transient-state calculations, you can add the character string %t to the file name
so that the iteration number is automatically appended to the name (for example, by
entering axial_comp-%t for the File Name in the Select File dialog box, Ansys
Fluent will save files with the names axial_comp-0240.cas.h5 and axial_comp-
0240.dat.h5).

12. Rename the report output file in preparation for further iterations.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
570 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → surf-mon-1-rfile Edit...

a. Enter surf-mon-1b.out for Output File Base Name.

b. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

13. Similarly, change the output file names for the surf-mon-2-rfile and surf-mon-3-rfile report file
definitions to surf-mon-2b.out and surf-mon-3b.out, respectively.

14. Continue the calculation for 720 more time steps to simulate three more revolutions of the rotor.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 571
Using Sliding Meshes

15. Examine the flow variable histories for the next three revolutions of the rotor to verify that the
solution is time-periodic (Figure 14.7: Mass Flow Rate at the Inlet During the Next 3 Revolu-
tions (p. 573) Figure 14.8: Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet During the Next 3 Revolutions (p. 574), and
Figure 14.9: Static Pressure at the Interface During the Next 3 Revolutions (p. 575)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
572 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 14.7: Mass Flow Rate at the Inlet During the Next 3 Revolutions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 573
Using Sliding Meshes

Figure 14.8: Mass Flow Rate at the Outlet During the Next 3 Revolutions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
574 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 14.9: Static Pressure at the Interface During the Next 3 Revolutions

16. Save the case and data files (axial_comp-960.cas.h5 and axial_comp-960.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

17. Change the file names for surf-mon-1b.out, surf-mon-2b.out, and surf-mon-3b.out to surf-
mon-1c.out, surf-mon-2c.out, and surf-mon-3c.out, respectively (as described in a
previous step), in preparation for further iterations.

18. Add a point at the interface of the stator.

Results → Surface → Create → Point...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 575
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enter -0.02 for x, -0.08 for y, and -0.036 for z in the Point Surface dialog box.

b. Enter point-1 for Name.

c. Click Create and close the Point Surface dialog box.

19. Enable plotting of the static pressure at a point on the stator interface (point-1).

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Vertex Average...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
576 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter surf-mon-4 for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Retain the defaults of Pressure and Static Pressure for Field Variable.

d. Enter point-1 in the Surfaces field to filter the list.

e. Select point-1 from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

20. Continue the calculation for one final revolution of the rotor, while saving data samples for the
postprocessing of the time statistics.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 577
Using Sliding Meshes

a. Enter 240 for Number of Time Steps.

b. Enable Data Sampling for Time Statistics in the Options group box.

Enabling Data Sampling for Time Statistics causes Ansys Fluent to calculate and store mean and
root-mean-square (RMS) values of various quantities and field functions over the calculation interval.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
578 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Click Calculate.

21. Save the case and data files (axial_comp-1200.cas.h5 and axial_comp-1200.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Figure 14.10: Static Pressure at a Point on The Stator Interface During the Final Revolution

14.4.11. Postprocessing
1. Examine the vertex-averaged static pressure at the stator during the final revolution of the rotor
(as calculated from surf-mon-4.out), and plot the data.

Results → Plots → FFT...

a. Click the Load Input File... button to open the Select File dialog box.

i. Select All Files from the Files of type: drop-down list.

ii. Select surf-mon-4-rfile.out from the list of files.

iii. Click OK to close the Select File dialog box.

b. Click the Plot/Modify Input Signal... button to open the Plot/Modify Input Signal dialog
box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 579
Using Sliding Meshes

i. Enable Subtract Mean Value in the Options group box.

ii. Enter flow-time as the X Axis Label.

iii. Select flow-time in the X Axis Variable drop-down list.

iv. Click Apply/Plot.

v. Close the Plot/Modify Input Signal dialog box.

c. Click Plot FFT in the Fourier Transform dialog box.

d. Click Axes... to open the Axes - Fourier Transform dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
580 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Select exponential from the Type drop-down list, and set Precision to 1 in the Number
Format group box.

f. Click Apply and close the Axes - Fourier Transform dialog box.

g. Click Plot FFT and close the Fourier Transform dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 581
Using Sliding Meshes

Figure 14.11: FFT of Static Pressure at the Stator

The FFT plot clearly shows that the pressure fluctuations due to interaction at the interface are
dominated by the rotor and stator blade passing frequencies (which are 10 kHz and 20 kHz, re-
spectively) and their higher harmonics.

2. Display contours of the mean static pressure on the walls of the axial compressor.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
582 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter contour-mean-static-pressure for Contour Name.

b. Ensure Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Unsteady Statistics... and Mean Static Pressure from the Contours of drop-down
lists.

e. Select Wall from the Surface Types selection list.

Scroll down the Surfaces selection list to find Wall.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

g. Rotate the view to get the display as shown in Figure 14.12: Mean Static Pressure on the Outer
Shroud of the Axial Compressor (p. 584).

Shock waves are clearly visible in the flow near the outlets of the rotor and stator, as seen in the areas
of rapid pressure change on the outer shroud of the axial compressor.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 583
Using Sliding Meshes

Figure 14.12: Mean Static Pressure on the Outer Shroud of the Axial Compressor

3. Save the case file (axial_comp-1200.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

14.5. Summary
This tutorial has demonstrated the use of the sliding mesh model for analyzing transient rotor-stator
interaction in an axial compressor stage. The model utilized the coupled pressure-based solver in con-
junction with the transient algorithm to compute the inviscid flow through the compressor stage. The
solution was calculated over time until the reported variables displayed time-periodicity (which required
several revolutions of the rotor), after which time-averaged data was collected while running the case
for the equivalent of one additional rotor revolution (240 time steps).

The Fast Fourier Transform (FFT) utility in Ansys Fluent was employed to determine the time averages
from stored flow variable report data. You also used the FFT utility to examine the frequency content
of the transient report data. The observed peak corresponds to the passing frequency and the higher
harmonics of the passing frequency, which occurred at approximately 10,000 Hz.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
584 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 15: Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
15.1. Prerequisites
15.2. Problem Description
15.3. Preparation
15.4. Mesh
15.5. Overset Interface Creation
15.6. Steady-State Case Setup
15.7. Unsteady Setup
15.8. Summary

The purpose of this tutorial is to provide guidelines and recommendations for setting up and solving
a dynamic overset mesh case. Overset mesh allows you to build up your case using multiple overlapping
meshes that automatically get connected by interpolating cell data in the overlapping regions. The
overset meshing technique is used in conjunction with the Six Degree of Freedom (6DOF) solver, allowing
bodies to move as a result of fluid and/or external forces.

In this tutorial, you will learn:

• Reading and appending mesh files into the Fluent solver and establishing a flow domain with
the overset approach from overlapping meshes.

• Best practices for overset mesh settings when two walls are close to each other or there is a very
tight gap.

• Compiling the UDF to specify the properties of the pod.

• Setting up the moving zones and hooking the UDF.

• Running a steady-state calculation and continuing an unsteady calculation for the problem.

• Best practices for monitoring and diagnosing an overset case and postprocessing the results.

Note:

Overset meshing has many applications beyond store separation. Refer to Overset Meshes
in the Fluent User's Guide for additional information on overset meshing capabilities.

15.1. Prerequisites
This tutorial is focused on overset meshing and it assumes that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent
interface and that you have a good understanding of the basic setup and solution procedures. Some

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 585
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

of the basic steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly. In this tutorial, you
will use the dynamic mesh model and the Six Degree of Freedom model. If you have not used these
models before, refer to the Section on Dynamic Meshes in the Ansys Fluent User’s Guide. You will use
a UDF to specify the properties of the pod. If you have not used UDFs before, refer to the Fluent Cus-
tomization Manual.

15.2. Problem Description

A rescue pod is dropped from a moving airplane flying at Mach 0.8. As the pod falls, it is subjected to
pressure, viscous drag, and gravitational forces. These forces also create a moment on the pod, causing
it to rotate about its center of gravity.

The pod is released from the aircraft at t=0.

Figure 15.1: Schematic of Problem

The representation of the problem is shown in Figure 15.1: Schematic of Problem (p. 586) A close view
of the bay area and different walls with their interior zones are shown in Figure 15.2: Close View of Bay
Area (p. 587).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
586 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh

Figure 15.2: Close View of Bay Area

15.3. Preparation
1. Download the overset_dynamic_mesh.zip file .

2. Unzip overset_dynamic_mesh.zip to your working directory.

The files Overset-background-mesh.msh, Overset-component-mesh.msh, and prop-

erty.c can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

15.4. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file Overset-background-mesh.msh.

File → Read → Mesh...

As Ansys Fluent reads the mesh file, it will report the progress in the console. This mesh has three different
zones that allow for a greater level of refinement where the pod will be falling and less refinement at

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 587
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

the far field. Dividing the background mesh into multiple zones allows for non-conformal interfaces
between the other zones that will not be in the overset interface.

Note:

Fluent uses the terminology of a component mesh and a background mesh. The mesh
containing the moving object is called component mesh and stationary mesh is called
the background mesh. The outer boundary of component mesh is referred as component
boundary.

• Select All Mesh Files (*.msh* *.MSH*) from the Files of type: drop down list. Then
select Overset-background-mesh.msh

2. In this step you will create mesh interfaces between multiple zones in the stationary mesh. This
mesh has three cell zones: upstream, downstream, and fluid-background.

Domain → Interfaces → Mesh...

a. Select interface-background-downstream and interface-downstream-background in the

Zones list.

b. Enter downstream-background for Interface Name Prefix.

c. Click Create.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
588 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Mesh

d. Select interface-background-upstream and interface-upstream-background in the Zones

list.

e. Enter upstream-background for Interface Name Prefix.

f. Click Create and close the Mesh Interfaces dialog box.

3. Append the component mesh file

Domain → Zones → Append → Append Case File...

a. Select overset-component-mesh.msh and click OK.

b. Click OK in the Warning dialog box that appears stating that some zone IDs have changed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 589
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

c. If you have the Display Mesh After Reading option enabled in the Fluent Launcher, then
you must refresh the graphics window by right-clicking in the graphics window and selecting
Refresh Display.

Note:

Fluent will append the component mesh and two meshes will overlap each other.
If background and component meshes are present in the same mesh file, then you
can start directly from the mesh file without appending.

4. Display the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Display

a. Select all surfaces and click Display.

b. Close the Mesh Display dialog box.

Note:

There are approximately 110 K mesh elements in this case.

5. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

The mesh check fails with a warning. The warning states that there is an overset zone that is not a part
of any overset interface. If any zone already has overset type, we need to define overset-interface with

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
590 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Overset Interface Creation

available overset zone. If mesh does not have any overset type predefined, then this warning will not
come.

Note:

Fluent performs various checks on the mesh and reports the progress in the console
window. Pay attention to the reported minimum volume and make sure this is a positive
number.

15.5. Overset Interface Creation

1. In this step you will ensure that the component boundary is properly defined as the overset
boundary type.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Overset → overset_boundary Type → overset

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 591
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

Note:

Ansys Meshing automatically assigns boundary types according to boundary names.

Meshes created in other meshing tools may require you to manually define all of the
boundary types.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
592 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Overset Interface Creation

2. Define Overset Interface.

Domain → Interfaces → Overset...

This opens the Create/Edit Overset Interfaces dialog box.

a. Enter overset-interface for Name.

b. Select fluid-background from the Background group box and component from the Com-
ponent group box.

c. Click Create to create the overset interface.

d. Close the Create/Edit Overset Interfaces dialog box.

3. Repeat the mesh check to confirm that it is successful.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

4. Define overset settings for creating an efficient interface.

Set the donor-priority-method to boundary-distance-based. This option is only available

through the TUI command:

/define/overset-interfaces/options/donor-priority-method 1

While establishing overset interface, Fluent does an optimization to get best location of the interface
while reducing the number of cells in the overlapping region that will participate in the calculation.
There are options to define the priority of the cell zones that will take part in the overset interface creation.
Zones defined as higher priority will be given more weight. When cell zones have the same priority,
there are two methods that govern overlap minimization (see Overlap Minimization in the Fluent User's
Guide): one method is cell volume based (proportional to the inverse of the cell volume) and other
method is boundary distance based (proportional to the inverse of the distance to the closest boundary).

Cell volume based works best if the component mesh resolution is fine near walls and increases
gradually away from walls and becomes similar in size to or larger than the background mesh.
Boundary distance based method works best where overlapping meshes have uniform and nearly
identical resolutions and therefore it is most suitable when two walls have small distance in between
them. In this example, the store wall is very near to the bay wall and the boundary distance based
method allows Fluent to create an overset interface somewhere middle of the gap. It is important to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 593
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

have sufficient cells overlapping each other between the gap region of two walls (at least 4 cells from
both walls), so it is better to create inflation layers on walls to resolve this requirement.

5. In this step you will create the overset intersection, also referred to as hole cutting. When the case
is initialized, Ansys Fluent automatically creates the overset intersection. Experts have the option
to investigate how the intersection is created by enabling expert options in the TUI:

/define/overset-interfaces/options/expert? yes

With expert options enabled, you can create the intersection using the following command:

/define/overset-interfaces/intersect-all

When prompted to keep bounding cells, press the Enter key to accept the default option of no.

Keep bounding cells? [no]

You can increase the overset verbosity to have Fluent print more information to the console for
any overset process. Verbosity settings range from 0 to 3 depending on the information required.
To increase verbosity, enter:

/define/overset-interfaces/options/verbosity 2

To list all overset interface related information, enter:

/define/overset-interfaces/list

15.6. Steady-State Case Setup

In this section you will set up the case for steady-state flow.

15.6.1. General Settings

Retain the setting of steady-state pressure-based solver.

Physics → Solver

15.6.2. Models
1. Enable the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

2. Specify the k-omega viscous model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
594 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady-State Case Setup

Physics → Models → Viscous...

a. Retain the default selection of the k-omega SST viscous model.

b. Enable the Viscous Heating and Production Limiter options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 595
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

c. Click OK to close and confirm the model settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
596 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady-State Case Setup

15.6.3. Materials
Specify the properties for air.

• Open the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit

a. Select ideal-gas from the Density drop-down list.

b. Click Change/Create and close the dialog box.

15.6.4. Operating Conditions

Set the operating conditions.

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions...

1. Enter 0 Pa for Operating Pressure.

2. Click OK to confirm the operating conditions.

15.6.5. Boundary Conditions

1. Set the boundary conditions for the inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → pressure-inlet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 597
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

a. Enter 154419.3 Pa for Gauge Total Pressure.

b. Enter 101325 Pa for Supersonic/Initial Gauge Pressure.

c. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio as the Specification Method in the Turbulence group
box.

d. Retain the default values of 5% and 10 for Turbulent Intensity and Turbulent Viscosity
Ratio respectively.

e. Click Apply and close the Pressure inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for outlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → pressure-outlet Edit...

a. Enter 101325 Pa for Gauge Pressure.

b. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio as the Specification Method in the Turbulence group
box.

c. Retain the default values of 5% and 10 for Backflow Turbulent Intensity and Backflow
Turbulent Viscosity Ratio respectively.

d. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
598 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady-State Case Setup

3. Keep the defaults for all of the other boundary conditions.

15.6.6. Reference Values

Physics → Solver → Reference Values...

1. Select pressure-inlet from the Compute from drop-down list.

2. Select fluid-background from the Reference Zone drop-down list.

3. Retain the default Reference Values as shown above.

15.6.7. Solution
In this section you will specify solution methods and controls that are appropriate for this overset
meshing case.

1. Set the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 599
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

1. In the Solution Methods task page, retain the default selections for the Spatial Discretization.

2. Set the solution controls.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
600 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady-State Case Setup

Solution → Controls → Controls...

a. Review and retain the default settings.

b. Click Limits... to open the Solution Limits dialog box.

c. Enter 1e+07 for Maximum Turb. Viscosity Ratio.

d. Click OK to accept the settings.

3. Define a report for the drag coefficient of the pod.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Force Report → Drag...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 601
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

a. Enable Report File and Report Plot in the Create group box.

b. Select wall-pod from the Wall Zones list.

c. Click OK to create the report.

For additional information on writing report files, refer to "Creating Report Files" in the Fluent User's
Guide.

4. Specify the residual monitor criterion for the solution equations.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
602 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady-State Case Setup

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Enter 1e-06 as the Absolute Criterion for all of the Equations and then close the Residual
Monitors dialog box.

5. Ensure Hybrid is selected as the initialization method in the Solution ribbon tab.

Click Initialize.

6. Define parameters for calculation to a steady-state solution.

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Enter 1000 for No. of Iterations.

Note:

If you are running in serial, then you must reorder the mesh prior to beginning
the calculation, using the mesh/reorder/reorder-domain text command.
This reordering is done automatically for parallel processes > 1.

b. Click Calculate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 603
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

7. Check the mass imbalance for the inlet and outlet to confirm there is not a large difference.

Results → Reports → Fluxes...

a. Select pressure-inlet and pressure-outlet from the list of Boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
604 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

b. Click Compute and close the Flux Reports dialog box.

8. Save the steady-state case and data files (overset-pod-steady-state.cas.h5 and

overset-pod-steady-state.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Click OK in the Information dialog box that appears.

15.7. Unsteady Setup

In this section you will define the transient settings.

15.7.1. General Settings

1. Select Transient in the General task page (Solver group box, under Time).

Setup → General → Transient

2. Set the Operating Conditions.

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions...

a. Enable Gravity.

b. Enter -9.81 for Y.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 605
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

c. Click OK to confirm the operating conditions.

A warning message will be displayed that for compressible (ideal and real) gas models with
buoyancy, it is recommended to use a specified operating density value of zero.

15.7.2. Compile the UDF

User-Defined → User-Defined → Functions → Compiled...

1. Click Add... to open the Select File dialog box.

2. Select property.c and click OK.

3. Select Use Built-in Compiler.

4. Click Build to build the library.

5. Click OK to close the Question dialog box that appears.

Note:

This UDF contains the mass of the pod and its moments of inertia.

Ansys Fluent sets up the directory structure and compiles the code. You can see the compilation in
the console window.

6. Click Load to load the library.

15.7.3. Dynamic Mesh Settings

In this section you will specify the six degrees of freedom (Six DOF) and dynamic mesh settings.

Domain → Mesh Models → Dynamic Mesh...

1. Enable Dynamic Mesh.

2. Disable Smoothing.

3. Enable Six DOF.

4. Click Settings... to open the Options dialog box.

a. Enable Write Motion History.

b. Enter pod-motion for the File Name.

c. Click OK to confirm the settings.

5. Set up the moving zones.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
606 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

a. Create the dynamic zone for the component

i. Click Create/Edit... in the Dynamic Mesh task page to open the Dynamic Mesh Zones
dialog box.

ii. Select component from the Zone Names drop-down list.

iii. Retain the selection of Rigid Body for Type.

iv. Retain the selection of On in the Six DOF group box.

v. Enable Passive in the Six DOF group box.

vi. Enter 7.6 for X and 18.5 for Y in the Center of Gravity Location group box.

vii. Click Create to create the dynamic zone for the component.

Note:

The UDF is automatically selected in the Six DOF UDF/Properties drop-down

list. If there were additional UDFs loaded, then you would have to select the
correct one.

b. Create the dynamic zone for the pod.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 607
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

i. Select wall-pod from the Zone Names drop-down list.

ii. Retain the selection of Rigid Body for Type.

iii. Retain the selection of On and disable Passive in the Six DOF group box.

iv. Retain the values for Center of Gravity Location.

v. Click Create to create the dynamic zone for the pod.

vi. Close the Dynamic Mesh Zones dialog box.

15.7.4. Report Generation for Unsteady Case

Create a new drag report definition named unsteady_pod for the drag coefficient on the wall-pod.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Force Report → Drag...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
608 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

1. Enter unsteady-pod-drag for Name.

2. Enable Report File and Report Plot in the Create group box.

3. Select wall-pod from the Wall Zones list.

4. Click OK to create the report.

Note that the drag report definition created previously, report-def-0 for the steady-state simulation
should be deleted. If not a Warning Message appears in the console notifying you that Data for the
following Report File can be written to its file..

You can click Yes in the Warning Message to create a new report file.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 609
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

15.7.5. Run Calculations for Unsteady Case

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 0.001 for Time Step Size (s).

b. Enter 1000 for Number of Time Steps.

c. Enter 8 for Max Iterations/Time Step.

d. Start recording the transcript.

File → Write → Start Transcript...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
610 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

Enter a name for the transcript file.

e. Click Calculate.

the simulation can take several hours depending on the compute capacity being utilized.

f. Stop recording the transcript.

• File → Write → Stop Transcript...

g. Save the case and data files (overset-pod-transient.cas.h5 and overset-pod-

transient.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

15.7.6. Overset Solution Checking

Check overset solution.

Open the transcript file and look for the warning of:
dead->solve cells

Ideally, no cells should go directly from being dead cells to being solve cells. A large number of cells
directly converting from dead to solve can affect the accuracy of the solution or cause divergence. If
you find that there is a large number of cells that went directly from dead to solve, then you can reduce
the time step size to decrease the likelihood of this issue occurring. If there are any dead to solve
cells present for this calculation run, the warning is printed as shown below:
WARNING: 1 overset dead->solve cells in interface overset-interface

Note:

Objects move their position with time in transient overset moving mesh cases, requiring
dead cells to convert into solve cells. Dead cells do not have proper solution data, so they
need to convert to receptor cells to get the required solution information before converting
to solve cells. If a dead cell converts directly into a solve cell, it may lack required informa-
tion and cause an improper result. Refer to "Diagnosing Overset Interface Issues" in the
Fluent User's Guide for additional information.

15.7.7. Postprocessing
1. Create contours of static pressure.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-pressure for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded from the Coloring drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 611
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

c. Ensure Pressure... and Static Pressure are selected from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. De-select all surfaces in the list of Surfaces.

e. Click Save/Display.

f. Close the Contours dialog box.

Note:

To capture intermediate images, you can create an animation definition prior to

beginning the calculation. This would allow you to view the individual image
files as well as an animation of the pod as it falls. For additional information on
creating animation definitions, see Animating the Solution in the Fluent User’s
Guide.

2. Save the case file (overset-pod-transient.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

3. Plot the center of gravity motion of the pod.

a. Read the pod-motion file into Microsoft Excel and plot flow time vs CG-orientation of
the pod.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
612 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

b. Plot flow time vs CG-angular orientation of the pod.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 613
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

15.7.8. Diagnosing an Overset Case

Once an overset interface is created, it is important to check and diagnose it. In this section you will
learn about diagnosing an overset interface and about the different cells participating in the solution.

In overset meshing all meshes are categorized into five cell types:

• Solve – (yellow in figures Figure 15.3: Cell Marking on component (p. 618) & Figure 15.4: Cell
Marking on fluid-background (p. 618)) cells that take part in the solution.

• Donor – (marked red in figures Figure 15.3: Cell Marking on component (p. 618) & Figure 15.4: Cell
Marking on fluid-background (p. 618)) provide information to corresponding cell zones.

• Receptor – (marked blue in figures Figure 15.3: Cell Marking on component (p. 618) & Fig-
ure 15.4: Cell Marking on fluid-background (p. 618)) receive information from donor cells in the
corresponding cell zones.

• Dead – (marked in red in figures Figure 15.5: Dead Cells in the Component (p. 619)) deactivated
cells located in regions of overlap between the background and component meshes, where
multiple cells are present in the same exact location. Only one set of cells in a region is allowed
to take part in the solution. Additionally, cells outside of the flow regime are marked as dead.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
614 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

• Orphan – receptor cells that cannot find a corresponding donor cell. Although Fluent has in-
telligence to deal with orphan cells, their presence should be avoided to reduce the risk of
solution inaccuracies and divergence.

You can mark orphan cells using the TUI command:

define/overset-interfaces/mark-cells orphan no

This will show all of the orphan cells present in the case, unless you specify a particular zone. Marking
orphan cells creates a register that you can display via the define/overset-interfaces/dis-
play-cells text command. The marked cells are in the overset-orphan-cells-r0 register.

In this case there are not any orphan cells, so nothing is displayed in the graphics window. If you
mark solve cells or other cells types and display those registers, then it will appear in the graphics
window.

If large number of orphan cells are generated in a case, then it is advisable to modify the mesh ac-
cordingly.

Different type of cells can also be displayed creating contours of Cell Info and displaying the Overset
Cell Type for given surfaces.

Enable the following TUI command to include receptor cells in the contours display:

/define/overset-interfaces/options/render-receptor-cells? yes

The overset interface for this tutorial is created properly, but issues could arise during overset interface
creation for geometries with complex topology. Ansys Fluent provides options to diagnose issues
and fix them. You can use the ‘debug hole cut’ option to understand more about flood filling of seed
cells or leakage between overlapping boundaries. For detailed information on overset mesh diagnosis,
refer to "Diagnosing Overset Interface Issues" in the Fluent User's Guide.

1. Start a new Fluent session, and read overset-pod-steady-state.cas.h5 and overset-

pod-steady-state.dat.h5.

File → Read → Case & Data...

2. Create zone surfaces for component and fluid-background.

Results → Surface → Create → Zone...

a. Select component in the Zone list.

b. Retain component for New Surface Name and click Create.

c. Similarly, create a zone surface for fluid-background.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 615
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

d. Close the Zone Surface dialog box.

3. Enter the following TUI command in the console:/define/overset-interfaces/op-

tions/render-receptor-cells? Yes

4. Display contours of the overset cell type on the surface you just created.

De-select Lighting View → Display

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-overset-1 for Contour Name.

b. Disable Auto Range (which enables Clip to Range) in the Options group box.

c. Disable Node Values and Global Range in the Options group box.

d. Select Cell Info... and Overset Cell Type from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Enter -0.5 for Min and 2.5 for Max.

Note:

Table 15.1: Meaning of Values

Cell Type Integer Function Value

Donor 2
Solve 1
Receptor 0
Orphan -1
Dead -2

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
616 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

Dead cells cannot be displayed in contours.

f. Click Colormap Options... to open the Colormap dialog box.

i. Enter 3 for Colormap Size in the Colormap group box.

ii. Click Apply and close the Colormap dialog box.

g. Select component from the list of Surfaces.

h. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 617
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

Figure 15.3: Cell Marking on component

i. Repeat the process for fluid-background.

Figure 15.4: Cell Marking on fluid-background

5. Marking and displaying dead cells.

a. Expand Cell Zones in the tree to check the id number.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
618 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Unsteady Setup

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid

b. Mark dead cells in component with the following TUI command: define/overset-in-
terfaces/mark-cells dead yes 29

c. Mark dead cells in fluid-background with the following TUI command: /define/overset-
interfaces/mark-cells dead yes 7

d. Display the dead cells by entering the define/overset-interfaces/display-cells

text command in the console.

i. Enter 0 for the text command prompt to display the overset-dead-cells-component-

r0 register (you can enter 0 instead of typing the full name of the register).

Figure 15.5: Dead Cells in the Component

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 619
Using Overset and Dynamic Meshes

ii. Enter 1 for the text command prompt to display only the overset-dead-cells-fluid-
background-r1 register.

Figure 15.6: Dead Cells in the Background

15.8. Summary
In this tutorial, you have learned about overset meshing in Ansys Fluent and its setup along with best
practices, by solving a store separation problem. You have also learned a few diagnostic techniques for
overset meshing and the postprocessing of results for a store separation case.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
620 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 16: Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous
Combustion
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
16.1. Introduction
16.2. Prerequisites
16.3. Problem Description
16.4. Background
16.5. Setup and Solution
16.6. Summary
16.7. Further Improvements

16.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines the mixing of chemical species and the combustion of a gaseous fuel.

A cylindrical combustor burning methane ( ) in air is studied using the eddy-dissipation model in
Ansys Fluent.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Enable physical models, select material properties, and define boundary conditions for a turbulent
flow with chemical species mixing and reaction.

• Initiate and solve the combustion simulation using the pressure-based solver.

• Examine the reacting flow results using graphics.

• Predict thermal and prompt NOx production.

• Use custom field functions to compute NO parts per million.

16.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

To learn more about chemical reaction modeling, see the Fluent User's Guide and the Fluent Theory
Guide. Otherwise, no previous experience with chemical reaction or combustion modeling is assumed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 621
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

16.3. Problem Description

The cylindrical combustor considered in this tutorial is shown in Figure 16.1: Combustion of Methane
Gas in a Turbulent Diffusion Flame Furnace (p. 622). The flame considered is a turbulent diffusion flame.
A small nozzle in the center of the combustor introduces methane at 80 . Ambient air enters the
combustor coaxially at 0.5 . The overall equivalence ratio is approximately 0.76 (approximately 28
excess air). The high-speed methane jet initially expands with little interference from the outer wall,
and entrains and mixes with the low-speed air. The Reynolds number based on the methane jet diameter
is approximately .

Figure 16.1: Combustion of Methane Gas in a Turbulent Diffusion Flame Furnace

16.4. Background
In this tutorial, you will use the generalized eddy-dissipation model to analyze the methane-air combus-
tion system. The combustion will be modeled using a global one-step reaction mechanism, assuming
complete conversion of the fuel to and . The reaction equation is
(16.1)

This reaction will be defined in terms of stoichiometric coefficients, formation enthalpies, and parameters
that control the reaction rate. The reaction rate will be determined assuming that turbulent mixing is
the rate-limiting process, with the turbulence-chemistry interaction modeled using the eddy-dissipation
model.

16.5. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
16.5.1. Preparation
16.5.2. Mesh
16.5.3. General Settings
16.5.4. Models
16.5.5. Materials
16.5.6. Boundary Conditions
16.5.7. Initial Reaction Solution
16.5.8. Postprocessing
16.5.9. NOx Prediction

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
622 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

16.5.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the species_transport.zip file .

2. Unzip species_transport.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file gascomb.msh can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

16.5.2. Mesh
Read the mesh file gascomb.msh.

File → Read → Mesh...

1. In the Select File dialog box that opens, select All Mesh Files (*.msh* *.MSH*) from the Files of
type drop-down list.

2. Select the gascomb.msh mesh file and click OK.

16.5.3. General Settings

1. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and will report the progress in the console. Ensure
that the reported minimum volume reported is a positive number.

2. Scale the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Scale...

Since this mesh was created in units of millimeters, you will need to scale the mesh into meters.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 623
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. Select mm from the Mesh Was Created In drop-down list in the Scaling group box.

b. Click Scale.

c. Ensure that m is selected from the View Length Unit In drop-down list.

d. Ensure that Xmax and Ymax are reset to 1.8 m and 0.225 m respectively.

The default SI units will be used in this tutorial, hence there is no need to change any units in this
problem.

e. Close the Scale Mesh dialog box.

3. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Note:

You should check the mesh after you manipulate it (scale, convert to polyhedra, merge,
separate, fuse, add zones, or smooth and swap). This will ensure that the quality of the
mesh has not been compromised.

4. Display mesh with the default settings.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
624 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

5. Examine the mesh.

Figure 16.2: The Quadrilateral Mesh for the Combustor Model

Extra:

You can use the right mouse button to probe for mesh information in the graphics
window. If you click the right mouse button on any node in the mesh, information will
be displayed in the Ansys Fluent console about the associated zone, including the name

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 625
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

of the zone. This feature is especially useful when you have several zones of the same
type and you want to distinguish between them quickly.

6. In the General task page, select Axisymmetric in the 2D Space list (Solver group box).

Setup → General

Ansys Fluent will display a warning about the symmetry zone in the console. You may have to scroll
up to see this warning.
Warning: It appears that symmetry zone 5 should actually be an axis
(it has faces with zero area projections).
Unless you change the zone type from symmetry to axis,
you may not be able to continue the solution without
encountering floating point errors.

In the axisymmetric model, the boundary conditions should be such that the centerline is an axis type
instead of a symmetry type. You will change the symmetry zone to an axis boundary in Boundary
Conditions (p. 633).

16.5.4. Models
1. Enable heat transfer by enabling the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
626 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Retain the default k-ω SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 627
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. Retain the default settings for the k-omega model.

b. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

3. Enable chemical species transport and reaction.

Physics → Models → Species...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
628 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Species Transport in the Model list.

The Species Model dialog box will expand to provide further options for the Species Transport
model.

b. Enable Volumetric in the Reactions group box.

c. Select methane-air from the Mixture Material drop-down list.

Scroll down the list to find methane-air.

Note:

The Mixture Material list contains the set of chemical mixtures that exist in the
Ansys Fluent database. You can select one of the predefined mixtures to access a
complete description of the reacting system. The chemical species in the system
and their physical and thermodynamic properties are defined by your selection of
the mixture material. You can alter the mixture material selection or modify the
mixture material properties using the Create/Edit Materials dialog box (see Mater-
ials (p. 630)).

d. Select Eddy-Dissipation in the Turbulence-Chemistry Interaction group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 629
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

The eddy-dissipation model computes the rate of reaction under the assumption that chemical
kinetics are fast compared to the rate at which reactants are mixed by turbulent fluctuations (eddies).

e. Click OK to close the Species Model dialog box.

16.5.5. Materials
In this step, you will examine the default settings for the mixture material. This tutorial uses mixture
properties copied from the Fluent Database. In general, you can modify these or create your own mixture
properties for your specific problem as necessary.

1. Confirm the properties for the mixture materials.

Setup → Materials → Mixture → methane-air Edit...

The Create/Edit Materials dialog box will display the mixture material (methane-air) that was selected
in the Species Model dialog box. The properties for this mixture material have been copied from the
Fluent Database... and will be modified in the following steps.

a. Click the Edit... button to the right of the Mixture Species drop-down list to open the Species
dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
630 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

You can add or remove species from the mixture material as necessary using the Species dialog
box.

i. Retain the default selections from the Selected Species selection list.

The species that make up the methane-air mixture are predefined and require no modification.

ii. Click OK to close the Species dialog box.

b. Click the Edit... button to the right of the Reaction drop-down list to open the Reactions
dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 631
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

The eddy-dissipation reaction model ignores chemical kinetics (the Arrhenius rate) and uses only
the parameters in the Mixing Rate group box in the Reactions dialog box. The Arrhenius Rate
group box will therefore be inactive. The values for Rate Exponent and Arrhenius Rate parameters
are included in the database and are employed when the alternate finite-rate/eddy-dissipation
model is used.

i. Retain the default values in the Mixing Rate group box.

ii. Click OK to close the Reactions dialog box.

c. Retain the selection of incompressible-ideal-gas from the Density drop-down list.

d. Retain the selection of mixing-law from the Cp (Specific Heat) drop-down list.

e. Retain the default values for Thermal Conductivity, Viscosity, and Mass Diffusivity.

f. Click Change/Create to accept the material property settings.

g. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

The calculation will be performed assuming that all properties except density and specific heat are
constant. The use of constant transport properties (viscosity, thermal conductivity, and mass diffusivity
coefficients) is acceptable because the flow is fully turbulent. The molecular transport properties will
play a minor role compared to turbulent transport.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
632 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

16.5.6. Boundary Conditions

1. Convert the symmetry zone to the axis type.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Symmetry → symmetry-5 Type axis

The symmetry zone must be converted to an axis to prevent numerical difficulties where the radius
reduces to zero.

2. Set the boundary conditions for the air inlet (velocity-inlet-8).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → velocity-inlet-8 Edit...

To determine the zone for the air inlet, display the mesh without the fluid zone to see the boundaries.
Use the right mouse button to probe the air inlet. Ansys Fluent will report the zone name (velocity-
inlet-8) in the console.

a. Enter air-inlet for Zone Name.

This name is more descriptive for the zone than velocity-inlet-8.

b. Enter 0.5 for Velocity Magnitude.

c. Select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification Method drop-down list in
the Turbulence group box.

d. Enter 10% for Turbulent Intensity.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 633
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

e. Enter 0.44 for Hydraulic Diameter.

f. Click the Thermal tab and retain the default value of 300 for Temperature.

g. Click the Species tab and enter 0.23 for o2 in the Species Mass Fractions group box.

h. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for the fuel inlet (velocity-inlet-6).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → velocity-inlet-6 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
634 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter fuel-inlet for Zone Name.

This name is more descriptive for the zone than velocity-inlet-6.

b. Enter 80 for the Velocity Magnitude.

c. Select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification Method drop-down list in
the Turbulence group box.

d. Enter 10% for Turbulent Intensity.

e. Enter 0.01 for Hydraulic Diameter.

f. Click the Thermal tab and retain the default value of 300 for Temperature.

g. Click the Species tab and enter 1 for ch4 in the Species Mass Fractions group box.

h. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

4. Set the boundary conditions for the exit boundary (pressure-outlet-9).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → pressure-outlet-9 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 635
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. Retain the default value of 0 for Gauge Pressure.

b. Select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification Method drop-down list in
the Turbulence group box.

c. Enter 10% for Backflow Turbulent Intensity.

d. Enter 0.45 for Backflow Hydraulic Diameter.

e. Click the Thermal tab and retain the default value of 300 for Backflow Total Temperature.

f. Click the Species tab and enter 0.23 for o2 in the Backflow Species Mass Fractions group
box.

g. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

The Backflow values in the Pressure Outlet dialog box are utilized only when backflow occurs at the
pressure outlet. Always assign reasonable values because backflow may occur during intermediate it-
erations and could affect the solution stability.

5. Set the boundary conditions for the outer wall (wall-7).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
636 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall-7 Edit...

Use the mouse-probe method described for the air inlet to determine the zone corresponding to the
outer wall.

a. Enter outer-wall for Zone Name.

This name is more descriptive for the zone than wall-7.

b. Click the Thermal tab.

i. Select Temperature in the Thermal Conditions list.

ii. Retain the default value of 300 for Temperature.

c. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

6. Set the boundary conditions for the fuel inlet nozzle (wall-2).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall-2 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 637
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. Enter nozzle for Zone Name.

This name is more descriptive for the zone than wall-2.

b. Click the Thermal tab.

i. Retain the default selection of Heat Flux in the Thermal Conditions list.

ii. Retain the default value of 0 for Heat Flux, so that the wall is adiabatic.

c. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

16.5.7. Initial Reaction Solution

You will first calculate a solution for the basic reacting flow neglecting pollutant formation. In a later step,
you will perform an additional analysis to simulate NOx.

1. Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
638 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Retain the default selections.

2. Ensure the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

3. Initialize the field variables.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the default Hybrid initialization method and click Initialize to initialize the variables.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 639
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

4. Save the case file (gascomb1.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

a. Enter gascomb1.cas.h5 for Case File.

b. Click OK to close the Select File dialog box.

5. Run the calculation by requesting 200 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 5 for the Time Scale Factor.

The Time Scale Factor allows you to further manipulate the computed time step size calculated by
Ansys Fluent. Larger time steps can lead to faster convergence. However, if the time step is too
large it can lead to solution instability.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
640 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enter 200 for Number of Iterations.

c. Click Calculate.

6. Save the case and data files (gascomb1.cas.h5 and gascomb1.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Note:

If you choose a file name that already exists in the current folder, Ansys Fluent will ask
you to confirm that the previous file is to be overwritten.

16.5.8. Postprocessing
Review the solution by examining graphical displays of the results and performing surface integrations at
the combustor exit.

1. Report the total sensible heat flux.

Results → Reports → Fluxes...

a. Select Total Sensible Heat Transfer Rate in the Options list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 641
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

b. Select all the boundaries from the Boundaries selection list (you can click the select-all button

).

c. Click Compute and close the Flux Reports dialog box.

Note:

The energy balance is good because the net result is small compared to the heat
of reaction.

2. Display filled contours of temperature (Figure 16.3: Contours of Temperature (p. 642)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-temp for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature in the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 16.3: Contours of Temperature

The peak temperature is approximately 2300 .

3. Display velocity vectors (Figure 16.4: Velocity Vectors (p. 644)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
642 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter vector-vel for Vector Name.

b. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

c. Enter 0.01 for Scale.

d. Click the Vector Options... button to open the Vector Options dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 643
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

i. Enable Fixed Length.

The fixed length option is useful when the vector magnitude varies dramatically. With fixed
length vectors, the velocity magnitude is described only by color instead of by both vector length
and color.

ii. Enter 0.1 for Scale Head.

iii. Click Apply and close the Vector Options dialog box.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

The entrainment of air into the high-velocity methane jet is clearly visible.

Figure 16.4: Velocity Vectors

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
644 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Display filled contours of mass fraction for (Figure 16.5: Contours of CH4 Mass Fraction (p. 645)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-ch4-mass-fraction for Contour Name.

b. Select Species... and Mass fraction of ch4 from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 16.5: Contours of CH4 Mass Fraction

5. In a similar manner, display the contours of mass fraction for the remaining species , , and
(Figure 16.6: Contours of O2 Mass Fraction (p. 646), Figure 16.7: Contours of CO2 Mass Frac-
tion (p. 646), and Figure 16.8: Contours of H2O Mass Fraction (p. 647)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 645
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

Figure 16.6: Contours of O2 Mass Fraction

Figure 16.7: Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
646 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 16.8: Contours of H2O Mass Fraction

6. Determine the average exit temperature.

Results → Reports → Surface Integrals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 647
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. Select Mass-Weighted Average from the Report Type drop-down list.

b. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

The mass-averaged temperature will be computed as:

(16.2)

c. Select pressure-outlet-9 from the Surfaces selection list, so that the integration is performed
over this surface.

d. Click Compute.

The Mass-Weighted Average field will show that the exit temperature is approximately 1840 .

7. Determine the average exit velocity.

Results → Reports → Surface Integrals...

a. Select Area-Weighted Average from the Report Type drop-down list.

b. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

The area-weighted velocity-magnitude average will be computed as:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
648 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

(16.3)

c. Click Compute.

The Area-Weighted Average field will show that the exit velocity is approximately 3.37 .

d. Close the Surface Integrals dialog box.

8. Save the case file (gascomb1.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

16.5.9. NOx Prediction

In this section you will extend the Ansys Fluent model to include the prediction of NOx. You will first calculate
the formation of both thermal and prompt NOx, then calculate each separately to determine the contribution
of each mechanism.

1. Enable the NOx model.

Setup → Models → Species (Species Transport, Reactions) → NOx Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 649
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. In the NOx Model dialog box, enable Thermal NOx and Prompt NOx in the Pathways group
box.

The dialog box expands to display the NOx model settings.

b. From the Fuel Species selection list, select ch4 (Fuel Streams group box).

c. Click the Turbulence Interaction Mode tab.

i. Select temperature from the PDF Mode drop-down list.

This enables the turbulence-chemistry interaction. If turbulence interaction is not enabled, you
will be computing NOx formation without considering the important influence of turbulent
fluctuations on the time-averaged reaction rates.

ii. Retain the default selection of beta from the PDF Type drop-down list and enter 20 for
PDF Points.

The value for PDF Points is increased from 10 to 20 to obtain a more accurate NOx prediction.

iii. Select transported from the Temperature Variance drop-down list.

d. Specify the formation model parameters (in the Formation Model Parameters group box).

i. In the Thermal tab, select partial-equilibrium from the [O] Model drop-down list.

The partial-equilibrium model is used to predict the O radical concentration required for thermal
NOx prediction.

ii. In the Prompt tab, retain the default value of 1 for Fuel Carbon Number.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
650 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

iii. Enter 0.76 for Equivalence Ratio.

All of the parameters in the Prompt tab are used in the calculation of prompt NOx formation.
The Fuel Carbon Number is the number of carbon atoms per molecule of fuel. The Equivalence
Ratio defines the fuel-air ratio (relative to stoichiometric conditions).

e. Click Apply to accept these changes and close the NOx Model dialog box.

2. Enable the calculation of NO species and temperature variance only.

Solution → Controls → Equations...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 651
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. Deselect all variables except Pollutant no and Temperature Variance from the Equations
selection list.

b. Click OK to close the Equations dialog box.

You will predict NOx formation in a postprocessing mode, with the flow field, temperature, and
hydrocarbon combustion species concentrations fixed. Hence, only the NO equation will be com-
puted. Prediction of NO in this mode is justified on the grounds that the NO concentrations are
very low and have negligible impact on the hydrocarbon combustion prediction.

3. Confirm the convergence criterion for the NO species equation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Ensure that the Absolute Criteria for pollut_no is set to 1e-06.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

4. Request 25 more iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation

5. Save the new case and data files (gascomb2.cas.h5 and gascomb2.dat.h5).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
652 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

File → Write → Case & Data...

6. Review the solution by creating and displaying a contour definition for NO mass fraction (Fig-
ure 16.9: Contours of NO Mass Fraction — Prompt and Thermal NOx Formation (p. 653)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-no-mass-fraction for Contour Name.

b. Disable Filled in the Options group box.

c. Select NOx... and Mass fraction of Pollutant no from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 16.9: Contours of NO Mass Fraction — Prompt and Thermal NOx Formation

7. Calculate the average exit NO mass fraction.

Results → Reports → Surface Integrals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 653
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

a. Select Mass-Weighted Average from the Report Type drop-down list.

b. Select NOx... and Mass fraction of Pollutant no from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. Ensure that pressure-outlet-9 is selected from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Compute.

The Mass-Weighted Average field will show that the exit NO mass fraction is approximately
0.00445.

e. Close the Surface Integrals dialog box.

8. Save the case file (gascomb2.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

9. In the NOx Model dialog box, disable the prompt NOx mechanism in preparation for solving for
thermal NOx only.

Setup → Models → Species → NOx Edit...

a. In the Formation tab, disable Prompt NOx.

b. Click Apply and close the NOx Model dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
654 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

10. Request 25 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation

11. Review the thermal NOx solution by displaying the contour-no-mass-fraction contour definition
for NO mass fraction (under the Results/Graphics/Contours tree branch) you created earlier
(Figure 16.10: Contours of NO Mass Fraction—Thermal NOx Formation (p. 655)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-no-mass-fraction Display

Figure 16.10: Contours of NO Mass Fraction—Thermal NOx Formation

Note that the concentration of NO is slightly lower without the prompt NOx mechanism.

12. Compute the average exit NO mass fraction with only thermal NOx formation.

Results → Reports → Surface Integrals...

Tip:

Follow the same procedure you used earlier for the calculation with both thermal
and prompt NOx formation.

The Mass-Weighted Average field will show that the exit NO mass fraction with only thermal NOx
formation (without prompt NOx formation) is approximately 0.00441.

13. Save the new case and data files (gascomb2-thermal.cas.h5 and gascomb2-
thermal.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

14. Solve for prompt NOx production only.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 655
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

Setup → Models → Species → NOx Edit...

a. In the NOx Model dialog box, disable Thermal NOx (Pathways group box).

b. Enable Prompt NOx.

c. Click Apply and close the NOx Model dialog box.

15. Request 25 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation

16. Review the prompt NOx solution by displaying the contour-no-mass-fraction contour definition
for NO mass fraction (under the Results/Graphics/Contours tree branch) (Figure 16.11: Contours
of NO Mass Fraction—Prompt NOx Formation (p. 656)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-no-mass-fraction Display

Figure 16.11: Contours of NO Mass Fraction—Prompt NOx Formation

The prompt NOx mechanism is most significant in fuel-rich flames. In this case the flame is lean and
prompt NO production is low.

17. Compute the average exit NO mass fraction only with prompt NOx formation.

Results → Reports → Surface Integrals...

Tip:

Follow the same procedure you used earlier for the calculation with both thermal
and prompt NOx formation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
656 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The Mass-Weighted Average field will show that the exit NO mass fraction with only prompt
NOx formation is approximately 9.87e-05

Note:

The individual thermal and prompt NO mass fractions do not add up to the levels
predicted with the two models combined. This is because reversible reactions are in-
volved. NO produced in one reaction can be destroyed in another reaction.

18. Use a custom field function to compute NO parts per million (ppm).

The NO ppm will be computed from the following equation:

(16.4)

Note:

This is the dry ppm. Therefore, the value is normalized by removing the water mole
fraction in the denominator.

User Defined → Field Functions → Custom...

Figure 16.12: The Custom Field Function Calculator Dialog Box

a. In the Custom Field Function Calculator dialog box, select NOx... and Mole fraction of
Pollutant no from the Field Functions drop-down lists, and click the Select button to enter
molef-pollut-pollutant-0 in the Definition field.

b. Click the appropriate calculator buttons to enter the following string in the Definition field
(as shown in Figure 16.12: The Custom Field Function Calculator Dialog Box (p. 657)):

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 657
Modeling Species Transport and Gaseous Combustion

*10ˆ6/(1-

Tip:

If you make a mistake, click the DEL button on the calculator pad to delete
the last item you added to the function definition.

c. From the Field Functions drop-down lists, select Species... and Mole fraction of h2o and
click the Select button to enter molef-h2o in the Definition field.

d. Click the ) button to complete the field function.

e. Enter no-ppm for New Function Name.

f. Click Define to add the new field function to the variable list and close the Custom Field
Function Calculator dialog box.

19. Display contours of NO ppm (Figure 16.13: Contours of NO ppm — Prompt NOx Formation (p. 658)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-no-ppm for Contour Name.

b. Disable Filled in the Options group box.

c. Select Custom Field Functions... and no-ppm from the Contours of drop-down lists.

Scroll up the list to find Custom Field Functions....

d. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Figure 16.13: Contours of NO ppm — Prompt NOx Formation

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
658 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Further Improvements

The contours closely resemble the mass fraction contours (Figure 16.11: Contours of NO Mass Frac-
tion—Prompt NOx Formation (p. 656)), as expected.

20. Save the new case and data files (gascomb2-prompt.cas.h5 and gascomb2-
prompt.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

16.6. Summary
In this tutorial you used Ansys Fluent to model the transport, mixing, and reaction of chemical species.
The reaction system was defined by using a mixture-material entry in the Ansys Fluent database. The
procedures used here for simulation of hydrocarbon combustion can be applied to other reacting flow
systems.

The NOx production in this case was dominated by the thermal NO mechanism. This mechanism is very
sensitive to temperature. Every effort should be made to ensure that the temperature solution is not
overpredicted, since this will lead to unrealistically high predicted levels of NO.

16.7. Further Improvements

Further improvements can be expected by including the effects of intermediate species and radiation,
both of which will result in lower predicted combustion temperatures.

The single-step reaction process used in this tutorial cannot account for the moderating effects of inter-
mediate reaction products, such as CO and . Multiple-step reactions can be used to address these
species. If a multi-step Magnussen model is used, considerably more computational effort is required
to solve for the additional species. Where applicable, the non-premixed combustion model can be used
to account for intermediate species at a reduced computational cost.

For more details on the non-premixed combustion model, see the Fluent User's Guide.

Radiation heat transfer tends to make the temperature distribution more uniform, thereby lowering the
peak temperature. In addition, radiation heat transfer to the wall can be very significant (especially here,
with the wall temperature set at 300 ). The large influence of radiation can be anticipated by computing
the Boltzmann number for the flow:

where is the Boltzmann constant (5.729 ) and is the adiabatic flame temperature.
For a quick estimate, assume , , and (the majority of the
inflow is air). Assume . The resulting Boltzmann number is Bo = 1.09, which shows that
radiation is of approximately equal importance to convection for this problem.

For details on radiation modeling, see the Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 659
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
660 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 17: Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
17.1. Introduction
17.2. Prerequisites
17.3. Problem Description
17.4. Setup and Solution
17.5. Summary
17.6. Further Improvements

17.1. Introduction
In this tutorial, radiation and conduction through coupled walls is solved using the Monte Carlo radiation
model to locate and determine the severity of any hotspots generated by the focusing of the sun's rays
through a headlamp lens.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Use the Watertight Geometry guided workflow to:

– Import a CAD geometry

– Generate a surface mesh

– Generate a volume mesh

• Use the Monte Carlo (MC) radiation model.

• Create new materials with thermal and radiation properties

• Set the boundary conditions for a heat transfer problem involving conduction and radiation.

• Calculate a solution using the pressure-based solver.

• Display contours of wall temperature

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing the solution results
for a turbulent flow within a manifold:

17.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 661
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

17.3. Problem Description

The problem to be considered is the modeling of solar radiation in an automotive headlamp assembly
shown in Problem Description (p. 439). For cars parked in uncovered areas or standing on highways for
long periods of time, solar rays entering the headlamp are focused by the lens in certain areas inside,
producing thermal hot spots. Overall heat up of the assembly and thermal hot spots produce stresses
due to thermal expansion & mechanical constraints. Moreover, thermal hot spots can also possibly harm
electronics or other plastic components (due to melting and/or burning) that are used in the headlamp
assembly.

Figure 17.1: Case Geometry

The headlamp assembly is modelled in an air volume with the boundaries maintained at a temperature
of 25 C. Two walls supply a 1200 w/m^2 heat flux to simulate the effect of the sun's rays shining on
the headlamp. The rays will travel into the headlamp through the front cover (polycarbonate, with an
absorption coefficient of 20 m^-1 and refractive index of 1.586) and be focused by the lens (glass, with
an absorption coefficient of 5.302 m^-1 and refractive index of 1.471).The rest of the components are
modelled as plastic and participate by absorbing, reflecting, and emitting radiation. The rim bezel is
modelled with an emissivity of 0.16, meaning 84% of incident radiation is reflected.

17.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
17.4.1. Preparation
17.4.2. Meshing Workflow
17.4.3. Mesh
17.4.4. Models
17.4.5. Materials
17.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions
17.4.7. Boundary Conditions
17.4.8. Solution
17.4.9. Postprocessing

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
662 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

17.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the radiation_headlamp.zip file .

2. Unzip radiation_headlamp.zip to your working directory.

The file Discovery CAD geometry headlamp.dsco can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Disable Double Precision under Options.

6. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

17.4.2. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 663
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. For more information, see Understanding Task States in the Fluent User's Guide).
All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow completing all
tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow. For more information, see
Customizing Workflows in the Fluent User's Guide.

2. Import the CAD geometry (headlamp.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. For File Format, keep the default setting of CAD.

c. For Units, keep the default setting as mm.

d. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(headlamp.dsco).

e. Select Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window (Figure 3.2: The Imported
CAD Geometry for the Catalytic Converter (p. 92)), and allow you to proceed onto the next task in
the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
664 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 17.2: The Imported CAD Geometry for the Headlamp

Note:

Alternatively, you can use the ... button next to File Name to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button. For more information, see Editing Tasks in the Fluent
User's Guide.

3. Add local sizing.

a. In the Add Local Sizing task, you are prompted as to whether or not you would like to add
local sizing controls to the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 665
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

In this tutorial, we will add local sizing in and around the lens, since that is an area where we require
a more refined mesh for the radiation simulation. Later, we will apply settings for a coarser surface
mesh elsewhere.

i. At the prompt for adding local sizing, select yes.

ii. Enter boi_lens for the Name of the size control.

iii. Specify Body of Influence for the Size Control Type.

iv. Specify 2 for the Target Mesh Size.

v. Select the region for body of influence, boi.

For occasions when the list of items is long, you can use the Filter Text option and use an ex-
pression such as in* to show only items starting with "in". Alternatively, you can use the Use
Wildcard option to list and pres-select matching items. See Filtering Lists and Using Wildcards
for more information.

vi. Click Add Local Sizing.

b. In the Add Local Sizing task, you can add additional local sizing controls to the faceted geo-
metry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
666 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

You can now see the boi_lens task in the workflow, which can be selected to change its settings.
The Add Local Sizing task can still be used to add more local sizing controls to the geometry.

i. At the prompt for adding local sizing, select yes.

ii. Enter bodysize_lens for the Name of the size control.

iii. Specify Body Size for the Size Control Type.

iv. Specify 2 for the Target Mesh Size.

v. Select the region for body size, lens.

vi. Click Add Local Sizing to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the workflow.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 667
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

b. Specify 1 for the Minimum Size.

c. Specify 40 for the Maximum Size.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

d. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Improve the surface mesh.

a. Right click Generate the Surface Mesh, click Insert Next Task and click Improve Surface
Mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
668 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. In the Improve Surface Mesh task.

Click Improve Surface Mesh.

6. Describe the geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 669
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

a. Select The geometry consists of both fluid and solid regions and/or voids option under
Geometry Type, since this model contains both fluid and solids, and potential voids.

b. Keep the rest of the default settings for this task.

c. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

7. Confirm and update the boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
670 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Update Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and confirm
and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the
correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

b. The proposed boundary is correct, so click Update Boundaries and proceed to the next task.

8. Create the fluid region.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 671
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

a. Select the Create Regions task, where you can determine the number of fluid regions that
need to be extracted. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the number of fluid regions to extract
automatically.

b. For the Estimated Number of Fluid Regions, keep the default selection of 1.

c. Click Create Regions.

9. Update your regions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
672 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review and change the tabulated names and
types of the various regions that have been generated from your imported geometry, and
change them as needed.

b. Keep the default settings, and click Update Regions.

10. Add boundary layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 673
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

For the Add Boundary Layers task, select no at the prompt as to whether or not you want
to define boundary layer settings.

Since well resolved flows near the walls are not necessary, the exclusion of boundary layers will
simplify the mesh and keep cell counts low.

b. Click Update and proceed to the next task.

11. Generate the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
674 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enable Advanced Options to expose additional options that are required for this task.

b. Specify 40 for Polyhedral Mesh Feature Angle.

c. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, where you can set properties of the volume mesh
itself.

d. Keep the default settings, and click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the manifold
geometry. Once complete, the mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is
automatically inserted with a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the
volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 675
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

12. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

13. Save the mesh file (headlamp.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

14. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a high-quality mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can
now switch to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

17.4.3. Mesh
1. Display and examine the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
676 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Disable Edges in the Options group box.

b. Ensure that all surfaces are selected from the Surfaces selection list.

c. Deselect enclosure:1 and rad-input from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

The graphics display will be updated to show only the headlamp mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 677
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

Figure 17.3: Graphics Display of Headlamp Mesh

17.4.4. Models
1. Enable the energy equation.

Physics → Models

a. Enable Energy.

2. Enable the laminar viscous model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
678 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Laminar in the Model group box.

b. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

3. Set up the Monte Carlo (MC) radiation model.

Physics → Models → Radiation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 679
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

a. Select Monte Carlo (MC).

b. Enter 20 for Iteration Interval.

c. Enter 10000000 for Target Number of Histories.

The MC model is a statistical radiation model that tracks a sample of photons through the
system. The size of this sample is determined by Target Number of Histories. In general, the
larger the number of histories, the more accurate the simulation at the expense of compute
time. In this tutorial, a relatively low number is used for demonstration purposes. In practice,
this number may need to be increased to achieve suitable results.

The MC model is preferred in this case because of the collimated beam type irradiation being
modelled. The Discrete Ordinates model would require very high angular discretization and,
therefore, would be computationally expensive. The Surface to Surface model assumes all ra-
diation to be diffuse and so would not capture the specular nature of the focusing of rays by
the lens.

d. Click OK to close the Radiation Model dialog box.

e. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

17.4.5. Materials
1. Define a new material, glass.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
680 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit...

a. Select solid from the Material type drop-down list.

b. Clear the entry in the Chemical Formula field.

c. Configure the following properties for glass:

Field Setting
Name glass
Density 2650 kg/m3
Cp (Specific Heat) 1887 j/kg-k
Thermal Conductivity 7.6 w/m-k
Absorption Coefficient 5.302 m^-1
Refractive Index 1.4714

d. Click Change/Create and select Yes to overwrite aluminum, since it will not be used in this
case.

2. Define a new material, plastic.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 681
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit...

a. Configure the following properties for plastic:

Field Setting
Name plastic
Density 1545.3 kg/m3
Cp (Specific Heat) 2302 j/kg-k
Thermal Conductivity 0.316 w/m-k
Absorption Coefficient 0
Refractive Index 1

b. Click Change/Create and select No to retain glass.

3. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

17.4.6. Cell Zone Conditions

1. Set the cell zone conditions for the bezel.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
682 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Solid → bezel Edit...

a. Select plastic from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Click Apply and close the Solid dialog box.

2. Copy the cell zone conditions for bezel to holder, housing, inner-bezel, reflector, rim-bezel, and
seating-steel-rim.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Solid → bezel Copy...

a. Ensure bezel is selected in the From Cell Zone list.

b. In the To Cell Zones list, select holder, housing, inner-bezel, reflector, rim-bezel, and
seating-steel-rim.

c. Click Copy.

d. Click OK when prompted to confirm.

e. Close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

3. Set the cell zone conditions for the lens.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Solid → lens Edit...

a. Ensure glass is selected from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Enable Participates in Radiation.

c. Click Apply and close the Solid dialog box.

17.4.7. Boundary Conditions

The mesh has a large number of faces and several have the suffix "-shadow". These are automatically
generated in Fluent because the faces are two-sided, meaning every face has two separate boundaries,
one for each side. You will utilize the copy function used in setting up the cell zone conditions to aide in
this section.

1. Set the basic boundary conditions for all boundaries:

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → bezel-enclosure Edit...

Tab Setting Value

Thermal Material name plastic
Radiation BC Type opaque
Internal Emissivity 1
Diffuse Fraction 1

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 683
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

2. Copy the boundary conditions for bezel-enclosure to all other boundaries.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → bezel-enclosure Copy...

a. Ensure bezel-enclosure is selected in the From Boundary Zone list.

b. Click Select All Shown ( ) to select all boundaries in the To Boundary Zones list.

c. Click Copy.

d. Click OK when prompted to confirm.

e. Close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for the lens:

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → enclosure-lens Edit...

Tab Setting Value

Thermal Material name glass
Radiation BC Type semi-transparent
Diffuse Fraction 0

Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

4. Copy the boundary conditions for enclosure-lens to other lens boundary.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → enclosure-lens Copy...

a. Ensure enclosure-lens is selected in the From Boundary Zone list.

b. Select enclosure-lens-shadow in the To Boundary Zones list.

c. Click Copy.

d. Click OK when prompted to confirm.

e. Close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

5. Set the boundary conditions for the rim bezel:

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → enclosure-rim-bezel Edit...

Tab Setting Value

Thermal Material name plastic
Radiation BC Type opaque

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
684 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Tab Setting Value

Internal Emissivity 0.16
Diffuse Fraction 0.1

Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

6. Copy the boundary conditions for enclosure-rim-bezel to other rim bezel boundaries.

Setup → Boundary Zone Conditions → Wall → enclosure-rim-bezel Copy...

a. Ensure enclosure-rim-bezel is selected in the From Boundary Zone list.

b. Select enclosure-rim-bezel-shadow, holder-rim-bezel, holder-rim-bezel-shadow, housing-

rim-bezel, and housing-rim-bezel-shadow in the To Boundary Zones list.

c. Click Copy.

d. Click OK when prompted to confirm.

e. Close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

7. Set the boundary conditions for the outer walls

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → enclosure:1 Edit...

a. Click the Thermal tab and select Temperature from the Thermal Conditions list.

b. Enter 298.15 K for Temperature.

c. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

8. Set the boundary conditions for the radiation input surfaces:

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → rad-input Edit...

Tab Setting Value

Thermal Thermal Conditions Temperature
Temperature 298.15 k
Radiation Boundary Source (enabled)
Direct Irradiation 1200 w/m2
Beam Direction X -0.848
Beam Direction Y 0
Beam Direction Z -0.53

Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 685
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

17.4.8. Solution
1. Specify the discretization schemes..

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Retain the default settiings.

2. Set the convergence criteria for you simulation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Enable Show Advanced Options and select none from the Convergence Criterion drop-
down list so that automatic convergence checking does not occur.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
686 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

3. Create a surface report definition for max temperature on the inner bezel.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Facet Maximum

a. Enter max-temp for the Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

Note:

Unlike residual values, data from other reports is not saved as part of the solution
set when the Ansys Fluent data file is saved. If you want to access the surface report
data in future Ansys Fluent sessions, you can enable the Report File option. The
report file will be saved in your working directory.

c. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

d. Select enclosure-inner_bezel from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

4. Save the case file (headlamp.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

5. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 99 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

c. Click Yes to initialize the case before solving.

You can monitor the progression of the residuals and the temperature report of the inner bezel during
the run. The residuals spike every 20 iterations when the Monte Carlo model is called and the radiation
quantities are updated. This case is run for a relatively small number of iterations for demonstration
purposes but the temperature on the inner bezel could be monitored for many more iterations until it
reaches a relative steady state.

6. Save the case and data files (headlamp.cas.h5 and headlamp.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

17.4.9. Postprocessing
1. Create a contour of temperature on the inner bezel.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 687
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-temp for Contour Name.

b. Ensure the Filled option is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select enclosure-inner-bezel from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display.

There is a clear hotspot on the inner bezel. You can use the draw mesh function to look at the
location of the hotpsot in relation to the lens.

g. Enable the Draw Mesh option in the Options group box to open the Mesh Display dialog
box.

i. Deselect all surfaces, then select enclosure-lens from the Surfaces list.

ii. Close the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
688 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

h. Click Save/Display.

Note:

On highly angular geometries, such as the inner bezel, the Gouraud lighting
method (used by default with the Automatic lighting method) will round off
corners. You may want to consider changing the lighting method to Flat in
the View tab to obtain the view as shown below.

Figure 17.4: Contour of Temperature on Inner Bezel

2. Create a contour of the normalized standard deviation of radiation intensity.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 689
Using the Monte Carlo Radiation Model

a. Enter contour-rad-std for Contour Name.

b. Ensure the Filled option is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Radiation... and Radiation Intensity.Normalized Std Deviation from the Contours
of drop-down lists.

d. Select all surfaces, then deselect enclosure:1 and rad-input from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

The standard deviation is generally less than 30, but still exceeds this value in many small areas,
which is undesirable. Increasing the number of histories in the Monte Carlo radiation model would
lower the standard deviation and improve the results, at the cost of the simulation being more
computationally expensive.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
690 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Further Improvements

Figure 17.5: Contour of Radiation Intensity Normalized Standard Deviation on Inner Bezel

3. Save the case file (headlamp.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

17.5. Summary
In this tutorial you completed a conduction and radiation simulation to investigate the occurrence of
any hot spots generated by the focusing of rays by the headlamp lens. The MC radiation model is ap-
propriate for modeling collimated beam type radiation where the discretization methods used in the
DO model might be computationally expensive.

You can watch a video of this case being set up, solved, and postprocessed at:

17.6. Further Improvements

This tutorial guides you through the steps to reach a basic solution. You may be able to obtain a more
accurate solution by refining the MC model settings (increasing the number of histories) or running the
case for more iterations. You can also try importing the temperature field into Ansys Mechanical for a
thermal stress analysis.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 691
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
692 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 18: Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady
Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
18.1. Introduction
18.2. Prerequisites
18.3. Problem Description
18.4. Setup and Solution
18.5. Steady Diffusion Flamelet Model Setup and Solution
18.6. Summary

18.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines the reacting flow through a can combustor that burns methane in air in order
to determine the combustor performance. In this tutorial, you will first mesh the geometry in the Ansys
Fluent Meshing and then simulate the combustion process using the Eddy Dissipation model. You will
then repeat the simulation using the steady flamelet model and compare the results of these two ap-
proaches.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Mesh the geometry in Ansys Fluent Meshing.

• Set up a combustion simulation in Ansys Fluent.

• Set up a reacting flow involving fuel and oxidizer.

• Use the Eddy Dissipation model.

• Use the Steady Diffusion Flamelet model.

• Display the results obtained using these two models.

18.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 693
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

18.3. Problem Description

A can type combustor is a component of a land-based gas turbine in which combustion occurs. Can
combustors are designed to burn the fuel efficiently, minimize the emissions, and reduce the wall
temperature. The can combustor to be considered in this tutorial is shown schematically in Fig-
ure 18.1: Can Combustor Geometry (p. 694).

Figure 18.1: Can Combustor Geometry

Compressed primary air is forced into the combustion chamber at 10 m/s through the main inlet at the
base of the canister. Six swirl inlet vanes guide the incoming air into the canister and facilitate its mixing
with pure methane for proper combustion. Methane is injected through six fuel inlets with a velocity
of 40 m/s. As the reacting mixture proceeds through the canister, secondary air is fed into the combustion
chamber at a velocity of 6 m/s through six secondary air inlets downstream from the primary combustion
zone. This helps increase the combustion efficiency and also cool the can walls as they are exposed to
the hot reacting flow. The fuel and oxidizer enter the combustion chamber at 300 K.

In this tutorial, the quantitative analysis of the combusting mixture is performed and the following
quantities are determined:

• The expected loss of total pressure through the combustor

• The temperature distribution inside the combustor that burns methane in air

• The proportion of unburned fuel remaining at the combustor outlet

18.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
18.4.1. Preparation
18.4.2. Meshing Workflow

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
694 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

18.4.3. Solver Settings

18.4.4. Models
18.4.5. Boundary Conditions
18.4.6. Solution
18.4.7. Postprocessing for the Eddy-Dissipation Solution

You can also watch a video that demonstrates how to setup, solve, and postprocess the solution results
for diffusion-controlled combustion at:

18.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the edm_flamelet.zip file .

2. Unzip edm_flamelet.zip to your working directory.

The file can_combustor.pmdb can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Enable Double Precision under Options.

6. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

18.4.2. Meshing Workflow

1. In the Workflow tab on the left of the interface, click the drop-down list and select Watertight
Geometry.

2. Import the CAD geometry (can_combustor.pmdb).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. Enable Advanced Options to expose additional options that may be required when importing
a CAD geometry.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 695
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

c. Select region for the Separate Zone By.

d. Enable the checkbox beside Use custom faceting.

e. Enter 0.1 for the Tolerance.

f. Locate the can_combustor.pmdb file using the File Name option and select the file.

g. Select Import Geometry.

3. Add local sizing.

a. Select yes to add local face sizing to the inlets.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
696 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select Face Size for the Size Control Type.

ii. Change the Target Mesh Size to 1.

iii. Select fuelinlet, inletair1 and inletair2 from the list of labels.

iv. Click Add Local Sizing.

b. Add fuelinlet proximity sizing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 697
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

i. Change the Size Control Type to Proximity.

ii. Adjust the Local Min Size to be 0.5 and the Max Size to be 2.

iii. Change the number of Cells Per Gap to be 16.

iv. Select fuelinlet from the list of labels and click Add Local Sizing.

c. Add proximity sizing to the inlet vanes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
698 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Ensure Proximity is selected and change the Local Min Size to 0.5 and the Max Size to
2.

ii. Change the Select By option to zone.

iii. Select origin-solid:18, origin-solid:20, origin-solid:21, origin-sol-

id:24 and origin-solid:25 from the list of zones.

iv. Click Add Local Sizing.

d. Add face sizing to the inlet vanes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 699
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

i. Change the Size Control Type to Face Size and enter 1 for the Target Mesh Size.

ii. Select origin-solid:18, origin-solid:20, origin-solid:21, origin-sol-

id:24 and origin-solid:25 from the list of zones.

iii. Click Add Local Sizing.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

a. Adjust the Minimum Size to be 1 and the Maximum Size to be 15.

b. Change the Cells Per Gap to be 4 and click Generate the Surface Mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
700 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

5. Describe the geometry.

a. In the Describe Geometry task, select the option "The geometry consists of only fluid regions
with no voids".

b. Check that both remaining options are set to "No".

c. Click Describe Geometry.

6. Update the boundaries.

a. Change the wallvanes boundary type to wall.

b. Click Update Boundaries.

7. Update the regions.

a. Retain default settings and click Update Regions.

8. Add boundary layers.

a. Retain default settings and click Add Boundary Layers.

9. Generate the volume mesh.

a. Change the Max Cell Length to 7.5.

b. Click Generate the Volume Mesh to generate the mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 701
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

10. Check the quality of the mesh

a. Select Check from the Mesh drop-down list on the main taskbar.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
702 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Switch to solution mode by clicking the Switch to Solution button on the Fluent ribbon tab.

18.4.3. Solver Settings

1. Retain the default setting of Pressure-Based in the Solver group box, under Type. Retain the
default selection of Steady from the Time list.

Setup → General

18.4.4. Models
The fuel (methane) and oxidizer (air) undergo fast combustion (that is, the overall combustion rate
is controlled by turbulent mixing). In this first part of the tutorial, the combustion reaction is considered
to be driven by turbulent diffusion, and it is modeled using the Eddy Dissipation model, which is
suitable for modeling fast combustion.

1. Enable the k-ω SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

a. Retain the default selections in the Viscous Model dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 703
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

b. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

2. Enable chemical species transport and reaction.

Physics → Models → Species...

a. Select Species Transport in the Model list.

b. Select methane-air from the Mixture Material drop-down list.

The Mixture Material list contains the set of chemical mixtures that exist in the Ansys Fluent
database. When selecting an appropriate mixture for your case, you can review the constituent
species and the reactions of the predefined mixture by clicking View... next to the Mixture Mater-
ial drop-down list. The chemical species and their physical and thermodynamic properties are
defined by the selection of the mixture material. After enabling the Species Transport model, you
can alter the mixture material selection or modify the mixture material properties using the Cre-
ate/Edit Materials dialog box.

c. Select Volumetric in the Reactions group box.

d. Select Eddy-Dissipation in the Turbulence-Chemistry Interaction group box.

The Eddy-Dissipation model computes the reaction rate under the assumption that chemical reaction
is fast compared to transport of reactants in the combusting flow. That is, the reaction is controlled
by diffusion.

e. Click OK to close the Species Model dialog box.

A Warning message appears in the console notifying you that Ansys Fluent automatically enabled
the energy equation required for the Species reaction model.

18.4.5. Boundary Conditions

In this step, you will define the boundary conditions at the inlets and the outlet.

1. Set the boundary condition for the fuel inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → fuelinlet Edit...

In the Velocity Inlet dialog box, configure the following settings.

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Velocity Magnitude 40 m/s
Thermal Temperature 300 (default)
Species ch4 (Species Mass Fractions group box) 1

2. Set the boundary condition for the primary air inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inletair1 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
704 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

In the Velocity Inlet dialog box, configure the following settings.

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Velocity Magnitude 10 m/s
Thermal Temperature 300 (default)
Species o2 (Species Mass Fractions group box) 0.23[a]
a. Dry air is composed of 23% of oxygen and 77% of nitrogen, which is a bulk species in the
mixture. Ansys Fluent adds an appropriate amount of nitrogen at the boundaries to ensure
that the sum of the mass fractions of the components is equal to unity.

3. Set the boundary condition for the secondary air inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inletair2 Edit...

In the Velocity Inlet dialog box, configure the following settings.

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Velocity Magnitude 6 m/s
Thermal Temperature 300 (default)
Species o2 (Species Mass Fractions group box) 0.23

4. Set the boundary condition for the pressure outlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet Edit...

In the Pressure Outlet dialog box, configure the following settings.

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Gauge Pressure 0 Pa [a] (default)
Backflow Pressure Specification Total Pressure[b]
(default)
Average Pressure Specification (Selected)
a. The gauge pressure of 0 Pa means that the pressure equals the ambient pressure.

b. This setting ensures that if the backflow occurs, only pure nitrogen at 300 K enters the chamber,
which will not affect the combustion reactions.

5. For wall-part-fluid, wallvanes and wallvanes-shadow retain the default stationary no slip adia-
batic settings.

18.4.6. Solution
1. Specify the discretization schemes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 705
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

Solution → Solution → Methods...

In the Solution Methods task page, configure the following settings.

Group Box Setting Value

Pressure Velocity Coupling Scheme Coupled
N/A Pseudo Time Method Global Time Step
N/A Warped-Face Gradient Correc- (Default) [a]
tion
N/A High Order Term Relaxation (Enabled)[b]
a. The warped-face gradient correction is designed to improve gradient accuracy for all gradient
methods.

b. The relaxation of high order terms will help to improve the solution behavior of flow simulations
when higher order spatial discretizations are used (higher than first).

2. Ensure that the plotting of residuals is enabled during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

3. Create a surface report definition of mass-weighted average of co2 at the outlet.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass-Weighted Average...

Configure the following settings.

Group Box Setting Value

N/A Name co2-out
N/A Field Variable Species... and Mass fraction of co2
N/A Surfaces outlet
Create Report File (Selected)
Report Plot (Selected)
Print to Console (Selected)

4. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization → Initialize

5. Save the case file (can_combustor_edm.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

6. Start calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
706 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Set the global Time Scale Factor to 5.

The Time Scale Factor allows you to further manipulate the computed time step size calculated
by Ansys Fluent. Larger time steps can lead to faster convergence. However, if the time step is too
large it can lead to solution instability.

b. Enter 500 for Number of Iterations.

c. Click Calculate.

All scaled residuals have met the criteria for a converged solution (Figure 18.2: Scaled Residuals (p. 707)),
and the relative amount of CO2 exiting the combustor outlet has become stable (Figure 18.3: Convergence
History of Mass-Weighted Average CO2 on the Outlet (p. 708)).

Figure 18.2: Scaled Residuals

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 707
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

Figure 18.3: Convergence History of Mass-Weighted Average CO2 on the Outlet

7. Save the case and data files (can_combustor_edm.cas.h5 and can_combus-

tor_edm.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

18.4.7. Postprocessing for the Eddy-Dissipation Solution

1. Check the mass flux balance.

Results → Reports → Fluxes...

Warning:

Although the mass flow rate history indicates that the solution is converged, you
should also check the net mass fluxes through the domain to ensure that mass is
being conserved.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
708 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select fuelinlet, inletair1, inletair2 and outlet from the Boundaries selection list.

b. Retain the default Mass Flow Rate option.

c. Click Compute and close the Flux Reports dialog box.

Warning:

The net mass imbalance should be a small fraction (for example, 0.5%) of the total
flux through the system. If a significant imbalance occurs, you should decrease
the residual tolerances by at least an order of magnitude and continue iterating.

2. Report the total sensible heat flux.

Results → Reports → Fluxes...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 709
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

a. Select Total Sensible Heat Transfer Rate in the Options list.

b. Select all the boundaries from the Boundaries selection list (you can click the select-all button

( ).

c. Click Compute and close the Flux Reports dialog box.

Note:

The energy balance is good because the net result is small compared to the heat
of reaction.

3. Create an XZ plane, which will be used for plotting the results.

Results → Surface → Create → Plane...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
710 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter plane_xz in for New Surface Name.

b. In the Method drop-down list, select Point and Normal.

c. In the Point group box, enter 1, 0, 1 for X, Y, Z, respectively.

d. In the Normal group box, enter 0, 1, 0 for iX, iY, iZ, respectively.

e. Click Create and close the Plane Surface dialog box.

4. Display filled contours of CO2 mass fraction in the combustion chamber (Figure 18.4: Contours of
CO2 Mass Fraction (p. 712)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter co2-mass-fraction for Contour Name.

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down lists, select Species... and Mass Fraction of co2.

d. From the Surfaces selection list, deselect all surfaces and select plane_xz.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 711
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

e. In the Coloring group box, select Smooth.

f. Click Save/Display, close the Contours dialog box, and rotate the view as shown in Fig-
ure 18.4: Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction (p. 712).

Figure 18.4: Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction

The contour map of the CO2 concentration shows that the flow is mixing and reacting properly in
the combustor.

5. Display filled contours of oxygen mass fraction on the surface plane_xz (Figure 18.5: Contours of
O2 Mass Fraction (p. 713)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter o2-mass-fraction for Contour Name.

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down lists, select Species... and Mass Fraction of o2.

d. From the Surfaces selection list, deselect all surfaces and select plane_xz.

e. In the Coloring group box, select Smooth.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
712 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 18.5: Contours of O2 Mass Fraction

6. Display filled contours of temperature on the aluminum combustor walls (Figure 18.6: Contours
of Static Temperature on the Combustor Walls (p. 714)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter surface-temperature for Contour Name.

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down lists, select Temperature... and Static Temperature.

d. Click New Surface and select Iso-Clip.

e. Name the surface clip-y-coordinate and select Mesh... and Y-Coordinate from the
Clip to Values of drop-down lists.

f. Select the surface solid:1.

g. Click Compute and enter 0 for the Min (m).

h. Click Create and close the dialog box.

i. From the Surfaces selection list, deselect all surfaces and select clip-y-coordinate and
wallvanes.

j. In the Coloring group box, select Smooth.

k. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 713
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

Figure 18.6: Contours of Static Temperature on the Combustor Walls

l. Rotate the contour plot to examine the temperature field of the combusting flow on the can-
ister walls from different angles.

7. Save the case and data files (can_combustor_edm.cas.h5 and can_combus-

tor_edm.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

18.5. Steady Diffusion Flamelet Model Setup and Solution

In the first part of the tutorial, the combustion reaction was modeled using the Eddy Dissipation model.
In this part of the tutorial, you will use the Steady Diffusion Flamelet model to simulate a turbulent
non-premixed reacting flow. The Steady Diffusion Flamelet model can model local chemical non-equi-
librium due to turbulent strain.

In the Steady Diffusion Flamelet model, reactions take place in a thin laminar locally one-dimensional
zone, called 'flamelet'. The turbulent flame is represented by an ensemble of such flamelets. Detailed
chemical kinetics is used to describe the combustion reaction. The chemistry is assumed to respond
rapidly to the turbulent strain, and as the strain relaxes to zero, the chemistry tends to equilibrium.
Despite the tendency toward equilibrium, a flamelet solution can often yield more accurate results than
an Eddy Dissipation or one- or two-step Finite Rate solution. This is because all the chemistry details
are included, making it possible to capture some of the faster intermediate reactions. To model turbulent
mixing, a probability density function (PDF) table is used as a lookup table at run time.

To watch a video that demonstrates some steps shown below, go to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
714 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady Diffusion Flamelet Model Setup and Solution

18.5.1. Models
Specify settings for non-premixed combustion.

Physics → Models → Species...

1. In the Model group box, select Non-Premixed Combustion.

2. In the State Relation group box, select Steady Diffusion Flamelet.

3. Retain the selection of Create Flamelet in the Options group box.

If you are generating a flamelet file yourself, you need to read in the chemical kinetics mechanism and
thermodynamic data, which must be in CHEMKIN format.

4. Click Import CHEMKIN Mechanism...

5. In the CHEMKIN Mechanism Import dialog box, in the Kinetics Input File text entry field, enter
the following:

path\KINetics\data\grimech30_50spec_mech.inp

where path is the Ansys Fluent installation directory (for example, C:\Program Files\ANSYS
Inc\v251\fluent\fluent25.1.0).

6. Click Import.

Once the reacting data file has been imported, the tab for specifying the fuel and oxidizer compositions,
flamelet and PDF table become accessible.

7. In the Boundary tab, specify the fuel (methane) and oxidizer (air) stream compositions in mass
fractions.

a. In the Specify Species in group box, make sure that Mass Fraction is selected.

b. Configure the following settings:

Group Species Mass Fraction

Fuel ch4 1.0
Oxid o2 0.233 (default)
n2 0.767 (default)

Tip:

Scroll down to see all the species.

Note:

All boundary species with a mass or mole fraction of zero will be ignored.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 715
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

c. In the Temperature group box, retain the default values of 300 K for Fuel and Oxid.

8. In the Control tab, retain the default settings.

9. In the Flamelet tab, retain the default settings and click Calculate Flamelets.

Once the diffusion flamelets are generated, a Question dialog box opens, asking whether you want
to save flamelets to a file. Click No.

10. In the Table tab, retain the default settings for the table parameters and click Calculate PDF
Table to compute a non-adiabatic probability density function (PDF) table.

11. Click Display PDF Table...

12. In the PDF Table dialog box, retain the selection of Mean Temperature from the Plot Variable
drop-down list and all the other default parameters and click Display.

In the graphical display of the 3D look-up table, the Z axis represents the mean temperature of the
reacting fluid, and the X and Y axes represent the mean mixture fraction and the scaled variance, re-
spectively.

The maximum and minimum values for mean temperature and the corresponding mean mixture
fraction and scale variance are also reported in the console.

The 3D look-up tables are reviewed on a slice-by-slice basis. By default, the slice selected corresponds
to the adiabatic enthalpy values. You can also select other slices of constant enthalpy for display.

13. Save the PDF output file (can_combustor_flamelet.pdf.gz).

File → Write → PDF...

a. Enter can_combustor_flamelet.pdf.gz for PDF File name.

b. Click OK to write the file.

By default, the file will be saved as formatted (ASCII, or text). To save a binary (unformatted) file,
enable the Write Binary Files option in the Select File dialog box.

14. Click Close to close the PDF Table dialog box.

15. Click OK to close the Species Model dialog box.

18.5.2. Boundary Conditions

Specify the boundary condition for the fuel inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → fuelinlet Edit...

1. In the Velocity Inlet dialog box, under the Species tab, enter 1 for Mean Mixture Fraction.

The value of 1 indicates that only pure methane will be entering the fuelinlet boundary.

2. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
716 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady Diffusion Flamelet Model Setup and Solution

18.5.3. Solution
1. Edit the output filename for mass-weighted average of co2 at the outlet.

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → co2-out-rfile Edit...

a. Enter co2-out-fl-rfile.out for File Name.

b. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

2. Save the case file (can_combustor_flamelet.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

3. Reinitialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization → Initialize

4. In the Run Calculation task page, retain the settings of 5 for Time Scale Factor and 500 for
Number of Iterations and click Calculate.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

5. Save the case and data files (can_combustor_flamelet.cas.h5 and can_combus-

tor_flamelet.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

18.5.4. Postprocessing for the Steady Diffusion Flamelet Solution

1. Check the mass flux balance and the total sensible heat flux. Here, it is important for the total
sensible net heat flux to be at least less than 1% of the reaction source.

Note that in this case, the residuals may not converge. It is important to utilize both the flux calculations
along with the monitor plot to determine whether the solution has converged.

2. Display filled contours of mean mixture fraction on the surface plane_xz (Figure 18.7: Contours
of Mean Mixture Fraction (p. 718)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter mean-mixture-fraction for Contour Name.

b. From the Contours of drop-down lists, select Pdf... and Mean Mixture Fraction.

c. From the Surfaces selection list, deselect all surfaces and select plane_xz.

d. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

e. Clear the Auto Range and Clip to Range options.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 717
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

f. Enter 0.15 for Max.

g. In the Coloring group box, select Smooth.

h. Click Save/Display.

Figure 18.7: Contours of Mean Mixture Fraction

3. Display filled contours of CO2 mass fraction in the combustion chamber (Figure 18.8: Contours of
CO2 Mass Fraction (p. 719)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → co2-mass-fraction Display

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
718 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Steady Diffusion Flamelet Model Setup and Solution

Figure 18.8: Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction

The steady diffusion flamelet simulation yields a significantly different CO2 mass fraction distribution
as compared to the eddy dissipation model calculation. The lower CO2 concentration at the base of
the flamelet flame is caused by low local temperature in the area, which results in slower combustion.
In the eddy dissipation model, chemical kinetics is ignored, and the reaction is controlled by turbulent
mixing of the materials. In this case, the CO2 concentration is greater near the base of the flame because
the rate of mixing is high in the area (see Figure 18.4: Contours of CO2 Mass Fraction (p. 712)).

4. Display the outlet CO2 concentration profiles for both solutions on a single plot.

Results → Plots → Data Sources...

a. In the Plot Data Sources dialog box, click the Load File... button to open the Select File
dialog box.

b. In the Select File dialog box that opens, click once on co2-out-fl-rfile.out and co2-out-
rfile.out.

Each of these files will be listed with their folder path in the bottom list to indicate that they have
been selected.

Tip:

If you select a file by mistake, simply click the file in the bottom list and then
click Remove.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 719
Using the Eddy Dissipation and Steady Diffusion Flamelet Combustion Models

c. Click OK to save the files and close the Select File dialog box.

d. In the Plot group box, enter co2-out for Title.

e. From the Curve Information selection list, select co2-out-rfile.out | Iteration | co2-out

f. Enter co2-EDM in the lower-right text-entry box under the Legend Names selection list.

g. Click the Change Legend Entry button.

The item in the Legend Entries list for co2-out-rfile.out | Iteration | co2-out will be changed to
co2-EDM. This legend entry will be displayed in the upper-left corner of the XY plot generated in
a later step.

h. In a similar manner, change the legend entry for the co2-out-fl-rfile.out | Iteration | co2-out
curve to be co2-Flamelet.

i. Click the Axes... button to open the Axes dialog box.

i. From the Axis list, select Y.

ii. Enter 2 for Precision.

iii. Click Apply and close the Axes dialog box.

j. Click the Curves... button to open the Curves dialog box, where you will define a different
curve symbol for the CO2 concentration data.

i. Retain 0 for the Curve #.

ii. Select ---- from the Pattern drop-down list.

iii. From the Symbol drop-down list, select the "blank" choice, which is the first item in the
Symbol list.

iv. Click Apply.

v. Set Curve # to 1 by clicking the up-arrow button.

vi. Modify the settings for Pattern and Symbol in a manner similar to that for the previous
curve.

vii. Click Apply and close the Curves dialog box.

k. Click Plot and close the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
720 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 18.9: Convergence History of Mass-Weighted Average CO2 on the Outlet

Despite the model differences, both models predicted similar mass-weighted average mass fractions
of CO2 exiting the combustor during the steady-state. However, the steady diffusion flamelet
model predicts less CO2 exiting the combustor and, due to its more realistic description of combustion
kinetics, is considered to be more accurate.

5. Save the case file (can_combustor_flamelet.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

You can perform further postprocessing of the solution results as shown in the following video:

18.6. Summary
In this tutorial, you have learned how to model the reacting flow through a can combustor using the
eddy dissipation model and steady diffusion flamelet model in Ansys Fluent.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 721
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
722 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 19: Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model
Combustor
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
19.1. Introduction
19.2. Prerequisites
19.3. Problem Description
19.4. Background
19.5. Setup and Solution
19.6. Summary

19.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates the process to set up perforated wall model and its capability for effusion
cooling in a model combustor.

A slice of cylindrical combustor burning liquid fuel with methane ( ) as the evaporated gas in hot
air is studied using the FGM model in Ansys Fluent.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Enable physical models, select material properties, and define boundary conditions for a turbulent
combustion flow with FGM model.

• Set up perforated wall to model effusion cooling effects.

• Initiate and solve the combustion simulation using the pressure-based solver.

• Examine the reacting flow results using graphics.

19.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

To learn more about turbulent combustion modeling and perforated walls, see the Fluent User's Guide
and the Fluent Theory Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 723
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

19.3. Problem Description

The 3D model gas turbine combustor considered in this tutorial is shown in Figure 19.1: 3D model gas
turbine combustor with liquid fuel Combustion of Methane (p. 724). The flame considered is a turbulent
diffusion flame with fuel supplied by liquid droplets. The air is introduced from the inlet with mass flow
rate 0.10962 kg/s. Air flow is split into two streams, one goes through a swirl after which air and evap-
orated fuel mixed, and the other goes into the shroud. The fuel droplets are injected after the swirl and
evaporation will occur. The evaporated fuel is set to be methane. After air and fuel are mixed, the flame
is established in the main combustion chamber.

Figure 19.1: 3D model gas turbine combustor with liquid fuel Combustion of Methane

19.4. Background
In this tutorial, you will use the FGM turbulent combustion model and DPM model to simulate analyze
the methane-air combustion system. The effusion cooling effects are modeled with perforated wall
capability. The effusion cooling mass flow rate are determined by the pressure difference between the
shroud and the main combustion chamber.

19.5. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
19.5.1. Preparation
19.5.2. Meshing Workflow
19.5.3. Mesh
19.5.4. Setting Up Physics
19.5.5. Models
19.5.6. Materials
19.5.7. Operating Conditions
19.5.8. Boundary Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
724 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

19.5.9. Cold Flow Solution

19.5.10. Combustion Solution
19.5.11. Postprocessing

19.5.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the effusion_cooling.zip file .

2. Unzip effusion_cooling.zip to your working directory.

The Discovery CAD file combustor_effusion.dsco can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Meshing in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Meshing Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Meshing Processes and Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

19.5.2. Meshing Workflow

1. Start the meshing workflow.

a. In the Workflow tab, select the Watertight Geometry workflow.

b. Review the tasks of the workflow.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 725
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

Each task is designated with an icon indicating its state (for example, as complete, incom-
plete, etc. For more information, see Understanding Task States in the Fluent User's Guide).
All tasks are initially incomplete and you proceed through the workflow completing all
tasks. Additional tasks are also available for the workflow. For more information, see
Customizing Workflows in the Fluent User's Guide.

2. Import the CAD geometry (combustor_effusion.dsco).

a. Select the Import Geometry task.

b. For Units, select mm.

c. For File Name, enter the path and file name for the CAD geometry that you want to import
(combustor_effusion.dsco).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
726 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click Import Geometry.

This will update the task, display the geometry in the graphics window and allow you to proceed
onto the next task in the workflow.

Figure 19.2: The Imported CAD Geometry for the Combustor

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 727
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

The combustor geometry has been enclosed in a suitable flow domain, which should provide distinct
regions of inflow and outflow for a range of angles of attack, and avoids having the bow shock
that forms in such flows from contacting the inflow surfaces..

Note:

Alternatively, the ... button next to File Name can be used to locate the CAD geo-
metry file, after which, the Import Geometry task automatically updates, displaying
the geometry in the graphics window, and the workflow automatically progresses
to the next task.

Throughout the workflow, you are able to return to a task and change its settings using either the
Edit button, or the Revert and Edit button.

3. Add local sizing.

Local mesh sizing controls are added on the liner surfaces using face sizing.

a. In the Add Local Sizing task, add local sizing controls to the faceted geometry by selecting
yes:

In this tutorial, we will add local sizing around the surfaces of the liner, since they are areas where
we require a more refined mesh.

i. At the prompt for adding local sizing, select yes.

ii. Retain the default facesize_1 for the Name of the size control.

iii. Specify 1.2 for the Growth Rate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
728 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

iv. Retain Face Size for the Size Control Type.

v. Specify 1 for the Target Mesh Size.

vi. Select Label for the Select By.

vii. Select wall-liner and wall-liner-cold.

viii.Click Add Local Sizing.

4. Generate the surface mesh.

With the local sizing set as described above, the global surface mesh sizing only defines the largest
elements on other surfaces.

a. In the Generate the Surface Mesh task, you can set various properties of the surface mesh
for the faceted geometry.

b. Specify 1 for the Minimum Size.

c. Specify 10 for the Maximum Size.

Note:

The red boxes displayed on the geometry in the graphics window are a graphical
representation of size settings. These boxes change size as the values change, and
they can be hidden by using the Clear Preview button.

d. Specify 1.2 for the Growth Rate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 729
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

e. Click Generate the Surface Mesh to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

5. Describe the geometry.

When you select the Describe Geometry task, you are prompted with questions relating to the
nature of the imported geometry.

a. Select The geometry consists of only fluid regions with no voids option under Geo-
metry Type, since this model contains only the fluid region.

b. Keep the rest of the default settings for this task.

c. Click Describe Geometry to complete this task and proceed to the next task in the
workflow.

6. Confirm and update the boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
730 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Update Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and confirm
and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine the
correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

b. Rename wall-internal to wall-int for the boundary name.

c. Rename Inlet-fuel to wall-fuel for the boundary name.

d. Select wall for the wall-fuel boundary type.

e. Select mass-flow-inlet for the inlet boundary type.

f. Click Update Boundaries and proceed to the next task.

7. Insert a new task and create the periodic boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 731
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

Right click on the Update Boundaries task, Insert New Task and select Set Up Periodic
Boundaries.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
732 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Set Up Periodic Boundaries task, where you can inspect the mesh boundaries and
confirm and change any designated boundaries accordingly. Ansys Fluent attempts to determine
the correct arrangement of boundaries automatically.

b. Retain the default Rotational for the Type of periodic boundary, Automatic - pick
both sides for the Method and Label for Select By:.

c. Select periodic_1 and periodic_2 for the two sides of the periodic boundary.

d. Click Set Up Periodic Boundaries and proceed to the next task.

8. Update your regions.

a. Select the Update Regions task, where you can review and change the tabulated names and
types of the various regions that have been generated from your imported geometry and
change them as needed.

b. The proposed region type is correct, so click Update Regions to update your settings.

9. Add boundary layers.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 733
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

a. Select the Add Boundary Layers task, where you can set properties of the boundary layer
mesh.

For the Add Boundary Layers task, ensure yes is selected at the prompt as to define boundary
layer settings. In this task, you can define specific details for capturing the boundary layer in
and around your geometry.

b. Click Add Boundary Layers.

10. Generating the volume mesh.

With the local sizing set as described above, including bodies of influence, the global volume
mesh sizing only defines the largest elements in the flow domain. In this case, the maximum is
set to be consistent with the specified global surface mesh sizing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
734 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select the Generate the Volume Mesh task, to set properties of the volume mesh.

b. Select the polyhedra for Fill With.

c. Specify 10 for Max Cell Length.

d. Retain the default selection of Enable Parallel Meshing.

e. Click Generate the Volume Mesh.

Ansys Fluent will apply your settings and proceed to generate a volume mesh for the geometry..
The mesh is displayed in the graphics window and a clipping plane is automatically inserted with
a layer of cells drawn so that you can quickly see the details of the volume mesh.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 735
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

11. Check the mesh.

Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

12. Save the mesh file (combustor_effusion.msh.h5).

File → Write → Mesh...

13. Switch to Solution mode.

Now that a mesh has been generated using Ansys Fluent in meshing mode, you can now switch
to solver mode to complete the set up of the simulation. Note that to obtain more accurate
solutions a higher quality mesh should be used.

We have just checked the mesh, so select Yes when prompted to switch to solution mode.

19.5.3. Mesh
1. Examine the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
736 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enable Edges in the Options group box.

b. Ensure All is selected in the Edge Type group box.

c. Select Wall from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 737
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

19.5.4. Setting Up Physics

In the Solver group box of the Physics ribbon tab, retain the default selection of the steady pressure-
based solver.

Setup → General

19.5.5. Models
1. Enable heat transfer by enabling the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

2. Retain the default k-ω SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
738 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default settings for the k-omega model.

b. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

3. Enable chemical species transport and reaction.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 739
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

Physics → Models → Species...

a. Select Partially Premixed Combustion in the Model list.

The Species Model dialog box will expand to provide further options for the Partially Premixed
Combustion model.

b. In the Chemistry Tab,

i. Select the Flamelet Generated Manifold in the State Relation group box.

ii. Select Non-Adiabatic in the Energy Treatment group box.

iii. Enable Compressibility Effects in the PDF Options group box.

iv. Select Diffusion Flamelet in the Flamelet Type group box.

v. Set the Equilibrium Operating Pressure (Pa) to 1519875 under Model Settings.

vi. Click Import CHEMKIN Mechanism... to open the Import CHEMKIN Format Mechanism
dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
740 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

A. Select drm19.inp for the Kinetics Input File.

B. Select thermo30.dat for the Thermodynamic Database.

C. Click Import and close the Import CHEMKIN Format Mechanism dialog box.

c. In the Boundary tab

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 741
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

i. Set ch4 to 1.0.

ii. Set the Fuel to be 755.37 K and the Oxid to be 422.04 K under Temperature

iii. Select Mole Fraction under Specify Species In.

d. In the Control tab, retain the existing settings.

e. In the Flamelet tab,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
742 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enable Automated Grid Refinement.

ii. Set the Initial Number of Grid Points in Flamelet to 16.

iii. Click the Calculate Flamelets button.

iv. Then answer Yes and save the flamelet solution into a file named combustor_effu-
sion.fla.gz.

f. In the Table tab

i. Click the Calculate PDF Table button.

g. Click OK to close the Species Model dialog box.

h. Save the PDF output file (combustor_effusion.pdf.gz).

File → Write → PDF...

i. Enter combustor_effusion.pdf.gz for PDF File name.

ii. Click OK to write the file.

4. Enable Discrete Phase Model

Physics → Models → Discrete Phase...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 743
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

a. Enable the Interaction with Continuous Phase in the Interaction group box.

b. Set the DPM Iteration Interval to 50.

c. In the Numerics Tab

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
744 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enable Linearize Source Terms in the Source Terms group box.

ii. Click the Injections button.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 745
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

A. Click the Create button.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
746 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

B. Select Cone as the injection type and set the Number of Streams to 300.

C. Select Droplet as the Particle Type.

D. Select kerosene-liquid as the Material and choose ch4 as the Evaporating Species.

E. Enable the Uniform Massflow Distribution option.

F. Set the X-Position [m] to 0.015 m, Y-Position [m] to 0.002 m, and the Z-Position
[m] to -0.08 m.

G. Set the Diameter [m] to 3.0E-5m.

H. Set the Temperature [K] to 340K.

I. Set the Velocity Magnitude [m/s] to 50 m//s.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 747
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

J. Set the Cone Half Angle to 12 degrees.

K. Set the Outer Radius [m] to 0.002m.

L. Set the Total Flow Rate [Kg/s] to 0.003815 Kg/s

d. In the Turbulent Dispersion tab

i. Select Discrete Random Walk Model and enable Random Eddy Lifetime.

e. Click OK to close the Set Injection Properties panel.

f. Click Close to close the Injections panel.

g. Click OK to close the Discrete Phase Model panel.

19.5.6. Materials
In this step, you will examine the default settings for the droplet material. This tutorial uses droplet prop-
erties copied from theFluent Database. In general, you can modify these or create your own droplet
properties for your specific problem as necessary .

1. Confirm the properties for the mixture materials.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
748 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Setup → Materials → Droplet Particle → kerosene-liquid Edit...

a. Retain the droplet particle properties. In this case, the default properties settings are used so
no changes are needed.

b. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

19.5.7. Operating Conditions

1. Set the operating pressure.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Operating Conditions...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 749
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

The Operating Conditions dialog box can also be accessed from the Cell Zone Conditions task page.

a. Enter 1519875 Pa for Operating Pressure.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

19.5.8. Boundary Conditions

1. Set the boundary conditions for the air inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
750 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter inlet for Zone Name.

b. Enter 0.1096181560833 kg/s for Mass Flow Rate.

c. Select Normal to the Boundary from the Direction Specification Method drop-down list.

d. Select Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list in the
Turbulence group box.

e. Enter 1 for Turbulent Intensity.

f. Enter 2 for Viscosity Ratio.

g. Click the Thermal tab and retain the default value of 755.37222 for Temperature.

h. Click the DPM tab and select escape for the Discrete Phase BC Type.

i. Click Apply and close the Inlet dialog box.

19.5.8.1. Perforated Walls

1. Setup the perforated walls to model the liner effusion, by reading an input file. .

Physics → Boundary Conditions → Perforated Walls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 751
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

a. Enable Perforated Wall Mode.

b. Click Import Input File dialog box.

c. Select the file named input.txt.

d. Click Manual Inputs to check the model settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
752 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. The Number of injection Walls is set to 1.

ii. The Injection Explicit Relaxation Factor is set to 0.1.

iii. Click Injection Holes Geometry... button and ensure the detailed setup for Injection
Holes matches what is shown in the image below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 753
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

Click OK to close the Injection Holes dialog box.

iv. Click Dynamic Conditions... button to view the detailed setup for dynamic injection
conditions for all the holes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
754 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Click OK to close the Dynamic Setup dialog box.

e. Click OK to close the Perforated Walls dialog box.

19.5.9. Cold Flow Solution

First solve the cold flow through the combustor.

1. Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 755
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

Select Second Order for Pressure, Second Order Upwind for Density and First Order Upwind
for the other equations in the Spatial Discretization group box.

2. Set the solution control parameters. This model combustor is relatively sensitive to the numerical
settings, thus to be conservative, low pseudo time explicit relaxation factors are used. Set all the
pseudo time explicit relaxation factors to be 0.1, except Body Forces (since there is no body force
considered in this case) and Discrete Phase Sources (using the default value of 0.5 since a smaller
value may not be able to recover the actual source item). With 0.1 as the relaxation factors, the
case may need a greater number of iterations to converge.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Enter 0.1 for all the Pseudo Time Explicit Relaxation Factors, except for Body Forces and
Discrete Phase Sources.

3. Set the reference pressure method in the TUI.

a. Press Enter in the console to get the command prompt (>).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
756 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enter the text commands as shown in the box:

define operating-conditions reference-pressure-method 1

4. Ensure the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

5. Initialize the field variables.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the default Hybrid initialization method and click Initialize to initialize the variables.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 757
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

6. Save the case file (combustor_effusion.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

a. Enter combustor_effusion.cas.h5 for Case File.

b. Ensure that Write Binary Files is enabled to produce a smaller, unformatted binary file.

c. Click OK to close the Select File dialog box.

7. Run the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 300 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

8. Save the case and data files (combustor_effusion.cas.h5 and combustor_effu-

sion.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Note:

If you choose a file name that already exists in the current folder, Ansys Fluent will ask
you to confirm that the previous file is to be overwritten.

19.5.10. Combustion Solution

Now model cooling flow with combustion.

1. Initialize the Progress Variable variable used for the ignition model.

Solution → Initialization

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
758 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Click Patch... to initialize the variables.

b. Select Progress Variable from the Variable list.

c. Enter 1 for the Value.

d. Select newgeom-combustor from the Zones to Patch list.

e. Click Patch and close the Patch dialog box..

2. Run the calculation.

a. Enter 400 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

3. Save the case and data files (combustor_effusion.cas.h5 and combustor_effu-

sion.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Note:

If you choose a file name that already exists in the current folder, Ansys Fluent will ask
you to confirm that the previous file is to be overwritten.

19.5.11. Postprocessing
Review the solution by examining graphical displays of the results.

1. Display effusion hole locations.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-taggedface for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 759
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

c. Select Smooth in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Perforated... and Tagged Face in the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select wall-liner and wall-heatsheild from the Surfaces lists.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

2. Display filled contours of wall temperature.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-temp-wall for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Disable Global Range in the Options group box.

d. Select Smooth in the Coloring group box.

e. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature in the Contours of drop-down lists.

f. Select wall-liner and wall-heatsheild from the Surfaces lists.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
760 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3. Create an iso-surface through the combustor geometry.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

a. Enter mid-plane for Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Y-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the Y extents of the domain.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 761
Effusion Cooling simulation in a 3D model Combustor

d. Enter 0 for the Iso-Values.

e. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

4. Display filled contours of temperature on a plane.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-temp for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Smooth in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature in the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select mid-plane from the Surfaces lists.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

5. Display filled contours of mean mixture fraction.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-mf for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Smooth in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Pdf... and Mean Mixture Fraction in the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select mid-plane from the Surfaces lists.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
762 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

6. Save the case file (combustor_effusion.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

19.6. Summary
In this tutorial you used Ansys Fluent to model the effusion cooling effects with perforated wall model
in a 3D model combustor. Discrete injection type is used here for the effusion cooling injections. The
procedures used here for simulation of effusion cooling can be applied to other combustors.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 763
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
764 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 20: Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
20.1. Introduction
20.2. Prerequisites
20.3. Problem Description
20.4. Setup and Solution
20.5. SCR Specific Post Processing
20.6. Summary

20.1. Introduction
This tutorial illustrates the setup and solution of a Selective Catalytic Reaction (SCR) system calculation
using Ansys Fluent. The selective catalytic reduction of nitrogen oxides by injecting reducing agents
has received increasing attention in the automotive industry for the removal of harmful gases. Ammonia
is typically used as an agent to react with NOx in the presence of catalysts due to the lower exhaust
temperature in the diesel engines.

However, to ensure safe and convenient storage and operation, the urea-water solution is often used
in automobile after treatment systems. The urea-water solution is injected into the exhaust gas upstream
of the SCR catalyst. The liquid jet goes through steps including liquid atomization, evaporation/decom-
position and hydrolysis to form a mixture consisting of ammonia, iso-cyanic acid, water vapor, oxygen
and other species. The mixture reacts with NOx in the SCR catalyst to reduce the NOx in the exhaust
gas stream.

SCR performance is measured on the basis of its de-NOx efficiency, ammonia and iso-cyanic acid slip
rates. These parameters heavily depend on the exhaust temperature, the NOx concentration, and the
mixture quality at the catalyst inlet, which is mainly determined by the urea injection and decomposition
rate.

Mesh file is provided with this tutorial, however the following points need to be considered while cre-
ating the geometry and meshing the volume.

Geometric Considerations:

• Computational domain consists of three parts:

1. Injector (spray development region).

2. Mixer.

3. Catalyst.

• Separate fluid zone needs to be created for catalyst, because it is modelled as porous region.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 765
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

• In place of resolving insulation (mesh inside solid material), it can be modelled using thick-wall (shell-
elements) approach.

Note:

It is important to model insulation as it influences the wall temperature and hence urea de-
position. Resolving the mesh in the insulation region will provide accurate result, but creating
mesh in thin walls and insulation can be tedious and CPU intensive. A better approach is
available where thermal behavior of insulation and thin metal is modeled with the shell
conduction model. This model solves for thermal conduction both in the normal direction,
as well as in the planar directions of the wall.

Mesh Considerations:

The following points were considered while meshing the volume:

• Spray development region: Uniform mesh.

• Boundary layer: 4 inflation layers adjacent to all walls.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Use the porous medium model.

• Use the laminar finite rate reaction model.

• Set up a spray injection of a multicomponent droplet.

• Model wall film using SCR specific impingement/splashing model.

• Post process results to obtain SCR specific risk analysis evaluation.

20.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

20.3. Problem Description

An automotive selective catalytic reduction system shown in Figure 20.1: Schematic of the selective
catalytic reduction system (p. 767) will be modeled.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
766 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 20.1: Schematic of the selective catalytic reduction system

In this tutorial you will simulate the injection, liquid atomization, evaporation/decomposition, mixing,
and wall film formation and evolution, that takes place inside the automotive SCR systems. To check
the performance of the SCR system you will use:

• The concept of uniformity index, which gives an indirect indication of the de–NOx efficiency of the
SCR system. The area-weighted uniformity index of a specified field variable is defined as:

(20.1)

where is the area–weighted average value and A is the facet area.

• SCR specific post–processing tools for assessing the risk for solids deposit formation.

20.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
20.4.1. Preparation
20.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh
20.4.3. General Settings
20.4.4. Solver Settings
20.4.5. Specifying the Models
20.4.6. Materials
20.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions
20.4.8. Specifying Boundary Conditions
20.4.9. Modify the Particle Properties
20.4.10. Flow Simulation
20.4.11. Postprocessing the Solution Results

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 767
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

20.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the selective_catalytic_reduction.zip file .

2. Unzip selective_catalytic_reactor.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file scr_hexprism.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

8. Browse to the working directory in General Options tab and press Start button.

20.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh

1. Read the mesh file scr_hexprism.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Note:

Mesh check will perform various checks and will report the results in the console. Ensure
that the reported minimum volume is positive .

3. The SCR geometric model is a long structure made of various cylindrical co-axial parts of different
diameter, joined together by conical transitions. The inlet, outlet and central cylindrical parts have
radius of 0.1 [m] and the two larger cylindrical parts have radius of 0.125 [m]; the upstream one
contains the mixer, the downstream one the catalyst. The mixer is made of 3 zero–thickness sur-
faces: wall_mixer–pipes, wall_mixer–plate and wall_mixer–twisted and since they are internal
walls, they appear as twins (for example, wall_mixer–pipes and wall_mixer–pipes_shad-
ow).

Note:

it’s good practice to display one surface at a time to visually confirm that all surfaces
have the intended name. For this tutorial, follow this procedure to familiarize yourself
with the model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
768 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Examine the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Display

a. Select the Edges option and retain the default Faces option in the Options group box.

b. Deselect all surfaces an then select all the wall surfaces by selecting the Wall surface type.

Click to deselect all surfaces. Click and select Surface Type under Group By to list the
surfaces by type, as shown above.

c. Click Display.

d. Rotate and adjust the magnification of the view.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 769
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Figure 20.2: Wall Surface Mesh Display

a. De-select the external wall surfaces wall_ext-catalyst, wall_ext-downstream and

wall_ext-upstream.

b. Click Display to show the mixer and close the Mesh Display dialogue box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
770 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 20.3: Mixer Mesh Display

20.4.3. General Settings

In the Mesh group box of the Domain ribbon tab, set the units for length..

Domain → Mesh → Units...

This opens the Set Units dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 771
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

1. Select length under Quantities.

2. Select mm under Units.

3. Select Temperature under Quantities.

4. Select C under Units.

5. Close the Set Units dialog box.

20.4.4. Solver Settings

1. Enable the pressure-based steady solver including the effects of gravity.

Physics → Solver → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
772 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of Pressure-Based from the Type list.

The pressure-based solver must be used for multiphase calculations.

b. Select Steady from the Time list.

c. Enable Gravity.

d. Enter -9.8065 m/s2 for the Gravitational Acceleration in the Y direction.

20.4.5. Specifying the Models

In this tutorial, the energy equation and the species conservation equations will be solved, along with the
momentum and continuity equations.

1. You will use the default settings for the k-ω SST turbulence model, so you can enable it directly from
the tree by right-clicking the Viscous node and choosing SST k-omega from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Viscous Model → SST k-omega

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 773
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

2. Enable chemical species transport and reaction.

Physics → Models → Species...

a. Select Species Transport in the Model list.

b. Enable Volumetric in the Reactions group box.

c. Ensure that Diffusion Energy Source is checked in the Options group box.

d. Select urea–water-air from the Mixture Material drop-down list.

Note:

Assignment of Fluent library mixture material urea–water–air and the activation

of volumetric reactions, loads a finite rate chemistry reaction mechanism with two
gaseous reactions: CO(NH_2 )_2↔ NH_3+HCNO and HCNO+H_2 O↔ NH_3+CO_2.
These species along with air (O2 and N2) are the 7 components of the mixture,
shown in Number of Volumetric Species.

e. Click OK to close the Species Model dialog box.

3. Enable Discrete Phase Model

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
774 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Physics → Models → Discrete Phase...

a. Enable the Interaction with Continuous Phase in the Interaction group box.

Note:

This is required for the activation of unsteady particle tracking with steady state
solver.

b. Set the DPM Iteration Interval to 5.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 775
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

c. Enable the Unsteady Particle Tracking in the Particle Treatment group box and change the
value of Particle Time Step [s] to 0.005.

Note:

Although gas flow can be treated in a steady-state manner, the injection and
motion of the droplets must be treated as transient.

d. Increase the Max. Number of Steps in Tracking Parameters group box to 2000.

e. Ensure that the High-Res Tracking is enabled in the Tracking Option group box.

f. Click the Injections button.

1. Click the Create button.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
776 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Select Cone as the Injection Type and set the Number of Streams to 10.

3. Select Multicomponent as the Particle Type.

4. Select urea-water from the Material drop-down list.

5. Select rosin–rammler from the Diameter Distribution drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 777
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

6. Confirm solid-cone is selected in the Cone Type drop-down list at Cone Injector Paramet-
ers group box.

7. Set the X-Position [m] to 0 mm, Y-Position [mm] to 124 mm, and the Z-Position [mm]
to 180 mm.

8. Set the Temperature [C] to 20 C.

9. Set the Start Time [s] to 0 s and Stop Time [s] to 1000 s

10. Set the Azimuthal Start Angle [deg] to 0 degrees and the Azimuthal Stop Angle [deg]
to 360 degrees.

11. Set the X-Axis, Y-Axis and Z-Axis to 0, -0.866 and 0.5, respectively .

12. Set the Velocity Magnitude [m/s] to 20 m/s.

13. Set the Cone Half Angle to 10 degrees.

14. Set the Outer Radius [mm] to 6.25e-02 mm.

15. Set the Total Flow Rate [Kg/s] to 5e-05 Kg/s

16. Set the Min. Diameter [mm] to 4e-03 mm and the Max. Diameter [mm] to 6e-02 mm.

17. Set the Mean Diameter [mm] to 4e-02 mm.

18. Set the Spread Parameter to 3.5.

19. Set the Number of Diameters to 10.

Note:

Start Time and Stop Time are given the above values for the tutorial purposes.
For practical SCR applications these should be defined according to the actual urea
dosing intervals.

g. In the Turbulent Dispersion tab

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
778 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

h. Select Discrete Random Walk Model.

Note:

This makes sure that particles are not always injected with the same exactly para-
meters, rather they follow a stochastic behavior with average values as declared in
the point properties table above and a perturbation that creates a more realistic
turbulence representation.

i. In the Components tab

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 779
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

i. Select co<nh2>2 for the co<nh2>2<l> Component from the Evaporating Species
drop–down list and enter 0.325 for its Mass Fraction.

ii. Select h2o for the <h2o>2<l> Component from the Evaporating Species drop–down list
and enter 0.675 for its Mass Fraction.

j. Click OK to close the Set Injection Properties panel.

k. Click Close to close the Injections panel.

l. Click OK to close the Discrete Phase Model panel.

4. Create another injection by first copying the injection-0.

Setup → Models → Discrete Phase → Injections → Injection-0 Copy...

This will create Injection-1 having the same properties as Injection-0. Change the Value of only
the following Variable of Injection-1 in Point Properties tab.

a. Set the X-Position [m] to 4.48 mm, Y-Position [mm] to 123 mm, and the Z-Position [mm]
to 172.707 mm.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
780 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Set the X-Axis to 0.15038.

c. Set the Y-Axis to -0.95511.

d. Set the Z-Axis to 0.25523.

e. Click OK to close the Set Injection Properties panel.

5. Repeat the procedure to create a third injection by copying injection–1.

Setup → Models → Discrete Phase → Injections → Injection-1 Copy...

This will create Injection-2 having the same properties as Injection-1. Change the Value of only
the following Variable of Injection-1 in Point Properties tab.

a. Set the X-Position to -4.48 mm.

b. Set the X-Axis to -0.15038.

c. Click OK to close the Set Injection Properties panel.

20.4.6. Materials
Modify the material properties:

1. Confirm the properties for the mixture materials.

Setup → Materials → Mixture → urea-water-air Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 781
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Click the Edit... button to the right of the Mixture Species drop-down list to open the Species
dialog box. Confirm that the last of the 7 species on the list Selected Species is n2.

b. Then click Cancel to return to the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

c. Edit the particle mixture by selecting particle-mixture in the Material Type drop-down list.
There is only one item urea-water in theFluent Particle Mixture Materials drop-down list.

d. Select convection/diffusion-controlled for the Vaporization/Boiling Model.

Note:

The convection/diffusion model is recommended for high evaporation rates.

i. In the Model Options dialog box, enable Variable Lewis Number Formulation in
Convection/Diffusion Vaporization Model. This causes the Use the Specific Heat
of the Evaporating Species in Boiling Law in Boiling Model to be also enabled.

Note:

Variable Lewis number allows Spalding heat transfer number and

Spalding mass number to be different.

ii. Click OK in the Model Options dialog box.

e. Click Change/Create to accept the material property settings.

f. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box, Select press button Fluent Database… and the
dialog box Fluent Database Materials will appear.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
782 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select solid from the Material Type drop-down list and steel from the Fluent Solid Ma-
terials list.

ii. Click Copy and close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

g. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

20.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions

Set the cell zone conditions for the catalyst: Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → fluid_cata-

lyst Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 783
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

1. Enable Porous Zone to activate the porous zone model.

2. Enable Laminar Zone to solve the flow in the porous zone without turbulence.

3. Click the Porous Zone tab.

i. Make sure that the principal direction vectors are set as shown in Table 20.1: Values for the
Principle Direction Vectors (p. 784).

Ansys Fluent automatically calculates the third (Z direction) vector based on your inputs for the
first two vectors. The direction vectors determine which axis the viscous and inertial resistance
coefficients act upon.

Table 20.1: Values for the Principle Direction Vectors

Axis Direction-1 Vector Direction-2 Vector

X 0 0
Y 0 1
Z 1 0

ii. For the viscous and inertial resistance directions, enter the values in Table 20.2: Values for the
Viscous and Inertial Resistance (p. 785).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
784 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Scroll down to access the fields that are not initially visible.

Table 20.2: Values for the Viscous and Inertial Resistance

Direction Viscous Resistance (1/m2) Inertial Resistance (1/m)

Direction-1 2e+07 10
Direction-2 2e+10 10000
Direction-3 2e+10 10000

Note:

This setup provides a finite resistance to flow in the axial Z-direction and practically
infinite resistance to the other two directions, therefore straightening the flow along
the axial direction. The values of coefficients in Z-direction are estimated from the
measured pressure losses along the catalyst, as a function of gases velocity,
whereas the coefficients in the other two directions are typically taken to be three
orders of magnitude larger.

4. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

20.4.8. Specifying Boundary Conditions

1. Set the boundary conditions of external wall wall_ext-catalyst.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall_ext-catalyst Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 785
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Click the Thermal tab.

b. Select Convection under Thermal Conditions and enter 10 for the Heat Transfer Coefficient
and -30 for the Free Stream Temperature .

c. Select Steel under Material Name.

d. Enable Shell Conduction and then select Edit.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
786 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enter 1 mm for Thickness.

ii. Select steel from the Material drop down list.

Note:

Shell conduction model allows to use zero–thickness walls, hence saving

in mesh count, and simultaneously solve accurately conductive heat transfer
inside solids not only along the thickness but also along the wall in both
lateral directions, which is necessary in conductive materials such as metals.
In case of temperature–dependent solid thermal conductivity and anticipated
large variations in temperature, more than one shell layers maybe be neces-
sary to accurately account for the in–thickness temperature distribution.

iii. Click OK in the Conduction Layers dialog box.

e. Select Species tab and confirm that for all species have Specified Mass Flux is selected for
the Species Boundary Condition and has a value of 0 specified for the Species Mass Fraction/
Mass Flux.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 787
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

f. Select the DPM tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
788 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select wall-film from the Discrete Phase BC Type drop–down list in the Discrete
Phase Model Boundary Conditions group.

ii. Select Enable Particle–Wall Heat Exchange?.

iii. Select stochastic kuhnke from the Impingement/Splashing Model drop-down

list in the Impingement/Splashing Parameters group box, retaining the default values.

Note:

Stochastic Kuhnke model is derived from the Kuhnke model and has been
developed and calibrated for addressing SCR applications. It introduces
stochastic effects into the critical temperature transition process, and the
partial evaporation concept for the evaporative splash regime.

g. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 789
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

2. Set the boundary conditions for internal wall wall_mixer–pipes.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall_mixer–pipes Edit...

a. Click the Thermal tab.

b. Confirm that Coupled is selected in the Thermal Conditions group box.

c. Select steel from the Material drop down list.

d. Enable Shell Conduction and then select Edit.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
790 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enter 2 mm for Thickness.

ii. Select steel from the Material drop down list.

iii. Click OK in the Conduction Layers dialog box.

e. Select Species tab and confirm that for all species have Specified Mass Flux is selected for
the Species Boundary Condition and has a value of 0 specified for the Species Mass Fraction/
Mass Flux.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 791
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

f. Select the DPM tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
792 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select wall-film from the Discrete Phase BC Type drop–down list in the Discrete
Phase Model Boundary Conditions group.

ii. Select Enable Particle–Wall Heat Exchange?.

iii. Select stochastic kuhnke from the Impingement/Splashing Model drop-down

list in the Impingement/Splashing Parameters group box, retaining the default values.

g. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

3. Copy the boundary conditions to the other external walls.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall_ext-catalyst Copy...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 793
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Ensure that wall_ext–catalyst is selected from the From Boundary Zone list.

b. Select all the walls from the To Boundary Zone list.

c. Click Copy, click OK in the confirmation prompt, and close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

4. Copy the boundary conditions to the other internal walls.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall_mixer-pipes Copy...

a. Ensure that wall_mixer-pipes is selected from the From Boundary Zone list.

b. Select all the walls from the To Boundary Zone list.

c. Click Copy, click OK in the confirmation prompt, and close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
794 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

5. Set the boundary conditions for the inlet, first change its type from velocity-inlet to mass-flow-
inlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet Type → mass-flow-inlet

6. Set the conditions for mass-flow-inlet.

a. Enter 0.0347754 kg/s for Mass Flow Rate .

b. Click the Thermal tab and enter 400 C for Total Temperature.

c. Click the Species tab, set the Species Mass Fractions for o2 to 0.001, h2o to 0.08, and
co2 to 0.02.

d. Click the DPM tab and confirm that escape is selected for Discrete Phase BC Type.

e. Click Apply and close the Mass Flow Inlet dialog box.

7. Set the boundary conditions for outlet.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet Edit...

a. Click the Thermal tab, enter 400 C for Temperature.

b. Click the Species tab, set all the Backflow Species Mass Fractions to 0.

c. Click the DPM tab and confirm that escape is selected for Discrete Phase BC Type.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 795
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

d. Click Apply and close the Pressure Oulet dialog box.

20.4.9. Modify the Particle Properties

Thermolysis model applies for both the free particles and wall film. Since wall film is now activated
in the boundary conditions thermolysis can now be setup in the materials. Modify the material
properties:

1. Select secondary rate for Thermolysis of particles and wall film:

Setup → Materials → Particle Mixture → urea–water → urea-liquid Edit...

a. Select secondary–rate for the Thermolysis Model.

Note:

Secondary rate thermolysis model allows to define different thermolysis parameters

for the particles and film.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
796 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i.

A. Enter 1.0 for the Pre–Exponential Factor in Film Thermolysis Rate group box.

B. Click OK to close the Secondary Rate Model dialog box.

2. Click Change/Create to accept the material property settings.

3. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

20.4.10. Flow Simulation

1. Specify the discretization schemes.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 797
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Select SIMPLE from the Pressure-Velocity Coupling drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
798 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enable Auto Select for the Flux Type.

c. Select Body Force Weighted for Pressure, Second Order Upwind for Momentum, Energy
and all the Species in the Spatial Discretization group box.

2. Set the solution control parameters.

Solution → Solution → Controls...

a. Retain the default Under Relaxation Factors for all variables.

b. Click Limits... to open the Solution Limits dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 799
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

i. Enter -50 C for the Minimum Static Temperature.

ii. Enter 700 C for the Maximum Static Temperature.

iii. Click OK to close the Solution Limits dialog box.

Note:

It's good practice to limit the allowable range of temperature (and/or pressure in
other cases) to avoid stability problems.

3. Create a surface report definition of the species at the interior catalyst.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Uniformity Index-Area

Weighted...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
800 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter ui_nh3_cat-in for the Name of the report definition.

b. Enable Report File, Report Plot, and Print to Console in the Create group box.

c. Select Species... and Mass fraction of nh3 from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

d. Select interior_catalyst-in from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

4. Create a surface report definition of the velocity at the interior catalyst.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Uniformity Index-Area

Weighted...

a. Enter ui_velmag_cat-in for the Name of the report definition.

b. Enable Report File and Report Plot in the Create group box.

c. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

d. Select interior_catalyst-in from the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 801
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

5. Create a surface report definition of the wall film mass.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Sum...

a. Enter sum_wf-mass_walls for the Name of the report definition.

b. Enable separate reporting for each surface by checking Per Surface box in the Options group
box.

c. Enable Report File and Report Plot in the Create group box.

d. Select Wall Film... and Wall Film Mass from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

e. Select all the walls from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

6. Initialize the flow field using the Initialization group box of the Solution ribbon tab.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the default selection of Hybrid from the Method list.

b. Click Initialize.

7. Save the case and dat file (scr_initial.cas.h5 and scr_initial.dat.h5.)

File → Write → Case & Data...

8. Request 2000 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation → Calculate

Note:

Convergence in this case is not judged by the residuals, rather from the monitors.
Both uniformity monitors show that main phase (gases) flow has been stabilized,
whereas the wall film mass monitor suggests, as expected, that disperse phase
flow (droplets and wall film) is developing.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
802 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Figure 20.4: Scaled Residuals

Figure 20.5: Surface Monitor of Uniformity Index (Area–Weighted) for NH3 Mass Fraction
at Catalyst Inlet

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 803
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Figure 20.6: Surface Monitor of Uniformity Index (Area–Weighted) for Mixture Velocity
Magnitude at Catalyst Inlet.

Figure 20.7: Surface Monitor of Total Wall Film Mass at Each Wall Boundary.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
804 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

9. Save the case and dat file (scr_solved.cas.h5 and scr_solved.dat.h5.)

File → Write → Case & Data...

20.4.11. Postprocessing the Solution Results

1. Display contours of pressure.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter pressure_walls for Contour Name.

b. Select Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Select Wall from the Surfaces selection list.

d. Click Save/Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 805
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Figure 20.8: Static Pressure Distribution on the System Walls.

Contours show that static pressure drops from ~112 to ~2 [Pa] across the catalyst.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
806 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e.

i. Disable Global Range and Auto Range in the Options group box.

ii. Change the Min value to 100 [Pa] and the Max value to 120 [Pa].

iii. Click Save/Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 807
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Figure 20.9: Static Pressure Distribution on the System Walls; Limited Range.

Contours reveal a smaller pressure drop from ~119 to ~111 [Pa] across the mixer.

2. Create two longitudinal planes to plot variables at the SCR internal region. These two surfaces
will be used to display solution results internally the SCR system.

Create a surface of constant x.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
808 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter x-mid for New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and X-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the x-extent of the domain.

d. Retain a value of 0 mm for Iso-Values.

e. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

Repeat steps above and create a surface of constant y.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

a. Enter y-mid for New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Y-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the x-extent of the domain.

d. Retain a value of 0 mm for Iso-Values.

e. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

3. Display the mesh surfaces.

Results → Graphics → Mesh → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 809
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Enter mesh_ext for Mesh Name.

b. Confirm that only Faces have been selected in the Options group box.

c. Select all the Wall surfaces, except those with suffix -shadow. This is to avoid plotting twice
the internal (double) walls.

d. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

4. Display contours of gas temperature field inside the SCR with the geometry also displayed.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
810 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter temp_mid-planes for Contour Name.

b. Disable Global Range, Auto Range and Clip to Range in the Options group box.

c. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Change the Min value to 300 C.

e. Change the Max value to 400 C.

f. Select Inlet,Outlet and Iso-surface from the Surfaces selection list.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

5. Create a scene containing the static temperature distribution at the two internal surfaces.

Results → Scene New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 811
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Change the Name to gas_temp.

b. Change the Title to Mixture Temperature.

c. Enable the mesh_ext and temperature_mid–planes graphics object.

d. Set the Transparency of mesh_ext object to 70.

e. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
812 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 20.10: Static Temperature Distribution at the Two Internal Planes

The gases enter the domain at 400 [C] but when mixed with the cooler droplets (at 20 [C])
and also due to droplets partial evaporation, they are cooled down to an average temperature
of ~315 [C] at the outlet. Note that values below the minimum and above the maximum values
set in the contour dialog box, are displayed as blue and red, respectively, due to deactivation
of Clip to Range option, otherwise they would have been displayed as empty regions.

6. Create a contour of NH3 distribution on the mixer

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 813
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Enter nh3_int for Contour Name.

b. Disable Global Range in the Options group box.

c. Select Species... and Mass fraction of nh3 from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select all internal walls from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
814 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 20.11: Distribution of NH3 Mass Fraction on the Mixer Walls.

7. Display contours of Wall Film Height.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 815
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Enter wfh_ext for Contour Name.

b. Disable Global Range and Auto Range in the Options group box.

c. Select Wall Film... and Wall Film Height from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select the external walls from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Compute.

f. Ensure that Clip to Range is selected in the Options group box.

g. Change the Min value to 1e-05 mm.

h. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

8. Create a scene with the wall film height distribution on all walls.

Results → Scene New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
816 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Change the Name to wfh.

b. Change the Title to Wall Film Height on External Walls.

c. Enable the mesh_ext and wfh_ext graphics object.

d. Set the Transparency of mesh_ext object to 70.

e. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 817
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Figure 20.12: Distribution of Wall Film Height on the External Walls of the SCR System.

9. Create a particle tracks graph.

Results → Graphics → Particle Tracks → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
818 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter par-tracks_urea for Particle Tracks Name.

b. Select Sphere in the Track Style group box.

c. Click Attributes... and change the Scale to 100.

d. Click Apply and close the Particle Sphere Style Attributes dialogue box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 819
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

This will cause the particles to appear as spheres with a size proportional to their diameter
and scaled by x100 for clarity.

e. Select Particle Variables... and Mass Fraction of co<nh2>2<l> from the Color by drop-down
lists.

f. Select all three injections from the Release from Injections selection list.

g. Select Summary in the Reporting group box, so that both a summary in the console and a
graph in the GUI will be produced.

h. Make sure that both Free Stream Particles and Wall Film Particles are checked.

i. Click Save/Display.

j. Close the Particle Tracks dialog box.

The summary track report provides information about the number of particles in the domain, their
fate ( evaporated , transformed , escaped ), their state ( In Film , In Fluid ) and the associated mass
and heat transfer, as well as their composition.

10. Create a scene with the particle tracks and the walls of the geometry.

Results → Scene New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
820 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Change the Name to tracks.

b. Change the Title to Particle Tracks with Urea MF.

c. Enable the mesh_ext and par-tracks_urea graphics object.

d. Set the Transparency of mesh_ext object to 50.

e. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 821
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Figure 20.13: Tracks of Free and Wall Film Particles, Colored by Urea Mass Fraction and
Scaled by Particle Diameter.

The particle track graph shows both the cloud of free droplets, as well as the wall particles
that form the wall film. It is evident that water content of the droplets is evaporated upstream
the mixer and is associated with the cooling effect observed in the gas temperature contour
plot previously.

11. Modify the particles tracks to show only the wall film particles that have lost practically all their
water content.

Results → Graphics → Particle Tracks → par-tracks_urea Edit..

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
822 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Uncheck Auto Range to be able to manually set the range of the plotted value.

b. Select Off in the Reporting group box.

c. Uncheck Free Stream Particles to hide them from the display.

d. Set the Min value to 0.999 and the Max value to 1.0, which practically means that all water
content of the droplet has evaporated.

e. Check the Filter option.

f. Select Filter By... to regulate filtering.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 823
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

g. Select Particle Variables... and Mass Fraction of co<nh2>2<l> from the Filter By... drop-
down lists.

h. i. Set the Filter-Min value to 0.999 and Filter-Max value to 1.0 and make sure the
remaining settings are as displayed.

ii. Click Apply and close the Particle Filter Attributes dialog box.

i. Click Save/Display and close the Particle Tracks dialog box.

12. Re-display the scene with the particle tracks and the walls of the geometry.

Results → Scene → tracks Edit...

a. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
824 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 SCR Specific Post Processing

Figure 20.14: Tracks of Wall Film Particles with H2O Content Practically Evaporated and
Scaled by Particle Diameter.

13. Save the case and data files (scr_final.cas.h5 and scr_final.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

20.5. SCR Specific Post Processing

Ansys Fluent has an automated workflow to post process CFD results and assess the risk for solids de-
posit formation for SCR systems operating with urea. The calculations involve chemical and hydrodynamic
risk factors based on thermodynamic data and known chemical pathways, as well as on experimental
evidence reported. The risk variables are defined as dimensionless quantities that vary from 0 (no risk)
to 1 (max risk). Note that the risk assessment calculation is not a predictive model for urea deposit
formation, and the obtained results should be considered only as rough guidance in exploring urea
deposit formation trends. The risk assessment calculation is invoked after initial film formation on SCR
surfaces and requires the transient solver.

1. In the Solver group box of the Physics ribbon tab, select transient.

Physics → Solver → General...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 825
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

2. Modify the iterations interval between DPM tracks.

Physics → Models → Discrete Phase...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
826 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 SCR Specific Post Processing

a. Change the DPM Iteration Interval to 100.

By setting a value equal or larger than the maximum number of iterations per time step, the
particle tracking is only performed once per time step.

b. Click OK to close the Discrete Phase Model panel.

3. Activate the urea risk assessment from the TUI.

a. Press Enter in the console to get the command prompt (>).

b. Type /define/models/dpm/options/scr-urea-deposition-risk-analysis en-

able?

c. Type yes in the console and press <Enter>.

d. Type all IDs (provided in the Boundary Conditions list on the model tree) one by one followed
by Enter. When the last wall ID has been typed, press Enter again. You should get the following
output in the console.

/define/models/dpm/options/scr-urea-deposition-risk-analysis> enable

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 827
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Enable the SCR urea deposition risk analysis? [no] y

Wall face zones(1) [()] 4
Wall face zones(2) [()] 5
Wall face zones(3) [()] 6
Wall face zones(4) [()] 9
Wall face zones(5) [()] 10
Wall face zones(6) [()] 16
Wall face zones(7) [()] 17
Wall face zones(8) [()] 18
Wall face zones(9) [()] 19
Wall face zones(10) [()]

e. Fluent has also activated the Data Sampling for Time Statistics in the Run Calculation Task
Page. If Sampling Options... is pressed the details can be seen.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
828 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 SCR Specific Post Processing

4. Run the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 829
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
830 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 SCR Specific Post Processing

a. Enter 20 for Number of Time Steps. This is a small time period covered, in order to demonstrate
the procedure. Larger time periods may be simulated in industrial risk assessment calculations.

b. Ensure that the Time Step Size to 0.005.

c. Enter 10 for Max Iterations/Time Steps. A transient simulation that converges every time step
in 10 iterations or less is generally considered to have a sufficiently fine time step size.

d. Click Calculate.

e. Fluent asks if the existing Report files will be over-written or new ones will be created. This
happens because now the reports are not monitored every iteration (steady-state solver) but
every time step (transient solver). Press Yes to create new files. Fluent starts the transient calcu-
lation using the steady-state solution as the initial state of the transient solution. Residuals show
that standard convergence is achieved in 10 iterations for all time steps (except a couple of steps
at the beginning), which was expected as the steady-state gas flow was quite stable.

5. Examine the risk levels.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter risk-analysis for Contour Name.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 831
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

b. Disable Global Range and Auto Range in the Options group box.

c. Select SCR Urea Deposition Risk Analysis... and SCR Urea Crystallization Risk from the Con-
tours of drop-down lists.

d. Select all walls from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click Compute. Fluent returns 0 for Min and Max, indicating that risk for crystallization is zero
at all walls.

f. Repeat the same for the other two risk parameters, SCR Urea Secondary Reactions Risk and
SCR Overall Urea Chemical Deposition Risk, which also return zero risk everywhere.

Note:

Risk assessment for solids deposition in urea SCR systems is based on empirical cor-
relations using parameters reported in the relevant literature. The user can set the
values of 9 such parameters through the TUI, according to the specific characteristics
of the SCR system simulated.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

6. Modify minimum mass fraction of HNCO from the TUI.

a. Press Enter in the console to get the command prompt (>).

b. Type /define/models/dpm/options/scr-urea-deposition-risk-analysis
seco-rx-min-hnco in the console and press Enter.

c.
/define/models/dpm/options/scr-urea-deposition-risk-analysis> seco-rx-min-hnco

minimum HNCO mass fraction in the gas phase above the film for secondary reactions [0.03] 0.001

d. Type 0.001 in the console and press Enter.

7. Continue the calculation for another 20 time steps

8. Re-examine the risk levels.

Results → Graphics → Contours → risk-analysis Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
832 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 SCR Specific Post Processing

a. Select SCR Urea Deposition Risk Analysis... and SCR Overall Urea Chemical Deposition Risk
from the Contours of drop-down lists.

b. Select all walls from the Surfaces selection list.

c. Click Compute and Fluent will return Min and Max values of 0 and 0.5, respectively.

d. Set the Min value to 1e-05.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

9. Create a scene with the overall deposition risk and the walls of the geometry.

Results → Scene New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 833
Selective Catalytic Reduction Simulation

a. Change the Name to overall-depo-risk.

b. Change the Title to Overall Deposition Risk.

c. Enable the risk-analysis and mesh_ext graphics object.

d. Set the Transparency of mesh_ext object to 60.

e. Click Save & Display and close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
834 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 20.15: Contours of Overall Deposition Risk on the Walls of the SCR System.

10. Save the case and data files (scr_transient.cas.h5 and scr_transient.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

20.6. Summary
The main focus of this tutorial is to illustrate the setup and solution of a SCR system calculation using
Ansys Fluent.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 835
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
836 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 21: Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
21.1. Introduction
21.2. Prerequisites
21.3. Problem Description
21.4. Setup and Solution
21.5. Summary

21.1. Introduction
In this tutorial, the air-blast atomizer model in Ansys Fluent is used to predict the behavior of an evap-
orating methanol spray. Initially, the air flow is modeled without droplets. To predict the behavior of
the spray, the discrete phase model is used, including a secondary model for breakup.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Define a spray injection for an air-blast atomizer.

• Calculate a solution using the discrete phase model in Ansys Fluent.

21.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

21.3. Problem Description

The geometry to be considered in this tutorial is shown in Figure 21.1: Problem Specification (p. 838).
Methanol is cooled to -10°C before being introduced into an air-blast atomizer. The atomizer contains
an inner air stream surrounded by a swirling annular stream. To make use of the periodicity of the
problem, only a 30° section of the atomizer will be modeled.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 837
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Figure 21.1: Problem Specification

21.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
21.4.1. Preparation
21.4.2. Mesh
21.4.3. Solver
21.4.4. Models
21.4.5. Materials
21.4.6. Boundary Conditions
21.4.7. Initial Solution Without Droplets
21.4.8. Creating a Spray Injection
21.4.9. Solution
21.4.10. Postprocessing

21.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the evaporate_liquid.zip file .

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
838 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Unzip evaporate_liquid.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file sector.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

21.4.2. Mesh
1. Read in the mesh file sector.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

2. Change the periodic type of periodic-a to rotational.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Periodic → periodic-a Edit...

a. Select Rotational in the Periodic Type group box.

b. Click Apply and close the Periodic dialog box.

3. In a similar manner, change the periodic type of periodic-b to rotational.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 839
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

4. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and report the progress in the console. Ensure
that the reported minimum volume is a positive number.

5. Display the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
840 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Ensure that Edges and Faces are enabled in the Options group box.

b. Select only atomizer-wall, central_air, and swirling_air from the Surfaces selection list.

Tip:

To deselect all surfaces click the far-right button at the top of the Surfaces
selection list, and then select the desired surfaces from the Surfaces selection list.

c. Click the Colors... button to open the Mesh Colors dialog box.

i. Select wall from the Types selection list.

ii. Select pink from the Colors selection list.

iii. Close the Mesh Colors dialog box.

d. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

The graphics display will be updated to show the mesh. Zoom in with the mouse to obtain the view
shown in Figure 21.2: Air-Blast Atomizer Mesh Display (p. 842).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 841
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Figure 21.2: Air-Blast Atomizer Mesh Display

21.4.3. Solver
Retain the default solver settings of pressure-based steady-state solver in the General task page
(Solver and Time group boxes).

Physics → Solver → General...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
842 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

21.4.4. Models
1. Enable heat transfer by enabling the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

2. Enable the k-ω SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 843
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

a. Retain the default selection of k-omega (2 eqn) in the Model list.

b. Retain the default selection of SST in the k-omega Model list.

c. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
844 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3. Enable chemical species transport and reaction.

Physics → Models → Species...

a. Select Species Transport in the Model list.

b. Select methyl-alcohol-air from the Mixture Material drop-down list.

The Mixture Material list contains the set of chemical mixtures that exist in the Ansys Fluent
database. When selecting an appropriate mixture for your case, you can review the constituent
species and the reactions of the predefined mixture by clicking View... next to the Mixture Mater-
ial drop-down list. The chemical species and their physical and thermodynamic properties are
defined by the selection of the mixture material. After enabling the Species Transport model, you
can alter the mixture material selection or modify the mixture material properties using the Cre-
ate/Edit Materials dialog box. You will modify your local copy of the mixture material later in this
tutorial.

c. Click OK to close the Species Model dialog box.

21.4.5. Materials
Define materials using the Materials task page.

Setup → Materials

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 845
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

1. Edit the methyl-alcohol-air mixture material by removing water vapor and carbon dioxide from
the mixture species list.

Setup → Materials → Mixture → Create/Edit...

a. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box for the methyl-alcohol-air mixture material, click the
Edit... button next to the Mixture Species drop-down list (Properties group box) to open
the Species dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
846 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. In the Selected Species selection list, select carbon dioxide (co2).

ii. Click Remove to remove carbon dioxide from the Selected Species list.

iii. In a similar manner, remove water vapor (h2o) from the Selected Species list.

iv. Click OK to close the Species dialog box.

v. Click OK in the Warning dialog box informing you that the species mixture has been
modified and asking you to check the species boundary conditions.

b. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

Note:

It is good practice to click the Change/Create button whenever changes are made
to material properties even though it is not necessary in this case.

21.4.6. Boundary Conditions

Specify boundary conditions using the Boundary Conditions task page.

Setup → Boundary Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 847
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

1. Set the boundary conditions for the inner air stream (central_air).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → central_air → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
848 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 9.167e-5 kg/s for Mass Flow Rate.

b. Select Direction Vector for the Direction Specification Method.

c. Enter 0 for X-Component of Flow Direction.

d. Retain the default value of 0 for Y-Component of Flow Direction.

e. Enter 1 for Z-Component of Flow Direction.

f. Select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification Method drop-down list.

g. Enter 10 for Turbulent Intensity.

h. Enter 0.0037 m for Hydraulic Diameter.

i. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Total Temperature.

j. Click the Species tab and enter 0.23 for o2 in the Species Mass Fractions group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 849
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

k. Click Apply and close the Mass-Flow Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for the air stream surrounding the atomizer (co-flow-air).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → co-flow-air → Edit...

a. Enter 1 m/s for Velocity Magnitude.

b. Select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification Method drop-down list.

c. Retain the default value of 5 for Turbulent Intensity.

d. Enter 0.0726 m for Hydraulic Diameter.

e. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Temperature.

f. Click the Species tab and enter 0.23 for o2 in the Species Mass Fractions group box.

g. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for the exit boundary (outlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → outlet → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
850 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select From Neighboring Cell from the Backflow Direction Specification Method drop-down
list.

b. Retain Intensity and Viscosity Ratio from the Specification Method drop-down list.

c. Retain the default value of 5 for Backflow Turbulent Intensity (%).

d. Enter 5 for Backflow Turbulent Viscosity Ratio.

e. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Backflow Total Temperature.

f. Click the Species tab and enter 0.23 for o2 in the Species Mass Fractions group box.

g. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

4. Set the boundary conditions for the swirling annular stream (swirling_air).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → swirling_air → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 851
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

a. Select Magnitude and Direction from the Velocity Specification Method drop-down list.

b. Enter 19 m/s for Velocity Magnitude.

c. Select Cylindrical (Radial, Tangential, Axial) from the Coordinate System drop-down list.

d. Enter 0 for Radial-Component of Flow Direction.

e. Enter 0.7071 for Tangential-Component of Flow Direction.

f. Enter 0.7071 for Axial-Component of Flow Direction.

g. Select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification Method drop-down list.

h. Retain the default value of 5 for Turbulent Intensity.

i. Enter 0.0043 m for Hydraulic Diameter.

j. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Temperature.

k. Click the Species tab and enter 0.23 for o2 in the Species Mass Fractions group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
852 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

l. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

5. Set the boundary conditions for the outer wall of the atomizer (outer-wall).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → outer-wall → Edit...

a. Select Specified Shear in the Shear Condition list.

b. Retain the default values for the remaining parameters.

c. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

21.4.7. Initial Solution Without Droplets

The airflow will first be solved and analyzed without droplets.

1. Set the solution method.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 853
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Retain the default selections.

2. Retain the default under-relaxation factors.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
854 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3. Enable residual plotting during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 855
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

4. Initialize the flow field.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the Method at the default of Hybrid.

b. Click Initialize to initialize the variables.

Note:

For flows in complex topologies, hybrid initialization will provide better initial velocity
and pressure fields than standard initialization. This will help to improve the convergence
behavior of the solver.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
856 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

5. Save the case file (spray1.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

6. Start the calculation by requesting 150 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation

a. In the Fluid Time Scale group box, retain Automatic for Time Step Method and 1s for Time
Scale Factor.

b. Enter 150 for Number of Iterations.

c. Click Calculate.

Figure 21.3: Scaled Residuals

7. Save the case and data files (spray1.cas.h5 and spray1.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Note:

Ansys Fluent will ask you to confirm that the previous case file is to be overwritten.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 857
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

8. Create a clip plane to examine the flow field at the midpoint of the atomizer section.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

a. Enter angle=15 for New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Angular Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute to obtain the minimum and maximum values of the angular coordinate.

d. Enter 15 for Iso-Values.

e. Click Create to create the isosurface.

f. Close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

9. Review the current state of the solution by examining contours of velocity magnitude (Fig-
ure 21.4: Velocity Magnitude at Mid-Point of Atomizer Section (p. 860)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
858 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter contour-vel for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Enable Draw Mesh.

The Mesh Display dialog box will open.

i. Retain the current mesh display settings.

ii. Close the Mesh Display dialog box.

e. Select angle=15 from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

g. Use the mouse to obtain the view shown in Figure 21.4: Velocity Magnitude at Mid-Point of
Atomizer Section (p. 860).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 859
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Figure 21.4: Velocity Magnitude at Mid-Point of Atomizer Section

10. Display pathlines of the air in the swirling annular stream (Figure 21.5: Pathlines of Air in the
Swirling Annular Stream (p. 861)).

Results → Graphics → Pathlines → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
860 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter pathlines-air for Pathline Name.

b. Increase the Path Skip value to 5.

c. In the Release from Surfaces filter, type s to display the surface names that begin with s and
select swirling_air from the selection list.

d. Enable Draw Mesh in the Options group box.

The Mesh Display dialog box will open.

i. Retain the current mesh display settings.

ii. Close the Mesh Display dialog box.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Pathlines dialog box.

f. Use the mouse to obtain the view shown in Figure 21.5: Pathlines of Air in the Swirling Annular
Stream (p. 861).

Figure 21.5: Pathlines of Air in the Swirling Annular Stream

21.4.8. Creating a Spray Injection

1. Define the discrete phase modeling parameters.

Physics → Models → Discrete Phase...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 861
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

a. Select Interaction with Continuous Phase in the Interaction group box.

This will include the effects of the discrete phase trajectories on the continuous phase.

b. Retain the value of 10 for DPM Iteration Interval.

c. Select Mean Values in the Contour Plots for DPM Variables group box.

This will make the cell-averaged variables available for postprocessing activities.

d. In the Particle Treatment group box, select the Unsteady Particle Tracking option.

e. Enter 0.0001 for Particle Time Step Size.

f. Enter 10 for Number of Time Steps.

g. Under the Physical Models tab, enable Temperature Dependent Latent Heat and Breakup
in the Options group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
862 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

h. Under the Numerics tab, select Linearize Source Terms (Source Terms group).

Enabling this option will allow you to run the simulation with more aggressive setting for the
Discrete Phase Sources under-relaxation factor to speed up the solution convergence.

i. Click Injections... to open the Injections dialog box.

In this step, you will define the characteristics of the atomizer.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 863
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

An Information dialog box appears indicating that the Max. Number of Steps has been
changed from 50000 to 500. Click OK in the Information dialog box to continue.

j. Click the Create button to create the spray injection.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
864 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

k. In the Set Injection Properties dialog box, select air-blast-atomizer from the Injection Type
drop-down list.

l. Enter 600 for Number of Streams.

This option controls the number of droplet parcels that are introduced into the domain at every
time step.

m. In the Particle Type group box, select Droplet.

n. Select methyl-alcohol-liquid from the Material drop-down list.

o. In the Point Properties tab, specify point properties for particle injections.

i. Retain the default values of 0 and 0 for X-Position and Y-Position.

ii. Enter 0.0015 for Z-Position.

iii. Retain the default values of 0, 0, and 1 for X-Axis, Y-Axis, and Z-Axis, respectively.

iv. Enter 263 K for Temperature.

Scroll down the list to see the remaining point properties.

v. Enter 8.5e-5 kg/s for Flow Rate.

This is the methanol flow rate for a 30-degree section of the atomizer. The actual atomizer flow
rate is 12 times this value.

vi. Retain the default Start Time of 0 s and enter 100 s for the Stop Time.

For this problem, the injection should begin at and not stop until long after the time period
of interest. A large value for the stop time (for example, 100 s) will ensure that the injection will
essentially never stop.

vii. Enter 0.0035 m for the Injector Inner Diameter and 0.0045 m for the Injector Outer
Diameter.

viii.Enter 45 degrees for Spray Half Angle.

The spray angle is the angle between the liquid sheet trajectory and the injector centerline.

ix. Enter 82.6 m/s for the Relative Velocity.

The relative velocity is the expected relative velocity between the atomizing air and the liquid
sheet.

x. Retain the default Azimuthal Start Angle of 0 degrees and enter 30 degrees for the Azi-
muthal Stop Angle.

This will restrict the injection to the 30-degree section of the atomizer that is being modeled.

p. In the Physical Models tab, specify the breakup model and drag parameters.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 865
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

i. In the Drag Parameters group box, select dynamic-drag from the Drag Law drop-down
list.

The dynamic-drag law is available only when the Breakup model is used.

ii. In the Breakup group, ensure that Enable Breakup is selected and TAB is selected from
the Breakup Model drop-down list.

iii. Retain the default values of 0 for y0 and 2 for Breakup Parcels.

q. In the Turbulent Dispersion tab, define the turbulent dispersion.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
866 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select Discrete Random Walk Model and enable Random Eddy Lifetime in the
Stochastic Tracking group box.

These models will account for the turbulent dispersion of the droplets.

ii. Click OK to close the Set Injection Properties dialog box.

Note:

If you want to modify the existing injection, then in the Injections dialog box,
select its name in the Injections list and click Set..., or simply double-click the
injection of interest.

r. Close the Injections dialog box.

Note:

In the case that the spray injection would be striking a wall, you must specify the
wall boundary conditions for the droplets. Though this tutorial does have wall zones,

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 867
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

they are a part of the atomizer apparatus. You need not change the wall boundary
conditions any further because these walls are not in the path of the spray droplets.

s. Click OK to close the Discrete Phase Model dialog box.

2. Specify the droplet material properties.

Setup → Materials → methyl-alcohol-liquid → Create/Edit...

When secondary atomization models (such as Breakup) are used, several droplet properties need to
be specified.

a. Ensure droplet-particle is selected in the Material Type drop-down list.

b. Enter 0.00095 kg/m-s for Viscosity in the Properties group box.

c. Ensure that piecewise-linear is selected from the Saturation Vapor Pressure drop-down list.

Scroll down to find the Saturation Vapor Pressure drop-down list.

d. Click the Edit... button next to Saturation Vapor Pressure to open the Piecewise-Linear
Profile dialog box.

e. Retain the default values and click OK to close the Piecewise-Linear Profile dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
868 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

f. Select convection/diffusion-controlled from the Vaporization/Boiling Model drop-down

list.

g. Click OK to close the Model Options dialog box.

h. Click Change/Create to accept the change in properties for the methanol droplet material
and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

21.4.9. Solution
1. Increase the under-relaxation factor for Discrete Phase Sources.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

In the Pseudo Time Explicit Relaxation Factors group box, change the under-relaxation factor
for Discrete Phase Sources to 0.9.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 869
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

2. Remove the convergence criteria.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Enable Show Advanced Options and select none from the Convergence Criterion drop-
down list.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

3. Enable the plotting of mass fraction of ch3oh.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Mass-Weighted Average...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
870 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter ch3oh_outlet for Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Select Species... and Mass fraction of ch3oh from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

d. Select outlet from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

Fluent automatically generates the ch3oh_outlet-rplot report plot under the Solution/Mon-
itors/Report Plots tree branch.

4. Enable the plotting of the sum of the DPM Mass Source.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Volume Report → Sum...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 871
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

a. Enter dpm-mass-source for Name.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Select Discrete Phase Sources... and DPM Mass Source from the Field Variable drop-down
lists.

d. Select fluid from the Cell Zones selection list.

e. Click OK to save the volume report definition settings and close the Volume Report Definition
dialog box.

Fluent automatically generates the dpm-mass-source-rplot report plot under Solution/Mon-

itors/Report Plots tree branch.

f. Modify the attributes of the dpm-mass-source-rplot report plot axes.

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → dpm-mass-source-rplot Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
872 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Click the Axes... button to open the Axes dialog box.

ii. Select Y in the Axis list.

iii. Select exponential from the Type drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 873
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

iv. Set Precision to 2.

v. Click Apply and close the Axes dialog box.

vi. Click OK to close the Edit Report Plot dialog box.

5. Create a DPM report definition for tracking the total mass present in the domain.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → DPM Report → Mass in Domain...

a. Enter dpm-mass-in-domain for Name.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Select injection-0 from the Injections selection list.

d. Disable Show Mass Flow / Change Rate.

e. Click OK to save the volume report definition settings and close the DPM Report Definition
dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
874 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Fluent automatically generates the dpm-mass-in-domain-rplot report plot under Solution/Mon-

itors/Report Plots tree branch.

f. Modify the attributes of the dpm-mass-in-domain-rplot report plot axes (in a manner similar
to that for the dpm-mass-source-rplot plot).

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → dpm-mass-in-domain-rplot Edit...

i. In the Plot Window group box, click the Axes... button to open the Axes dialog box.

ii. Select Y in the Axis list.

iii. Select exponential from the Type drop-down list.

iv. Set Precision to 2.

v. Click Apply and close the Axes dialog box.

vi. Click OK to close the Edit Report Plot dialog box.

6. Create a DPM report definition for tracking the mass of the evaporated particles.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → DPM Report → Evaporated Mass...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 875
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

a. Enter dpm-evaporated-mass for Name.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Select injection-0 from the Injections selection list.

d. Ensure that the Show Mass Flow / Change Rate option is selected.

e. Click OK to save the volume report definition settings and close the DPM Report Definition
dialog box.

Fluent automatically generates the dpm-evaporated-mass-rplot report plot under Solu-

tion/Monitors/Report Plots tree branch.

f. Modify the attributes of the dpm-evaporated-mass-rplot report plot axes in a manner similar
to that for the dpm-mass-source-rplot plot.

7. Request 300 more iterations (Figure 21.6: Convergence History of Mass Fraction of ch3oh on Flu-
id (p. 877), Figure 21.7: Convergence History of DPM Mass Source on Fluid (p. 878), Figure 21.8: Con-
vergence History of Total Mass in Domain (p. 878), and Figure 21.9: Convergence History of Evap-
orated Particle Mass (p. 879)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
876 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Solution → Run Calculation

It can be concluded that the solution is converged because the number of particle tracks are constant
and the flow variable plots are flat.

Figure 21.6: Convergence History of Mass Fraction of ch3oh on Fluid

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 877
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Figure 21.7: Convergence History of DPM Mass Source on Fluid

Figure 21.8: Convergence History of Total Mass in Domain

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
878 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 21.9: Convergence History of Evaporated Particle Mass

8. Save the case and data files (spray2.cas.h5 and spray2.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

21.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Display the trajectories of the droplets in the spray injection (Figure 21.10: Particle Tracks for the
Spray Injection (p. 881)).

This will allow you to review the location of the droplets.

Results → Graphics → Particle Tracks → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 879
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

a. Enter particle-tracks-droplets for Particle Tracks Name.

b. Enable Draw Mesh in the Options group box.

The Mesh Display dialog box will open.

i. Retain the current display settings.

ii. Close the Mesh Display dialog box.

c. Retain the default selection of point from the Track Style drop-down list.

d. Select Particle Variables... and Particle Diameter from the Color by drop-down lists.

This will display the location of the droplets colored by their diameters.

e. Select injection-0 from the Release from Injections selection list.

f. Click Save/Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
880 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

As an optional exercise, you can increase the particle size by clicking the Attributes... button in
the Particle Tracks dialog box and adjusting the Marker Size value in the Track Style Attributes
dialog box.

g. Close the Particle Tracks dialog box.

h. Use the mouse to obtain the view shown in Figure 21.10: Particle Tracks for the Spray Injec-
tion (p. 881).

Figure 21.10: Particle Tracks for the Spray Injection

The air-blast atomizer model assumes that a cylindrical liquid sheet exits the atomizer, which then
disintegrates into ligaments and droplets. Appropriately, the model determines that the droplets should
be input into the domain in a ring. The radius of this disk is determined from the inner and outer radii
of the injector.

Note:

In the real device, the inner diameter and outer diameter of the liquid injection are 3.5
mm and 4.5 mm, respectively. Hence a liquid sheet is formed that is about 0.5 mm in
thickness. The shear forces of the two air streams quickly disperse the liquid into droplets
between, roughly, 4 µm and 50 µm in diameter. This is predicted by the air-blast-atom-
izer model, which uses the parameters specified in the "Set Injection Properties" dialog
box.

Also note that the droplets are placed a slight distance away from the injector. Once
the droplets are injected into the domain, their behavior will be determined by second-
ary models. For instance, they may collide/coalesce with other droplets depending on

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 881
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

the secondary models employed. However, once a droplet has been introduced into
the domain, the air-blast atomizer model no longer affects the droplet.

2. Display the mean particle temperature field (Figure 21.11: Contours of DPM Temperature (p. 883)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-dpm-temp for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Discrete Phase Variables... and DPM Temperature from the Contours of drop-down
lists.

e. Disable Auto Range.

The Clip to Range option will automatically be enabled.

f. Click Compute to update the Min and Max fields.

g. Enter 260 for Min.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
882 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

h. Select angle=15 from the Surfaces selection list.

i. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

j. Use the mouse to obtain the view shown in Figure 21.11: Contours of DPM Temperature (p. 883).

Figure 21.11: Contours of DPM Temperature

3. Display the mean Sauter diameter (Figure 21.12: Contours of DPM Sauter Diameter (p. 884)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-dpm-sauter-diameter for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Discrete Phase Variables... and DPM D32 from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select angle=15 from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 883
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Figure 21.12: Contours of DPM Sauter Diameter

4. Display vectors of DPM mean velocity colored by DPM velocity magnitude (Figure 21.13: Vectors
of DPM Mean Velocity Colored by DPM Velocity Magnitude (p. 886)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
884 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter vector-dpm-vel for Vector Name.

b. Select dpm-mean-velocity from the Vectors of drop-down lists.

c. Select Discrete Phase Variables... and DPM Velocity Magnitude from the Color by drop-
down lists.

d. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

e. Enter 7 for Scale.

f. Select angle=15 from the Surfaces selection list.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 885
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Figure 21.13: Vectors of DPM Mean Velocity Colored by DPM Velocity Magnitude

5. Create an isosurface of the methanol mass fraction.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
886 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter methanol-mf=0.002 for the New Surface Name.

b. Select Species... and Mass fraction of ch3oh from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute to update the minimum and maximum values.

d. Enter 0.002 for Iso-Values.

e. Click Create and then close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

6. Display the isosurface you just created (methanol-mf=0.002).

Results → Graphics → Mesh → New...

a. Deselect atomizer-wall and central_air in the Surfaces selection list.

b. Select methanol-mf=0.002 and swirling_air in the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 887
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

c. Click Save/Display in the Mesh Display dialog box.

The graphics display will be updated to show the isosurface.

7. Modify the view to include the entire atomizer.

View → Display → Periodic Instancing...

a. Select fluid from the Cell Zones list.

b. Select swirling_air and methanol-mf=0.002 from the Associated Surfaces selection list.

c. Retain the selection of Rotational in the Periodic Type list.

d. Set 12 for the Number of Repeats.

e. Click Save and close the Periodic Instancing dialog box.

f. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

g. Use the mouse to obtain the view shown in Figure 21.14: Full Atomizer Display with Surface
of Constant Methanol Mass Fraction (p. 889).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
888 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 21.14: Full Atomizer Display with Surface of Constant Methanol Mass Fraction

h. This view can be improved to resemble Figure 21.15: Atomizer Display with Surface of Constant
Methanol Mass Fraction Enhanced (p. 890) by changing some of the following variables:

i. Open the mesh-1 object you saved earlier.

Results → Graphics → Mesh → mesh-1 Edit...

ii. In the Mesh Display dialog box, disable Edges.

iii. Click Save/Display.

iv. In the Periodic Instancing dialog box, change the Number of Repeats to 6.

View → Display → Periodic Instancing...

v. Make sure that swirling_air and methanol-mf=0.002 are selected in the Surfaces
list.

vi. Click Display.

vii. In the View ribbon tab, enable the Headlight and Lighting display options and change
lighting to Flat (Display group).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 889
Modeling Evaporating Liquid Spray

Figure 21.15: Atomizer Display with Surface of Constant Methanol Mass Fraction Enhanced

8. Save the case and data files (spray3.cas.h5 and spray3.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

21.5. Summary
In this tutorial, a spray injection was defined for an air-blast atomizer and the solution was calculated
using the discrete phase model in Ansys Fluent. The location of methanol droplet particles after exiting
the atomizer and an isosurface of the methanol mass fraction were examined.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
890 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 22: Using the VOF Model
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
22.1. Introduction
22.2. Prerequisites
22.3. Problem Description
22.4. Setup and Solution
22.5. Summary

22.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines the flow of ink as it is ejected from the nozzle of a printhead in an inkjet printer.
Using Ansys Fluent’s volume of fluid (VOF) multiphase modeling capability, you will be able to predict
the shape and motion of the resulting droplets in an air chamber.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Set up and solve a transient problem using the pressure-based solver and VOF model.

• Copy material from the property database.

• Define time-dependent boundary conditions with an expression.

• Patch initial conditions in a subset of the domain.

• Automatically save data files at defined points during the solution.

• Examine the flow and interface of the two fluids using volume fraction contours.

22.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

22.3. Problem Description

The problem considers the transient tracking of a liquid-gas interface in the geometry shown in Fig-
ure 22.1: Schematic of the Problem (p. 892). The axial symmetry of the problem enables a 2D geometry
to be used. The computation mesh consists of 24,600 cells. The domain consists of two regions: an ink
chamber and an air chamber. The dimensions are summarized in Table 22.1: Ink Chamber Dimen-
sions (p. 892).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 891
Using the VOF Model

Figure 22.1: Schematic of the Problem

Table 22.1: Ink Chamber Dimensions

Ink Chamber, Cylindrical Region: Radius (mm) 0.015

Ink Chamber, Cylindrical Region: Length (mm) 0.050
Ink Chamber, Tapered Region: Final Radius (mm) 0.009
Ink Chamber, Tapered Region: Length (mm) 0.050
Air Chamber: Radius (mm) 0.030
Air Chamber: Length (mm) 0.280

The following is the chronology of events modeled in this simulation:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
892 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

• At time zero, the nozzle is filled with ink, while the rest of the domain is filled with air. Both fluids
are assumed to be at rest. To initiate the ejection, the ink velocity at the inlet boundary (which is
modeled in this simulation by a user-defined function) suddenly increases from 0 to 3.58 m/s and
then decreases according to a cosine law.

• After 10 microseconds, the velocity returns to zero.

The calculation is run for 30 microseconds overall, that is, three times longer than the duration of the
initial impulse.

Because the dimensions are small, the double-precision version of Ansys Fluent will be used. Air will be
designated as the primary phase, and ink (which will be modeled with the properties of liquid water)
will be designated as the secondary phase. Patching will be required to fill the ink chamber with the
secondary phase. Gravity will not be included in the simulation. To capture the capillary effect of the
ejected ink, the surface tension and prescription of the wetting angle will be specified. The surface inside
the nozzle will be modeled as neutrally wettable, while the surface surrounding the nozzle orifice will
be non-wettable.

22.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
22.4.1. Preparation
22.4.2. Reading and Manipulating the Mesh
22.4.3. General Settings
22.4.4. Models
22.4.5. Materials
22.4.6. Phases
22.4.7. Operating Conditions
22.4.8. Boundary Conditions
22.4.9. Solution
22.4.10. Postprocessing

22.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the vof.zip file .

2. Unzip vof.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file inkjet.msh can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 893
Using the VOF Model

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

Note:

The double precision solver is recommended for modeling multiphase flows simulation.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

22.4.2. Reading and Manipulating the Mesh

1. Read the mesh file inkjet.msh.

File → Read → Mesh...

2. Examine the mesh (Figure 22.2: Default Display of the Nozzle Mesh (p. 894)).

Figure 22.2: Default Display of the Nozzle Mesh

Tip:

Zoom in by dragging the middle mouse button with the Shift key pressed, so that you
can see that the interior of the model is composed of a fine mesh of quadrilateral cells
(see Figure 22.3: The Quadrilateral Mesh (p. 895)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
894 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 22.3: The Quadrilateral Mesh

3. Set the graphics display options.

View → Display → Options...

a. Ensure that All is selected from the Animation Option drop-down list.

Selecting All will allow you to see the movement of the entire mesh as you manipulate the Camera
view in the next step.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 895
Using the VOF Model

4. Click Apply and close the Display Options dialog box.

5. Manipulate the mesh display to show the full chamber upright.

View → Display → Views...

a. Select front from the Views selection list.

b. Select axis from the Mirror Planes selection list.

c. Click Apply.

The mesh display is updated to show both sides of the chamber.

d. Click the Camera... button to open the Camera Parameters dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
896 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note:

You may notice that the scale of the dimensions in the Camera Parameters dialog
box appear very large given the problem dimensions. This is because you have not
yet scaled the mesh to the correct units. You will do this in a later step.

i. Drag the indicator of the dial with the left mouse button in the clockwise direction until
the upright view is displayed (Figure 22.4: Mesh Display of the Nozzle Mirrored and Up-
right (p. 898)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 897
Using the VOF Model

Figure 22.4: Mesh Display of the Nozzle Mirrored and Upright

ii. Click Apply and close the Camera Parameters dialog box.

e. Close the Views dialog box.

22.4.3. General Settings

1. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and report the progress in the console. Make
sure that the reported minimum volume is a positive number.

2. Scale the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Scale...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
898 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Specify Scaling Factors from the Scaling group box.

b. Enter 1e-6 for X and Y in the Scaling Factors group box.

c. Click Scale and close the Scale Mesh dialog box.

d. Right-click in the graphics window and select Refresh Display

e. Click the Fit to Window icon, , to center the graphic in the window.

3. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Note:

It is a good idea to check the mesh after you manipulate it (that is, scale, convert to
polyhedra, merge, separate, fuse, add zones, or smooth and swap.) This will ensure that
the quality of the mesh has not been compromised.

4. Define the units for the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Units...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 899
Using the VOF Model

a. Select length from the Quantities list.

b. Select mm from the Units list.

c. Select surface-tension from the Quantities list.

d. Select dyne/cm from the Units list.

e. Close the Set Units dialog box.

5. Retain the default setting of Pressure-Based in the Solver group box of the General task page.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
900 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

6. Select Transient from the Time list.

7. Select Axisymmetric from the 2D Space list.

22.4.4. Models
1. Enable the laminar viscous model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

a. Select Laminar in the Model group box.

b. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

2. Enable the Volume of Fluid multiphase model.

Physics → Models → Multiphase...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 901
Using the VOF Model

a. Select Volume of Fluid from the Model list.

The Multiphase Model dialog box expands to show related inputs.

b. Retain the default settings and click Apply and close the Multiphase Model dialog box.

Important:

When setting up your case, if you have made changes in the current tab, you should
click the Apply button to make them effective before moving to the next tab.
Otherwise, the relevant models may not be available in the other tabs, and your
settings may be lost.

22.4.5. Materials
The default properties of air and water defined in Ansys Fluent are suitable for this problem. In this step,
you will make sure that both materials are available for selection in later steps.

1. Add water to the list of fluid materials by copying it from the Ansys Fluent materials database.

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit...

a. Click Fluent Database... in the Create/Edit Materials dialog box to open the Fluent Database
Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
902 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select water-liquid (h2o < l >) from the Fluent Fluid Materials selection list.

Scroll down the Fluent Fluid Materials list to locate water-liquid (h2o < l >).

ii. Click Copy to copy the information for water to your list of fluid materials.

iii. Close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 903
Using the VOF Model

b. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

22.4.6. Phases
In the following steps, you will define water as the secondary phase. When you define the initial solution,
you will patch water in the nozzle region. In general, you can specify the primary and secondary phases
whichever way you prefer. It is a good idea to consider how your choice will affect the ease of problem
setup, especially with more complicated problems.

Physics → Models → Multiphase...

In the Multiphase Model dialog box, open the Phases tab.

1. Specify air (air) as the primary phase.

a. Select phase-1 – Primary Phase in the Phases selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
904 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enter air for Name.

c. Retain the default selection of air in the Phase Material drop-down list.

d. Click Apply

2. Specify water (water-liquid) as the secondary phase.

a. In the Phases selection list, select phase-2 – Secondary Phase.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 905
Using the VOF Model

b. Enter water-liquid for Name.

c. Select water-liquid from the Phase Material drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
906 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Click Apply.

3. Specify the interphase interaction.

In the Multiphase Model dialog box, open the Phase Interaction tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 907
Using the VOF Model

a. In the Forces tab, select Surface Tension Force Modeling (Global Options group box).

The surface tension inputs is displayed and the Continuum Surface Force model is set as the default.

b. Enable Wall Adhesion (Adhesion Options group box) so that contact angles can be prescribed.

c. For Surface Tension Coefficient (Force Setup group box), select constant from the drop-
down list and enter 73.5 dyne/cm .

d. Click Apply.

4. Close the Multiphase Model dialog box.

22.4.7. Operating Conditions

1. Set the operating reference pressure location.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Operating Conditions...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
908 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

You will set the Reference Pressure Location to be a point where the fluid will always be 100 air.

a. Enter 0.10 mm for X.

b. Enter 0.03 mm for Y.

c. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

22.4.8. Boundary Conditions

1. Set the boundary conditions at the inlet (inlet) for the mixture by selecting mixture from the
Phase drop-down list in the Boundary Conditions task page.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet Edit...

a. Select expression from the Velocity Magnitude drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 909
Using the VOF Model

b. Enter the expression in the Expression Editor dialog box as shown and click OK and close
the dialog box.

IF(t<=10e-06[sec],3.58[m/s]*cos(PI*t/30e-6[s]),0[m/s])

c. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions at the inlet (inlet) for the secondary phase by selecting water-liquid
from the Phase drop-down list in the Boundary Conditions task page.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet → water-liquid Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
910 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Click the Multiphase tab and enter 1 for the Volume Fraction.

b. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions at the outlet (outlet) for the secondary phase by selecting water-liquid
from the Phase drop-down list in the Boundary Conditions task page.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Outlet → outlet → water-liquid Edit...

a. Click the Multiphase tab and retain the default setting of 0 for the Backflow Volume Fraction.

b. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

4. Set the conditions at the top wall of the air chamber (wall_no_wet) for the mixture by selecting
mixture from the Phase drop-down list in the Boundary Conditions task page.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall_no_wet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 911
Using the VOF Model

a. Enter 175 degrees for Contact Angles [deg].

b. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

Note:

This angle affects the dynamics of droplet formation. You can repeat this simulation
to find out how the result changes when the wall is hydrophilic (that is, using a
small contact angle, say 10 degrees).

5. Set the conditions at the side wall of the ink chamber (wall_wet) for the mixture.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → wall_wet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
912 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default setting of 90 degrees for Contact Angles [deg].

b. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

22.4.9. Solution
1. Set the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 913
Using the VOF Model

a. Enable Non-Iterative Time Advancement.

The non-iterative time advancement (NITA) scheme is often advantageous compared to the iterative
schemes as it is less CPU intensive. Although smaller time steps must be used with NITA compared
to the iterative schemes, the total CPU expense is often smaller. If the NITA scheme leads to conver-
gence difficulties, then the iterative schemes (for example, PISO, SIMPLE) should be used instead.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
914 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Select Fractional Step from the Scheme drop-down list in the Pressure-Velocity Coupling
group box.

c. Retain the default selection of Least Squares Cell Based from the Gradient drop-down list
in the Spatial Discretization group box.

d. Retain the default selection of PRESTO! from the Pressure drop-down list.

e. Select QUICK from the Momentum drop-down list.

f. Select Compressive from the Volume-Fraction drop-down list.

2. Enable the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Ensure Plot is selected in the Options group box.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

3. Initialize the solution after reviewing the default initial values.

Solution → Initialization → Options...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 915
Using the VOF Model

a. Retain the default settings for all the parameters and click Initialize (either in the ribbon or
in the Solution Initialization task page.

4. Define a register for the ink chamber region.

Solution → Cell Registers New → Region...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
916 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 917
Using the VOF Model

a. Enter a setting of 0 mm for X Min and Y Min in the Input Coordinates group box.

b. Enter 0.10 mm for X Max.

c. Enter 0.03 mm for Y Max.

d. Click Save and close the Region Register dialog box.

5. Patch the initial distribution of the secondary phase (water-liquid).

Solution → Initialization → Patch...

a. Select water-liquid from the Phase drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
918 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Select Volume Fraction from the Variable list.

c. Enter 1 for Value.

d. Select region_0 from the Registers to Patch selection list.

e. Click Patch and close the Patch dialog box.

6. Request the saving of data files every 200 steps.

Solution → Activities → Autosave...

a. Enter 200 for Save Data File Every (Time Steps).

b. Ensure that time-step is selected from the Append File Name with drop-down list.

c. Enter inkjet for the File Name.

Ansys Fluent will append the time step value to the file name prefix (inkjet). The standard
.dat.h5 extension will also be appended. This will yield file names of the form inkjet-1-
00200.dat.h5, where 200 is the time step number.

d. Click OK to close the Autosave dialog box.

7. Save the initial case file (inkjet.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 919
Using the VOF Model

8. Run the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Enter 1e-8 seconds for the Time Step Size (s).

Note:

Small time steps are required to capture the oscillation of the droplet interface and
the associated high velocities. Failure to use sufficiently small time steps may cause
differences in the results between platforms.

b. Enter 3000 for the Number of Time Steps.

c. Click Calculate.

The solution will run for 3000 iterations.

22.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Read the data file for the solution after 6 microseconds (inkjet-1-00600.dat.h5).

File → Read → Data...

2. Create and display a filled contour of water volume fraction after 6 microseconds (Figure 22.5: Con-
tours of Water Volume Fraction After 6 μs (p. 922)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
920 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Change the Contour Name to contour-volume-fraction.

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. Select Phases... and Volume fraction from the Contours of drop-down lists.

d. Select water-liquid from the Phase drop-down list.

e. Click Save/Display.

Tip:

In order to display the contour plot in the graphics window, you may need to click the

Fit to Window button .

3. Save the case file (inkjet.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 921
Using the VOF Model

4. Display contours of water volume fraction after 12, 18, 24, and 30 microseconds (Figure 22.6: Con-
tours of Water Volume Fraction After 12 μs (p. 923) - Figure 22.9: Contours of Water Volume Fraction
After 30 μs (p. 924)).

a. Read the data file for the solution after 12 microseconds (inkjet-1-01200.dat.h5).

File → Read → Data...

b. Reload the contour graphic saved in the previous step.

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-volume-fraction Display

c. Repeat these steps for the 18, 24, and 30 microseconds files.

Figure 22.5: Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 6 μs

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
922 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 22.6: Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 12 μs

Figure 22.7: Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 18 μs

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 923
Using the VOF Model

Figure 22.8: Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 24 μs

Figure 22.9: Contours of Water Volume Fraction After 30 μs

22.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated the application of the volume of fluid method with surface tension effects.
The problem involved the 2D axisymmetric modeling of a transient liquid-gas interface, and postpro-
cessing showed how the position and shape of the surface between the two immiscible fluids changed
over time.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
924 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 23: Modeling Cavitation
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
23.1. Introduction
23.2. Prerequisites
23.3. Problem Description
23.4. Setup and Solution
23.5. Summary

23.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines the pressure-driven cavitating flow of water through a sharp-edged orifice. This
is a typical configuration in fuel injectors, and brings a challenge to the physics and numerics of cavit-
ation models because of the high pressure differentials involved and the high ratio of liquid to vapor
density. Using the multiphase modeling capability of Ansys Fluent, you will be able to predict the strong
cavitation near the orifice after flow separation at a sharp edge.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Set boundary conditions for internal flow.

• Use the mixture model with cavitation effects.

• Calculate a solution using the pressure-based coupled solver.

23.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

23.3. Problem Description

The problem considers the cavitation caused by the flow separation after a sharp-edged orifice. The
flow is pressure driven, with an inlet pressure of 5 x 105 Pa and an outlet pressure of 9.5 x 104 Pa. The
orifice diameter is 4 x 10–3 m, and the geometrical parameters of the orifice are D/d = 2.88 and L/d =
4, where D, d, and L are the inlet diameter, orifice diameter, and orifice length respectively. The geometry
of the orifice is shown in Figure 23.1: Problem Schematic (p. 926).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 925
Modeling Cavitation

Figure 23.1: Problem Schematic

23.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
23.4.1. Preparation
23.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh
23.4.3. Solver Settings
23.4.4. Models
23.4.5. Materials
23.4.6. Phases
23.4.7. Boundary Conditions
23.4.8. Operating Conditions
23.4.9. Solution
23.4.10. Postprocessing

23.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the cavitation.zip file .

2. Unzip cavitation.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file cav.msh can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
926 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

Note:

The double precision solver is recommended for modeling multiphase flows

simulation.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

23.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh

1. Read the mesh file cav.msh.

File → Read → Mesh...

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

3. Check the mesh scale.

Domain → Mesh → Scale...

a. Retain the default settings.

b. Close the Scale Mesh dialog box.

4. Examine the mesh (Figure 23.2: The Mesh in the Orifice (p. 928)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 927
Modeling Cavitation

Figure 23.2: The Mesh in the Orifice

As seen in Figure 23.2: The Mesh in the Orifice (p. 928), half of the problem geometry is modeled, with
an axis boundary (consisting of two separate lines) at the centerline. The quadrilateral mesh is slightly
graded in the plenum to be finer toward the orifice. In the orifice, the mesh is uniform with aspect ratios
close to , as the flow is expected to exhibit two-dimensional gradients.

When you display data graphically in a later step, you will mirror the view across the centerline to
obtain a more realistic view of the model.

Since the bubbles are small and the flow is high speed, gravity effects can be neglected and the problem
can be reduced to axisymmetrical. If gravity could not be neglected and the direction of gravity were
not coincident with the geometrical axis of symmetry, you would have to solve a 3D problem.

23.4.3. Solver Settings

1. Specify an axisymmetric model.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
928 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of Pressure-Based in the Type list.

The pressure-based solver must be used for multiphase calculations.

b. Select Axisymmetric in the 2D Space list.

Note:

A computationally intensive, transient calculation is necessary to accurately simulate

the irregular cyclic process of bubble formation, growth, filling by water jet re-entry,
and break-off. In this tutorial, you will perform a steady-state calculation to simulate
the presence of vapor in the separation region in the time-averaged flow.

23.4.4. Models
1. Enable the multiphase mixture model.

Physics → Models → Multiphase...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 929
Modeling Cavitation

a. Select Mixture in the Model list.

The Multiphase Model dialog box will expand.

b. Clear Slip Velocity in the Mixture Parameters group box.

In this flow, the high level of turbulence does not allow large bubble growth, so gravity is not im-
portant. It is also assumed that the bubbles have same velocity as the liquid. Therefore, there is no
need to solve for the slip velocity.

c. Click Apply and close the Multiphase Model dialog box.

Important:

When setting up your case, if you have made changes in the current tab, you should
click the Apply button to make them effective before moving to the next tab.
Otherwise, the relevant models may not be available in the other tabs, and your
settings may be lost.

2. Enable the k-ω SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
930 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of k-omega (2 eqn) in the Model list.

b. Retain the default selection of SST in the k-omega Model list

c. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

23.4.5. Materials
For the purposes of this tutorial, you will be modeling the liquid and vapor phases as incompressible.
Note that more comprehensive models are available for the densities of these phases, and could be
used to more fully capture the affects of the pressure changes in this problem.

1. Create a new material to be used for the primary phase.

Setup → Materials → Fluid New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 931
Modeling Cavitation

a. Enter water for Name.

b. Enter 1000 kg/m3 for Density.

c. Enter 0.001 kg/m–s for Viscosity.

d. Click Change/Create and select Yes.

2. Copy water vapor from the materials database and modify the properties of your local copy.

a. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box, click the Fluent Database... button to open the
Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
932 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select water-vapor (h2o) from the Fluent Fluid Materials selection list.

Scroll down the list to find water-vapor (h2o).

ii. Click Copy to include water vapor in your model.

water-vapor appears under Fluid in the Materials task page

iii. Close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 933
Modeling Cavitation

b. Enter 0.02558 kg/m3 for Density.

c. Enter 1.26e-06 kg/m–s for Viscosity.

d. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

23.4.6. Phases

Setup → Models → Multiphase Edit...

In the Multiphase Model dialog box, go to the Phases tab.

1. Specify liquid water as the primary phase.

a. In the Phases selection list, select phase-1 – Primary Phase.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
934 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enter liquid for Name.

c. Select water from the Phase Material drop-down list.

d. Click Apply.

2. Specify water vapor as the secondary phase.

a. In the Phases selection list, select phase-2 – Secondary Phase.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 935
Modeling Cavitation

b. Enter vapor for Name.

c. Select water-vapor from the Phase Material drop-down list.

d. Click Apply.

3. Enable the cavitation model.

a. In the Multiphase Model dialog box, go to the Phase Interaction tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
936 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. In the Heat, Mass, Reaction tab, set Number of Mass Transfer Mechanisms to 1.

The dialog box expands to show relevant modeling parameters.

c. Ensure that liquid is selected from the From Phase drop-down list in the Mass Transfer group
box.

d. Select vapor from the To Phase drop-down list.

e. Select cavitation from the Mechanism drop-down list.

The Cavitation Model dialog box will open to show the cavitation inputs.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 937
Modeling Cavitation

i. Retain the value of 3540 Pa for Vaporization Pressure.

The vaporization pressure is a property of the working liquid, which depends mainly on the
temperature and pressure. The default value is the vaporization pressure of water at 1 atmo-
sphere and a temperature of 300 K.

ii. Retain the value of 1e+11 for Bubble Number Density.

iii. Click OK to close the Cavitation Model dialog box.

f. Click Apply and close the Multiphase Model dialog box.

23.4.7. Boundary Conditions

For the multiphase mixture model, you will specify conditions for the mixture (that is, conditions that apply
to all phases) and the conditions that are specific to the primary and secondary phases. In this tutorial,
boundary conditions are required only for the mixture and secondary phase of two boundaries: the pressure
inlet (consisting of two boundary zones) and the pressure outlet. The pressure outlet is the downstream
boundary, opposite the pressure inlets.

Setup → Boundary Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
938 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1. Set the boundary conditions at inlet_1 for the mixture. Ensure that mixture is selected from the
Phase drop-down list in the Boundary Conditions task page.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 939
Modeling Cavitation

Setup → Boundary Conditions → inlet_1 → Edit...

a. Enter 500000 Pa for Gauge Total Pressure.

b. Enter 449000 Pa for Supersonic/Initial Gauge Pressure.

If you choose to initialize the solution based on the pressure-inlet conditions, the Supersonic/Initial
Gauge Pressure will be used in conjunction with the specified stagnation pressure (the Gauge
Total Pressure) to compute initial values according to the isentropic relations (for compressible
flow) or Bernoulli’s equation (for incompressible flow). Otherwise, in an incompressible flow calcu-
lation, Ansys Fluent will ignore the Supersonic/Initial Gauge Pressure input.

c. Retain the default selection of Normal to Boundary from the Direction Specification Method
drop-down list.

d. Retain the default settings in the Turbulence group box.

e. Click Apply and close the Pressure Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions at inlet_1 for the secondary phase.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → inlet_1

a. Select vapor from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click Edit... to open the Pressure Inlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
940 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. In the Multiphase tab, retain the default value of 0 for Volume Fraction.

ii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Inlet dialog box.

3. Copy the boundary conditions defined for the first pressure inlet zone (inlet_1) to the second
pressure inlet zone (inlet_2).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → inlet_1

a. Select mixture from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click Copy... to open the Copy Conditions dialog box.

i. Select inlet_1 from the From Boundary Zone selection list.

ii. Select inlet_2 from the To Boundary Zones selection list.

iii. Click Copy.

A Question dialog box will open, asking if you want to copy inlet_1 boundary conditions to
inlet_2. Click OK.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 941
Modeling Cavitation

iv. Close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

4. Set the boundary conditions at outlet for the mixture.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → outlet → Edit...

a. Enter 95000 for Gauge Pressure.

b. Retain the default settings in the Turbulence group box.

c. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

5. Set the boundary conditions at outlet for the secondary phase.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → outlet

a. Select vapor from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click Edit... to open the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
942 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. In the Multiphase tab, retain the default value of 0 for Backflow Volume Fraction.

ii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

23.4.8. Operating Conditions

1. Set the operating pressure.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Operating Conditions...

a. Enter 0 Pa for Operating Pressure.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

23.4.9. Solution
1. Set the solution parameters.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 943
Modeling Cavitation

a. Select Coupled from the Scheme drop-down list in the Pressure-Velocity Coupling group
box.

b. Retain the selection of PRESTO! from the Pressure drop-down list in the Spatial Discretization
group box.

c. Select QUICK for Momentum and Volume Fraction.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
944 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. Retain First Order Upwind for Turbulent Kinetic Energy and Specific Dissipation Rate.

e. Select Global Time Step from the Pseudo Time Method drop-down list.

f. Enable High Order Term Relaxation.

The relaxation of high order terms will help to improve the solution behavior of flow simulations
when higher order spatial discretizations are used (higher than first).

2. Set the solution controls.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

a. Set the pseudo time explicit relaxation factor for Volume Fraction to 0.3.

3. Enable the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 945
Modeling Cavitation

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Enter 1e-05 for the Absolute Criteria of continuity, x-velocity, y-velocity, k, omega, and
vf-vapor.

Decreasing the criteria for these residuals will improve the accuracy of the solution.

c. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

4. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

a. Select Hybrid from the Initialization group box.

b. Click More Settings... to open the Hybrid Initialization dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
946 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Enable Use Specified Initial Pressure on Inlets in the Initialization Options group box. The
velocity will now be initialized to the Initial Gauge Pressure value that you set in the Pressure
Inlet boundary condition dialog box. For more information on initialization options, see hybrid
initialization in the Fluent User's Guide.

d. Click Apply and close the Hybrid Initialization dialog box.

e. Click Initialize to initialize the solution.

Note:

For flows in complex topologies, hybrid initialization will provide better initial velocity
and pressure fields than standard initialization. This will help to improve the conver-
gence behavior of the solver.

5. Save the case file (cav.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

6. Start the calculation by requesting 500 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 947
Modeling Cavitation

a. Enter 500 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

7. Save the case and data files (cav.cas.h5 and cav.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

23.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Create and plot a definition of pressure contours in the orifice (Figure 23.3: Contours of Static
Pressure (p. 950)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
948 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Change Contour Name to contour-static-pressure

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. Enable Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Retain the default selection of Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Contours of drop-
down lists.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

The contour-static-pressure contour definition appears under the Results/Graph-

ics/Contours tree branch. Once you create a plot definition, you can use a right-click menu
to display this definition at a later time, for instance, in subsequent simulations with different
settings ;or in combination with other plot definitions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 949
Modeling Cavitation

Figure 23.3: Contours of Static Pressure

Note the dramatic pressure drop at the flow restriction in Figure 23.3: Contours of Static Pressure (p. 950).
Low static pressure is the major factor causing cavitation. Additionally, turbulence contributes to
cavitation due to the effect of pressure fluctuation (Figure 23.4: Mirrored View of Contours of Static
Pressure (p. 951)) and turbulent diffusion (Figure 23.5: Contours of Turbulent Kinetic Energy (p. 952)).

2. Mirror the display across the centerline (Figure 23.4: Mirrored View of Contours of Static Pres-
sure (p. 951)).

View → Display → Views...

Mirroring the display across the centerline gives a more realistic view.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
950 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select symm_2 and symm_1 from the Mirror Planes selection list.

b. Click Apply and close the Views dialog box.

Figure 23.4: Mirrored View of Contours of Static Pressure

3. Create and plot a contour definition of the turbulent kinetic energy (Figure 23.5: Contours of Tur-
bulent Kinetic Energy (p. 952)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Change Contour Name to contour-tke

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. Enable Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Turbulence... and Turbulent Kinetic Energy(k) from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Click Save/Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 951
Modeling Cavitation

Figure 23.5: Contours of Turbulent Kinetic Energy

In this example, the mesh used is fairly coarse. However, in cavitating flows the pressure distribution
is the dominant factor, and is not very sensitive to mesh size.

4. Create and plot a contour definition of the volume fraction of water vapor (Figure 23.6: Contours
of Vapor Volume Fraction (p. 953)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Change Contour Name to contour-vf-vapor

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. Enable Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Phases... and Volume fraction from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select vapor from the Phase drop-down list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
952 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 23.6: Contours of Vapor Volume Fraction

The high turbulent kinetic energy region near the neck of the orifice in Figure 23.5: Contours of Turbulent
Kinetic Energy (p. 952) coincides with the highest volume fraction of vapor in Figure 23.6: Contours of
Vapor Volume Fraction (p. 953). This indicates the correct prediction of a localized high phase change
rate. The vapor then gets convected downstream by the main flow.

5. Save the case file (cav.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

23.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated how to set up and resolve a strongly cavitating pressure-driven flow through
an orifice, using multiphase mixture model of Ansys Fluent with cavitation effects. You learned how to
set the boundary conditions for an internal flow. A steady-state solution was calculated to simulate the
formation of vapor in the neck of the flow after the section restriction at the orifice. A more computa-
tionally intensive transient calculation is necessary to accurately simulate the irregular cyclic process of
bubble formation, growth, filling by water jet re-entry, and break-off.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 953
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
954 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 24: Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
24.1. Introduction
24.2. Prerequisites
24.3. Problem Description
24.4. Setup and Solution
24.5. Summary

24.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines a turbulent two-phase flow consisting of air sparged into a water-filled mixing
lab reactor. You will use the Eulerian multiphase model to simulate the mixing tank processes since the
air and water phases are not in equilibrium throughout the simulation.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Set up a multiphase flow simulation involving air and water.

• Use multiple frames of reference.

• Use a degassing outlet boundary condition to enable only air, but not water, to escape from the
boundary.

• Calculate a solution using the multiphase coupled solver with the Eulerian model.

• Display the solution results.

• Calculate torque and power requirements.

24.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

24.3. Problem Description

The problem to be modeled in this tutorial is shown schematically in Figure 24.1: Problem Schemat-
ic (p. 956).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 955
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

Figure 24.1: Problem Schematic

The geometry consists of a mixing vessel, four baffles along the vessel wall, a ring sparger, a pitch blade
turbine, a Rushton blade turbine, and a rotating vertical shaft. There is no water flow into or out of the
vessel. Air is injected into the tank at the bottom through the ring sparger at a speed of 0.05 m/s. Small
inlet holes in the sparger ring are ignored, and the air inlet is modeled as a uniform circular strip. The
air mixes with water, producing small bubbles. The Rushton blade turbine agitates the air-water mixture,
evenly distributing the air bubbles. The pitch blade turbine performs dispersion and pumping operations.
Both impellers rotate at 450 rpm in the counterclockwise direction about the Z axis (as viewed from
the top). Dispersed gas bubbles can escape through the top water surface, which is open to the ambient
air. This model can be used as a reasonable representation of the initial conditions in a real mixing tank.

24.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
24.4.1. Preparation
24.4.2. Mesh
24.4.3. Solver Settings
24.4.4. Models
24.4.5. Materials
24.4.6. Phases
24.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions
24.4.8. Boundary Conditions
24.4.9. Solution

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
956 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

24.4.10. Postprocessing

24.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the mixing_tank.zip file .

2. Unzip mixing_tank.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file mixing_tank.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

24.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file mixing_tank.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

As Fluent reads the mesh file, it will report the progress in the console.

A warning message will be displayed that the degassing boundary condition type is not compatible
with currently enabled models. You will resolve this issue when you enable the Eulerian multiphase
model in a subsequent step.

Click OK and close the Information dialog box.

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and will report the progress in the console. Make sure
that the reported minimum volume is a positive number.

3. Display the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

a. In the Options group box, enable Faces and Edges.

b. In the Surfaces selection list, select gas-inlet, wall_liquid_level and Wall (to select all walls),
deselect fluid-tank_body.

c. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 957
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

4. Examine the mesh (Figure 24.2: Mesh Display of the Mixing Tank (p. 958)).

Extra:

You can use the right mouse button to check which zone number corresponds to each
boundary. If you click the right mouse button on one of the boundaries in the graphics
window, its zone number, name, and type will be printed in the Ansys Fluent console.
This feature is especially useful when you have several zones of the same type and you
want to distinguish between them quickly.

Figure 24.2: Mesh Display of the Mixing Tank

24.4.3. Solver Settings

Related video that demonstrates steps for setting up, solving, and postprocessing the solution results
for a two-phase turbulent flow within a mixing tank:

1. Define the units for the model.

Setup → General → Units...

a. Select angular-velocity from the Quantities selection list.

b. Select rev/min from the Units selection list.

c. Close the Set Units dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
958 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Retain the default Solver settings.

Physics → Solver → General...

3. Set the gravitational acceleration.

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions...

a. In the Operating Conditions dialog box, enable Gravity to account for gravitational forces.

b. In the Gravitational Acceleration group box, enter -9.81 m/s2 for the Gravitational Accel-
eration in the Z direction.

c. Select Specified Operating Density.

d. Retain the default value of 1.225 kg/m3 for Operating Density.

For this simulation, you will model air as an incompressible fluid with a density of 1.225 kg/m3,
which is a default value.

Note:

For multiphase flows, the operating density should be set to the density of the least
dense phase.

e. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

f. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

24.4.4. Models
1. Enable the Eulerian multiphase model.

Since you will use the default settings for the Eulerian model, you can enable it directly from the tree
by right-clicking the Multiphase node and choosing Eulerian from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Multiphase Edit...

a. Select Eulerian under Model. Click Apply and close the Multiphase Model dialog box.

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

Enabling the Eulerian multiphase model will also automatically enable the operating density parameters.
You can verify this in the Operating Conditions dialog box.

2. Verify the operating density.

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 959
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

a. Ensure that minimum-phase-averaged is selected from the Operating Density Method

drop-down list.

b. Click OK to close the Operating Conditions dialog box.

3. Enable the k-ω turbulence model with standard wall functions.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

a. Retain the default k-omega (2 eqn) model in the Model group box.

b. Retain SST in the k-omega Model group box.

c. In the Turbulence Multiphase Model group box, select Dispersed.

The dispersed turbulence model is suitable for cases when the dispersed phase is dilute. The model
assumes that turbulence in the primary phase is dominant, while the turbulent quantities of the
secondary phase can be obtained from the mean characteristics of the primary phase.

d. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

24.4.5. Materials
The default properties for water defined in Ansys Fluent are suitable for this problem. In this step, you will
make sure that this material is available for selecting in future steps.

1. Add water to the list of fluid materials by copying it from the Ansys Fluent materials database.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air

a. Click Fluent Database... in the Create/Edit Materials dialog box to open the Fluent Database
Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
960 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select water-liquid (h2o<l>) in the Fluent Fluid Materials selection list.

Scroll down the list to find water-liquid (h2o<l>). Selecting this item will display the default
properties in the dialog box.

ii. Click Copy and close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

The Create/Edit Materials dialog box will now display the copied properties for water-liquid.

b. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

24.4.6. Phases
In the following steps you will define the liquid water and air phases that flow in the mixing tank.

Setup → Models → Multiphase Edit...

1. In the Phases tab of the Multiphase Model dialog box, specify liquid water as the primary phase.

a. In the Phases selection list, select phase-1 – Primary Phase.

b. Enter water for Name.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 961
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

c. Select water-liquid from the Phase Material drop-down list.

d. Click Apply.

2. Specify air as the secondary phase.

a. In the Phases selection list, select phase-2 – Secondary Phase.

b. Enter air for Name.

c. Retain the default selection of air from the Phase Material drop-down list.

d. Enter 0.0015 m for Diameter.

The diameter of the air bubbles that are formed when the air is injected into the tank depends on
the diameter of the inlet holes in the real reactor, which is 1 mm in this example.

e. Click Apply.

3. Define the interphase interactions formulations to be used.

a. Open the Phase Interaction tab.

b. In the Forces tab, select grace from the Coefficient drop-down list (Drag Coefficient group
box).

The Grace model is suitable for liquid-gas mixtures with low gas density and bubble sizes of 1-
2 mm.

Click OK to close the Grace Swarm Correction dialog box.

Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

c. For Surface Tension Coefficients (Force Setup group box), select constant from the drop-
down list and enter 0.073.

d. Click Apply and close the Multiphase Model dialog box.

24.4.7. Cell Zone Conditions

The mesh has three fluid cell zones: fluid_mrf_1-1 and fluid_mrf_2-0 are zones associated with the Rushton
blade turbine and pitch blade turbine, respectively, and fluid_tank-2 represents the rest of the tank. In this
section, you will use multiple reference frames to define boundary conditions for the cell zones that contain
rotating components. Moving reference frames enable you to model the flow around rotating parts as
steady-state with respect to the moving frames.

Physics → Zones → Cell Zones

Tip:

To visually confirm the location of a cell or boundary zone, you can display it by right-
clicking it in the tree and selecting either Display or Add to Graphics. Conversely, if you

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
962 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

click a cell or boundary mesh in the graphics window, the selected item will be highlighted
in the tree. You can use Ctrl or Shift to select multiple zones.

1. Set up the cell zone conditions for the fluid zone associated with the Rushton blade turbine (flu-
id_mrf_1-1).

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → fluid_mrf_1-1 Edit...

a. In the Fluid dialog box, enter rbt-zone for Zone Name.

This name is more descriptive for the zone than fluid_mrf_1-1.

b. Select Frame Motion.

c. Retain the default values of (0, 0, 1) for X, Y, and Z in the Rotation-Axis Direction group box.

d. Enter 450 rev/min for Speed [rev/min] in the Rotational Velocity group box.

e. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

2. In a similar manner, set up the cell zone conditions for the fluid zone associated with the pitch
blade turbine (fluid_mrf_2-0).

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → fluid_mrf_2-0 Edit...

a. In the Fluid dialog box, enter pbt-zone for Zone Name.

b. Select Frame Motion.

c. Retain the default values of (0, 0, 1) for X, Y, and Z in the Rotation-Axis Direction group box.

d. Enter 450 rev/min for Speed [rev/min] in the Rotational Velocity group box.

e. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

3. Retain the default settings for fluid_tank-2, which is stationary in the absolute reference frame.

24.4.8. Boundary Conditions

You will now define the conditions on the boundaries of the domain. Since each wall uses the same reference
frame as the cell zone within which they are located, all walls will use the default stationary wall condition.
A stationary wall condition implies that the wall is stationary with respect to the adjacent cell zone.
Therefore, in the case of a rotating reference frame, a stationary wall is actually rotating with respect to
the absolute reference frame.

The degassing boundary condition at the top of the fluid was created in a meshing application. At the
degassing outlet, only gas phase can leave the domain. The degassing boundary condition became active
after you enabled the Eulerian multiphase model in Fluent. No input is required for this type of boundary
condition. For this problem, you only need to set the boundary conditions for the velocity inlet. Since this
is a multiphase model, you will set the conditions that are specific to the primary and secondary phases.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 963
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

1. Set the boundary conditions at the inlet (gas-inlet) for the primary phase (water).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → gas-inlet → water Edit...

Since this is a dispersed turbulent flow, only turbulence must be defined for the water phase.

a. In the Turbulence group box, select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter as the turbulence
Specification Method.

b. Enter 3% for Turbulent Intensity.

c. Enter 0.0254 m for Hydraulic Diameter.

d. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions at the inlet (gas-inlet) for the secondary phase (air).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → gas-inlet → air Edit...

a. Enter 0.05 m/s for Velocity Magnitude.

b. In the Multiphase tab, enter 1 for Volume Fraction.

A value of unity implies that only air enters the inlet.

c. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

24.4.9. Solution
1. Specify the discretization schemes.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

In the Solution Methods task page, configure the following settings.

Group Box Setting Value

Pressure Velocity Coupling Scheme Coupled
N/A Pseudo Time Method Global Time Step
N/A Warped-Face Gradient Correc- (Enabled)
tion

2. Ensure that Plot (plotting of residuals) is enabled during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

3. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization → Initialize

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
964 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Save the case file (mixing_tank.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

5. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 1500 for Number of Iterations.

b. Retain the default selection of Automatic for the Time Step Method.

c. Retain the default value of 1 for Time Scale Factor.

d. Click Calculate.

Note:

It may take significant time and computer resources to complete the problem calculation.

Figure 24.3: Residual History

6. After the solution has converged, save the case and data files (mixing_tank.cas.h5 and
mixing_tank.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 965
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

24.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Create iso-surfaces for y=0 and z=0.08.

Note:

Refer to Creating Isosurfaces (p. 55) that demonstrates how to create an iso-surface at
various coordinate locations.

2. Display the distribution of air on the XZ plane (Figure 24.4: Contours of Air Volume Fraction on
the XZ plane (p. 968)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-air-vf-xz for Contour Name.

b. From the Contours of drop-down lists, select Phases... and Volume Fraction.

c. From the Phase drop-down lists, select air.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
966 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

d. In the Surfaces selection list, deselect all surfaces by clicking and then select y=0,
wall_impeller_1, and wall_impeller_2.

e. In the Options group box, make sure that Filled is selected.

f. Disable Global Range, Auto Range, and Clip to Range.

g. Enter 0.01 for Max.

The specified range will allow you to better view the volume fraction variation.

h. Select Draw Mesh to open the Mesh Display dialog box.

i. In the Mesh Display dialog box, click next to the Surfaces filter to deselect all surfaces
and then select wall_baffle_1, wall_sparger, and all walls whose names begin with
wall_shaft.

ii. Enable Edges and disable Faces in the Options group box.

iii. Click Close to close the Mesh Display dialog box.

i. Ensure that Smooth is selected in the Coloring group box.

j. Click Save/Display and use the interactive triad to orient the view as shown in Figure 24.4: Con-
tours of Air Volume Fraction on the XZ plane (p. 968).

Note:

You may need to deselect Headlight and Lighting in the View ribbon tab (Display
group).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 967
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

Figure 24.4: Contours of Air Volume Fraction on the XZ plane

The contour map of the air volume fraction on the XZ plane shows how the air is agitated by im-
pellers as it moves upward in the mixing tank. The shape of the Rushton blade turbine is forming
cavities below the turbine.

3. Display the distribution of air on the plane z=0.08 (Figure 24.5: Contours of Air Volume Fraction
on the z=0.08 plane (p. 969)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-air-vf-z=0.08 for Contour Name.

b. Set up the contour plot in a similar manner to step 1, except using the z=0.08 instead of y=0.

c. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

d. In the View Tools toolbar, from the Set View drop-down list ( ), select the view from the

positive Z axis ( ) to obtain the view shown in Figure 24.5: Contours of Air Volume Fraction
on the z=0.08 plane (p. 969).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
968 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 24.5: Contours of Air Volume Fraction on the z=0.08 plane

Note that the air is collecting on the bottom surface of the Rushton blade turbine disk before its
dispersed by the impeller’s blades.

4. Display vectors of velocity magnitude for water on the XZ plane (Figure 24.6: Vectors of Water
Velocity Magnitude on the XZ plane (p. 970)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

a. Enter vector-vel-water for Vector Name.

b. Disable Global Range.

c. Enable Draw Mesh and retain the default settings.

d. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

e. Select Velocity from the Vectors of drop-down list.

f. Select water from the Phase drop-down list.

Since the Eulerian model solves individual momentum equations for each phase, you can choose
the phase for which solution data is plotted.

g. From the Color by drop-down lists, select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude.

h. Retain the selection of water from the Phase drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 969
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

i. In the Surfaces selection list, deselect all surfaces by clicking and then select y=0,
wall_impeller_1, and wall_impeller_2.

j. Click Save/Display, close the Vectors dialog box, and use the interactive triad to orient the
view as shown in Figure 24.6: Vectors of Water Velocity Magnitude on the XZ plane (p. 970).

Figure 24.6: Vectors of Water Velocity Magnitude on the XZ plane

The vector plot of the water velocity shows that the water moves in a circular motion, creating a
closed loop since it cannot escape the reactor.

5. Display vectors of velocity magnitude for air on the XZ plane (Figure 24.7: Vectors of Air Velocity
Magnitude on the XZ plane (p. 971)).

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

a. Enter vector-vel-air for Vector Name.

b. Enable Draw Mesh and retain the default settings.

c. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

d. Under Vectors of, select air from the Phase drop-down list.

e. Under Color by, select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
970 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

f. In the Surfaces selection list, deselect all surfaces by clicking and then select y=0,
wall_impeller_1, and wall_impeller_2.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

Figure 24.7: Vectors of Air Velocity Magnitude on the XZ plane

The vector plot of the air velocity shows that the air moves upward all the way to the water surface,
where it escapes. The baffle walls located on the sides of the tank prevent the undesirable vortex
formation.

6. Calculate the torque about the shaft for the Rushton blade turbine.

Results → Reports → Forces...

a. From the Options group box, select Moments.

b. In the Moment Center group box, enter 0, 0, and 0 for X, Y, Z, respectively.

c. In the Moment Axis group box, enter 0, 0, and -1 for X, Y, Z, respectively.

d. From the Wall Zones selection list, deselect all zones by clicking and then select
wall_impeller_1.

e. Click Print and close the Force Reports dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 971
Using the Eulerian Multiphase Model

Fluent reports the individual and net values of the pressure moment, viscous moment, total
moment, pressure coefficient, viscous coefficient, and total coefficient about the specified
center in the console.

The power requirement is simply the required torque (0.03767 N m) multiplied by the rotational
speed (450 rpm = 47.12 rad/s): 0.03767 N m * 47.1 rad/s = 1.77 W.

Note that this value does not account for any mechanical losses, motor efficiencies, and so
on.

7. Save the case file (mixing_tank.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

24.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated how to set up and solve a turbulent multiphase flow in the mixing tank using
the Eulerian multiphase model. You learned how to set degassing boundary conditions and boundary
conditions for primary and secondary phases. After completing the simulation, you displayed the results
of your calculation and calculated the torque and power requirements. For more information about the
Eulerian multiphase model, see the Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
972 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 25: Modeling Solidification
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
25.1. Introduction
25.2. Prerequisites
25.3. Problem Description
25.4. Setup and Solution
25.5. Summary

25.1. Introduction
This tutorial illustrates how to set up and solve a problem involving solidification and will demonstrate
how to do the following:

• Define a solidification problem.

• Define pull velocities for simulation of continuous casting.

• Define a surface tension gradient for Marangoni convection.

• Solve a solidification problem.

25.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

25.3. Problem Description

This tutorial demonstrates the setup and solution procedure for a fluid flow and heat transfer problem
involving solidification, namely the Czochralski growth process. The geometry considered is a 2D
axisymmetric bowl (shown in Figure 25.1: Solidification in Czochralski Model (p. 974)), containing liquid
metal. The bottom and sides of the bowl are heated above the liquidus temperature, as is the free
surface of the liquid. The liquid is solidified by heat loss from the crystal and the solid is pulled out of
the domain at a rate of 0.001 and a temperature of 500 . There is a steady injection of liquid at
the bottom of the bowl with a velocity of and a temperature of 1300 . Material
properties are listed in Figure 25.1: Solidification in Czochralski Model (p. 974).

Starting with an existing 2D mesh, the details regarding the setup and solution procedure for the solid-
ification problem are presented. The steady conduction solution for this problem is computed as an

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 973
Modeling Solidification

initial condition. Then, the fluid flow is enabled to investigate the effect of natural and Marangoni
convection in a transient fashion.

Figure 25.1: Solidification in Czochralski Model

In the above figure, is the mushy zone constant.

25.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
25.4.1. Preparation
25.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh
25.4.3. Specifying Solver and Analysis Type
25.4.4. Specifying the Models
25.4.5. Defining Materials
25.4.6. Setting the Cell Zone Conditions
25.4.7. Setting the Boundary Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
974 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

25.4.8. Solution: Steady Conduction

25.4.9. Solution: Transient Flow and Heat Transfer

25.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the solidification.zip file .

2. Unzip solidification.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file solid.msh can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

6. Disable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

25.4.2. Reading and Checking the Mesh

1. Read the mesh file solid.msh.

File → Read → Mesh...

As the mesh is read by Ansys Fluent, messages will appear in the console reporting the progress of the
reading.

A warning about the use of axis boundary conditions is displayed in the console. You are asked to
consider making changes to the zone type or change the problem definition to axisymmetric. You will
change the problem to axisymmetric swirl later in this tutorial.

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and will report the progress in the console. Make
sure that the minimum volume is a positive number.

3. Examine the mesh (Figure 25.2: Mesh Display (p. 976)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 975
Modeling Solidification

Figure 25.2: Mesh Display

25.4.3. Specifying Solver and Analysis Type

1. Select Axisymmetric Swirl from the 2D Space list and include the effects of gravity on the
model.

Setup → General → Gravity

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
976 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The geometry comprises an axisymmetric bowl. Furthermore, swirling flows are considered in this
problem, so the selection of Axisymmetric Swirl best defines this geometry.

Also, note that the rotation axis is the X axis. Hence, the X direction is the axial direction and the Y
direction is the radial direction. When modeling axisymmetric swirl, the swirl direction is the tangential
direction.

a. Enable Gravity.

b. Enter -9.81 for X in the Gravitational Acceleration group box.

25.4.4. Specifying the Models

1. Enable the laminar viscous model.

Setup → Models → Viscous Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 977
Modeling Solidification

a. Select Laminar in the Model group box.

2. Define the solidification model.

Setup → Models → Solidification & Melting Edit...

a. Enable the Solidification/Melting option in the Solidification and Melting dialog box.

The Solidification and Melting dialog box will expand to show the related parameters.

b. Retain the default value of 100000 for the Mushy Zone Constant.

This default value is acceptable for most cases.

c. Enable the Include Pull Velocities option.

By including the pull velocities, you will account for the movement of the solidified material as it
is continuously withdrawn from the domain in the continuous casting process.

When you enable this option, the Solidification and Melting dialog box will expand to show the
Compute Pull Velocities option. If you were to enable this additional option, Ansys Fluent would
compute the pull velocities during the calculation. This approach is computationally expensive and
is recommended only if the pull velocities are strongly dependent on the location of the liquid-solid
interface. In this tutorial, you will patch values for the pull velocities instead of having Ansys Flu-
ent compute them.

For more information about computing the pull velocities, see the Fluent User's Guide.

d. Click OK to close the Solidification and Melting dialog box.

An Information dialog box opens, telling you that available material properties have changed for
the solidification model. You will set the material properties later, so you can click OK in the dialog
box to acknowledge this information.

Note:

Ansys Fluent will automatically enable the energy calculation when you enable the
solidification model, so you need not visit the Energy dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
978 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

25.4.5. Defining Materials

In this step, you will create a new material and specify its properties, including the melting heat, solidus
temperature, and liquidus temperature.

1. Define a new material.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air Edit...

a. Enter liquid-metal for Name.

b. Select polynomial from the Density drop-down list in the Properties group box.

c. Configure the following settings In the Polynomial Profile dialog box:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 979
Modeling Solidification

i. Set Coefficients to 2.

ii. In the Coefficients group box, enter 8000 for 1 and -0.1 for 2.

As shown in Figure 25.1: Solidification in Czochralski Model (p. 974), the density of the material
is defined by a polynomial function: .

iii. Click OK to close the Polynomial Profile dialog box.

d. In the Question dialog box, click Yes to overwrite air and add the new material (liquid-metal)
to the Fluent Fluid Materials drop-down list.

e. Enter 680 for Cp (Specific Heat).

f. Enter 30 for Thermal Conductivity.

g. Enter 0.00553 for Viscosity.

h. Enter 100000 for Pure Solvent Melting Heat.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
980 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Scroll down the group box to find Pure Solvent Melting Heat and the properties that follow.

Note that for solidification to occur, Pure Solvent Melting Heat must be set to a positive non-
zero value.

i. Enter 1150 for Solidus Temperature.

j. Enter 1150 for Liquidus Temperature.

k. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

25.4.6. Setting the Cell Zone Conditions

1. Set the cell zone conditions for the fluid (fluid).

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Fluid → fluid Edit...

a. Ensure liquid-metal is selected from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Click Apply and close the Fluid dialog box.

25.4.7. Setting the Boundary Conditions

1. Set the boundary conditions for the inlet (inlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → inlet Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 981
Modeling Solidification

a. Enter 0.00101 for Velocity Magnitude.

b. Click the Thermal tab and enter 1300 for Temperature.

c. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
982 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Set the boundary conditions for the outlet (outlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → outlet Edit...

Here, the solid is pulled out with a specified velocity, so a velocity inlet boundary condition is used with
a positive axial velocity component.

a. From the Velocity Specification Method drop-down list, select Components.

The Velocity Inlet dialog box will change to show related inputs.

b. Enter 0.001 for Axial-Velocity.

c. Enter 1 for Swirl Angular Velocity.

d. Click the Thermal tab and enter 500 for Temperature.

e. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for the bottom wall (bottom-wall).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → bottom-wall Edit...

a. Click the Thermal tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 983
Modeling Solidification

i. Select Temperature in the Thermal Conditions group box.

ii. Enter 1300 for Temperature.

b. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

4. Set the boundary conditions for the free surface (free-surface).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → free-surface Edit...

The specified shear and Marangoni stress boundary conditions are useful in modeling situations in
which the shear stress (rather than the motion of the fluid) is known. A free surface condition is an
example of such a situation. In this case, the convection is driven by the Marangoni stress and the
shear stress is dependent on the surface tension, which is a function of temperature.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
984 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Marangoni Stress in the Shear Condition group box.

The Marangoni Stress condition allows you to specify the gradient of the surface tension with
respect to temperature at a wall boundary.

b. Enter -0.00036 for Surface Tension Gradient.

c. Click the Thermal tab to specify the thermal conditions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 985
Modeling Solidification

i. Select Convection from the Thermal Conditions group box.

ii. Enter 100 for Heat Transfer Coefficient.

iii. Enter 1500 for Free Stream Temperature.

d. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

5. Set the boundary conditions for the side wall (side-wall).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → side-wall Edit...

a. Click the Thermal tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
986 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select Temperature from the Thermal Conditions group box.

ii. Enter 1400 for the Temperature.

b. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

6. Set the boundary conditions for the solid wall (solid-wall).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → solid-wall Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 987
Modeling Solidification

a. From the Wall Motion group box, select Moving Wall.

The Wall dialog box is expanded to show additional parameters.

b. in the Motion group box, in the lower box, select Rotational.

The Wall dialog box is changed to show the rotational speed.

c. Enter 1.0 for Speed.

d. Click the Thermal tab to specify the thermal conditions.

i. Select Temperature from the Thermal Conditions selection list.

ii. Enter 500 for Temperature.

e. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

25.4.8. Solution: Steady Conduction

In this step, you will specify the discretization schemes to be used and temporarily disable the calculation
of the flow and swirl velocity equations, so that only conduction is calculated. This steady-state solution
will be used as the initial condition for the time-dependent fluid flow and heat transfer calculation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
988 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1. Set the solution parameters.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

a. Select Coupled from the Scheme drop-down list in the Pressure-Velocity Coupling group
box.

b. Select PRESTO! from the Pressure drop-down list in the Spatial Discretization group box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 989
Modeling Solidification

The PRESTO! scheme is well suited for rotating flows with steep pressure gradients.

c. Retain the default selection of Second Order Upwind from the Momentum, Swirl Velocity,
and Energy drop-down lists.

d. Select Global Time Step from the Pseudo Time Method drop-down list.

This Pseudo Time Method enables an algorithm in the coupled pressure-based solver that effectively
adds an unsteady term to the solution equations, in order to improve stability and convergence
behavior. The use of this option is recommended for general fluid flow problems.

2. Enable the calculation for energy.

Solution → Controls → Equations...

a. Deselect Flow and Swirl Velocity from the Equations selection list to disable the calculation
of flow and swirl velocity equations.

b. Click OK to close the Equations dialog box.

3. Confirm the Relaxation Factors.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
990 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Retain the default values.

4. Enable the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 991
Modeling Solidification

a. Ensure Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Click OK to accept the remaining default settings and close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

5. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the Method at the default of Hybrid in the Initialization group.

For flows in complex topologies, hybrid initialization will provide better initial velocity and pressure
field than standard initialization. This in general will help in improving the convergence behavior
of the solver.

b. Click Initialize.

6. Define a custom field function for the swirl pull velocity.

Parameters & Customization → Custom Field Functions New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
992 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

In this step, you will define a field function to be used to patch a variable value for the swirl pull velocity
in the next step. The swirl pull velocity is equal to , where is the angular velocity, and is the
radial coordinate. Since = 1 rad/s, you can simplify the equation to simply . In this example, the
value of is included for demonstration purposes.

a. From the Field Functions drop-down lists, select Mesh... and Radial Coordinate.

b. Click the Select button to add radial-coordinate in the Definition field.

If you make a mistake, click the DEL button on the calculator pad to delete the last item you added
to the function definition.

c. Click the button on the calculator pad.

d. Click the 1 button.

e. Enter omegar for New Function Name.

f. Click Define.

The omegar item appears under the Parameters & Customization/Parameters tree branch.

Note:

To check the function definition or delete the custom field function, click Manage....
Then in the Field Function Definitions dialog box, from the Field Functions selec-
tion list, select omegar to view the function definition.

g. Close the Custom Field Function Calculator dialog box.

7. Patch the pull velocities.

Solution → Initialization → Patch...

As noted earlier, you will patch values for the pull velocities, rather than having Ansys Fluent compute
them. Since the radial pull velocity is zero, you will patch just the axial and swirl pull velocities.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 993
Modeling Solidification

a. From the Variable selection list, select Axial Pull Velocity.

b. Enable the Use Field Function option.

c. Enter 0.001 for Value.

d. From the Zones to Patch selection list, select fluid.

e. Click Patch.

You have just patched the axial pull velocity. Next you will patch the swirl pull velocity.

f. From the Variable selection list, select Swirl Pull Velocity.

Scroll down the list to find Swirl Pull Velocity.

g. Enable the Use Field Function option.

h. Select omegar from the Field Function selection list.

i. Ensure that fluid is selected from the Zones to Patch selection list.

j. Click Patch and close the Patch dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
994 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

8. Save the initial case and data files (solid0.cas.h5 and solid0.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

9. Start the calculation by requesting 20 iterations.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 995
Modeling Solidification

a. In the Run Calculation task page, select User-Specified for the Time Step Method in both
the Fluid Time Scale and the Solid Time Scale group boxes.

b. Retain the default values of 1 s and 1000 s for the Pseudo Time Step Size in the Fluid Time
Scale and the Solid Time Scale group boxes, respectively.

c. Enter 20 for Number of Iterations.

d. Click Calculate.

10. Create and display the definition of filled temperature contours (Figure 25.3: Contours of Temper-
ature for the Steady Conduction Solution (p. 997)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter temperature for Contour Name.

b. Enable the Filled option in the Options group box.

c. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Contours of drop-down lists.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
996 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

e. Click Save/Display (Figure 25.3: Contours of Temperature for the Steady Conduction Solu-
tion (p. 997)) and close the Contours dialog box.

The temperature contour definition appear under the Results/Graphics/Contours tree branch.

Figure 25.3: Contours of Temperature for the Steady Conduction Solution

11. Display filled contours of temperature to determine the thickness of mushy zone.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 997
Modeling Solidification

a. Enter temperature-mushy for Contour Name.

b. Disable Auto Range in the Options group box.

The Clip to Range option is automatically enabled.

c. Enter 1100 for Min and 1200 for Max.

d. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

e. Enable Draw Mesh in the Options group box.

f. Deselect default-interior from the Surfaces selection list and close the Mesh Display dialog
box.

g. Click Save/Display (See Figure 25.4: Contours of Temperature (Mushy Zone) for the Steady
Conduction Solution (p. 999)) and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
998 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 25.4: Contours of Temperature (Mushy Zone) for the Steady Conduction Solution

12. Save the case and data files for the steady conduction solution (solid.cas.h5 and sol-
id.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

25.4.9. Solution: Transient Flow and Heat Transfer

In this step, you will turn on time dependence and include the flow and swirl velocity equations in the
calculation. You will then solve the transient problem using the steady conduction solution as the initial
condition.

1. Enable a time-dependent solution by selecting Transient from the Time list.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 999
Modeling Solidification

2. Set the solution parameters.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1000 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of First Order Implicit from the Transient Formulation drop-
down list.

b. Ensure that PRESTO! is selected from the Pressure drop-down list in the Spatial Discretization
group box.

3. Enable calculations for flow and swirl velocity.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1001
Modeling Solidification

Solution → Controls → Equations...

a. Select Flow and Swirl Velocity and ensure that Energy is selected from the Equations selection
list.

Now all three items in the Equations selection list will be selected.

b. Click OK to close the Equations dialog box.

4. Set the Under-Relaxation Factors.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1002 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 0.1 for Liquid Fraction Update.

b. Retain the default values for other Under-Relaxation Factors.

5. Save the initial case and data files (solid01.cas.h5 and solid01.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

6. Run the calculation for 2 time steps.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1003
Modeling Solidification

a. Enter 0.1s for Time Step Size.

b. Set the Number of Time Steps to 2.

c. Retain the default value of 20 for Max Iterations/Time Step.

d. Click Calculate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1004 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

7. Display filled contours of the temperature after 0.2 seconds using the temperature contours
definition that you created earlier.

Results → Graphics → Contours → temperature Display

Figure 25.5: Contours of Temperature at t=0.2 s

8. Create and display the definition of liquid fraction contours by modifying the stream-function
contour definition (Figure 25.6: Contours of Liquid Fraction at t=0.2 s (p. 1006)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter liquid-fraction for Contour Name.

b. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

c. Enable Auto Range in the Options group box.

d. Select Solidification/Melting... and Liquid Fraction from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1005
Modeling Solidification

Figure 25.6: Contours of Liquid Fraction at t=0.2 s

The liquid fraction contours show the current position of the melt front. Note that in Figure 25.6: Contours
of Liquid Fraction at t=0.2 s (p. 1006), the mushy zone divides the liquid and solid regions roughly in
half.

9. Continue the calculation for 48 additional time steps.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 48 for Number of Time Steps.

b. Click Calculate.

After a total of 50 time steps have been completed, the elapsed time will be 5 seconds.

10. Display filled contours of the temperature after 5 seconds using the contour definition created
earlier (Figure 25.7: Contours of Temperature at t=5 s (p. 1007)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → temperature Display

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1006 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 25.7: Contours of Temperature at t=5 s

As shown in Figure 25.7: Contours of Temperature at t=5 s (p. 1007), the temperature contours are fairly
uniform through the melt front and solid material. The distortion of the temperature field due to the
recirculating liquid is also clearly evident.

In a continuous casting process, it is important to pull out the solidified material at the proper time.
If the material is pulled out too soon, it will not have solidified (that is, it will still be in a mushy state).
If it is pulled out too late, it solidifies in the casting pool and cannot be pulled out in the required shape.
The optimal rate of pull can be determined from the contours of liquidus temperature and solidus
temperature.

11. Display filled contours of liquid fraction (Figure 25.8: Contours of Liquid Fraction at t=5 s (p. 1008)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → liquid-fraction Display

The introduction of liquid material at the left of the domain is balanced by the pulling of the solidified
material from the right. After 5 seconds, the equilibrium position of the melt front is beginning to be
established (Figure 25.8: Contours of Liquid Fraction at t=5 s (p. 1008)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1007
Modeling Solidification

Figure 25.8: Contours of Liquid Fraction at t=5 s

12. Save the case and data files for the solution at 5 seconds (solid5.cas.h5 and sol-
id5.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

25.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you studied the setup and solution for a fluid flow problem involving solidification for
the Czochralski growth process.

The solidification model in Ansys Fluent can be used to model the continuous casting process where
a solid material is continuously pulled out from the casting domain. In this tutorial, you patched a
constant value and a custom field function for the pull velocities instead of computing them. This ap-
proach is used for cases where the pull velocity is not changing over the domain, as it is computationally
less expensive than having Ansys Fluent compute the pull velocities during the calculation.

For more information about the solidification/melting model, see the Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1008 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 26: Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase
Model with Heat Transfer
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
26.1. Introduction
26.2. Prerequisites
26.3. Problem Description
26.4. Setup and Solution
26.5. Summary
26.6. References

26.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines the flow of air and a granular solid phase consisting of glass beads in a hot gas
fluidized bed, under uniform minimum fluidization conditions. The results obtained for the local wall-
to-bed heat transfer coefficient in Ansys Fluent can be compared with analytical results [1].

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Use the Eulerian granular model.

• Set boundary conditions for internal flow.

• Compile a User-Defined Function (UDF) for the gas and solid phase thermal conductivities.

• Calculate a solution using the pressure-based solver.

26.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

In order to complete the steps to compile the UDF, you will need to have a working C compiler installed
on your machine.

26.3. Problem Description

This problem considers a hot gas fluidized bed in which air flows upwards through the bottom of the
domain and through an additional small orifice next to a heated wall. A uniformly fluidized bed is ex-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1009
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

amined, which you can then compare with analytical results [1]. The geometry and data for the problem
are shown in Figure 26.1: Problem Schematic (p. 1010).

Figure 26.1: Problem Schematic

26.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
26.4.1. Preparation
26.4.2. Mesh
26.4.3. Solver Settings
26.4.4. Models
26.4.5. UDF
26.4.6. Materials
26.4.7. Phases
26.4.8. Boundary Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1010 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

26.4.9. Solution
26.4.10. Postprocessing

26.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the eulerian_granular_heat.zip file .

2. Unzip eulerian_granular_heat.zip to your working directory.

The files fluid-bed.msh and conduct.c can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

Note:

The double precision solver is recommended for modeling multiphase flow sim-
ulations.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

26.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file fluid-bed.msh.

File → Read → Mesh...

As Ansys Fluent reads the mesh file, it will report the progress in the console.

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and will report the progress in the console. Make
sure that the reported minimum volume is a positive number.

3. Examine the mesh (Figure 26.2: Mesh Display of the Fluidized Bed (p. 1012)).

Extra:

You can use the right mouse button to check which zone number corresponds to each
boundary. If you click the right mouse button on one of the boundaries in the graphics

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1011
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

window, its zone number, name, and type will be printed in the Ansys Fluent console.
This feature is especially useful when you have several zones of the same type and you
want to distinguish between them quickly.

Figure 26.2: Mesh Display of the Fluidized Bed

26.4.3. Solver Settings

1. Enable the pressure-based transient solver.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1012 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the default selection of Pressure-Based from the Type list.

The pressure-based solver must be used for multiphase calculations.

b. Select Transient from the Time list.

c. Enable Gravity.

d. Enter -9.81 m/s2 for the Gravitational Acceleration in the Y direction.

26.4.4. Models
1. Enable the Eulerian multiphase model for two phases.

You will use the default settings for the Eulerian model, so you can enable it directly from the tree by
right-clicking the Multiphase node and choosing Eulerian from the context menu.

Setup → Models → Multiphase Eulerian

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1013
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

2. Enable heat transfer by enabling the energy equation.

Setup → Models → Energy On

An Information dialog box appears reminding you to confirm the property values. Click OK in
the Information dialog box to continue.

3. Enable the laminar viscous model.

The decision to use the laminar model should be based on the Stokes number for the particles suspended
in the fluid flow.

Setup → Models → Viscous Model → Laminar

26.4.5. UDF
1. Compile the user-defined function, conduct.c, that will be used to define the thermal conduct-
ivity for the gas and solid phases.

User Defined → User Defined → Functions → Compiled...

a. Click the Add... button below the Source Files option to open the Select File dialog box.

b. Select the file conduct.c and click OK in the Select File dialog box.

c. Click Build.

Ansys Fluent will create a libudf folder and compile the UDF. Also, a Warning dialog box will
open asking you to make sure that UDF source file and case/data files are in the same folder.

d. Click OK to close the Warning dialog box.

e. Click Load to load the UDF.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1014 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

26.4.6. Materials
1. Modify the properties for air, which will be used for the primary phase.

Setup → Materials → air → Create/Edit...

The properties used for air are modified to match data used by Kuipers et al. [1]

a. Enter 1.2 kg/m3 for Density.

b. Enter 994 J/kg-K for Cp.

c. Select user-defined from the Thermal Conductivity drop-down list to open the User Defined
Functions dialog box.

i. Select conduct_gas::libudf from the available list.

ii. Click OK to close the User Defined Functions dialog box.

d. Click Change/Create and close the Materials dialog box..

2. Define a new fluid material for the granular phase (the glass beads).

Setup → Materials → air → Create/Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1015
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

a. Enter solids for Name.

b. Enter 2660 kg/m3 for Density.

c. Enter 737 J/kg-K for Cp.

d. Retain the selection of user-defined from the Thermal Conductivity drop-down list.

e. Click the Edit... button to open the User Defined Functions dialog box.

i. Select conduct_solid::libudf in the User Defined Functions dialog box and click
OK.

A Question dialog box will open asking if you want to overwrite air.

ii. Click No in the Question dialog box.

f. Click Change/Create and close the Materials dialog box.

26.4.7. Phases
You will now configure the phases.

Setup → Models → Multiphase Edit...

1. In the Phases tab of the Multiphase Model dialog box, define air as the primary phase.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1016 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Phases selection list, select phase-1 – Primary Phase.

b. Enter air for Name.

c. Ensure that air is selected from the Phase Material drop-down list.

d. Click Apply.

Important:

When setting up your case, if you have made changes in the current tab, you should
click the Apply button to make them effective before moving to the next tab.
Otherwise, the relevant models may not be available in the other tabs, and your
settings may be lost.

2. Define solids (glass beads) as the secondary phase.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1017
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

a. In the Phases selection list, select phase-2 – Secondary Phase.

b. Enter solids for Name.

c. Select solids from the Phase Material drop-down list.

d. Enable Granular.

e. Retain the default selection of Phase Property in the Granular Temperature Model group
box.

f. Enter 0.0005 m for Diameter.

g. Select syamlal-obrien from the Granular Viscosity drop-down list.

h. Select lun-et-al from the Granular Bulk Viscosity drop-down list.

i. Select constant from the Granular Temperature drop-down list and enter 1e-05.

j. Enter 0.6 for the Packing Limit.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1018 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

k. Click Apply.

3. In the Phases Interaction tab of the Multiphase Model dialog box, define the interphase inter-
actions formulations to be used.

a. In the Forces tab, select syamlal-obrien from the Coefficient drop-down list (Drag Coefficient
group box).

b. Click Apply.

c. Go to the Heat, Mass, Reactions tab.

d. In the Heat tab, select gunn from the Heat Transfer Coefficient drop-down list.

The interphase heat exchange is simulated, using a drag coefficient, the default restitution coefficient
for granular collisions of 0.9, and a heat transfer coefficient. Granular phase lift is not very relevant
in this problem, and in fact is rarely used.

e. Click Apply.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1019
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

f. In the Interfacial Area tab, select ia-symmetric from the Interfacial Area drop-down list.

The default ia-particle method is best suited for typical dispersed flow applications with a volume
fraction lower than 30%. In this analysis, the volume fraction of the secondary phase is relatively
high (close to 60%). The ia-symmetric correlation is more accurate for such cases because it con-
siders the volume fraction of both the primary and secondary phases in the interfacial area calcu-
lation.

g. Click Apply and close the Multiphase Model dialog box.

26.4.8. Boundary Conditions

For this problem, you need to set the boundary conditions for all boundaries.

Setup → Boundary Conditions

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1020 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1. Set the boundary conditions for the lower velocity inlet (v_uniform) for the primary phase.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → v_uniform

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1021
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

For the Eulerian multiphase model, you will specify conditions at a velocity inlet that are specific to
the primary and secondary phases.

a. Select air from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click the Edit... button to open the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

i. Retain the default selection of Magnitude, Normal to Boundary from the Velocity Spe-
cification Method drop-down list.

ii. Enter 0.25 m/s for the Velocity Magnitude.

iii. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Temperature.

iv. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

c. i. Select solids from the Phase drop-down list.

ii. Click the Edit... button to open the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1022 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

A. Retain the default Velocity Specification Method and Reference Frame.

B. Retain the default value of 0 m/s for the Velocity Magnitude.

C. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Temperature.

D. Click the Multiphase tab and retain the default value of 0 for Volume Fraction.

E. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for the orifice velocity inlet (v_jet) for the primary phase.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → v_jet

a. Select air from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click the Edit... button to open the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

i. Retain the default Velocity Specification Method and Reference Frame.

ii. Enter 0.25 m/s for the Velocity Magnitude.

In order for a comparison with analytical results [1] to be meaningful, in this simulation you
will use a uniform value for the air velocity equal to the minimum fluidization velocity at both
inlets on the bottom of the bed.

iii. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Temperature.

iv. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

c. i. Select solids from the Phase drop-down list.

ii. Click the Edit... button to open the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1023
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

A. Retain the default Velocity Specification Method and Reference Frame.

B. Retain the default value of 0 m/s for the Velocity Magnitude.

C. Click the Thermal tab and enter 293 K for Temperature.

D. Click the Multiphase tab and retain the default value of 0 for the Volume Fraction.

E. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for the pressure outlet (poutlet) for the mixture phase.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → poutlet

For the Eulerian granular model, you will specify conditions at a pressure outlet for the mixture and
for both phases.

The thermal conditions at the pressure outlet will be used only if flow enters the domain through this
boundary. You can set them equal to the inlet values, as no flow reversal is expected at the pressure
outlet. In general, however, it is important to set reasonable values for these downstream scalar values,
in case flow reversal occurs at some point during the calculation.

a. Select mixture from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click the Edit... button to open the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

i. Retain the default value of 0 Pascal for Gauge Pressure.

ii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

4. Set the boundary conditions for the pressure outlet (poutlet) for the primary phase.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → poutlet

a. Select air from the Phase drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1024 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Click the Edit... button to open the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

i. In the Thermal tab, enter 293 K for Backflow Total Temperature.

ii. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

c. i. Select solids from the Phase drop-down list.

ii. Click the Edit... button to open the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

A. In the Thermal tab, enter 293 K for the Backflow Total Temperature.

B. In the Multiphase tab, retain default settings.

C. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

5. Set the boundary conditions for the heated wall (wall_hot) for the mixture.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → wall_hot

For the heated wall, you will set thermal conditions for the mixture, and momentum conditions (zero
shear) for both phases.

a. Select mixture from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click the Edit... button to open the Wall dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1025
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

i. In the Thermal tab, select Temperature from the Thermal Conditions list.

ii. Enter 373 K for Temperature.

iii. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

6. Set the boundary conditions for the heated wall (wall_hot) for the primary phase.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → wall_hot

a. Select air from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Click the Edit... button to open the Wall dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1026 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Retain the default No Slip condition and click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

7. Set the boundary conditions for the adiabatic wall (wall_ins).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → wall_ins

For the adiabatic wall, retain the default thermal conditions for the mixture (zero heat flux), and the
default momentum conditions (no slip) for both phases.

26.4.9. Solution
1. Select the second order implicit transient formulation and higher-order spatial discretization
schemes.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1027
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

a. Modify the discretization methods in the Spacial Discretization group box.

i. Select Second Order for Pressure and Second Order Upwind for Momentum.

ii. Select QUICK for Volume Fraction and Energy.

b. Select Second Order Implicit from the Transient Formulation drop-down list.

2. Set the solution parameters.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1028 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 0.5 for Pressure.

b. Enter 0.2 for Momentum.

3. Ensure that the plotting of residuals is enabled during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

4. Define a custom field function for the heat transfer coefficient.

User Defined → Field Functions → Custom...

Initially, you will define functions for the mixture temperature, and thermal conductivity, then you will
use these to define a function for the heat transfer coefficient.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1029
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

a. Define the function t_mix.

i. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Field Functions drop-down lists.

ii. Ensure that air is selected from the Phase drop-down list and click Select.

iii. Click the multiplication symbol in the calculator pad.

iv. Select Phases... and Volume fraction from the Field Functions drop-down list.

v. Ensure that air is selected from the Phase drop-down list and click Select.

vi. Click the addition symbol in the calculator pad.

vii. Similarly, add the term solids-temperature * solids-vof.

viii.Enter t_mix for New Function Name.

ix. Click Define.

b. Define the function k_mix.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1030 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select Properties... and Thermal Conductivity from the Field Functions drop-down lists.

ii. Select air from the Phase drop-down list and click Select.

iii. Click the multiplication symbol in the calculator pad.

iv. Select Phases... and Volume fraction from the Field Functions drop-down lists.

v. Ensure that air is selected from the Phase drop-down list and click Select.

vi. Click the addition symbol in the calculator pad.

vii. Similarly, add the term solids-thermal-conductivity-lam * solids-vof.

viii.Enter k_mix for New Function Name.

ix. Click Define.

c. Define the function ave_htc.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1031
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

i. Click the subtraction symbol in the calculator pad.

ii. From the Field Functions drop-down lists, select Custom Field Functions... and k_mix
and click Select.

iii. Use the calculator pad and the Field Functions lists to complete the definition of the
function.

iv. Enter ave_htc for New Function Name.

v. Click Define and close the Custom Field Function Calculator dialog box.

5. Define the point surface in the cell next to the wall on the plane .

Domain → Surface → Create → Point...

a. Enter y=0.24 for New Surface Name.

b. Enter 0.28494 m for x and 0.24 m for y in the Coordinates group box.

c. Click Create and close the Point Surface dialog box.

6. Create a surface report definition for the heat transfer coefficient.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Facet Average...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1032 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter surf-mon-1 for Name of the surface report definition.

b. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

c. Select Custom Field Functions... and ave_htc from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

d. Select y=0.24 from the Surfaces selection list.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition settings and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

surf-mon-1-rplot and surf-mon-1-rfile that are automatically generated by Fluent appear in

the tree (under Solution/Monitors/Report Plots and Solution/Monitors/Report Files, respect-
ively).

f. Rename the report output file.

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → surf-mon-1-rfile Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1033
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

i. Enter htc-024.out for Output File Base Name.

ii. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

7. Define a cell register for the lower half of the fluidized bed.

Solution → Cell Registers New → Region...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1034 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 0.3 m for Xmax and 0.5 m for Ymax in the Input Coordinates group box.

b. Click Save and close the Region Register dialog box.

This register is used to patch the initial volume fraction of solids in the next step.

8. Initialize the solution.

Solution → Initialization → Options...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1035
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

a. Select all-zones from the Compute from drop-down list.

b. Retain the default values and click Initialize.

9. Patch the initial volume fraction of solids in the lower half of the fluidized bed.

Solution → Initialization → Patch...

a. Select solids from the Phase drop-down list.

b. Select Volume Fraction from the Variable selection list.

c. Enter 0.598 for Value.

d. Select region_0 from the Registers to Patch selection list.

e. Click Patch and close the Patch dialog box.

At this point, it is a good practice to display contours of the variable you just patched, to ensure that
the desired field was obtained.

10. Display contours of Volume Fraction of solids (Figure 26.3: Initial Volume Fraction of Granular
Phase (solids) (p. 1037)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enable Filled in the Options group box.

b. Select Phases... from the upper Contours of drop-down list.

c. Select solids from the Phase drop-down list.

d. Ensure that Volume fraction is selected from the lower Contours of drop-down list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1036 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 26.3: Initial Volume Fraction of Granular Phase (solids)

11. Save the case file (fluid-bed.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

12. Start calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1037
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

a. Set 0.00015 for Time Step Size.

b. Set 12000 for Number of Time Steps.

c. Enter 50 for Max Iterations/Time Step.

d. Click Calculate.

The plot of the value of the mixture-averaged heat transfer coefficient in the cell next to the heated
wall versus time is in excellent agreement with results published for the same case [1].

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1038 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 26.4: Plot of Mixture-Averaged Heat Transfer Coefficient in the Cell Next to the Heated
Wall Versus Time

13. Save the case and data files (fluid-bed.cas.h5 and fluid-bed.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

26.4.10. Postprocessing
1. Display the pressure field in the fluidized bed (Figure 26.5: Contours of Static Pressure (p. 1041)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1039
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

a. Enter contour-pressure for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. Select mixture from Phase drop-down list.

d. Select Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1040 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 26.5: Contours of Static Pressure

Note the build-up of static pressure in the granular phase.

2. Display the volume fraction of solids (Figure 26.6: Contours of Volume Fraction of Solids (p. 1042)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-solid-vf for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. Select solids from the Phase drop-down list.

d. Select Phases... and Volume fraction from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

f. Zoom in to show the contours close to the region where the change in volume fraction is the
greatest.

Note that the region occupied by the granular phase has expanded slightly, as a result of fluidization.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1041
Using the Eulerian Granular Multiphase Model with Heat Transfer

Figure 26.6: Contours of Volume Fraction of Solids

3. Save the case file (fluid-bed.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

26.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated how to set up and solve a granular multiphase problem with heat transfer,
using the Eulerian model. You learned how to set boundary conditions for the mixture and both phases.
The solution obtained is in excellent agreement with analytical results from Kuipers et al. [1].

26.6. References
1. J. A. M. Kuipers, W. Prins, and W. P. M. Van Swaaij "Numerical Calculation of Wall-to-Bed Heat
Transfer Coefficients in Gas-Fluidized Beds", Department of Chemical Engineering, Twente University
of Technology, in AIChE Journal, July 1992, Vol. 38, No. 7.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1042 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 27: Modeling Ablation
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
27.1. Introduction
27.2. Prerequisites
27.3. Problem Description
27.4. Setup and Solution
27.5. Summary

27.1. Introduction
In this tutorial, a flow field of air passing around a 3D wedge is simulated using the Ansys Fluent ablation
model. Ablation is an effective treatment used to protect a vehicle from the damaging effects of external
high temperatures. During high speed vehicle operations (for example, vehicle reentry), the ablative
coating is chipped away to remove excessive amount of heat from the surface of the vehicle.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Define boundary conditions for a high-speed flow.

• Set up the ablation model to model effects of a moving boundary due to ablation.

• Initiate and solve the transient simulation using the density-based solver.

27.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

27.3. Problem Description

The geometry of the 3D wedge considered in this tutorial is shown in Figure 27.1: Problem Schemat-
ic (p. 1044). The air flow passes around a nose of a re-entry vehicle operating under high speed conditions.
The inlet air has a temperature of 4500 K, a gauge pressure of 13500 Pa, and a Mach number of 3. The
domain is bounded above and below by symmetry planes (displayed in yellow). As the ablative coating
chips away, the surface of the wall moves. The moving of the surface is modeled using dynamic meshes.
The surface moving rate is estimated by Vielle’s empirical law:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1043
Modeling Ablation

where is the surface moving rate, is the absolute pressure, and and are model parameters. In
the considered case, = 5 and = 0.1.

The inlet is colored blue, the walls are colored gray, the symmetry planes are colored yellow, and the
outlet is colored red.

Figure 27.1: Problem Schematic

27.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
27.4.1. Preparation
27.4.2. Mesh
27.4.3. Solver
27.4.4. Models
27.4.5. Materials
27.4.6. Boundary Conditions
27.4.7. Dynamic Mesh
27.4.8. Solution
27.4.9. Postprocessing

27.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the ablation.zip file .

2. Unzip ablation.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file ablation_mesh.msh can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1044 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

27.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file ablation.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

Ansys Fluent will perform various checks on the mesh and report the progress in the console. Ensure
that the reported minimum volume is a positive number.

3. Display the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Display...

a. In the Options group box, disable Faces and enable Edges.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1045
Modeling Ablation

b. From the Surfaces selection list, select inlet, outlet, and wall-ablation.

Tip:

To deselect all surfaces click the far-right button at the top of the Surfaces
selection list, and then select the desired surfaces from the Surfaces selection list.

c. In the Edge Type group box, ensure that All is selected.

d. Click Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

The graphics display will be updated to show the mesh (see Figure 27.2: Wedge Mesh Display (p. 1046)).

Figure 27.2: Wedge Mesh Display

27.4.3. Solver

1. In the General task page, retain the default solver settings of Density-Based solver type.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1046 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Setup → General → Density-Based

The density-based solvers of Ansys Fluent provides faster performance for applications involving
high-speed aerodynamics with shocks.

2. Select Transient from the Time list.

Setup → General → Transient

3. Set the Operating Conditions.

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions...

a. Enter 0 for Operating Pressure.

b. Click OK to confirm the operating conditions.

27.4.4. Models
1. Enable heat transfer by enabling the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

2. Enable the k-ω SST turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1047
Modeling Ablation

a. Retain the default selection of k-omega (2 eqn) in the Model list.

b. Retain the default selection of SST in the k-omega Model list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1048 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

3. Enable the ablation model.

Physics → Models → More... → Ablation...

a. In the Ablation Dynamic Mesh Coupling Model dialog box, enable Ablation Dynamic Mesh
Coupling.

b. Click OK to close the Ablation Dynamic Mesh Coupling Model dialog box.

27.4.5. Materials
The default Fluid Material is air, which is the working fluid in this problem. The default settings need to
be modified to account for compressibility.

1. Set the properties for air, the default fluid material.

Setup → Materials → Fluid → air Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1049
Modeling Ablation

a. In the Properties group, select ideal-gas from the Density drop-down list.

b. Click Change/Create to save these settings.

c. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

27.4.6. Boundary Conditions

Specify boundary conditions using the Boundary Conditions task page.

Setup → Boundary Conditions

1. Set the boundary conditions for the air inlet (inlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → inlet

a. In the Boundary Conditions task page, select inlet from the Zone list.

b. From the Type drop-down list, select pressure-far-field.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1050 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Click Edit... to open the Pressure Far-Field dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1051
Modeling Ablation

d. In the Pressure Far-Field dialog box, configure the following settings:

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Gauge Pressure 13500 Pa
Mach Number 3
Intensity and Viscosity Ratio
Specification Method
(default)
Turbulent Intensity 0.1 %
Thermal Temperature 4500 K

e. Click Apply and close the Pressure Far-Field dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for the air outlet (outlet).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → outlet → Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1052 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Pressure Outlet dialog box, configure the following settings:

Tab Setting Value

Momentum Gauge Pressure 13500 Pa
Prevent Reverse Flow (Selected)

b. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

3. Set the ablation boundary conditions for the wall (wall_ablation).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → wall_ablation → Edit...

a. In the Wall dialog box, configure the following settings:

Tab Setting Value

Ablation Ablation Model Vielle’s Model
Parameter A 5
Parameter n 0.1 (default)

b. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

Once you have specified the ablation boundary conditions for the wall, Ansys Fluent automatically
enables the Dynamic Mesh model with the Smoothing and Remeshing options, creates the wall-
ablation dynamic mesh zone, and configure appropriate dynamic mesh settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1053
Modeling Ablation

27.4.7. Dynamic Mesh

For ablation simulations, you must define dynamic mesh zones to allow the mesh to handle the zone
deformation in the Dynamic Mesh... task page.

Domain → Mesh Models → Dynamic Mesh...

1. In the Mesh Methods group box, click the Settings... button to open the Mesh Method Settings
dialog box.

2. Review and retain the current settings for smoothing and remeshing.

Note:

In general, there is no need to modify the dynamic mesh settings automatically con-
figured by Ansys Fluent. However, you can adjust these settings to suit your specific
needs.

3. Click OK to close the Mesh Method Settings dialog box.

4. Click the Create/Edit... button to open the Dynamic Mesh Zones dialog box.

5. Create the dynamic zone for the fluid cell zone.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1054 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. From the Zone Names drop-down list, select interior--flow.

b. From the Type list, select Deforming.

c. In the Meshing Options tab, disable Smoothing.

d. Retain the remaining default settings and click Create.

6. Create the dynamic zone for the outlet.

a. From the Zone Names drop-down list, select outlet.

b. From the Type list, select Deforming.

c. In the Meshing Options tab, enable Smoothing.

d. Retain the remaining default settings and click Create.

7. Create the dynamic zones for the symmetry zones.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1055
Modeling Ablation

a. From the Zone Names drop-down list, select symm1.

b. From the Type list, select Deforming.

c. In the Meshing Options tab, enable Smoothing.

d. In Geometry Definition tab, select plane from the Definition drop-down list.

e. In the Point on Plane group box, enter 0, -0.04, and 0 for X, Y, and Z.

f. In the Plane Normal group box, enter 0, -1, and 0 for X, Y, and Z.

g. Click Create.

h. In a similar manner, create the dynamic zone for symm2. For the Point on Plane, enter 0,
0.04, and 0 for X, Y, and Z, respectively. For the Plane Normal, enter 0, 1, and 0 for X, Y,
and Z, respectively.

Click Create.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1056 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

8. Enable the movement of the adjacent boundary layer mesh with the moving face zone for the
wall_ablation dynamic zone.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1057
Modeling Ablation

a. From the Zone Names drop-down list, select wall_ablation.

b. From the Type list, select User-Defined.

c. In the Meshing Options tab, enable Deform Adjacent Boundary Layer with Zone.

d. Click Create and close the Dynamic Mesh Zones dialog box.

27.4.8. Solution
1. Set the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1058 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Retain the selection of Implicit and Roe-FDS from the Formulation and Flux Type drop-down
lists, respectively.

b. For the Gradient spatial discretization, select Least Squares Cell Based.

c. Retain the default selections of Second Order Upwind for the remaining spatial discretizations.

d. From the Transient Formulation drop-down list, select Second Order Implicit.

e. Enable the Warped-Face Gradient Correction option.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1059
Modeling Ablation

2. In the Solution Controls task page, adjust the solution settings.

a. Retain the under-relaxation factors.

b. Click Limits... to open the Solution Limits dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1060 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Enter 25000 K for the Maximum Static Temperature.

d. Click OK to close the Solution Limits dialog box.

3. Enable the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Enter 1e-06 for energy and retain the default values for the Absolute Criteria of continuity,
x-velocity, y-velocity, z-velocity, k, and omega.

c. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

4. Create a force report definition to plot and write the drag force on the wall_ablation wall
boundary.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Force Report → Drag...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1061
Modeling Ablation

1. In the Drag Report Definition dialog box, enter drag_force_x for Name.

2. Select Drag Force in the Report Output Type list.

3. Select wall_ablation from the Wall Zones list.

4. In the Create group box, enable Print to Console.

5. Click OK to create the report.

Fluent automatically generates the drag_force_x-rplot report plot under Solution/Monit-

ors/Report Plots tree branch and the drag_force_x-rfile report file under Solution/Monit-
ors/Report Files tree branch.

6. Modify the attributes of the drag_force_x-rplot report plot axes.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1062 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → drag_force_x-rplot Edit...

a. In the Edit Report Plots dialog box, click the Axes... button to open the Axes - Report
Plots dialog box.

b. In the Axis list, select Y.

c. Select exponential from the Type drop-down list.

d. Set Precision to 0.

e. Click Apply to save the modified settings and close the Axes - Report Plots dialog box.

f. Click OK to close the Edit Report Plot dialog box.

5. Create a surface report definition for the averaged pressure at the wall_ablation boundary.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Area-Weighted Average...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1063
Modeling Ablation

a. In the Surface Report Definition dialog box, enter pressure_avg_abl_wall for Name.

b. Retain Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. From the Surfaces selection list, select wall_ablation.

d. In the Create group box, enable Print to Console.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

f. Modify the attributes of the pressure_avg_abl_wall-rplot report plot axes in a manner similar
to that for the drag_force_x-rplot plot.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1064 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

6. Create a surface report definition for the maximum value of the Z-coordinate at the wall_ablation
boundary to monitor the effects of the mesh movement.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Vertex Maximum...

a. In the Surface Report Definition dialog box, enter recede_point for Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Z-Coordinate from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. From the Surfaces selection list, select wall_ablation.

d. In the Create group box, enable Print to Console.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1065
Modeling Ablation

f. Modify the attributes of the recede_point-rplot report plot axes in a manner similar to that
for the drag_force_x-rplot plot.

7. Initialize the flow field.

Solution → Initialization → Options...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1066 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Solution Initialization task page, select the Standard Initialization from the Initializ-
ation Methods group.

b. Select inlet from the Compute from drop-down list.

c. Click Initialize to initialize the variables.

8. Save the case file (ablation.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

9. Run the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1067
Modeling Ablation

a. Enter 100 for Number of Time Steps.

b. Enter 1e-6 for Time Step Size.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1068 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Click Calculate.

Note:

It may take significant time and computer resources to complete the problem cal-
culation.

Figure 27.3: Scaled Residuals

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1069
Modeling Ablation

Figure 27.4: History of the Drag Force on the Ablation Wall

Figure 27.5: History of the Averaged Pressure on the Ablation Wall

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1070 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 27.6: History of the Maximum Z Coordinate of the Ablation Wall

10. Save the case and data files (ablation.cas.h5 and ablation.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

27.4.9. Postprocessing
1. Create an iso-surface through the domain geometry.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1071
Modeling Ablation

a. Enter mid_plane for the New Surface Name.

b. Select Mesh... and Y-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down lists.

c. Click Compute to update the minimum and maximum values.

d. Retain the value of 0 for Iso-Values.

e. Click Create and then close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

2. Display static pressure contours on the mid_plane iso-surface. (Figure 27.7: Contours of Static
Pressure (p. 1073)).

This will allow you to review the location of the droplets.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-pressure for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Retain the selection of Smooth in the Coloring group box.

d. Retain the default selection of Pressure... and Static Pressure from the Contours of drop-
down lists.

e. Select mid_plane from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1072 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 27.7: Contours of Static Pressure

Note that the static pressure near the tipping point of the wedge has the highest value, as expected.

3. Display contours of the Mach number on the mid_plane iso-surface. (Figure 27.8: Contours of
Mach Number (p. 1074)).

This will allow you to review the location of the droplets.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-mach for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Retain the selection of Smooth in the Coloring group box.

d. Select Velocity… and Mach number from the Contours of drop-down lists.

e. Select mid_plane from the Surfaces selection list.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1073
Modeling Ablation

Figure 27.8: Contours of Mach Number

In Figure 27.8: Contours of Mach Number (p. 1074), you can observe an oblique shock formed in the
domain. The Mach number (or velocity) is the lowest at the tipping point of the wedge where the
static pressure is the highest (see Figure 27.7: Contours of Static Pressure (p. 1073)).

4. Save the case and data files (ablation.cas.h5 and ablation.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

27.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you used the Ansys Fluent ablation model to predict the ablation effects in a 3D wedge
flow. The Vielle's model was used to model the surface recession rate. The procedures used here can
be applied to other applications that involve ablation modeling.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1074 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 28: Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure
Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
28.1. Introduction
28.2. Prerequisites
28.3. Problem Description
28.4. Setup and Solution
28.5. Summary

28.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines turbulent air flow through a cylindrical test chamber that includes a steel probe.
You will enable a structural model in order to simulate the deformation of the probe as a result of the
fluid flow. It is assumed that the deformation will be small enough that this problem can be modeled
as a one-way fluid-structure interaction (FSI) simulation; that is, the fluid flow will affect the deformation
of the structure, but not vice versa. Because Fluent performs all of the structural calculations (as opposed
to using a separate structural program), it is referred to as "intrinsic FSI".

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Run a journal file to complete an initial fluid flow simulation without structural calculations.

• Enable a structural model.

• Define structural material properties, a solid cell zone, and related boundary conditions.

• Turn off flow and turbulence equations.

• Complete a one-way FSI simulation.

• Postprocess the deformation of a solid cell zone.

28.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1075
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

28.3. Problem Description

The problem to be modeled in this tutorial is shown schematically in Figure 28.1: Problem Schemat-
ic (p. 1076).

Figure 28.1: Problem Schematic

Taking advantage of the symmetry of the problem, only half of the geometry is modeled. The cylindrical
test chamber is 20 cm long, with a diameter of 10 cm. Turbulent air enters the chamber at 100 m/s,
flows around and through the steel probe, and exits through a pressure outlet.

28.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
28.4.1. Preparation
28.4.2. Structural Model
28.4.3. Materials
28.4.4. Cell Zone Conditions
28.4.5. Boundary Conditions
28.4.6. Solution
28.4.7. Postprocessing

28.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the fsi_1way.zip file .

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1076 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Unzip fsi_1way.zip to your working directory.

The files probe.msh.h5 and fluid_flow.jou can be found in the folder. Note that the solid
cell zone in the mesh file is appropriate for a 3D intrinsic FSI simulation, which requires that only
hexahedral, tetrahedral, wedge, and/or pyramid cell types are used and that a conformal mesh exists
between the solid and fluid zones.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Retain the default Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

8. Make sure that the Working Directory (in the General Options tab) is set to the one created
when you unzipped fsi_1way.zip.

9. Read the journal file fluid_flow.jou.

File → Read → Journal...

This journal file will read the mesh file probe.msh.h5 and set up and solve a fluid flow simulation
that will serve as the starting point for the structural calculations. It is not necessary to separate these
calculations, but it is a advantage of one-way FSI simulation that structural calculations can be simply
added to an existing fluid flow case and data file. Separating the calculations allows you to easily
discern and resolve any convergence issues that are solely related to the fluid simulation.

As Fluent reads the journal file, it will report the text commands and solution progress in the console.
You can also view the journal file in a text editor to see the settings used in this simulation. The final
text command in the journal file will display contours of the velocity magnitude (Figure 28.2: Velocity
Magnitude on the Symmetry Plane (p. 1078)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1077
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Figure 28.2: Velocity Magnitude on the Symmetry Plane

10. Save the initial case and data files as probe_fluid.cas.h5 and probe_fluid.dat.h5.

File → Write → Case & Data...

Having completed the initial fluid flow simulation, the remaining steps are all concerned with setting up
the structural calculations and obtaining the deformation results for the solid cell zone as a result of the
flow pressure.

28.4.2. Structural Model

1. Verify that a solid cell zone is already defined, as this is necessary to be able to enable a structural
model. You can view the existing cell zones in the Outline View window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1078 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Enable the linear elasticity structural model.

Setup → Models → Structure Edit...

a. Select Linear Elasticity from the Model list.

This model enables structural calculations for the solid cell zone such that the internal load is linearly
proportional to the nodal displacement, and the structural stiffness matrix remains constant.

b. Click OK to close the Structural Model dialog box.

28.4.3. Materials
1. Add steel to the list of solid materials by copying it from the Ansys Fluent materials database.

Setup → Materials → Solid → aluminum Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1079
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. Click the Fluent Database... button in the Create/Edit Materials dialog box to open the
Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1080 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Select solid from the Material Type drop-down list.

c. Select steel in the Fluent Solid Materials selection list.

Scroll down the list to find steel. Selecting this item will display the default properties in the dialog
box.

d. Click Copy, then close the Fluent Database Materials dialog box.

The Create/Edit Materials dialog box will now display the copied properties for steel.

e. Keep the default values for the material.

f. Click Change/Create and close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

28.4.4. Cell Zone Conditions

1. Set up the cell zone conditions for the solid zone associated with the probe (solid).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1081
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Solid → solid Edit...

a. Select steel from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Click Apply and close the Solid dialog box.

28.4.5. Boundary Conditions

You must ensure that the boundary conditions are appropriately defined for every wall that is imme-
diately adjacent to the solid zone.

1. Set the boundary conditions for solid-top, which is located where the probe attaches to the top
of the test chamber. You will define it as being fixed (that is, undergoing no displacement).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → solid-top Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1082 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Click the Structure tab.

b. Select displacement boundary conditions (that is, Node X-Displacement from the X-Displace-
ment Boundary Condition drop-down list with 0 for the X-Displacement, and so on).

c. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for all of the wall zones of the solid cell zone that lie on the plane
of symmetry and represent the center of the probe. In this case there are two: they should be
free to move with no stress in the X- and Y-directions, but fixed in the Z-direction.

a. Set the boundary conditions for solid-symmetry.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → solid-symmetry Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1083
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

i. Click the Structure tab.

ii. Select Stress Free from the X- and Y-Displacement Boundary Condition drop-down lists.

iii. Select the Z-Displacement Boundary Condition drop-down list and the Z-Displacement
field (that is, Node Z-Displacement and set 0, respectively).

This ensures that the zone does not move out of the plane of symmetry.

iv. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

b. Copy the boundary conditions from solid-symmetry to solid-symmetry:011.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → solid-symmetry Copy...

i. Make sure that solid-symmetry is selected in the From Boundary Zone list.

ii. Select solid-symmetry:011 in the To Boundary Zones list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1084 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

iii. Click the Copy button.

A Question dialog box will open, asking if you want to copy the boundary conditions to all of
the selected zones. Click OK.

iv. Close the Copy Conditions dialog box.

3. Set the boundary conditions for all of the two-sided walls (that is, the wall / wall-shadow pairs)
between the solid and fluid cell zones. In this case there is one pair of walls, which represent the
outer surface of the probe.

a. Set the boundary conditions for fsisurface-solid-shadow.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → fsisurface-solid-shadow Edit...

Note that the Adjacent Cell Zone for this wall is flow, which is the fluid zone. The side of the wall
/ wall-shadow pair that is immediately adjacent to the fluid does not require any settings in the
Structure tab, and so this tab is not available.

i. Retain the default settings in the Momentum tab.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1085
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

ii. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

b. Set the boundary conditions for fsisurface-solid.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → fsisurface-solid Edit...

Note that the Adjacent Cell Zone for this wall is solid, which is the solid zone. The side of the
wall / wall-shadow pair that is immediately adjacent to the solid does require structural settings
(that is, displacement boundary conditions).

i. Click the Structure tab.

ii. Select Intrinsic FSI from the X-, Y-, and Z-Displacement Boundary Condition drop-down
lists.

This specifies that the displacement results from pressure loads exerted by the fluid flow on the
faces. This setting is only available for two-sided walls.

iii. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

28.4.6. Solution
1. Enable the inclusion of operating pressure into the fluid-structure interaction force by entering
the following text command:
> define/models/structure/expert/include-pop-in-fsi-force?
Include operating p into fsi force [no] yes

2. Disable the flow and turbulence equations, since in a one-way FSI simulation they will not change
from their converged state.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1086 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Solution → Controls Equations...

a. Deselect Flow and Turbulence from the Equations selection list.

b. Retain the selection of Structure.

c. Click OK to close the Equations dialog box.

3. Review the convergence criteria for the displacement residual equations.

Solution → Monitors → Residual Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1087
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. Retain the default settings for the x-, y-, and z-displacement equations.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

4. Save the case file (probe_fsi_1way.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

5. Start the calculation by requesting 2 iterations in the Solution ribbon tab (Run Calculation group
box)..

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Enter 2 for No. of Iterations.

Since only structural calculations will be performed, you do not need a large number of iterations
to reach convergence.

b. Click Calculate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1088 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

6. After the solution has been calculated, save the case and data files (probe_fsi_1way.cas.h5
and probe_fsi_1way.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

28.4.7. Postprocessing
1. Display the total displacement of the probe (Figure 28.3: Contours of Total Displacement (p. 1090)).

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-disp for Contour Name.

b. Select Structure... and Total Displacement from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Deselect all surfaces in the Surfaces selection list by clicking , and then select fsisurface-
solid.

d. Click Save/Display, close the Contours dialog box, and rotate and magnify the view as shown
in Figure 28.3: Contours of Total Displacement (p. 1090).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1089
Modeling One-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Figure 28.3: Contours of Total Displacement

2. Save the case file (probe_fsi_1way.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

28.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated how to set up and solve a one-way intrinsic FSI simulation. You learned how
to enable a structural model and define the solid material and boundary conditions. After completing
the simulation, you displayed the resulting displacement of the structure. For more information about
intrinsic FSI simulations, see the Fluent User's Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1090 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 29: Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure
Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
29.1. Introduction
29.2. Prerequisites
29.3. Problem Description
29.4. Setup and Solution
29.5. Summary

29.1. Introduction
This tutorial examines turbulent air flow through a duct that includes vertical flaps. You will enable a
structural model in order to simulate the deformation of the flaps as a result of the fluid flow. It is as-
sumed that the deformation will be large enough that this problem must be modeled as a two-way
fluid-structure interaction (FSI) simulation; that is, the fluid flow will affect the deformation of the
structures, and vice versa. Because Fluent performs all of the structural calculations (as opposed to using
a separate structural program), it is referred to as "intrinsic FSI".

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Run a journal file to complete an initial steady-state fluid flow simulation without structural calculations.

• Set up a transient calculation.

• Enable a structural model.

• Define structural material properties, a solid cell zone, and related boundary conditions.

• Set up dynamic mesh zones for the fluid-structure interaction.

• Create solution animation definitions for a scene, contour, and mesh.

• Complete a two-way FSI simulation.

• Postprocess the fluid flow and the deformation of a solid cell zone.

29.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1091
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

29.3. Problem Description

The problem to be modeled in this tutorial is shown schematically in Figure 29.1: Problem Schemat-
ic (p. 1092).

Figure 29.1: Problem Schematic

Flow through a simple duct with vertical flaps is simulated as a 2D planar model. The duct is 10 cm
long and 4 cm high, and the flaps are 1 cm tall and 0.3 cm thick, composed of silicone rubber. Turbulent
air enters the duct at 10 m/s, flows around the flaps, and exits through a pressure outlet. Symmetry allows
only half of the duct to be modeled.

29.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
29.4.1. Preparation
29.4.2. Solver and Analysis Type
29.4.3. Structural Model
29.4.4. Materials
29.4.5. Cell Zone Conditions
29.4.6. Boundary Conditions
29.4.7. Dynamic Mesh Zones
29.4.8. Solution Animations
29.4.9. Solution
29.4.10. Postprocessing

29.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the fsi_2way.zip file .

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1092 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Unzip fsi_2way.zip to your working directory.

The files flap.msh and steady_fluid_flow.jou can be found in the folder. Note that the cell
zone in the mesh file that will represent the solid zone is appropriate for a 2D intrinsic FSI simulation,
which requires that only quadrilateral and/or triangular cell types are used and that a conformal mesh
exists between the zones that will represent the solid and the fluid.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Retain the default Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

8. Make sure that the Working Directory (in the General Options tab) is set to the one created
when you unzipped fsi_2way.zip.

9. Read the journal file steady_fluid_flow.jou.

File → Read → Journal...

This journal file will read the mesh file flap.msh and set up and solve a steady fluid flow simulation
that will serve as the starting point for the transient FSI simulation. Solving the steady flow problem
first allows you to easily discern and resolve any convergence issues that are not related to the fluid-
structure interaction.

As Fluent reads the journal file, it will report the text commands and solution progress in the console.
You can also view the journal file in a text editor to see the settings used in this simulation. The final
text command in the journal file will display contours of the velocity magnitude (Figure 29.2: Steady-
State Velocity Magnitude (p. 1094)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1093
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Figure 29.2: Steady-State Velocity Magnitude

10. Mirror the display across the centerline (Figure 29.3: Duct with Mirroring (p. 1095)).

View → Display → Views...

a. Select symmetry.2 in the Mirror Planes selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1094 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Click Apply to refresh the display.

c. Close the Views dialog box and reposition the view as shown in Figure 29.3: Duct with Mirror-
ing (p. 1095).

Figure 29.3: Duct with Mirroring

11. Save the initial case and data files as flap_fluid.cas.h5 and flap_fluid.dat.h5.

File → Write → Case & Data...

Having completed an initial steady fluid flow simulation, the remaining steps are all concerned with setting
up the structural calculations and obtaining the transient results for the deformation of the solid flaps.

29.4.2. Solver and Analysis Type

1. Specify the solver settings.

Setup → General

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1095
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. Enable a time-dependent calculation by selecting Transient in the General task page (Solver
group).

b. Retain the default selection of Pressure-Based from the Type list.

29.4.3. Structural Model

1. Verify that a solid cell zone is already defined, as this is necessary to be able to enable a structural
model. You can view the existing cell zones in the Outline View window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1096 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Enable the linear elasticity structural model.

Setup → Models → Structure Edit...

a. Select Linear Elasticity from the Model list.

This model enables structural calculations for the solid cell zone such that the internal load is linearly
proportional to the nodal displacement, and the structural stiffness matrix remains constant.

b. Click OK to close the Structural Model dialog box.

29.4.4. Materials
1. Create a new solid material for the flap.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1097
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Setup → Materials → Solid New...

a. Enter silicone-rubber for the Name.

b. Clear the Chemical Formula field.

c. Enter 1600 for the Density.

d. Enter 1e+6 for the Youngs Modulus.

e. Enter 0.47 for the Poisson Ratio.

f. Click Change/Create, and click Yes in the Question dialog box to overwrite aluminum.

g. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

29.4.5. Cell Zone Conditions

1. Set up the cell zone conditions for the solid zone associated with the flap (solid.5).

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → Solid → solid.5 Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1098 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select silicone-rubber from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Click Apply and close the Solid dialog box.

29.4.6. Boundary Conditions

You must ensure that the boundary conditions are appropriately defined for every wall that is imme-
diately adjacent to the solid zone.

1. Set the boundary conditions for flap_attach, which is located where the flap attaches to the duct.
You will define it as being fixed (that is, undergoing no displacement).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → flap_attach Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1099
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. In the Structure tab, select displacement boundary conditions (that is, Node X-Displacement
from the X-Displacement Boundary Condition drop-down list with 0 for the X-Displacement,
and so on).

b. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions for all of the two-sided walls (that is, the wall / wall-shadow pairs)
between the solid and fluid cell zones. In this case there is one pair of walls, which represent the
outer surface of the flap.

a. Set the boundary conditions for flap_wall-shadow.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → flap_wall-shadow Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1100 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Note that the Adjacent Cell Zone for this wall is fluid.4, which is the fluid zone. The side of the
wall / wall-shadow pair that is immediately adjacent to the fluid does not require any settings in
the Structure tab, and so this tab is not available.

i. Retain the default settings in the Momentum tab.

ii. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

b. Set the boundary conditions for flap_wall.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall → flap_wall Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1101
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Note that the Adjacent Cell Zone for this wall is solid.5, which is the solid zone. The side of the
wall / wall-shadow pair that is immediately adjacent to the solid does require structural settings
(that is, displacement boundary conditions).

i. Click the Structure tab.

ii. Select Intrinsic FSI from the X- and Y-Displacement Boundary Condition drop-down
lists.

This specifies that the displacement results from pressure loads exerted by the fluid flow on the
faces. This setting is only available for two-sided walls.

iii. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

29.4.7. Dynamic Mesh Zones

For two-way FSI simulations, you must define dynamic mesh properties to allow the mesh to handle
the deformation of the solid zone.

Domain → Mesh Models → Dynamic Mesh...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1102 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1. Enable the Dynamic Mesh option.

2. Make sure that the Smoothing option is enabled in the Mesh Methods group box, and click the
Settings... button to open the Mesh Method Settings dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1103
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. Select Linearly Elastic Solid from the Method list.

b. Click OK to close the Mesh Method Settings dialog box.

3. Retain the default settings in the Options group box (that is, with the options disabled). These
options are not supported for FSI simulations, except for Implicit Update. The Implicit Update
option may be required for more complex cases in which the stability of the FSI simulation may
be an issue, but for a simple case such as this one, it is not required.

4. Click the Create/Edit... button to open the Dynamic Mesh Zones dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1104 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select po.3 (the pressure outlet) from the Zone Names drop-down list, select Stationary from
the Type list, and click Create. This ensures the boundary zone does not deform.

b. In a similar manner, create stationary dynamic zones for the other boundary zones that are
not deforming: symmetry.2, velocity_inlet.1, and wall.

c. Select flap_wall-shadow (the side of the wall / wall-shadow pair that is immediately adjacent
to the fluid) from the Zone Names drop-down list, select Intrinsic FSI from the Type list, and
click Create. This specifies that the wall / wall-shadow pair deforms according to the deform-
ation of the adjacent solid zone.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1105
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

d. Close the Dynamic Mesh Zones dialog box.

29.4.8. Solution Animations

By setting up animation definitions, you will be able to capture results for your transient simulation
as it calculates the solution, so that you can later display how the fluid flow and flap shape change
over time.

1. Create a scene that can be used in an animation definition for the fluid flow.

Scenes are used when you want to display multiple graphics objects within a single window. In this
case, the animation will include not only contours of the fluid velocity, but also boundary zones.

Results → Scene New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1106 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter vel_bound for the Name.

b. Click New Object and select Mesh... from the drop-down list to open the associated dialog
box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1107
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

i. Enter boundaries for the Mesh Name.

ii. Select Edges under the Options list.

iii. Deselect all surfaces in the Surfaces selection list by clicking , and then select flap_wall-
shadow, po.3, velocity_inlet.1, and wall.

iv. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

c. Click New Object and select Contours... from the drop-down list to open the associated dialog
box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1108 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enter vel_mag for the Contour Name.

ii. Select Velocity... and Velocity Magnitude from the Contours of drop-down lists.

iii. Disable the Auto Range option and enter 20 and 29 for the Min and Max, respectively.

Disabling the Auto Range ensures that all of the results in the animation have the same scale.
The velocity of the fluid will not change very much in this particular solution, and so using a
narrow range of values will make it easier to identify the small contour changes.

iv. Deselect all surfaces in the Surfaces selection list by clicking .

For 2D cases, if no surface is selected, contouring is done on the entire domain.

v. Click the Save/Display button and close the Contours dialog box.

d. Click the Save & Display button, and then click Cancel to close the Scene dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1109
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

2. Create an animation definition for the fluid velocity and boundaries scene.

Solution → Calculation Activities → Solution Animations New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1110 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter vel_animation for the Name.

b. Enter 5 for Record after every and select iteration from the drop-down list.

c. Select In Memory from the Storage Type drop-down.

The In Memory option is acceptable for a small 2D case such as this. For larger 2D or 3D cases,
saving animation files with either the PPM Image or HSF File option is preferable, to avoid using
too much of your machine’s memory.

d. Select vel_bound from the Animation Object list.

e. Click OK to create the animation definition.

3. Create an animation definition for the flap displacement.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1111
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Solution → Calculation Activities → Solution Animations New...

a. Enter disp_animation for the Name.

b. Enter 5 for Record after every and select iteration from the drop-down list.

c. Select In Memory from the Storage Type drop-down.

d. Click New Object and select Contours... from the drop-down list to open the associated dialog
box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1112 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enter disp for the Contour Name.

ii. Select Structure... and Total Displacement from the Contours of drop-down lists.

iii. Disable Auto Range and enter 0 and 5.1e-05 for Min and Max, respectively.

iv. Select solid.5 from the Surfaces list.

v. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

e. Select disp from the Animation Object list.

f. Click OK to create the animation definition.

4. Create an animation definition for the mesh.

Solution → Calculation Activities → Solution Animations New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1113
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. Enter mesh_animation for the Name.

b. Enter 5 for Record after every and select iteration from the drop-down list.

c. Select In Memory from the Storage Type drop-down.

d. Click New Object and select Mesh... from the drop-down list to open the associated dialog
box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1114 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Enter mesh for the Mesh Name.

ii. Disable the Faces option.

iii. Deselect all surfaces in the Surfaces selection list by clicking , and then select fluid.4
and solid.5.

iv. Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

e. Select mesh from the Animation Object list.

f. Click OK to create the animation definition.

5. Add a structural point surface to a location of interest within the solid zone.

Results → Surfaces New → Structural Point...

The Structural Point Surface dialog appears, as does a point triad in the graphics window. Zoom
into the mesh displayed in the graphics window to focus on the tip of the flap.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1115
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. Enter structural-point-flap for the Name.

b. Enter 0.0505 for the x coordinate, and enter 0.0095 for the y coordinate.

Alternatively,you can use the mouse to drag the point's position in the graphics window to an ap-
proximate location.

c. Click Create to create the structural point surface at this location.

d. Close the Structural Point Surface dialog box.

6. Create a report definition to monitor displacement of the flap.

Solution → Report Definitions New → Surface Report → Vertex Average...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1116 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter report-def-surf for the Name.

b. Select Structure... and Total Displacement from the Contours of drop-down lists.

c. Select structural-point-flap from the Surfaces list.

d. Enable the Report File, Report Plot, and Print to Console options.

e. Click OK.

This report definition will monitor and plot the vertex average of the displacement of the nodes that
surround the structural point surface.

29.4.9. Solution
1. Disable the checking of convergence for the displacement residual equations.

Solution → Monitors → Residual Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1117
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

a. Disable the Check Convergence options for the x- and y-displacement equations.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

2. Save the case file (flap_fsi_2way.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

3. Start the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1118 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 50 for Number of Time Steps.

b. Enter 0.0005 for Time Step Size.

c. Enter 40 for Max Iterations/Time Step.

d. Click Calculate.

4. After the solution has been calculated, save the case and data files (flap_fsi_2way.cas.h5
and flap_fsi_2way.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1119
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

29.4.10. Postprocessing
1. View the displacement of the flap's point surface (Figure 29.4: The Vertex Average Displacement
of the Flap's Point Surface (p. 1120)).

Figure 29.4: The Vertex Average Displacement of the Flap's Point Surface

The monitored plot of the vertex average of the displacement at the point surface clearly shows dis-
placement over time.

2. View the animations of the results.

Results → Animations → Playback Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1120 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Select Auto Repeat from the Playback Mode drop-down list.

b. Disable the Use Stored View option.

c. Select vel_animation from the Animation Sequences list.

d. Decrease the Replay Speed by clicking the button four times.

e. Click the play button (the second from the right in the group of buttons in the Playback group
box).

f. Magnify the view as shown in Figure 29.5: Contours of Velocity Magnitude (p. 1122).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1121
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

Figure 29.5: Contours of Velocity Magnitude

g. Click the button to stop the animation.

h. Select disp_animation from the Animation Sequences list.

i. Click the play button.

j. Magnify the view as shown in Figure 29.6: Contours of Total Displacement (p. 1122).

Figure 29.6: Contours of Total Displacement

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1122 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

k. Click the button to stop the animation.

l. Select mesh_animation from the Animation Sequences list.

m. Click the play button.

n. Magnify the view as shown in Figure 29.7: The Mesh of the Displaced Flap (p. 1123).

Figure 29.7: The Mesh of the Displaced Flap

o. Click the button to stop the animation.

29.5. Summary
This tutorial demonstrated how to set up and solve a two-way intrinsic FSI simulation. You learned how
to enable a structural model and define the solid material, boundary conditions, and dynamic mesh
zones. After completing the simulation, you viewed animations of the resulting fluid velocity contours

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1123
Modeling Two-Way Fluid-Structure Interaction (FSI) Within Fluent

and displacement of the structure. For more information about intrinsic FSI simulations, see the Fluent
User's Guide.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1124 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 30: Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar
Flow Past a Cylinder
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
30.1. Introduction
30.2. Problem Description
30.3. Setup and Solution
30.4. Summary

30.1. Introduction
Ansys Fluent’s adjoint solver is used to compute the sensitivity of quantities of interest in a fluid system
with respect to the user-specified inputs, for an existing flow solution. Importantly, this also includes
the sensitivity of the computed results with respect to the geometric shape of the system. The adjoint
design change tool is a powerful component that can use the sensitivity information from one or more
adjoint solutions to guide systematic changes that result in predictable improvements in the system
performance, which can be made subject to various types of design constraints if desired.

This tutorial provides an example of how to generate sensitivity data for flow past a circular cylinder,
how to postprocess the results, and how to use the data to perform a multi-objective design change
that reduces drag and increases lift by morphing the mesh. The tutorial makes use of a previously
computed flow solution, and demonstrates how to do the following:

• Select the observable of interest.

• Access the solver controls for advancing the adjoint solution.

• Set convergence criteria and plot and print residuals.

• Advance the adjoint solver.

• Postprocess the results to extract sensitivity data.

• Use the design change tool to modify the cylinder shape to simultaneously reduce the drag and in-
crease the lift.

30.2. Problem Description

The configuration is a circular cylinder, bounded above and below by symmetry planes. The flow is
laminar and incompressible with a Reynolds number of 40, based on the cylinder diameter. At this
Reynolds number, the flow is steady.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1125
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

30.3. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup steps for this tutorial:
30.3.1. Step 1: Preparation
30.3.2. Step 2: Define Observables
30.3.3. Step 3: Compute the Drag Sensitivity
30.3.4. Step 4: Postprocess and Export Drag Sensitivity
30.3.5. Step 5: Compute Lift Sensitivity
30.3.6. Step 6: Modify the Shape

30.3.1. Step 1: Preparation

1. Download the adjoint_cylinder.zip file .

2. Unzip adjoint_cylinder.zip to your working directory.

The files cylinder_tutorial.cas and cylinder_tutorial.dat can be found in the

folder .

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 2D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Enable Display Mesh After Reading in the General Options tab.

8. Load the converged case and data file for the cylinder geometry.

File → Read → Case & Data...

When prompted, browse to the location of the case and data files and select cylinder_tu-
torial.cas to load. The corresponding data file will automatically be loaded as well.

Note:

After you read in the mesh, it will be displayed in the embedded graphics windows,
since you enabled the appropriate display option in Fluent Launcher.

The data file contains a previously computed flow solution that will serve as the starting point
for the adjoint calculation. Part of the mesh and the velocity field are shown below:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1126 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 30.1: Mesh Close to the Cylinder Surface

Figure 30.2: Contours of Velocity Magnitude

30.3.2. Step 2: Define Observables

Begin setting up the adjoint solver by opening the Adjoint Observables dialog box. Here you will
create lift and drag observables. Clicking on any button in the Gradient-Based group of the Design
ribbon tab will activate the adjoint solver.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1127
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

Design → Gradient-Based → Observable...

Figure 30.3: Adjoint Observables Dialog Box

1. Click the Manage... button to open the Manage Adjoint Observables dialog box.

Figure 30.4: Manage Adjoint Observables Dialog Box

2. Click the Create button and select force from the Observable types drop-down list.

3. The Manage Adjoint Observables will update to show the newly created force-01 observable
which must now be configured:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1128 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Ensure that force-01 is selected from the Observables list.

b. Enter force-drag for Name.

c. Select wall under Wall Zones. This is the cylinder wall on which you want the force to
be evaluated.

d. Ensure that the X-Component direction is set to 1 and the Y-Component direction is set
to 0.

e. Click OK to commit the settings for force-drag. Upon clicking OK, force-01 will be renamed
to force-drag.

4. Repeat the process in the Manage Adjoint Observables dialog box to create a lift observable
with the following settings:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1129
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

Name force-lift
Wall Zones wall
X-Component 0
Y-Component 1

When you have configured the force-lift observable, click OK to commit the settings for force-
lift and close the Manage Adjoint Observables dialog box.

30.3.3. Step 3: Compute the Drag Sensitivity

1. In the Adjoint Observables dialog box (Figure 30.5: Adjoint Observables Dialog Box (p. 1130)) specify
that you will solve for the drag sensitivity.

Figure 30.5: Adjoint Observables Dialog Box

a. Select force-drag in the list of Observable Names.

The selection in the Adjoint Observables dialog box determines the observable for which
sensitivities will be computed. You will first compute the drag sensitivities.

b. Click Evaluate to print the value of the drag force on the wall in the console.
Observable name: force-drag
Observable Value [N] = 1271.7444

This value is in SI units, with N denoting Newtons.

c. Close the Adjoint Observables dialog box.

2. Adjust the solution controls.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1130 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

The default solution control settings are chosen to provide robust solution advancement for a
wide variety of problems, including those having complex geometry, high local flow rates, and
turbulence. Given sufficient iterations, a converged result can often be obtained without modifying
the controls.

For this simple laminar flow case, more aggressive settings will yield faster convergence.

Open the Adjoint Solution Controls dialog box (Figure 30.6: Adjoint Solution Controls Dialog
Box (p. 1131)).

Design → Gradient-Based → Solver Controls...

Figure 30.6: Adjoint Solution Controls Dialog Box

a. Disable the Auto-Adjust Controls option.

This prevents Fluent from automatically choosing and adjusting the solution controls for you.

b. Enable Show Advancement Controls.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1131
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

c. Select Stabilization Settings and enable Auto Detection?.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1132 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 30.7: Adjoint Residual Monitors Dialog Box

Click Apply and then OK to close the dialog box.

d. Enter 100 for Courant Number.

Higher Courant Number values correspond to more aggressive settings / faster convergence,
which is appropriate for a simple case such as this.

e. Enter 0.05 for Artificial Compressibility.

f. Click Apply and then OK to close the dialog box.

3. Configure the adjoint solution monitors by opening the Adjoint Residual Monitors dialog box
(Figure 30.8: Adjoint Residual Monitors Dialog Box (p. 1134)).

Design → Gradient-Based → Monitors...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1133
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

Figure 30.8: Adjoint Residual Monitors Dialog Box

In the Adjoint Residual Monitors dialog box, you set the adjoint equations that will be checked
for convergence, as well as set the corresponding convergence criteria.

a. Make sure that the Print to Console and Plot options are enabled.

b. Enter values of 1e-05 for Adjoint continuity and Adjoint velocity, and keep the default
value of 0.001 for Adjoint local flow rate. These settings are adequate for most cases. Make
sure that the Check Convergence options are enabled.

c. Click Apply and then OK to close the dialog box.

4. Run the adjoint solver using the Run Adjoint Calculation dialog box (Figure 30.9: Run Adjoint
Calculation Dialog Box (p. 1134)).

Design → Gradient-Based → Calculate...

Figure 30.9: Run Adjoint Calculation Dialog Box

a. Click the Initialize button. This initializes the adjoint solution everywhere in the problem domain
to zero.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1134 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Set the Number of Iterations to 200. The adjoint solver is fully configured to start running
for this problem.

c. Click the Calculate button to advance the solver to convergence.

Figure 30.10: Residuals for the Converged Solution

d. When the calculation is complete, Close the Run Adjoint Calculation dialog box.

30.3.4. Step 4: Postprocess and Export Drag Sensitivity

In this section, postprocessing options for the adjoint solution are presented.

30.3.4.1. Drag Force Sensitivity Orientation for Plotting

1. Open the Adjoint Postprocess Options dialog box.

Design → Gradient-Based → Postprocess Options...

Figure 30.11: Adjoint Postprocess Options Dialog Box

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1135
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

2. Select Minimize from the Sensitivity Orientation for Plotting group box, because you are
trying to reduce the drag force. This indicates that postprocessed results for the drag sensitivity
will be displayed such that a reduction in drag is achieved by a design change in the positive
sensitivity direction.

3. Click Apply to apply the sensitivity orientation, then click Close to close the Adjoint Postprocess
Options dialog box.

30.3.4.2. Boundary Condition Sensitivity

1. Open the Adjoint Reporting dialog box (Figure 30.12: Adjoint Reporting Dialog Box (p. 1136)).

Design → Gradient-Based → Reporting...

Figure 30.12: Adjoint Reporting Dialog Box

2. Select inlet under Boundary Choice and click the Report button to display a report in the
console of the available scalar sensitivity data on the inlet:
Updating shape sensitivity data.
Done.

Boundary condition sensitivity report: inlet

Observable: force-drag
Velocity Magnitude [m/s]: 40 Sensitivity ([N]/[m/s]): 54.55674
Decrease Velocity Magnitude to decrease force-drag

3. Close the Adjoint Reporting dialog box.

30.3.4.3. Momentum Source Sensitivity

1. Open the Contours dialog box.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1136 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

2. Enter x-sensitivity-bf for the Contour Name.

3. Disable Filled in the Options group.

4. Ensure Banded is selected under the Coloring group.

5. Select Sensitivities... and Sensitivity to Body Force X-Component (Cell Values) from the
Contours of drop-down lists.

Figure 30.13: Contours Dialog Box When Plotting Adjoint Fields

6. Click Compute and then Save/Display to view the contours (Figure 30.14: Adjoint Sensitivity
to Body Force X-Component Contours (p. 1138)) and then Close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1137
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

Figure 30.14: Adjoint Sensitivity to Body Force X-Component Contours

Figure 30.14: Adjoint Sensitivity to Body Force X-Component Contours (p. 1138) shows how sens-
itive the drag on the cylinder is to the application of a body force in the -direction in the flow.
If a body force is applied directly upstream of the cylinder, for example, the disturbed flow is
incident on the cylinder and modifies the force that it experiences.

30.3.4.4. Shape Sensitivity

1. Open the Vectors dialog box (Figure 30.15: Vectors Dialog Box (p. 1139))

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1138 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 30.15: Vectors Dialog Box

2. Enter sensitivity-shape for the Vector Name.

3. Select Sensitivity to Shape from the Vectors of drop-down list.

4. Select Sensitivities... and Sensitivity to Mass Sources (Cell Values) from the Color by
drop-down lists.

5. Select arrow from the Style selection list.

6. Enter 1e-8 for Scale.

7. Select wall from the Surfaces selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1139
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

8. Click the Save/Display button to view the vectors (Figure 30.16: Shape Sensitivity Colored
by Sensitivity to Mass Sources (Cell Values) (p. 1140)) and then Close the Vectors dialog box.

Tip:

In order to display the vector plot in the graphics window, you may need to

click the Fit to Window button .

Figure 30.16: Shape Sensitivity Colored by Sensitivity to Mass Sources (Cell Values)

This plot shows how sensitive the drag on the cylinder is to changes in the surface shape. The drag
is affected more significantly if the cylinder is deformed on the upstream rather than the downstream
side. Maximum effect is achieved by narrowing the cylinder in the cross-stream direction.

30.3.4.5. Exporting Drag Sensitivity Data

Before computing the sensitivity for the force-lift observable, you need to define the region that
will be subject to geometry morphing, and export the drag sensitivity data so it can be used later
in the multi-objective optimization.

1. Open the Design Tool dialog box.

Design → Gradient-Based → Design Tool...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1140 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 30.17: The Design Tool Dialog Box

2. In the Region tab, define the region that will be modified for the design change.

a. Ensure that Cartesian is selected from the Region Geometry drop-down list.

b. Click Get Bounds....

c. Select wall in the Bounding Region Definition dialog box and click OK.

This will initialize the morphing region to the bounding box around the cylinder wall.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1141
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

d. Click Update Region to update the view of the bounding box illustration in the graphics
window.

You can use the Mesh Display dialog box to also display the mesh, in order to review it prior
to morphing.

Results → Graphics → Mesh → new...

Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

e. Click Larger Region several times until the X and Y Limits are ±1.907349 m (Fig-
ure 30.18: Morphing Region Around Cylinder (p. 1142)).

Figure 30.18: Morphing Region Around Cylinder

f. In the Objectives tab, click Manage Data....

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1142 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 30.19: The Design Tool Dialog Box Objectives Tab

g. In the Manage Sensitivity Data dialog box, click Export... and save the sensitivity data
as force-drag.sens.

h. Close the Design Tool dialog box.

30.3.5. Step 5: Compute Lift Sensitivity

1. Select force-lift as the observable to be computed.

Design → Gradient-Based → Observable...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1143
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

a. Select force-lift from the list of Observable Names, then click Close to close the Adjoint
Observables dialog box.

2. Initialize and Calculate the adjoint solution using the Run Adjoint Calculation dialog box to
obtain the sensitivities for the force-lift observable.

Design → Gradient-Based → Calculate...

Click Yes in the Question dialog box that appears to overwrite the existing adjoint solution data.

When the calculation is complete, you can optionally specify Maximum for the Sensitivity Orientation
for Plotting similarly to Drag Force Sensitivity Orientation for Plotting (p. 1135). However for this example
we will not be plotting the sensitivities for the force-lift observable and it is not necessary to define
the sensitivity orientation for plotting. Additionally, you can export the sensitivity data for the lift
observable as you did for the drag, but it is not strictly necessary if you plan to perform the multi-
objective optimization in the current Fluent session.

30.3.6. Step 6: Modify the Shape

In this section, you will load the previously saved force-drag sensitivity data and perform the multi-
objective design change.

1. Open the Design Tool dialog box if it is not already open.

Design → Gradient-Based → Design Tool...

force-lift is now displayed in the Design Change tab because it is the currently selected observ-
able. The Design Change tab functions as a dashboard for the design modification, where you
can select which boundaries are subject to modification, enable or disable conditions that you
have defined, specify relative weighting if you have multiple freeform objectives, and view pre-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1144 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

dicted results. You will return to it to perform the design change after you have configured the
objectives and the morphing region.

2. Retain the default selection of Polynomials from the Morphing Method list.

This morphing method is appropriate when you prefer mesh quality over adherence to the design
conditions. Alternatively if there are many design conditions present, Direct Interpolation is the
recommended method. Finally, when mesh quality is preferred and there are some design conditions,
Radial Basis Function is the recommended method.

3. Load the previously saved force-drag sensitivity data.

a. Open the Objectives tab.

The force-lift observable is already listed because Include current data is enabled.

b. Click Manage Data... to open the Manage Sensitivity Data dialog box.

c. Click Import... and select the force-drag.sens file you created earlier. Click OK.

d. Close the Manage Sensitivity Data dialog box.

4. Define the objective for each observable.

For this example, you will seek a design change that increases the lift and results in a 10% reduc-
tion in drag.

a. In the Objectives tab, select the force-lift observable. The current value of the lift is displayed
along with options to specify the objective for the lift.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1145
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

b. Select Increase Value from the Objective list.

This indicates that you want to increase the lift, but are not prescribing a specific target change.

c. Enter 100 for Target/Reference Change.

This setting is used to normalize the scale of the change in value of the observable, which can
be important in cases where multiple observables are considered that may be of different scales.

d. Select force_drag.sens in the list of observables.

e. Select Target Change In Value from the Objective list.

This indicates that you are prescribing a specific change in the value of the observable, rather
than a freeform increase or decrease.

f. Enter -10 for Target/Reference Change and enable the As Percentage option.

10% is a generally a reasonable maximum target change for a design change. Using a target
change that is too large may result in very large deformations and/or overshooting the local
optimum.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1146 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

5. Configure the morphing region.

You already specified the dimensions of the region earlier when exporting the force-drag sens-
itivity. Now you will also configure the control-point density.

a. Click the Region Conditions tab in the Design Tool dialog box.

b. Enter 30 for Points in the In X Direction and In Y Direction group boxes.

c. You can use the Mesh Display dialog box to display the mesh, in order to see the increase in
control points.

Results → Graphics → Mesh → New...

Many other settings are available in the Region Conditions tab, including constraints on control-
point motion, symmetry conditions, and continuity conditions. For additional information, see
the section on defining region conditions in the Fluent User's Guide manual.

6. Compute the design change and modify the mesh.

a. Return to the Design Change tab.

b. Select wall in the Modifiable Zones selection list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1147
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

Only zones that are selected in the Modifiable Zones list (or that have prescribed motions applied)
will be modified as part of the design change.

c. If multiple freeform objectives were defined (that is, multiple objectives with Increase Value
or Decrease Value selected in the Objectives tab), you would need to specify the Weight
for each. In this case only one objective (force-lift) is freeform, so no input is required for
Weight.

d. Retain the default settings of Control-Point Spacing for Freeform Scaling Scheme, and
0.1 for Freeform Scale Factor.

These settings allow you to adjust the magnitude of the attempted design change (Freeform
Scale Factor) and the basis for the scaling (Freeform Scaling Scheme).

e. Click Calculate Design Change.

The Results list is updated to reflect the Expected change for each observable.

Note that the drag is predicted to decrease by 10% as you requested, and the lift is predicted
to increase.

f. Click the Preview... button in the Mesh group box to preview the design change in the
graphics window.

g. Select wall on the Preview Morphing dialog box and click Display.

Click OK in the Warning dialog box that appears.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1148 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 30.20: Morphing Preview of Cylinder

h. Click the Modify button in the Mesh group box to apply the calculated mesh deformation
that will reposition the boundary and interior nodes of the mesh. Information regarding the
mesh modification is printed in the console:
Updating mesh (steady, mesh iteration = 00001, pseudo time step 1.0000e+00)...
Dynamic Mesh Statistics:
Minimum Volume = 3.24815e-04
Maximum Volume = 6.36270e-01
Maximum Cell Skew = 3.75949e-01 (cell zone 11)
Minimum Orthogonal Quality = 6.24051e-01 (cell zone 11)

i. Display the new mesh geometry.

Results → Graphics → Mesh → mesh-1 Edit...

Click Save/Display and close the Mesh Display dialog box.

The effect on the mesh is shown in Figure 30.21: Mesh After Deformation (p. 1150):

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1149
Using the Adjoint Solver – 2D Laminar Flow Past a Cylinder

Figure 30.21: Mesh After Deformation

j. Re-converge the conventional flow calculation for this new geometry in the Run Calculation
task page.

Solution → Run Calculation → Calculate

The currently loaded case file already has report definitions defined for lift and drag, or you
can Evaluate the new values in the Adjoint Observables dialog box.

Design → Gradient-Based → Observable...

The new values for drag and lift are reported to be:
Observable name: force-drag
Observable Value [N]: 1151.1871

Observable name: force-lift

Observable Value [N]: 122.87626

Note that the drag has changed by -120.55 N or -9.5% compared to the drag on the unde-
formed cylinder. This value compares very well with the change of -127.2 N (-10%) that was
predicted from the adjoint solver. The lift has increased by 294.4 N, which again compares
very well with the predicted change of 291.91 N.

7. Save the case and data files (cylinder-adjoint.cas.h5 and cylinder-ad-

joint.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1150 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

30.4. Summary
This tutorial has demonstrated how to use the adjoint solver to compute the sensitivity of the drag and
lift on a circular cylinder to various inputs for a previously computed flow field. The process of setting
up and running the adjoint solver was illustrated. The steps to perform various forms of postprocessing
were also described. The design change tool was used to make a multi-objective change to the design
that reduced the drag and increased the lift in a predictable manner.

This example considered multiple objectives at a single flow condition. Another powerful application
of the design tool is to perform multi-objective design changes using sensitivities computed for multiple
flow conditions. This allows you to identify design changes that improve performance across a range
of anticipated operating conditions, potentially of differing importance. The design tool also offers a
rich set of additional capabilities for including prescribed deformations, bounding planes / surfaces,
and fixed-wall constraints in your multi-objective design change.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1151
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1152 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 31: Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using
the MSMD Battery Model
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
31.1. Introduction
31.2. Prerequisites
31.3. Problem Description
31.4. Setup and Solution
31.5. Summary
31.6. Appendix
31.7. References

31.1. Introduction
This tutorial is used to show how to set up a battery cell simulation in Ansys Fluent.

This tutorial demonstrates how to do the following:

• Set up a battery cell simulation using the NTGK battery submodel

• Perform the calculations for different battery discharge rates and compare the results using the
postprocessing capabilities of Ansys Fluent

• Use the reduced order method (ROM) in a battery simulation

• Simulate a battery pulse discharge

• Introduce external and internal short-circuits in a battery simulation

31.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

31.3. Problem Description

The discharge behavior of a lithium-ion battery described in Kim’s paper [2] will be modeled in this
tutorial. You will use the NTGK model. The battery is a 14.6 Ah LiMn2O4 cathode/graphite anode battery.
The geometry of the battery cell is shown in Figure 31.1: Schematic of the Battery Cell Problem (p. 1154).
You will study the battery’s behavior at different discharge rates.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1153
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

Figure 31.1: Schematic of the Battery Cell Problem

For external and internal short-circuit treatment, you will consider an extreme case where external and
internal short-circuits occur at the same time. You will simulate post-short-circuit battery processes. You
can assume that the internal short is caused by a nail penetration occurring near the center of the
battery.

31.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
31.4.1. Preparation
31.4.2. Reading and Scaling the Mesh
31.4.3. NTGK Battery Model Setup
31.4.4. Postprocessing
31.4.5. Simulating the Battery Pulse Discharge Using the ECM Model
31.4.6. Using the Reduced Order Method (ROM)
31.4.7. External and Internal Short-Circuit Treatment

31.4.1. Preparation
1. Download the battery_cell.zip file .

2. Unzip battery_cell.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file unit_battery.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1154 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

31.4.2. Reading and Scaling the Mesh

1. Read the mesh file unit_battery.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

When prompted, browse to the location of the unit_battery.msh.h5 and select the file.

Once you read in the mesh, it is displayed in the embedded graphics windows.

The geometry is already in the correct scale. You don’t need to scale it.

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

31.4.3. NTGK Battery Model Setup

The following sections describe the setup steps for this tutorial:
31.4.3.1. Specifying Solver and Models
31.4.3.2. Defining New Materials for Cell and Tabs
31.4.3.3. Defining Cell Zone Conditions
31.4.3.4. Defining Boundary Conditions
31.4.3.5. Specifying Solution Settings
31.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution

31.4.3.1. Specifying Solver and Models

1. In the Solver group of the General task page, enable a time-dependent calculation.

Setup → General → Transient

2. Enable the battery model.

Setup → Models → Battery Model Edit

a. In the Battery Model dialog box, select Enable Battery Model.

The dialog box expands to display the battery model’s settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1155
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

Figure 31.2: Model Options

Once you enable the battery model, the Energy equation will be automatically enabled in
order to solve for the temperature field.

b. Under the Model Options tab (Figure 31.2: Model Options (p. 1156)), configure the following
battery operation conditions:

i. Ensure that MSMD is selected for Solution Method.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1156 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

ii. Under E-Chemistry Models, enable the NTGK/DCIR Model.

iii. Under Electrical Parameters, retain the default value of 14.6 Ah for Nominal Cell
Capacity.

iv. Select Enable Joule heat in Passive Zones in the Energy Source Options group box.

v. Retain the default selection of Specified C-Rate and the value of 1 for C-Rate.

vi. Retain the default value of 3 V for Min. Stop Voltage.

c. Under the Conductive Zones tab (Figure 31.3: Conductive Zones (p. 1157)), configure the fol-
lowing settings:

Group Control or List Value or Selection

Active Components Zone (s) e-zone
Passive Components Zone (s) tab_nzone
tab_pzone

For this single cell case, there are no busbar zones. Electro-chemical reactions occur only in
the active zone. Battery tabs are usually modeled as passive zones, in which the potential
field is also solved.

Figure 31.3: Conductive Zones

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1157
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

d. Under the Electric Contacts tab (Figure 31.4: Electric Contacts (p. 1158)), configure the contact
surface and external connector settings as follows:

Group Control or List Value or Selection

External Connectors Negative Tab tab_n
Positive Tab tab_p

The corresponding current or voltage boundary condition will be applied to those boundaries
automatically.

Under the Electric Contacts tab, you can also define extra contact resistance for each zone.

Figure 31.4: Electric Contacts

e. Click the Print Battery System Connection Information button.

Ansys Fluent prints the battery connection information in the console window:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1158 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Battery Network Zone Information:

-------------------------------------
Battery 1s1p
Active zone: e_zone

Passive zone at level 1:

tab_nzone
Passive zone at level 2:
tab_pzone
-------------------------------------
Number of battery series stages =1; Number of batteries in parallel per series stage=1
****************END OF BATTERY CONNECTION INFO**************

f. Verify that the connection information is correct.

g. Under the Model Parameters tab, retain the default settings for Y and U coefficients.

Note:

• If in your case, Y and U functions are not in the same function form as in Kim’s
paper, you need to modify the cae_user.c source code file.

• For a given battery, you can perform a set of constant current discharging tests,
and then use the battery's parameter estimation tool to obtain the Y and U
functions.

h. Click OK to close the Battery Model dialog box.

In the background, Fluent automatically hooks all the necessary UDFs for the problem.

i. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

31.4.3.2. Defining New Materials for Cell and Tabs

Define the new e_material material for the battery’s cell, p_material for the positive tab, and
n_material for the negative tab.

In the battery model, two transport equations are solved for the positive and negative potentials,
respectively. To specify the electric conductivity of the active material you need to define the two
electric conductivities, one for each potential field..

1. Create the electric material.

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1159
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box, select solid from the Material Type drop-down
list.

b. Enter e_material for Name and e for Chemical Formula.

c. Under Properties, set Density to 2092 [kg/m3].

d. Set Cp (Specific Heat) to 678 [J/kg-K].

e. Set Thermal Conductivity to 18.2 [W/m-K].

f. Select defined-per-uds from the Electrical Conductivity drop-down list.

g. In the UDS Diffusion Coefficients dialog box, specify the user-defined scalars.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1160 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select uds-0 in the User-Defined Scalar Diffusion list.

ii. Retain constant from the Coefficient drop-down list.

iii. Set Coefficient to 1.19e6.

iv. In a similar way, set uds-1 to 9.83e5 and click OK to close the UDS Diffusion
Coefficients dialog box.

v. In the Question dialog box, click No to retain aluminum and add the new material
(e_material) to the materials list.

Note:

Refer to Appendix (p. 1192) for information on how to calculate the battery
cell property values.

2. Create a new material for the positive tab by modifying copper from the solid material database.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1161
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box, click Fluent Database....

b. In the Fluent Database Materials dialog box, make sure that solid is selected for Material
Type.

c. Select copper from Fluent Solids Materials and click Copy and then Close.

The Create/Edit Materials dialog box now displays the copied properties for copper.

d. Enter p_material for Name and pmat for Chemical Formula.

e. Ensure constant is selected for Electrical Conductivity and enter 1.0e7.

f. Click Change/Create.

g. In the Question dialog box, click Yes to overwrite copper.

The new material (p_material) appears under Materials.

3. Create a new material for the negative tab with the same properties as the material for the
positive tab.

Note:

You do not need to create two different materials for the positive and negative tabs
if the positive and negative tabs are made of the same material. In this tutorial, the
two different tab materials with the same physical properties have been created for
demonstration purposes only.

a. From Fluent Solid Materials drop-down list, select p_material.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1162 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. Enter n_material for Name and nmat for Chemical Formula.

c. Click Change/Create.

d. In the Question dialog box, click No to retain p_material and add the new material (n_ma-
terial) to the materials list.

e. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

31.4.3.3. Defining Cell Zone Conditions

Assign e_material to the cell zone, p_material to the positive tab and n_material to the negative
tab.

1. Assign e_material to the e_zone zone.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → e_zone → Edit...

a. In the Solid dialog box, select e_material from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Click Apply.

2. In a similar manner, assign p_material to tab_pzone and n_material to tab_nzone.

31.4.3.4. Defining Boundary Conditions

Define the thermal boundary conditions for all walls for the cell, and positive and negative tabs.

1. Set the convection boundary condition for wall_active.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Wall wall_active → Edit...

a. In the Wall dialog box, under the Thermal tab, under Thermal Conditions, enable
Convection.

b. Set Heat Transfer Coefficient to 5 [w/m2K].

c. Retain the default value of 300 [K] for Free Stream Temperature.

d. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

You do not need to change the settings under the UDS tab since the boundary condi-
tions for the two UDS scalars have been set automatically when you defined the cell
zone conditions.

2. Copy the boundary conditions for wall_active to wall_p and wall_n.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → wall_active Copy...

a. Make sure that wall_active is selected in the From Boundary Zone list.

b. Select wall_n and wall_p in the To Boundary Zone list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1163
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

c. Click Copy, click OK in the confirmation prompt, and close the Copy Conditions dialog
box.

31.4.3.5. Specifying Solution Settings

1. Turn off the flow and turbulence equations.

Solution → Controls → Equations...

a. In the Equations dialog box, deselect Flow and Turbulence from the Equation selection
list.

b. Click OK.

2. Remove the convergence criteria to ensure that automatic convergence checking does not occur.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. In the Residual Monitors dialog box, enable Show Advanced Options.

b. Select none from the Convergence Criterion drop-down list.

c. Click OK.

3. Create a surface report definition for the voltage at the positive tab.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Area-Weighted Average

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1164 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Surface Report Definition dialog box, enter voltage_vp for Name.

b. Select Battery Variables... and Passive Zone Potential from the Field Variable drop-down
lists.

c. From the Surfaces selection list, select tab_p.

d. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

e. Click OK to save the voltage_vp report definition and close the Surface Report Definition
dialog box.

f. Rename the report output file.

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → voltage_vp-rfile Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1165
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

i. Enter ntgk-1c.out for File Name.

ii. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

g. Modify the attributes of the plot axes.

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → voltage_vp-rplot Edit...

i. In the Edit Report Plot dialog box, under the Plot Window group box, click the Axes...
button to open the Axes dialog box.

ii. Select the X axis and set Precision to 0.

iii. Click Apply.

iv. Select the Y axis and set Precision to 2.

v. Click Apply and close the Axes dialog box.

Note:

You must click Apply to save the modified settings for each axis.

vi. Make sure that time-step is selected from the Get Data Every drop-down list.

vii. Click OK to close the Edit Report Plot dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1166 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Create a volume report definition for the maximum temperature in the domain.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Volume Report → Max...

a. In the Volume Report Definition dialog box, enter max_temp for Name.

b. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. From the Cell Zones selection list, select all zones.

d. In the Create group box, enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console.

e. Click OK to save the volume report definition settings and close the Volume Report
Definition dialog box.

f. Rename the report output file.

Solution → Monitors → Report Files → max_temp-rfile Edit...

i. Enter max-temp-1c.out for Output File Base Name.

ii. Click OK to close the Edit Report File dialog box.

g. Modify the axis attributes by setting the Precision to 0 for the X axis and to 2 for the Y
axes (in a manner similar to the surface plot definition).

h. Click OK.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1167
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

5. Save the case file (unit_battery.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

31.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution

1. Initialize the field variables using the Standard Initialization method.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the selection of the Standard method (Initialization group).

b. Click Initialize.

You do not need to modify Initial Values in the Solution Initialization task page, because
these values are not used for initialization. The Ansys Fluent solver automatically computes
the initial condition for UDS0 and UDS1.

Note:

Warning messages are printed in the Fluent console informing you about interior
zones between different solids. Such messages appear when two adjacent solid zones
separated by an interior face type are using two different materials. The message
suggests using the mesh/modify-zones/slit-interior-between-diff-solids text command
to slit the interior zone between solid zones of differing materials to create a wall/wall-
shadow interfaces. In general, the material property interpolation at wall/wall-shadow
is more accurate if different materials are used at two sides of an interface. However,
the battery model is implemented in such a way that both treatments are equivalent,
and such messages could be ignored.

2. Run the simulation.

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Set Time Step Size to 30 seconds and No. of Time Steps to 100.

b. Click Calculate.

The residual plot, the report for voltage at the positive tab and the history of the maximum
temperature in the domain are shown in Figure 31.5: Residual History of the Simulation (p. 1169),
Figure 31.6: Report Plot of Discharge Curve at 1 C (p. 1169), and Figure 31.7: History of Maximum
Temperature in the Domain (p. 1169), respectively.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1168 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.5: Residual History of the Simulation

Figure 31.6: Report Plot of Discharge Curve at 1 C

Figure 31.7: History of Maximum Temperature in the Domain

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1169
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

3. Save the case and data files (unit_battery.cas.h5 and unit_battery.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

31.4.4. Postprocessing
In this section, postprocessing capabilities for the MSMD battery model solution are demonstrated.

1. Display the contour plot of the phase potential for the positive electrode.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

a. Enter contour-phi+ for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Battery Variables... and Cathode Potential.

d. Click the Toggle Tree View button next to the Surfaces filter and from the drop-down list,
select Surface Type (under Group by).

e. From the Surfaces selection list, under Wall, select wall_active.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1170 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Note:

To change the precision for the colormap labels, click Colormap Options... to open
the Colormap dialog box, and increase the value of Precision.

Figure 31.8: Contour Plot of Phase Potential for the Positive Electrode

2. In a similar manner, display the contour plot of the phase potential for the negative electrode.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1171
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. Enter contour-phi- for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Battery Variables... and Anode Potential.

d. From the Surfaces selection list, select wall_active.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1172 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.9: Contour Plot of Phase Potential for the Negative Electrode

3. Display a contour plot of the phase potential in the passive zones

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1173
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. Enter contour-phi-passive for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Battery Variables... and Passive Zone Potential.

d. From the Surfaces selection list, select tab_n, tab_p, wall_n, and wall_p.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1174 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.10: Contour Plot of Phase Potential for Passive Zones

4. Display the contour plot of the temperature.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1175
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. Enter contour-temp for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Temperature... and Static Temperature.

d. Select Wall in the Surfaces selection list.

The surfaces listed under Wall are automatically selected in the Surfaces list.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1176 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.11: Contour Plot of Temperature

5. Display the vector plot of current density.

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1177
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. Enter vector-current-dens for Vector Name.

b. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

c. In the Vectors dialog box, select current-density-j from the Vectors of drop-down list.

d. Select Battery Variables... and Current Magnitude from the Color by drop-down list.

e. Click the Toggle Tree View button next to the Surfaces filter and from the drop-down list,
select Surface Type (under Group by).

f. From the Surfaces selection list, select Wall.

g. In the Options group, enable Draw Mesh and in the Mesh Display dialog box, set the mesh
display options as desired.

h. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1178 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.12: Vector Plot of Current Density

6. Save the case file as ntgk.cas.h5. You will use this saved case later to treat electric short-circuits.

7. Repeat the simulation for the following charge rates and time steps:

C-Rate Number of Time Steps

0.5 C 230
5C 23

Make the following changes in the model’s settings:

Setup → Models → Battery Model Edit...

a. In the Battery Model dialog box, under the Model Options tab, specify the value listed in
the above table for the C-Rate.

b. Modify the output filename for the voltage_vp-rfile report file by entering ntgk-C-Rate.out
for Output File Base Name in the corresponding Edit Report File dialog box, where C-Rate
is the value of the battery discharge rate. (For example, for C-Rate = 0.5 C, you will enter ntgk-
0.5c.out for the filename).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1179
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

c. Similarly, modify the output filename for max_temp-rfile by entering max-temp-C-Rate.out

for Output File Base Name in the corresponding Edit Report File dialog box.

d. Initialize and run the solution for the number of the times steps specified in the above table.

Note:

The Fluent solver will stop either after completing the specified number of time
steps or when the Min. Stop Voltage condition is reached.

8. Display the discharge curves for the positive tab for the different discharge rates.

a. Open the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Results → Plots → Data Sources...

b. Click Load File... to open the Select File dialog box.

c. Change the Files of type: drop-down filter to All Files (*), select ntgk-0.5c.out and click
OK.

d. Deselect flow-time from the Y Axis Variables selection list.

e. Select voltage_vp in the Legend Names group box, enter 0.5c in the text box that populates
below it and click Change Legend Entry.

f. Do the same for ntgk-1c.out and ntgk-5c.out and change their legend entries accord-
ingly.

g. Enter Discharge Rate for the Legend Label in the Plot group box.

h. Click Plot and close the Plot Data Sources dialog box.

Note:

Use the Axes dialog box to set the precision for the plot axes.

The Figure 31.13: NTGK Model: Discharge Curves (p. 1181) shows the discharge curves for different
discharge rates in the function of time.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1180 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.13: NTGK Model: Discharge Curves

9. In a manner similar to the previous step, load the files max-temp-0.5c.out, max-temp-
1c.out, and max-temp-5c.out and display the maximum temperature curves in the domain.

Figure 31.14: NTGK Model: Maximum Temperature in the Domain (p. 1181) shows the maximum
temperature curves in the simulation for different discharge rates.

Figure 31.14: NTGK Model: Maximum Temperature in the Domain

31.4.5. Simulating the Battery Pulse Discharge Using the ECM Model

Setup → Models → Battery Model Edit...

1. In the Battery Model dialog box, under E-Chemistry Models, select Equivalent Circuit Model.

2. Under Electrical Parameters, retain the default value of 14.6 Ah for Nominal Cell Capacity.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1181
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

3. Retain the default selection of Specified C-Rate and enter 1 for C-Rate.

4. Under the Model Parameters tab, retain the battery specific parameters.

For a given battery, these model parameters can be obtained using the battery's HPPC testing
data.

5. Click OK to apply the ECM battery model settings and close the Battery Model dialog box

6. Click OK in the Warning dialog box informing you that the re-initialization of the battery model
is required.

7. In the Solution Initialization task page, click Initialize to re-initialize the field variables.

8. Simulate the battery pulse discharge by changing the battery operating conditions each time
after running the calculation for five minutes.

a. In the Run Calculation task page, make sure that Time Step Size is set to 30, set Number of
Time Steps to 10 and click Calculate.

b. Click Yes to create new report definition files.

c. Once the calculation is complete, set C-Rate in the MSMD Battery Model dialog box to 0 and
run the calculation for 10 more time steps.

d. Continue the simulation by alternating the value of C-Rate between 1 C and 0 C until, until
the battery is fully discharged.

Note:

Instead of doing this manually, you can use the Using Profile option in the MSMD
Battery Model dialog box and load a profile file with specified C-rate fluctuations
to drive the whole process. For more information about the usage of a profile file,
refer to Specifying Battery Model Options in the Ansys Fluent User's Guide.

The battery pulse discharge is summarized in Figure 31.15: Battery Pulse Discharge (p. 1183).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1182 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.15: Battery Pulse Discharge

31.4.6. Using the Reduced Order Method (ROM)

You will use the ntgk.cas.h5 case file that you saved earlier to illustrate how to use the ROM for
time-efficient calculations. This section assumes that you are already familiar with the Ansys Fluent
battery model; only the steps related specifically to using the ROM for problem solution are discussed
here.

1. Read the NTGK model case file ntgk.cas.h5.

2. Initialize the problem.

3. In the Run Calculation task page, make sure that Time Step Size is set to 30, set Number of
Time Steps to 3 and click Calculate.

Click No in the Question dialog box when asked if you would like to append the new data to the
existing file, and then click Yes in the Warning dialog box to overwrite the existing file.

4. Once the calculation is complete, enable the ROM.

Setup → Models → Battery Model Edit...

a. In the MSMD Method Option group box, select Reduced Order Method.

b. Set Number of Sub-Steps/Time Step to 10 and click OK to close the Battery Model dialog
box.

5. Re-run the simulation continuing from step 2 in Obtaining Solution (p. 1168).

The solution of the simulation using the ROM is significantly faster than when using the direct
method without any changes in results.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1183
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

31.4.7. External and Internal Short-Circuit Treatment

You will again use the ntgk.cas.h5 case file that you saved earlier to illustrate how to treat external
and internal short-circuits in a battery simulation. It is assumed that the battery is experiencing ex-
ternal and internal short-circuit simultaneously. This extreme case will be used to demonstrate the
problem setup and postprocessing in a short simulation. This section assumes that you are already
familiar with the Ansys Fluent battery model, only the steps related to short simulation are emphasized
here.

31.4.7.1. Setting up and Solving a Short-Circuit Problem

1. Read the NTGK model case file ntgk.cas.h5.

2. Set up the external electric short-circuit.

Setup → Models → Battery Model Edit...

a. In the Battery Model dialog box, under the Model Options tab, in the Solution Options
group box, enable Specified Resistance.

b. For External Resistance, enter 0.5 Ohm and click OK.

3. Set up the internal electric short-circuit in the center of the battery cell.

a. Mark the short-circuit zone shown in Figure 31.16: Internal Short Circuit Region Marked for
Patching (p. 1185) using a region register.

Solution → Cell Registers New → Region...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1184 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.16: Internal Short Circuit Region Marked for Patching

i. In the Region Register dialog box, enter the following values for Input Coordinates.

X Min X Max Y Min Y Max Z Min Z Max

-0.01 0.01 -0.01 0.02 -1 1

ii. Click Save/Display and close the Region Register dialog box.

Fluent reports in the console that 12 cells were marked for refinement.

4. Initialize the field variables using the standard initialization method.

Solution → Initialization → Initialize

5. Patch the internal short circuit zone with the short resistance value.

Solution → Initialization → Patch...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1185
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. In the Patch dialog box, select Battery Short Resistance under Variable.

b. Select region_0 under Registers to Patch.

c. For Value, enter 5.0e-7.

d. Click Patch and close the Patch dialog box.

6. Save the case file (ntgk_short_circuit.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

7. Run the simulation for 5 seconds.

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Set Time Step Size to 1 second and No. of Time Steps to 5.

b. Click Calculate.

8. Save the case and data files (ntgk_short_circuit.cas.h5 and ntgk_short_cir-

cuit.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

31.4.7.2. Postprocessing
1. Compute the battery tab voltage .

Results → Reports → Surface Integrals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1186 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Surface Integrals dialog box, from the Report Type drop-down list, select Area-
Weighted Average.

b. From the Field Variable drop-down lists, select Battery Variables... and Passive Zone Po-
tential.

c. In the Surfaces filter, type t to display surface names that begin with "t" and select tab_p
from the selection list.

d. Click Compute and close the Surface Integrals dialog box.

The battery tab voltage of approximately 4.077 V is printed in the Area-Weighted Average
field and in the Fluent console.

2. Compute the battery tab current .

Results → Reports → Volume Integrals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1187
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

a. In the Report Type group box, select Volume Integrals.

b. From the Field Variable drop-down lists, select Battery Variables... and Total Current
Source.

c. From the Cell Zones selection list, select e_zone.

d. Click Compute and close the Volume Integrals dialog box.

Fluent reports in the Total Volume Integral field and in the console that the total volume
integral for the volumetric current source is approximately 8.155 A.

The computed values of the battery tab current and voltage satisfy the tab boundary condi-
tion .

3. Display the vector plot of current at the positive and negative current collectors.

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

a. Enter vector-current+ for Vector Name.

b. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

c. In the Vectors dialog box, select current-density-jp from the Vectors of drop-down list.

d. Select Battery Variables... and Current Magnitude from the Color by drop-down lists.

e. From the Surfaces selection list, select Wall.

The surfaces of the "wall" type are automatically selected in the Surfaces list.

f. Click Save/Display.

g. The plot shows the vector plot of electric current flow in the positive current collector of
the battery cell.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1188 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 31.17: The Vector Plots of Current at the Positive Current Collectors

h. In a similar manner, display the current for the negative current collector by selecting current-
density-jn from the Vectors of drop-down list.

The plot shows the vector plots of electric current flow in the negative current collector of
the battery cell. These plots clearly show that besides providing tab current, short current
flows from positive electrode to the negative electrode through the short area.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1189
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

Figure 31.18: The Vector Plots of Current at the Negative Current Collectors

i. Close the Vectors dialog box.

4. Display the contour plot of the temperature as you did previously.

Results → Graphics → Contours → contour-temp Display

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1190 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Figure 31.19: Contour Plot of Temperature

Figure 31.19: Contour Plot of Temperature (p. 1191) shows a temperature hotspot in the internal
shorted area of the battery cell.

5. Check for different electric current flow rates in the manner described in step 2.

Results → Reports → Volume Integrals...

a. Generate volume integral reports for the field variables listed in the table below.

Field Variable Notation Reported Value

Short Current Source -15.843 A
ECHEM Current Source 23.999 A

b. Verify that the total produced electric current equals to the sum of tab and short current,
that is .

6. Check for different types of heat generation rates.

a. As you did for the current source reports, generate reports for the field variables listed in
the table below.

Field Variable Notation Reported Value

Joule Heat Source 0W

Echem Heat Source 1.092 W

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1191
Simulating a Single Battery Cell Using the MSMD Battery Model

Field Variable Notation Reported Value

Short-Circuit Heat Source 64.607 W
Total Heat Source 65.699 W

b. Verify that the total heat generation rate is the sum of different contributions, that is
.

7. Save the case file (ntgk_short_circuit.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

Note that, as battery's temperature increases, thermal runaway may occur. If thermal runaway starts,
some undesirable exothermic decomposition reactions will occur. For thermal runaway simulations,
the default electrochemistry model cannot be used. Short treatment can only capture the thermal
ramp-up process before the onset of thermal runaway.

31.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you studied how to solve a battery cell problem using the NTGK submodel with the
default settings. You then used the ROM to speed up the computation time of the battery model sim-
ulation. In addition, you learned how to use the MSMD model capability to treat external and internal
short-circuits.

For more information about using the Dual-Potential MSMD Battery model, see the Ansys Fluent User's
and Theory Guides.

31.6. Appendix
The battery cell cross-section is shown in the figure below.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1192 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 References

You can estimate the material properties for your battery cell using the following correlations:

• For density , heat capacity , and thermal conductivity :

where is the effective property value of a material property (such as density, heat capacity, or
thermal conductivity), is the thickness. The subscripts , , and refer to current collector, electrode,
and separator, respectively. The superscripts and refer to positive and negative, respectively.

• For electric conductivity :

The material properties are taken from Kim’s papers [2] and [1]. The computed material properties for
the battery cell presented in the tutorial are shown in the table below.

Zone Total
[um] 20 150 12 145 10 322

[kg/m3] 2700 1500 1200 2500 8960 2092

[J/kg-K] 900 700 700 700 385 678

[W/m-K] 238 5 1 5 398 18.2
[s/m] 3.83e7 13.9 100 6.33e7 = 1.19e6

= 9.83e5

31.7. References
1. U. S. Kim et al, "Effect of electrode configuration on the thermal behavior of a lithium-polymer battery",
Journal of Power Sources, Volume 180 (2), pages 909-916, 2008.

2. U. S. Kim, et al., "Modeling the Dependence of the Discharge Behavior of a Lithium-Ion Battery on
the Environmental Temperature", J. of Electrochemical Soc., Volume 158 (5), pages A611-A618, 2011.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1193
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1194 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 32: Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the
Battery Model
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
32.1. Introduction
32.2. Prerequisites
32.3. Problem Description
32.4. Setup and Solution
32.5. Summary

32.1. Introduction
This tutorial is used to show how to set up a battery pack (battery system connected in parallel/series
pattern) simulation in Ansys Fluent. All the three submodels are available for a pack simulation.

This tutorial illustrates how to do the following:

• Set up a battery pack simulation using the NTGK battery submodel in Ansys Fluent

• Define active, tab, and busbar conductive zones

• Define electric contacts for the contact surface and external connectors

• Define electric conductivity for the active material using the user-defined scalars

• Define electric conductivity for the passive material using the user-defined function

• Obtain the battery pack simulation results and perform postprocessing activities

Most problem setup procedures are similar to the single cell simulation. The differences in the problem
setup will be emphasized in this tutorial.

32.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

32.3. Problem Description

This problem considers a small 1P3S battery pack, that is, the three battery cells connected in series. A
schematic of the problem is shown in Figure 32.1: Schematic of the Battery Pack Problem (p. 1196).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1195
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

Figure 32.1: Schematic of the Battery Pack Problem

The discharging process of the battery pack is occurring under constant power of 200 W. The nominal
cell capacity is 14.6 Ah.

You will create a material for the battery cells (an active material) and define the electric conductivity
for the active material using the user-defined scalars (UDS). You will create a material for busbars and
tabs (a passive material) and define the electric conductivity for the passive material using the provided
user-defined function (UDF). You will use the same material for busbars and tabs.

In this tutorial, you will use the NTGK battery submodel to simulate the discharging process under
constant power conditions.

32.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
32.4.1. Preparation
32.4.2. Reading and Scaling the Mesh
32.4.3. Battery Model Setup
32.4.4. Postprocessing

32.4.1. Preparation
1. Download the battery_pack.zip file .

2. Unzip battery_pack.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file 1P3S_battery_pack.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1196 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 1 under Parallel (Local Machine).

32.4.2. Reading and Scaling the Mesh

1. Read the mesh file 1P3S_battery_pack.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

When prompted, browse to the location of the 1P3S_battery_pack.msh.h5 and select the
file.

Once you read in the mesh, it is displayed in the embedded graphics windows.

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

3. Scale the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Scale

a. In the Scale Mesh dialog box, select Specify Scaling Factors in the Scaling group.

b. Enter 0.1 for X, Y and Z in the Scaling Factors group.

c. Click Scale and close the Scale Mesh dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1197
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

d. Right click in the graphics window and select Refresh Display.

e. Click the Fit to Window icon, , to fit and center the mesh in the graphics window.

4. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

32.4.3. Battery Model Setup

The following sections describe the setup steps for this tutorial:
32.4.3.1. Specifying Solver and Models
32.4.3.2. Defining New Materials
32.4.3.3. Defining Cell Zone Conditions
32.4.3.4. Defining Boundary Conditions
32.4.3.5. Specifying Solution Settings
32.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution

32.4.3.1. Specifying Solver and Models

1. Enable a time-dependent calculation by selecting Transient in the General task page (Solver
group).

Setup → General → Transient

2. Enable the battery model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1198 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Physics → Models → More → Battery Model

a. In the Battery Model dialog box, select Enable Battery Model.

The dialog box expands to display the battery model’s settings.

Figure 32.2: Model Options

Once you enable the battery model, the Energy equation will be automatically enabled in
order to solve for the temperature field.

b. Under the Model Options tab (Figure 32.2: Model Options (p. 1199)), configure the following
battery operation conditions:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1199
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

i. Under E-Chemistry Models, enable NTGK/DCIR Model.

ii. In the Electrical Parameters group, retain the default value of 14.6 Ah for Nominal
Cell Capacity.

iii. Select Enable Joule heat in passive zones in the Energy Source Options group.

iv. Enable Specified System Power in the Solution Options group and set System Power
to 200 W.

c. Under the Model Parameters tab, retain the default settings for Y and U coefficients.

d. Under the Conductive Zones tab (Figure 32.3: Conductive Zones (p. 1201)), configure the fol-
lowing settings:

Group Control or List Value or Selection

Active Components Zone (s) cell_1
cell_2
cell_3
Passive Components Zone (s) n_tabzone_1
n_tabzone_2
n_tabzone_3
p_tabzone_1
p_tabzone_2
p_tabzone_3
bar1
bar2

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1200 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 32.3: Conductive Zones

e. Under the Electric Contacts tab (Figure 32.4: Electric Contacts (p. 1202)), configure the contact
surface and external connector settings as follows:

Group Control or List Value or Selection

External Connectors Negative Tab tab_n
Positive Tab tab_p

The corresponding current or voltage boundary condition will be applied to those boundaries
automatically.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1201
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

Figure 32.4: Electric Contacts

f. Click the Print Battery System Connection Information button.

Ansys Fluent prints the battery connection information in the console window:
Battery Network Zone Information:
-------------------------------------
Battery 1s1p
Active zone: cell_1
Battery 2s1p
Active zone: cell_2
Battery 3s1p
Active zone: cell_3

Passive zone at level 1:

n_tabzone_1
Passive zone at level 2:
n_tabzone_2
p_tabzone_1
bar1
Passive zone at level 3:
n_tabzone_3
p_tabzone_2
bar2

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1202 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Passive zone at level 4:

p_tabzone_3
-------------------------------------

Number of battery series stages =3; Number of batteries in parallel per series stage=1
****************END OF BATTERY CONNECTION INFO**************

g. Verify that the connection information is correct. If an error message appears or if the con-
nections are not what you want, redefine the conductive zones in the Conductive Zones
tab (Figure 32.3: Conductive Zones (p. 1201)). Repeat this process until you confirm that the
battery connections are set correctly.

Important:

To set a valid connection, you must connect the negative tab to the positive
tab through conductive zones.

h. Click OK to close the Battery Model dialog box.

In the background, Fluent automatically hooks all the necessary UDFs for the problem.

i. Click OK to close the Information dialog box.

32.4.3.2. Defining New Materials

Define the new e_material material for all the battery’s cells and busbar_material material for the
battery pack’s busbars and tabs.

1. Create the electric material.

Setup → Materials → Solid → aluminum Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1203
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

a. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box, enter e_material for Name and e for Chemical
Formula.

b. Set Thermal Conductivity to 20.

c. Under Properties, ensure that defined-per-uds is selected from the Electrical Conductivity
drop-down list and click Edit... next to Electrical Conductivity.

d. In the UDS Diffusion Coefficients dialog box, set the constant value of 1.0 e6 for the both
user-defined scalars.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1204 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

i. Select uds-0 in the User-Defined Scalar Diffusion list.

ii. Retain constant from the Coefficient drop-down list.

iii. Set 1.0 e6 [1/ohm-m] for Coefficient.

iv. In a similar way, set uds-1 to 1.0 e6 [1/ohm-m] and click OK to close the UDS
Diffusion Coefficients dialog box.

e. In the Question dialog box, click No to retain aluminum and add the new material (e_ma-
terial) to the materials list.

f. Ensure that e_material (e) is selected from the Fluent Solid Materials drop-down list.

g. Close the Create/Edit Material dialog box.

2. Create the busbar_material material for busbars and tabs by modifying e-material you have
created in the previous step.

Setup → Materials → Solid → e-material Edit...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1205
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

As stated in the problem description, you will use the same material for busbars and tabs.

Note:

If the busbar and tab materials are different, you need to define the two different
materials and assign them to the busbars and tabs, respectively.

a. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box, enter busbar_material for Name and bus for
Chemical Formula.

b. Set Thermal Conductivity to 20.

c. Enter a value of 3.541 e7 [1/ohm-m] for Electrical Conductivity.

d. Click Change/Create.

e. In the Question dialog box, click No to retain e_material and add the new material (bus-
bar_material) to the materials list.

f. Ensure that busbar_material (bus) is selected from the Fluent Solid Materials drop-
down list.

g. Close the Create/Edit Materials dialog box.

32.4.3.3. Defining Cell Zone Conditions

Assign e_material to all the cell zones and busbar_material to all the tabs and busbars.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1206 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

1. Assign e_material to the cell_1 cell zone.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → cell_1 → Edit...

a. In the Solid dialog box, select e_material from the Material Name drop-down list.

b. Click Apply and close the Solid dialog box.

2. Copy the cell zone condition for the cell_1 zone to the cell_2 and cell_3 cell zones.

Setup → Cell Zone Conditions → cell_1 → Copy...

a. In the Copy Conditions dialog box, select cell_1 in the From Cell Zone list.

b. In the To Cell Zones list, select cell_2 and cell_3.

c. Click Copy.

d. Click OK in the Question dialog box to copy the cell zone conditions and close the Copy
Conditions dialog box.

3. In a similar manner, assign busbar_material to all the tabs and busbars cell zones.

32.4.3.4. Defining Boundary Conditions

Define the thermal boundary conditions for all walls for the cells, busbars, and tabs. The boundary
conditions for the two UDSs have been set automatically when you defined the cell zone conditions.

1. Set the convection boundary condition for wall-cell_1.

Physics → Zones → Boundaries

a. In the Boundary Conditions task page, select wall-cell_1 and click Edit....

b. In the Wall dialog box, under the Thermal tab, configure the following settings:

i. Under Thermal Conditions, enable Convection.

ii. Set Heat Transfer Coefficient to 5 [w/m2K].

iii. Set Free Stream Temperature to 300 [K].

iv. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

2. Copy the boundary conditions for wall-cell_1 to wall-cell_2, wall-cell_3 and all the tab
and busbar wall zones (all boundary zones that have names starting with the "wall" string
and containing the "bar" or "tabzone" string).

Setup → Boundary Conditions → wall-cell_1 → Copy...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1207
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

32.4.3.5. Specifying Solution Settings

1. Turn off the flow and turbulence equations.

Solution → Controls → Equations...

a. In the Equations dialog box, deselect Flow and Turbulence from the Equation selection
list.

b. Click OK.

2. Remove the convergence criteria to ensure that automatic convergence checking does not occur.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

a. In the Residual Monitors dialog box, enable Show Advanced Options.

b. Select none from the Convergence Criterion drop-down list.

c. Click OK.

3. Create a surface report definition for the voltage at the positive tab.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Area-Weighted Aver-

age...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1208 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Surface Report Definition dialog box, enter surf-mon-1 for Name.

b. Select Battery Variables... and Passive Zone Potential from the Field Variable drop-down
lists.

c. From the Surfaces selection list, select tab_p.

d. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

e. Click OK to save the surface report definition and close the Surface Report Definition dialog
box.

f. Modify the attributes of the plot axes.

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → surf-mon-1-rplot Edit...

i. In the Edit Report Plot dialog box, under the Plot Window group box, click the Axes...
button to open the Axes dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1209
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

ii. Select the X axis and set Precision to 0.

iii. Click Apply.

iv. Select the Y axis and set Precision to 2.

v. Click Apply and close the Axes dialog box.

Note:

You must click Apply to save the modified settings for each axis.

vi. Ensure that time-step is selected from the Get Data Every drop-down list.

vii. Click OK to close the Edit Report Plot dialog box.

4. Create a volume report definition to monitor the maximum temperature in the domain.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Volume Report → Max...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1210 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Volume Report Definition dialog box, enter vol-mon-1 for Name.

b. Select Temperature... and Static Temperature from the Field Variable drop-down lists.

c. From the Cell Zones selection list, select all zones.

d. In the Create group box, enable Report Plot and Print to Console.

e. Click OK to save the volume report definition settings and close the Volume Report
Definition dialog box.

f. Modify the attributes of the plot axes.

Solution → Monitors → Report Plots → vol-mon-1-rplot Edit...

i. In the Edit Report Plot dialog box, under the Plot Window group box, click the Axes...
button to open the Axes dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1211
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

ii. Select the X axis and set Precision to 0.

iii. Click Apply.

iv. Select the Y axis and set Precision to 2.

v. Click Apply and close the Axes dialog box.

vi. Ensure that time-step is selected from the Get Data Every drop-down list.

vii. Click OK to close the Edit Report Plot dialog box.

5. Save the case file (1P3S_battery_pack.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

32.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution

1. Initialize the field variables using the Standard Initialization method.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the selection of Standard from the Initialization Methods group box.

b. Click Initialize.

Note:

Warning messages are printed in the Fluent console informing you about interior
zones between different solids. Such messages appear when two adjacent solid
zones separated by an interior face type are using two different materials. The
message suggests using the mesh/modify-zones/slit-interior-between-diff-solids
text command to slit the interior zone between solid zones of differing materials
to create a wall/wall-shadow interfaces. In general, the material property interpol-
ation at wall/wall-shadow is more accurate if different materials are used at two
sides of an interface. However, the battery model is implemented in such a way
that both treatments are equivalent, and such messages could be ignored..

You do not need to modify the Initial Values in the Solution Initialization task page, be-
cause these values are not used for initialization. The Ansys Fluent solver automatically
computes the initial condition for UDS0 and UDS1.

2. Run the simulation.

Solution → Run Calculation

a. Set Time Step Size to 30 seconds and No. of Time Steps to 50.

b. Click Calculate and run the simulation up to 1500 seconds.

The residual plot, the history of the voltage at the positive tab and the history of the max-
imum temperature in the domain are shown in Figure 32.5: Residual History of the Simula-

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1212 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

tion (p. 1213), Figure 32.6: Surface Report Plot of Discharge Curve at 200W (p. 1214), and Fig-
ure 32.7: Volume Report Plot of Maximum Temperature in the Domain (p. 1214), respectively.

Figure 32.5: Residual History of the Simulation

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1213
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

Figure 32.6: Surface Report Plot of Discharge Curve at 200W

Figure 32.7: Volume Report Plot of Maximum Temperature in the Domain

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1214 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. Save the case and data files (1P3S_battery_pack.cas.h5 and 1P3S_bat-

tery_pack.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

32.4.4. Postprocessing
In this section, postprocessing options for the MSMD battery model solution are presented.

1. Display the vector plot of current density.

Results → Graphics → Vectors → New...

a. Enter vector-current-dens for Vector Name

b. In the Vectors dialog box, select current-density-j from the Vectors of drop-down list.

c. Select Battery Variables... and Current Magnitude from the Color by drop-down list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1215
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

d. Click the Toggle Tree View button next to the Surfaces filter and from the drop-down list,
select Surface Type (under Group By).

e. From the Surfaces selection list, select Wall.

The surfaces of the "wall" type are automatically selected in the Surfaces list.

f. In the Options group, enable Draw Mesh and set the mesh display options as desired.

g. Select arrow from the Style drop-down list.

h. Set Scale to 0.003.

i. Click Vector Options....

i. In the Vector Options dialog box, enable Fixed Length.

All vectors in your plot will be displayed with the same lengths.

ii. Set Scale Head to 0.1.

iii. Click Apply and close the Vector Options dialog box.

j. Click Save/Display and close the Vectors dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1216 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 32.8: Vector Plot of Current Density

Note:

Use the Headlight and Lighting display options under the View ribbon tab to
manipulate the graphics display.

2. Display the contour plot of the temperature.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1217
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

a. Enter contour-temp for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Temperature... and Static Temperature.

d. Click the Toggle Tree View button next to the Surfaces filter and from the drop-down list,
select Surface Type (under Group By).

e. From the Surfaces selection list, select Wall.

f. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1218 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 32.9: Contour Plot of Temperature

3. In a similar manner, display the contour of Ohmic heat source.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1219
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

a. Enter contour-ohmic-source for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Battery Variables... and Joule Heat Source.

d. From the Surfaces selection list, select Wall.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1220 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 32.10: Ohmic Heat Generation Rate

4. In a similar manner, display the contour of the total heat source.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1221
Simulating a 1P3S Battery Pack Using the Battery Model

a. Enter contour-total-source for Contour Name.

b. Select Banded in the Coloring group box.

c. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Battery Variables... and Total Heat Source.

d. From the Surfaces selection list, select Wall.

e. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1222 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 32.11: Total Heat Generation Rate

5. Save the case file (1P3S_battery_pack.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

32.5. Summary
This tutorial has demonstrated the use of the MSMD battery model to perform electrochemical and
heat transfer simulations for battery packs. You have learned how to set up and solve the problem for
the battery pack of the 1P3S configuration using the NTGK Battery submodel. You have also learned
some of the postprocessing capabilities available in the MSMD battery model.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1223
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1224 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 33: Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange
Membrane Electrolyzers
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
33.1. Introduction
33.2. Prerequisites
33.3. Problem Description
33.4. Setup and Solution
33.5. Summary

33.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates the setup and solution of a proton exchange membrane (PEM) electrolyzer
using the electrolysis model in Ansys Fluent.

The 3D PEM electrolyzer geometry consists of a membrane electrode assembly (MEA), current collectors,
and bipolar plates with flow channels.

This tutorial illustrates how to do the following:

• Set up a PEM electrolyzer simulation using the electrolysis model in Ansys Fluent

• Define solid materials for the anode, cathode, and electrolyte

• Initiate and solve the electrolysis simulation using the pressure-based solver

• Obtain the electrolyzer simulation results and perform postprocessing activities

To learn more about electrolysis modeling, see Electrolysis and H2 Pump Model in the Fluent Theory
Guide and Setting the Electrolysis and H2 Pump Model in the Fluent User's Guide.

33.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1225
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

33.3. Problem Description

The 3D electrolyzer model described in [1] (p. 1251) is considered in this tutorial. The geometry of the
PEM electrolyzer with bipolar plates is schematically shown in Figure 33.1: Schematic of the Electrolyzer
Problem (p. 1226).

Figure 33.1: Schematic of the Electrolyzer Problem

Liquid water is supplied through the anode flow channel at 333.15 K and a mass flow rate of 0.000404
kg/s. It flows through the porous layers to the catalyst layers where electrochemistry reactions occur.
During the electrochemistry reactions, gaseous hydrogen is produced in the cathode catalyst layer, and
oxygen is produced in the anode catalyst layer. Then gaseous hydrogen and oxygen are transported
out of the catalyst layer through the flow channels to the anode and cathode outlets where hydrogen
and oxygen, along with the remaining liquid water, are discharged from the electrolyzer. See Fig-
ure 33.2: The Electrolyzer Cross-Section (p. 1226).

Figure 33.2: The Electrolyzer Cross-Section

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1226 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

33.3.1. Background
In this tutorial, the electrolysis model is used to simulate a 3D PEM electrolyzer. For the PEM electro-
lysis, the electrochemistry reactions are given by:

The electrochemistry reaction rates in the catalyst layers are calculated using the Butler-Volmer for-
mulation, which determines the production rates of hydrogen and oxygen. Due to the presence of
liquid water and gaseous hydrogen and oxygen, the multiphase model is used in the modeling. Two
potential equations are solved to track the electrical currents and ionic currents, respectively.

33.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
33.4.1. Preparation
33.4.2. Mesh
33.4.3. Model Setup
33.4.4. Postprocessing

33.4.1. Preparation
1. Download the electrolysis.zip file .

2. Unzip electrolysis.zip to your working directory.

The mesh file electrolysis.msh.h5 can be found in the folder.

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in Solution Mode.

5. Select 3D under Dimension.

6. Enable Double Precision under Solver Options.

7. Set Solver Processes to 4 under Parallel (Local Machine).

33.4.2. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file electrolysis.msh.h5.

File → Read → Mesh...

When prompted, browse to the location of the electrolysis.msh.h5 and select the file.

Once you read in the mesh, it is displayed in the embedded graphics windows.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1227
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

2. Check the mesh.

Domain → Mesh → Check → Perform Mesh Check

33.4.3. Model Setup

The following sections describe the setup steps for this tutorial:
33.4.3.1. Setting Up Physics
33.4.3.2. Models
33.4.3.3. Materials
33.4.3.4. Boundary Conditions
33.4.3.5. Solution
33.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution

33.4.3.1. Setting Up Physics

Set the solver settings.

Physics → Solver → General...

1. In the General task page, retain the default setting of Pressure-Based under Type (Solver
group box).

2. Retain the default selection of Steady in the Time group box.

33.4.3.2. Models
1. Enable the potential/electrochemistry model.

Physics → Models → More → Potential/Electrochemistry

a. In the Potential/Electrochemistry dialog box, enable Potential Equation.

b. In the Electrochemistry group box, enable Electrolysis and H2 Pump Model.

The dialog box expands to display the electrolysis model’s settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1228 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 33.3: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Model Tab

2. In the Model tab (see Figure 33.3: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Model Tab (p. 1229)),
configure the following settings:

Group Box Control or List Value or Selection

MEA Layer Modeling
Resolved (Selected)
Method
Device Type PEM Electrolysis (Selected)
Electrochemistry Sources (Selected)
Butler-Volmer Rate (Selected)
Options
Osmotic Drag (Selected)
Capillary Pressure (Selected)
Specify Total Voltage (Selected)
Electrical System Setup
Total Voltage 1.730202 V

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1229
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

3. In the Parameters tab (see Figure 33.4: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Parameters
Tab (p. 1231)), configure the following settings:

Group Box Control or List Value or Selection

J_ref 1.36e-9 A/m2
Ea 181411 J/mol
C_ref 55.4088 kmol/m3
Anode (Default)
Con. Exponent 0
Exch. Coeff. a 2 (Default)
Exch. Coeff. c 2 (Default)
J_ref 200 A/m2
Ea 24359 J/mol
C_ref 1 kmol/m3 (Default)
Cathode
Con. Exponent 0 (Default)
Exch. Coeff. a 1
Exch. Coeff. c 1
Open Voltage 1.1999 V
Global
Mod. Coef. OSM_Drag 1 (Default)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1230 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 33.4: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Parameters Tab

Note:

The input values for the electrolyzer considered in this tutorial are taken from
[1] (p. 1251). These inputs may not be appropriate for your electrolysis device. You
must provide inputs suitable for your case.

4. In the Anode tab, specify settings for the anode zones.

a. In the Anode Zone Type group box, select Current Collector, and then in the Zone(s)
multiple-selection list, select anode_cc and retain the default selection of collector-default
for Solid Material.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1231
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

Figure 33.5: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Collector

b. In the Anode Zone Type group box, select Flow Channel, and then in the Zone(s) multiple-
selection list, select anode_fc.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1232 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 33.6: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Flow Channel

c. In the Anode Zone Type group box, select Porous Layer and then and then configure the
following settings (see Figure 33.7: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Porous
Layer (p. 1234)).

i. In the Zone(s) multiple-selection list, select anode_pl.

ii. In the Cell Zone Conditions group box, modify the following settings:

• Set Porosity to 0.75.

• Set Absolute Permeability to 4.9e-11 m2.

• Set Contact Angle to 70 degrees.

• Retain the remaining default settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1233
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

Figure 33.7: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Porous Layer

d. In the Anode Zone Type group box, select Catalyst Layer and then configure the following
settings (see Figure 33.8: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Catalyst Layer (p. 1235).

i. In the Zone(s) multiple-selection list, select anode_cl.

ii. In the Cell Zone Conditions group box, modify the following settings:

• Set Porosity to 0.2.

• Set Absolute Permeability to 4.9e-12 m2.

• Set Contact Angle to 80 degrees.

• Retain the remaining default settings.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1234 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 33.8: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Anode Catalyst Layer

5. In the Electrolyte tab, configure the following settings for the electrolyte/membrane.

Group or List Control or Zone Value or Selection

Zone(s) mem (Selected)
Solid Material electrolyte-default
Cell Zone Conditions Porosity 0.6 (default)
Absolute Permeability 1e-12 m2 (default)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1235
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

Figure 33.9: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Electrolyte Tab

6. In the Cathode tab, specify settings for the cathode zones (in a manner similar to the anode
zones).

a. For the cathode current collector, configure the following settings:

Group or List Control or Zone Value or Selection

Cathode Zone Type Current Collector (Selected)
Zone(s) cathode_cc (Selected)
Cell Zone Conditions Solid Material collector-default

b. For the cathode flow channel, configure the following settings:

Group or List Control or Zone Value or Selection

Cathode Zone Type Flow Channel (Selected)
Zone(s) cathode_fc (Selected)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1236 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

c. For the cathode porous layer, configure the following settings:

Group or List Control or Zone Value or Selection

Cathode Zone Type Porous Layer (Selected)
Zone(s) cathode_pl (Selected)
Solid Material porous-default
Porosity 0.75
Cell Zone Conditions
Absolute Permeability 1e-11 m2
Contact Angle 60 degrees (Default)

d. For the cathode catalyst layer, configure the following settings:

Group or List Control or Zone Value or Selection

Cathode Zone Type Catalyst Layer (Selected)
Zone(s) cathode_cl (Selected)
Solid Material catalyst-default
Porosity 0.2
Cell Zone Conditions
Absolute Permeability 2e-12 m2
Contact Angle 60 degrees (Default)

7. In the Electrical Tabs tab, specify external anode and cathode tabs.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1237
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

Figure 33.10: Potential/Electrochemistry Dialog Box - Electrolyte Tab

a. In the Anode multiple-selection list, select anode_tab, anode_tab.1, anode_tab.1.1.

b. In the Cathode multiple-selection list, select cathode_tab, cathode_tab.1, cath-

ode_tab.1.1.

8. Click OK to close the Potential/Electrochemistry dialog box.

In the background, Fluent automatically makes the following changes:

• Adjusts the solver settings. The information about the changes is printed in the console
window.

• Sets the species model. A mixture material called pem-mixture (consisting of nitrogen, oxgen,
hydrogen, and water-vapor) is automatically created.

• Sets the mixture multiphase model. The pem-mixture mixture material is assigned to the
primary phase. water-liquid is assigned to the secondary phase. The primary phase (phase-
1) is selected for a species mixture material in the Species Model dialog box.

• Enables the energy equation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1238 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

33.4.3.3. Materials
Adjust electrical conductivity and electrolyte conductivity for the solid materials (catalyst-de-
fault, porous-default, catalyst-default, and electrolyte-default).

1. Modify properties of the collector material.

Setup → Materials → Solid → collector-default Edit...

a. In the Create/Edit Materials dialog box, make sure that solid is selected for Material Type,
and collector-default is selected for Fluent Solid Materials.

b. In the Properties group box, set Electrical Conductivity to 20000 and Electrolyte Con-
ductivity to 1e-16.

c. Click the Change/Create button.

2. In a similar manner, modify properties of the porous material as follows.

Important:

You must click Change/Create to save the settings for each material before selecting
the next material. Otherwise, your edits will be lost.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1239
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

Fluent Solid Materials Property Value

Electrical Conductivity 20000
porous-default
Electrolyte Conductivity 1e-16
Electrical Conductivity 5000
catalyst-default
Electrolyte Conductivity 4.5
Electrical Conductivity 1e-16
electrolyte-default
Electrolyte Conductivity 11

3. Close the Create/Edit Material dialog box.

33.4.3.4. Boundary Conditions

Set the boundary conditions at a mass-flow inlet for the mixture phase and phase-2.

Setup → Boundary Conditions → Inlet → anode_in Edit...

1. In the Outline View, right-click anode_in (under the Setup/Boundary Conditions/Inlet tree
branch) and select Edit... from the menu that opens.

2. In the Mass Flow Inlet dialog box that opens, define the boundary conditions for the mixture
phase.

a. Make sure that mixture is selected from the Phase drop-down list.

b. In Thermal tab, enter 333.15 K for Total Temperature.

c. Click Apply.

3. Define the boundary conditions for phase-2.

a. From the Phase drop-down list, select phase-2.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1240 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

b. In Momentum tab, retain the default selection of Mass Flow Rate for the Mass Flow Spe-
cification Method.

c. Enter 0.000404 kg/s for Mass Flow Rate.

d. Click Apply.

4. Close the Mass Flow Inlet dialog box.

Note:

Since phase 1 is not present at the inlet, its mass flow rate is 0 kg/s, which is a default
value.

33.4.3.5. Solution
1. In the Solution Methods task page, retain the default settings for the Pressure-Velocity
Coupling and Spatial Discretization.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1241
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

2. In the Solution Controls task page, adjust the solution settings.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1242 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. Enter 1.0 for Volume Fraction in the Under-Relaxation Factors group box.

In electrolysis applications, the velocities (or convection) are relatively small, and diffusion dom-
inates the flow inside porous zones. Therefore, setting the volume fraction under-relaxation factor
to 1.0 is recommended for a faster convergence.

b. Retain the default values for the remaining under-relaxation factors.

3. Enable the plotting of residuals during the calculation.

Solution → Reports → Residuals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1243
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

a. Ensure that Plot is enabled in the Options group box.

b. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

33.4.3.6. Obtaining Solution

1. Initialize the field variables using the Standard Initialization method.

Solution → Initialization

a. Retain the selection of Standard from the Initialization Methods group box.

b. Modify the Initial Values as follows:

• Set Temperature to 333.15 K.

• Set phase-2 Volume Fraction to 1.

Scroll down the Initial Values list to find phase-2 Volume Fraction.

c. Click Initialize.

d. Save the case file (electrolysis.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

2. Run the simulation.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1244 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. Enter 300 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate.

As the solution progresses, the residuals history will be plotted in the Scaled Residuals tab
in the graphics window (see Figure 32.5: Residual History of the Simulation (p. 1213).

Figure 33.11: Residual History of the Simulation

c. Save the case and data files (electrolysis.cas.h5 and electrolysis.dat.h5).

File → Write → Case & Data...

33.4.4. Postprocessing
1. Compute the volume integral of transfer current at the anode and cathode catalyst layers to
verify that they have the same values (which indicates the total current at the anode and cathode
sides are the same).

Results → Reports → Volume Integrals...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1245
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

a. Select Volume Integral as the Report Type.

b. From the Field Variable drop-down lists, select Potential... and Transfer Current.

c. In the Cell Zones button next to the Surfaces filter and from the drop-down list, select Surface
Type (under Group By).

d. In the Cell Zones multiple selection list, select anode_cl and cathode_cl.

e. Click Compute.

Ansys Fluent reports in the Total Volume Integral field and in the console that the total
volume integral for transfer current at the anode and cathode catalyst layers is approximately
3.12 A. The results printed in the console show that the total volume integrals for the anode_cl
and cathode_cl cell zones are the same, which indicates that the total current is balanced
on the anode and cathode sides.

f. Close the Volume Integrals dialog box

2. Create iso-surfaces through the electrolyzer geometry for postprocessing purposes.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1246 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

a. In the Iso-Surface dialog box, enter z-mid for Name.

b. From the Surface of Constant drop-down lists, elect Mesh... and Z-Coordinate.

c. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the Z extents of the domain.

d. Enter 0.025 m for Iso-Values.

e. Click Create.

f. Enter x-mid for Name.

g. From the Surface of Constant drop-down lists, elect Mesh... and X-Coordinate.

h. Click Compute.

The Min and Max fields display the X extents of the domain.

i. Enter 0.0015 m for Iso-Values.

j. Click Create and close the Iso-Surface dialog box..

3. Display contours of potential on the z-mid cross-sectional surface.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1247
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

a. In the Contours dialog box, enter potential for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Retain the selection of Smooth in the Coloring group box.

d. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Potential... and Electrical Potential.

e. In the Phase drop-down list, retain the default selection of mixture.

f. From the Surfaces selection list, select z-mid.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1248 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Figure 33.12: Electric Potential Distribution

Figure 33.12: Electric Potential Distribution (p. 1249) shows that electric potential on the cathode
side is lower than that on the cathode side. The major electric potential changes occur inside
the catalyst layers due to electrochemistry reactions in catalyst layers.

4. In a similar manner, display the contour of volume fraction of phase-1(pem-mixture) on the x-mid
and z-mid iso-surfaces.

Results → Graphics → Contours → New...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1249
Electrolysis Modeling of Proton Exchange Membrane Electrolyzers

a. Enter volume-fraction for Contour Name.

b. Ensure that Filled is enabled in the Options group box.

c. Retain the selection of Smooth in the Coloring group box.

d. From the Contours of drop-down list, select Phases... and Volume Fraction.

e. From the Phase drop-down list, select phase-1.

f. From the Surfaces selection list, select x-mid and z-mid.

g. Click Save/Display and close the Contours dialog box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1250 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Summary

Figure 33.13: Volume fraction of gas phase

Figure 33.13: Volume fraction of gas phase (p. 1251) shows that the volume fraction of phase-1 on
the cathode side is 0.997 due to the production of gaseous H2. On the anode side, gaseous O2 is
produced and is mixed with the remaining liquid water that has not yet reacted.

5. Save the case file (electrolysis.cas.h5).

File → Write → Case...

33.5. Summary
In this tutorial, you learned how to model PEM electrolysis in a 3D PEM electrolyzer using the electro-
lysis model in Ansys Fluent. You learned how to define solid materials for the anode, cathode, and
electrolyte and set up boundary conditions for the mixture and phases. The steps to perform various
forms of postprocessing were also described.

Bibliography
[1] H. Ito, T. Maeda, A. Nakano, A. Kato, and T. Yoshida. "Influence of pore structural properties of current
collectors on the performance of proton exchange membrane electrolyzer". Electrochimica Acta.
100. 242–248. 2013.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1251
 Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1252 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 34: Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials
The following sections of this chapter are:
34.1. Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial
34.2. Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

34.1. Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
34.1.1. Introduction
34.1.2. Problem Description
34.1.3. Setup
34.1.4. Solution
34.1.5. Summary
34.1.6. References

34.1.1. Introduction
This tutorial provides guidelines for setting up and solving a simple helicopter simulation using Fluent’s
Virtual Blade Model (VBM). The physical rotor is replaced with an actuator disk of finite thickness that
provides the framework to simulate the thrust and torque of the actual rotor and to represent the
rotor effects on the working fluid using the momentum source terms in Fluent’s governing equations.
Local flow characteristics in the actuator disk are extracted from the 3D flow solution generated by
Fluent and used by the VBM to compute the forces acting on each blade section from airfoil look-up
tables, using Blade Element Theory (BET), then applied to the cells composing the actuator disk. Hence
the unsteady rotor problem is replaced with a much simpler time-averaged procedure that can be
used very effectively for the initial design of a real helicopter. The simplified helicopter geometry in
this tutorial consists of a cylinder with a hemispherical nose and a flat disk to simulate the simple
tethering rotor and rotor/fuselage flow interaction in the Georgia Institute of Technology (GIT) wind
tunnel test chamber. The primary purpose of this tutorial is to illustrate the methodology for conducting
this type of simulation, however, even though the mesh is very coarse, very reasonable agreement
with the published experimental data can be obtained.

• VBM meshing requirements.

• Setting up and running in different scenario applications.

• Post-processing different sets of results and interpreting the differences.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1253
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

34.1.2. Problem Description

This tutorial will demonstrate the simulation of a simple helicopter in forward-flight in the Georgia
Institute of Technology (GIT) wind tunnel [1-6] shown in Figure 34.1: Simple Helicopter in the GIT
Wind Tunnel Test Section (p. 1255). The geometric and operating conditions are listed in
Table 34.1: Geometric Data and Operating Conditions (p. 1254).

Table 34.1: Geometric Data and Operating Conditions

Geometric Data
Tunnel dimensions 2.134 x 2.743 x 4.877 m
Body diameter 0.134 m
Body length 1.35 m
Body/rotor clearance 0.135m
Rotor blades 2
Rotor radius 0.4570 m
Cutout radius 0.0125 m
Hinge offset 0m
Blade section NACA 0015
Blade chord 0.086 m
Disk pitch angle -6°
Disk bank angle 0°
Collective pitch 10° (fixed)
Coning angle 0°
Longitudinal flapping angle 1.94°
Lateral flapping angle 2.03°
Blade twist 0°

Operating Conditions
Advance ratio (J) 0.1
Reference pressure 101263.15 Pa
Reference temperature 288.0997 K
Reference density 1.22451 kg/m3
Entrance velocity (Vx) 10.04996 m/s
Rotational speed 2,100 rpm

(Ω = 219.9115 rad/s)
Tip speed 100.49955 m/s

For this simulation, the advance ratio is defined as:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1254 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Figure 34.1: Simple Helicopter in the GIT Wind Tunnel Test Section

For rotor simulations, operating cases will initially be considered using Embedded Disk mode (EDM)
in the following scenarios:

• No trimming

• Collective trimming

• Collective and cyclic trimming

Then, Floating Disk mode (FDM) will be used to simulate a no-trimming option.

34.1.3. Setup
The following sections describe the setup steps for this tutorial:
34.1.3.1. Preparation
34.1.3.2. Mesh
34.1.3.3. Enabling the Virtual Blade Model
34.1.3.4. Setup Units
34.1.3.5. Operating Conditions
34.1.3.6. Physical Modeling
34.1.3.7. Materials
34.1.3.8. Boundary Conditions
34.1.3.9. Reference Values
34.1.3.10. Solution Methods and Controls
34.1.3.11. Solution Initialization

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1255
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

34.1.3.12. VBM Rotor Inputs

34.1.3.13. Convergence Monitoring
34.1.3.14. Post-processing Setup
34.1.3.15. Saving Settings and Re-Launching

34.1.3.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the vbm_helicopter_tutorial.zip file .

2. Unzip vbm_helicopter_tutorial.zip to your working directory and ensure the following

files are available:

• naca0015.dat

• VBM_helicopter_tutorial/GIT_helicopter_tutorial.msh

• xnr_phi0.xy

• xnr_phi090.xy

• xnr_phi180.xy

• xnr_phi270.xy

3. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

4. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in solution mode.

5. Select 3D for Dimension, Double Precision for Solver Options and a suitable number of
Solver Processes.

6. Select the appropriate Working Directory in the General Options panel.

7. Click Start.

34.1.3.2. Mesh
1. To read the mesh file, go to:

File → Read → Mesh…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1256 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Select the GIT_helicopter_tutorial.msh file and click OK.

2. To display the mesh, click the following button in the ribbon.

Domain → Mesh → Display…

Deselect inlet, exit and tunnel in the Surfaces list, select int_rotor and fuselage and click
Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1257
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Since this case uses an embedded disk in the first part of this tutorial (EDM approach), the
computational domain must be divided into two separate but connected fluid domains, referred
to as cell zones (Physics → Zones → Cell Zones). The VBM only acts on the cells that form the
live1 cell zone attached to one side of the actuator disk.

As shown in Figure 34.2: From Left to Right, the Three Components of the live1 Cell Zone:
Int_Rotor, Int_live1 and Int_Live. (p. 1258), Fluent automatically subdivides the live1 cells into
three separate entities.

• int_rotor contains the internal single-sided cell faces lying on the actuator disk surface,

• int_live: contains the cell faces shared by the live and live1 domains, excluding the actuator
disk,

• int_live1 contains the internal cell faces perpendicular to the disk,

3. To display the first two surfaces, select them under Surfaces, and click Display.

4. For the third surface, however, click Adjacency... in the Mesh Display dialog box and select
live1 under Cell Zone(s) and int_live1 from the list of the Adjacent Face Zones and then click
on the Display Face Zones.

Important:

If this arrangement is not respected, the VBM will not work properly in Embedded
Disk mode.

Figure 34.2: From Left to Right, the Three Components of the live1 Cell Zone: Int_Rotor,
Int_live1 and Int_Live.

Since this tutorial uses Embedded Disk mode, the following mesh topology characteristics must
be respected:

• The entire 360˚ azimuth of the rotor must be modeled.

• The actuator disk surface (int_rotor) must have the interior boundary condition.

• The cells attached to one side of the disk must be marked as a separate domain (live1).

• These cells must have one complete face attached to the disk. Only hexa and prisms are allowed.

• A continuum fluid zone (live) must completely envelop the rotor zone (live1).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1258 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

• The fluid zone and rotor zone must have different BC index (id=13 for the fluid zone and 1 for
the rotor zone).

Note:

There is no need to create the disk and corresponding cell zone in the mesh when using
Floating Disk mode. Floating disks can be created during the VBM setup.

34.1.3.3. Enabling the Virtual Blade Model

Fluent VBM can be enabled through the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box or through the Text User
Interface (TUI) by using the following text user interface command in the Fluent Console:

define/models/virtual-blade-model/enable?

Answer yes when asked to enable the Virtual Blade Model.

Note:

The VBM is only available when Dimension is set to 3D at launch.

The VBM can only be enabled when a valid Ansys Fluent case or mesh file has been set
or read.

The current compatibility of the VBM is limited as it cannot operate with multiphase or
inviscid flow. If any of these are active, Fluent will prevent the VBM from being enabled
and display a warning message via either the Console or a pop-up message.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1259
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

34.1.3.4. Setup Units

Since this tutorial is in the SI system of units and the rotor disk, blade pitch and blade flapping
angles are provided in degrees. To set units in SI, go to:

Domain → Mesh → Units...

1. Click angle in the Quantities list and choose deg in the Units list.

2. Click the si button.

3. Close the Set Units dialog box.

34.1.3.5. Operating Conditions

Set the operating conditions.

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1260 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

1. Set a value of 101263.15 Pa in the Operating Pressure box.

2. Set the value of the X component of the Reference Pressure Location to -1 m.

3. Click OK.

34.1.3.6. Physical Modeling

1. Configure the Fluent solver settings.

Physics → Solver → General...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1261
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

a. Type → Pressure-Based

b. Velocity Formulation → Absolute

c. Time → Steady

2. Enable the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

Enable the Energy box.

3. Select the turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1262 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

a. Select the Spalart-Allmaras (1 eqn) turbulence model.

b. Enable Strain/Vorticity – Based under Spalart-Allmaras Production.

c. Enable Viscous Heating and Curvature Correction in the Options section.

d. Click OK to accept all the other default settings and close the Viscous Model dialog box.

Note:

For vorticity-dominated flows, Vorticity-Based under Spalart-Allmaras Production

overpredicts the production of eddy viscosity in the vortex cores. Adding the strain
tensor to the vorticity reduces the production of turbulent viscosity in regions where
the measure of vorticity exceeds that of strain rate.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1263
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

34.1.3.7. Materials
This simulation features a high-speed flow regime, hence compressibility must be enabled.

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit…

1. Select air as the working fluid in the Fluent Fluid Materials pull-down menu

2. Select ideal-gas in the Density [kg/m3] pull-down menu.

3. Click Change/Create followed by Close.

Note:

The VBM also works with the constant density and incompressible-ideal-gas op-
tions.However, the ideal-gas option is more appropriate since rotors usually operate
in the compressible regime.

34.1.3.8. Boundary Conditions

Configure the boundary conditions.

Physics → Zones → Boundaries

1. Set the boundary conditions at the inlet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1264 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1265
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

a. Select the inlet boundary in the Task Page, ensure that its Type is velocity-inlet and click
the Edit… button.

b. In the Momentum panel of the ribbon, select Components from the Velocity Specification
Method pull-down menu.

c. Select Absolute in the Reference Frame pull-down menu.

d. Input the values (10.049955, 0, 0) m/s for the X-, Y- and Z-Velocity components, respect-
ively.

This velocity is calculated using the definition of the advance ratio J = 0.1.

e. In the Turbulence section, select Intensity and Hydraulic Diameter from the Specification
Method pull-down menu.

f. Set the Turbulence Intensity value to 1% (or Turbulence Intensity [fraction]value to 0.01
and the Hydraulic Diameter value to 0.134 m. The diameter of the fuselage is assumed
to represent the characteristic turbulent macroscopic length scale.

g. In the Thermal panel of the ribbon, set a Temperature value of 288.0997 K.

h. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary conditions at the outlet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1266 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1267
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

a. Select the exit boundary, ensure that the Type is pressure-outlet, then click the Edit…
button.

b. Select Absolute in the Backflow Reference Frame pull-down menu.

c. Set the Gauge Pressure [Pa] value to 0.

d. In the Turbulence section, select the Modified Turbulent Viscosity option in the
Specification Method pull-down menu.

e. Set a value of 0.0001 in the Backflow Modified Turbulent Viscosity [m2/s] box.
There is very little chance that backflow may occur, however it is good practice not to
skip this operation.

f. In the Thermal panel of the ribbon, set the Backflow Total Temperature to 288.15
K.

g. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

3. Set wall boundary conditions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1268 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1269
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

a. Select the tunnel boundary, ensure that the Type is set to wall, and and click the Edit…
button.

b. In the Momentum panel of the ribbon, click Specified Shear under Shear Condition.
Within Shear Stress, specify 0, 0, 0 for the X-, Y- and Z-Components [Pa], respectively.

c. In the Thermal panel of the ribbon, select Heat Flux under Thermal Conditions and ensure
that the Heat Flux [W/m2] value is 0.

d. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

e. Retain the default setting for the fuselage boundary.

34.1.3.9. Reference Values

Set the reference values.

Physics → Solver → Reference Values…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1270 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

1. Select inlet from the Compute from pull-down menu.

2. Set the Area [m2] value to 0.65612 (disk area).

3. Set the Length [m] to 0.086 (blade chord).

4. Select live from the Reference Zone pull-down menu.

34.1.3.10. Solution Methods and Controls

Set the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1271
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

1. Scheme → SIMPLE

2. Gradient → Green-Gauss Node Based*

3. Pressure → PRESTO!**

4. Density → Second Order Upwind

5. Momentum → Second Order Upwind

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1272 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

6. Modified Turbulent Viscosity → First Order Upwind

7. Energy → Second Order Upwind

8. Pseudo Time Method → Off

9. Note:

*The node-based averaging scheme is more accurate than the default cell-based
scheme, especially on unstructured meshes, and most notably for triangular and
tetrahedral meshes.

**The PRESTO! pressure discretization scheme is recommended for highly rotating

flows.

10. Retain the default solver controls.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1273
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

34.1.3.11. Solution Initialization

Initialize the solution from inlet boundary values.

Solution → Initialization → Method

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1274 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

1. Select Standard and click Options... to open the Solution Initialization task page which
provides access to further settings.

2. Select inlet under the Compute from drop-down.

3. Set Reference Frame to Absolute.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1275
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

4. Click the Initialize button.

Note:

It is recommended to initialize the solution before configuring the VBM rotor. This
is a mandatory step for Floating Disk mode due to use of Fluent post-processing
tools for creating a floating disk. However, it can be delayed for Embedded Disk
mode.

34.1.3.12. VBM Rotor Inputs

Set up the VBM rotor.

Physics → Models → More

1. Select Virtual Blade Model... to open the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

2. Toggle Enable VBM.

3. Select Embedded Disk under VBM Mode.

4. Press Add. A new rotor with a default name vbmrotor_1 with default properties will be created.
The settings appearing to the right will be updated in the next steps.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1276 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

5. Enter main-rotor in the Active Rotor Name box.

6. Enter the parameters shown in Figure 34.3: General Disk Data Configuration Window (p. 1278).

7. Click the Geometry tab and enter the parameters shown in Figure 34.3: General Disk Data
Configuration Window (p. 1278).

8. Click Change/Create to save the settings. Click OK if the following warning message appears:

9. Click Apply to pre-process input settings and close the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

Note:

The Change/Create button must be clicked to save the updated entries of the current
rotor before moving on to the next rotor or before pressing the Apply button. This
sequence must always be respected, even if the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box (VBM
graphical user interface) is re-opened to simply edit a parameter.

When pressing Apply, Fluent VBM reads and pre-processes data entered in the VBM
Rotor Inputs dialog box and reports some information regarding each rotor zone
in the Console.

VBM will append the .dat suffix to the airfoil file names if it is omitted in the VBM
graphical user interface.

Consult Airfoil File Format within the Fluent User's Guide for more information on
the geometry of the rotor blades and the effect of the parameters.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1277
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.3: General Disk Data Configuration Window

Figure 34.4: Geometry Configuration Window

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1278 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

34.1.3.13. Convergence Monitoring

Configure the residuals monitors that will appear in the Fluent graphics window and console.

Solution → Reports → Residuals…

Figure 34.5: Solution Residuals Configuration

1. Ensure that Plot and Print to Console options are enabled in the Options group box.

2. Enable Show Advanced Options and select absolute from the Convergence Criterion drop-
down list.

3. Set the Absolute Criteria values to 1e-6 for Energy equation and to 1e-5 for other equations
as shown in Figure 34.5: Solution Residuals Configuration (p. 1279).

4. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

Additionally, you may also want to monitor pressure convergence on the actuator disk int_rotor.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → Surface Report → Integral…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1279
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

1. Enter rotor_pressure in the Name box.

2. Enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console in the Create section.

3. Select Pressure… and Static Pressure with the pull-down menus in the Field Variable section.

4. Select int_rotor in the Surfaces section.

5. Click OK to close the Surface Report Definition dialog box.

When the calculation begins, the pressure convergence history will be displayed in the Graphics
window, printed in the Console and written in the rotor_pressure-rfile file.

Additionally, the convergence histories of the thrust, torque, power, moments and forces are written
to the Rotor_1_Loads.dat file. If you want to see the convergence histories of any output
quantity (for example, VBM Thrust) for the rotor, go to:

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → VBM Report → Rotor Thrust…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1280 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

1. Enter main_rotor_thrust in the Name box.

2. Enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console under Create.

3. Select Rotor Thrust under Report Type.

4. Select Quantity under Output Type.

5. Select main_rotor under Rotor Names.

6. Click OK to close the VBM Report Definition dialog box.

When the calculation begins, the rotor thrust convergence history will be displayed in the Graphics
window, printed in the Console and written in main_rotor_pressure-rfile.out.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1281
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Example 34.1: The Ribbon at the Top of the Graphics Window Can Be Used to Change
the View Options Defined Above

(residual/pressure-integral/rotor-thrust convergence history)

34.1.3.14. Post-processing Setup

It's recommended to set up and save the post-processing configuration before proceeding with
the actual solution process. Nevertheless, if you prefer, you may skip this section and configure the
post-processing setup later after obtaining the solution. In the upcoming sections, you'll learn how
to establish a framework for post-processing and extracting data from the solution. This framework
will enable you to compare the solution data with experimental data.

34.1.3.14.1. Cutting Planes for the Pressure Distributions

Create two cutting planes to visualize the rotor-fuselage interaction. One cutting plane will be
oriented perpendicular to the centerline of the fuselage, and the other one will be parallel to the
centerline of the fuselage. These cutting planes will be useful in comparing the effect of trimming
on the solution later on.

Results → Surface → Create → Plane...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1282 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Figure 34.6: Create Plane Surface Plane-y=0

1. Create plane-y=0

a. Enter plane-y=0 in the New Surface Name box.

b. Select Three Points from the Method drop-down list and enable the Bounded box in
the Options list. This will allow the creation of a bounded cutting plane using three corner
points.

c. Enter the coordinates of the corner points in the Points section: P(1) = {-0.25, 0, -0.40},
P(2) = {1.5, 0, -0.40} and P(3) = {1.5, 0, 0.70}.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1283
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

d. Click the Create button.

To define the next plane, do not close the Plane Surface dialog box.

2. Create plane-x=0.3

a. Enter the name plane-x=0.3 in the New Surface Name box.

b. Enter the coordinates of the corner points in the Points section: P(1) = {0.3, 0.7, -0.5},
P(2) = {0.3, -0.7, -0.5} and P(3) = {0.3, -0.7, 0.5)}.

c. Click the Create button.

d. Close the Plane Surface dialog box.

34.1.3.14.2. Cutting Planes for the VBM Results

To properly visualize the VBM results, it's necessary to have a plane surface that intersects the
entire rotor cell zone as VBM variables are cell-based. You will need to determine the surface
normal vector and a point on the plane to create it. For this purpose, you may utilize the Rotor
Disk Normal and Rotor Disk Origin.

Results → Surface → Create → Plane...

Figure 34.7: Create Plane Surface Plane-Disk

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1284 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

1. Enter plane-disk in the New Surface Name box.

2. Select Point and Normal under the Method drop-down list.

3. Enter the coordinates of the point in the Point section: {0.457552, 0, 0.132127}

4. Enter the normal vector components in the Normal section: {-0.104528, 0, 0.996195}

5. Click the Create button.

6. Close the Plane Surface dialog box.

34.1.3.14.3. Curves for the Pressure Coefficient

Four curves will be created along the port and starboard sides and at the top and bottom of the
cylindrical fuselage to enable the extraction of the pressure coefficient. The curves are saved so
that they can be reused for the subsequent cases.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface…

The Iso-Surface panel is shown in Figure 34.8: Iso-Surface Creation Panel (p. 1285).

Figure 34.8: Iso-Surface Creation Panel

1. Create clip-z.

a. Enter the name clip-z in the New Surface Name box.

b. Select Mesh… and then Z-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down list.

c. Select fuselage in the From Surface list and live in the From Zones list.

d. Set the Iso-Values to 0 m.

e. Click the Create button.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1285
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

This operation creates a curve at the intersection of the cylindrical fuselage and an X-Y cutting
plane at position Z = 0 m.

To define the next curve, do not close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

2. Create clip-y.

a. Name the curve around the fuselage clip-y in the New Surface Name box.

b. Select Mesh… and then Y-Coordinate in the Surface of Constant drop-down list.

c. Select fuselage in the From Surface list and live in the From Zones list

d. Set the Iso-Values to 0 m.

e. Click the Create button.

f. Close the Iso-Surface dialog box.

This operation creates a curve at the intersection of the cylindrical fuselage and an X–Z cutting
plane at position Y = 0 m.

3. Create a clip-port.

The curves created in the previous steps are irrelevant in their current state; they must be
divided into port and starboard, top and bottom sides.

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Clip….

Figure 34.9: Iso-Clip Panel for the Creation of the Clip-Port Curve

a. Enter the name clip-port in the New Surface Name box.

b. Select clip-z in the Clip Surface list.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1286 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

c. Select Mesh… and then Y-Coordinate in the Clip to Values of pull-down menus.

d. Click the Compute button. The maximum and minimum Y limits of the curve clip-z are
displayed under the two circular dials.

e. Change the Max [m] limit to 0 and press the Enter key.

f. Leave the Min [m] value at -0.067.

g. Click the Create button.

To define the next curve, do not close the Iso-Clip dialog box.

4. Create a clip-starboard.

a. Enter the name clip-starboard in the New Surface Name box.

b. Retain clip-z in the Clip Surface list.

c. Click the Compute button again.

d. Change the Min [m] to 0 and press the Enter key.

e. Leave the Max [m] value at 0.06699026.

f. Click the Create button.

To define the next curve, do not close the Iso-Clip dialog box.

5. Create a clip-bottom.

a. Enter the name clip-bottom in the New Surface Name box.

b. Select clip-y in the Clip Surface list.

c. Select Mesh… and then Z-Coordinate in the Clip to Values of pull-down menus.

d. Click the Compute button. The maximum and minimum Z limits of the curve clip-y are
displayed under the two circular dials.

e. Change the Max [m] limit to 0 and press the Enter key.

f. Leave the Min [m] value at -0.06693347.

g. Click the Create button.

To define the next curve, do not close the Iso-Clip dialog box.

6. Create a clip-top.

a. Enter the name clip-top in the New Surface Name box.

b. Retain clip-y in the Clip Surface list.

c. Click the Compute button again.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1287
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

d. Change the Min [m] to 0 and press the Enter key.

e. Leave the Max [m] value at 0.06698362.

f. Click the Create button.

g. Close the Iso-Clip dialog box.

7. Delete clip-y and clip-z.

The clip-y and clip-z curves are no longer needed and therefore can be deleted. Go to:

Results → Surface → Manage…

a. Select clip-y and clip-z in the Surfaces list and click the Delete button.

b. Close the Surfaces dialog box.

34.1.3.14.4. Custom Field Function

The experimental pressure coefficient data is provided with respect to the normalized x-coordinate
x/r, where r is the radius of the rotor. Therefore it is necessary to define a Custom Field Function
to facilitate direct comparison.

User-Defined → Field Functions → Custom…

Figure 34.10: Custom Field Function Configuration Panel

1. Select Mesh… and then X-Coordinate in the Field Functions pull-down menus. Click the
Select button. An x will appear in the Definition box.

2. Click the / button.

3. Enter the value 0.457 with the keys of the numeric keypad.

4. Enter the name x-norm in the New Function Name box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1288 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

5. Click the Define and Close buttons.

Note:

To change/modify an already defined custom field function, click the Manage… button.

34.1.3.15. Saving Settings and Re-Launching

Before launching the simulation, it is recommended to save your work.

File → Write → Case…

and save the settings to the VBM_helicopter_tutorial.cas file. Alternately, File →

Write → Case & Data… can be used if you want to save both case and data file.

You can exit Fluent by selecting File → Exit or by clicking the X icon in the top right corner
of the application. Otherwise, go to Solution (p. 1289) to run the calculation.

If you exit Fluent, the steps below should be followed to re-launch and apply VBM settings before
running calculations.

1. Launch the Fluent executable in the working directory using the same launching setup
shown in Preparation (p. 1256).

2. Read the case file, File → Read → Case... and select VBM_helicopter_tutori-
al.cas. Alternatively, you can read both case & data file when restarting from a previous
solution.

3. Initialize the solution from inlet boundary values, select Solution → Initialization
→ Initialize. If you restarted from a previous solution, you can skip this step.

4. Apply the VBM, select Physics → Models → More → Virtual Blade Model… to
open the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box and click Apply. This action will prompt the Fluent
VBM to read and pre-process rotor setup in the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box and report
details on each rotor zone.

Note:

Before starting any iteration, Fluent will automatically apply VBM settings if they have
not been applied yet or if the mesh or input settings have changed. While Step 4 is not
mandatory, it is good practice to apply VBM settings before running the simulation or
after any adjustments to the VBM setup. Fluent will verify the inputs and notify you of
any issues.

34.1.4. Solution
Four simulations will be executed and compared to demonstrate VBM capabilities:
34.1.4.1. Rotor Simulation with Fixed-Pitch Using EDM

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1289
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

34.1.4.2. Rotor Simulation with Collective Trimming

34.1.4.3. Rotor Simulation with Collective and Cyclic Trimming
34.1.4.4. Rotor Simulation With Fixed Pitch Using FDM
34.1.4.5. Comparison with Experimental Results

34.1.4.1. Rotor Simulation with Fixed-Pitch Using EDM

1. For the first simulation, the helicopter rotor is operating in fixed-pitch mode without trimming
using the EDM approach.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Set the Number of Iterations value to 500 and click the Calculate button.

The convergence history of the residuals is shown in Figure 34.11: Convergence History (p. 1291).
The convergence history of the integral of the static pressure on the int_rotor surface is shown
in Figure 34.12: Pressure Monitor Convergence History (p. 1291). Also, the convergence history of
the main-rotor-thrust, which is a VBM output quantity, is demonstrated in Figure 34.13: Rotor
Thrust Monitor Convergence History (p. 1292). You can see that main-rotor-thrust converged
more quickly than the Scaled Residuals, although this is not always the case.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1290 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Figure 34.11: Convergence History

Figure 34.12: Pressure Monitor Convergence History

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1291
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.13: Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History

2. Display contours of pressure on the cutting planes that have been created in Cutting Planes for
the Pressure Distributions (p. 1282):

Results → Graphics → Contours → New …

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1292 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Figure 34.14: Pressure Distribution Contours on the Y=0 Plane

a. Configure the contour settings shown in Figure 34.14: Pressure Distribution Contours on the
Y=0 Plane (p. 1293).

b. Click the Save/Display button to display the image in the graphics window.

c. To see the contours on plane-y=0, as shown in Figure 34.15: Pressure Distribution with Fixed
Blade Pitch, Y=0 Cutting Plane (p. 1294), click the green y-axis arrow in the axis triad twice
and click the Fit to Window button in the graphics toolbar.

d. To change the colormap, click the Colormap Options… button to open the Colormap
dialog and set the parameters (Number Format, Font Size, Colormap Size, etc) based on
your preference.

e. To disable the light on the contour, go to the Lights dialog box, and de-select Light On:

View → Graphics → Lights…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1293
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.15: Pressure Distribution with Fixed Blade Pitch, Y=0 Cutting Plane

f. Create a similar contour for the plane-x=0.3 to see the image of Figure 34.16: Pressure Distri-
bution with Fixed Blade Pitch, X=0.3 Cutting Plane (p. 1294). Use the axis triad, rotation controls,
and Lights dialog box as needed.

Figure 34.16: Pressure Distribution with Fixed Blade Pitch, X=0.3 Cutting Plane

Figure 34.15: Pressure Distribution with Fixed Blade Pitch, Y=0 Cutting Plane (p. 1294) and Fig-
ure 34.16: Pressure Distribution with Fixed Blade Pitch, X=0.3 Cutting Plane (p. 1294) show that
there is a clear pressure load imbalance on the disk, therefore if the helicopter were free to fly,
it would not be able to maintain a straight-and-level course, rather it would tilt up and roll to

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1294 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

the left. To achieve stability, the rotor must be trimmed so that the pressure integrated over
the rotor produces no net moments, only lift and thrust in the forward direction. This can only
be achieved by fine-tuning the rotor collective and cyclic pitch (thrust and moment trimming).

3. To display contours of the results on the disk planes that have been created in Cutting Planes
for the VBM Results (p. 1284), go to:

Results → Graphics → Contours→ New...

Figure 34.17: Setup Contours to Display the Vbm AoA Distribution for Main-Rotor

a. Configure the contour settings shown in Figure 34.17: Setup Contours to Display the Vbm
AoA Distribution for Main-Rotor (p. 1295).

b. Ensure Node Value and all other options are deselected in the Options group box, with
the exception of the Filled option.

Note:

The VBM variables are cell-based. Therefore Node Value must be de-selected for
the values to display correctly.

c. Click the Save/Display button to display the image in the Graphics window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1295
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

d. Modify Colormap Options..., rotate the view and zoom in to get the display shown in Fig-
ure 34.18: VBM AoA Distribution for Main-Rotor (p. 1296)

Figure 34.18: VBM AoA Distribution for Main-Rotor

e. Press Compute. The angle of attack is zero on any cells in the domain except the ones in
rotor cells (live1).The AoA distribution is in the range of -79.97 to 16.77 degrees. During
forward flight, the retreating blade experiences a reduction in the relative airflow velocity
and can enter a stall condition (positive or negative AoA with an absolute magnitude larger
than stall angle), where the airflow separates from the blade surface and creates a region
of reverse flow.

f. Try different VBM variables and visualize their contours by displaying them.

4. Save the Fluent case and data files (VBM_helicopter_tutorial.cas and VBM_heli-
copter_tutorial.dat):

File → Write → Case & Data

34.1.4.2. Rotor Simulation with Collective Trimming

The next simulation should be identical to the previous one, with the exception that, now, the VBM
model will trim the collective angle of the rotor. It is expected that the trimming will recover the
exact blade pitch angle of the fixed-pitch rotor and produce the same thrust. Before enabling the
collective trimming, the thrust coefficient of the fixed-pitch rotor must be computed from the fixed-
pitch solution with the following equation:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1296 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Table 34.2: Values from the Fixed-Pitch Solution (p. 1297) lists the values of the variables appearing
in the formula. The rotor thrust can be recovered from column 3 of the last line of the VBM log
file Rotor_1_Loads.csv. is the coefficient of the dynamic pressure set to 1 in the code.
The blade tip velocity and the reference density are listed in Table 34.1: Geometric Data and Oper-
ating Conditions (p. 1254).

Table 34.2: Values from the Fixed-Pitch Solution

Variable Value
rotor thrust 74.94955 N
dynamic pressure coefficient 1
blade tip velocity 100.499327 m/s

reference density 1.22451 kg/m3

rotor diameter 0.914 m

The computed thrust coefficient value CT is 0.0092363.

1. Enable collective trimming.

Physics → Models → More

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1297
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

a. Select Virtual Blade Model... to open the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

b. Select the Trimming panel in the ribbon and enable Collective pitch.

c. Set the Update Frequency value to 10, the Damping Factor to 0.7 and enter the value
0.0092363 in the Desired thrust coefficient box.

d. Click the Change/Create button to save the new entries.

e. Press the Apply button to pre-process the VBM inputs.

2. Run the calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation→ Run Calculation...

Set a value of 200 in the Number of Iterations box and press the Calculate button.

The residuals, pressure and thrust monitor values should not change for the next 200 iterations.
This short run is required only to verify that the thrust coefficient value is precise and the col-
lective angle printed to the Console after 200 iterations converges to the original 10° fixed-pitch
blade angle.

3. When the execution terminates, save the case and data files (VBM_helicopter_tutori-
al_VP.cas and VBM_helicopter_tutorial_VP.dat).

File → Write → Case & Data…

34.1.4.3. Rotor Simulation with Collective and Cyclic Trimming

1. Enable cycling trimming.

Physics→ Models → More

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1298 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

a. Select Virtual Blade Model... to open the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

b. Select the Trimming option in the ribbon and enable the Cyclic pitch option.

c. Enter the value 0 in the Desired roll-moment coefficient and Desired pitch-moment
coefficient boxes.

d. Click the Change/Create button, then press the Apply button.

2. Run the calculation.

Solution→ Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1299
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Set a value of 600 in the Number of Iterations box and press the Calculate button.

At convergence the residual history will look like Figure 34.19: Convergence History with Collective
and Cyclic Angles Trimming (p. 1301).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1300 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Figure 34.19: Convergence History with Collective and Cyclic Angles Trimming

3. When the execution terminates, save the case and data files (VBM_helicopter_tutori-
al_Co_Cy.cas and VBM_helicopter_tutorial_Co_Cy.dat):

File → Write → Case & Data…

During the saving process, trimming results will also be saved in a Fluent .dat file and printed
in the Console. Due to cyclic pitch trimming, the collective pitch angle changes to 10.14838˚
and the coefficient of cyclic cosine and sine components of the blade pitch angle change to -
1.91224˚ and 2.83469˚, respectively. The resulting converged rotor thrust with both collective
and cyclic trimming is still 74. 94954 N, as it was prior to trimming. These values can be found
in the third column of the Rotor_1_Loads.csv output file.

Figure 34.20: Pressure Distribution with Collective and Cyclic Trimming, Y=0 Cutting Plane (p. 1302)
and Figure 34.21: Pressure Distribution with Collective and Cyclic Trimming, X=0.3 Cutting
Plane (p. 1302) show that the cyclic trimming has balanced the pressure distribution almost equally
along, and especially across, the rotor.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1301
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.20: Pressure Distribution with Collective and Cyclic Trimming, Y=0 Cutting Plane

Figure 34.21: Pressure Distribution with Collective and Cyclic Trimming, X=0.3 Cutting
Plane

4. Exit Fluent by selecting Exit in the File ribbon tab or by clicking the X icon in the top right
corner of the application. For the latter, a Warning dialog box will open. Press OK to exit Fluent.

34.1.4.4. Rotor Simulation With Fixed Pitch Using FDM

Previous simulations were performed using Embedded Disk mode. In this section, Rotor Simulation
with Fixed-Pitch Using EDM (p. 1290) is repeated using Floating Disk mode. The difference is related
to the rotor input setup, such that a floating disk is used instead of an embedded disk. This tutorial

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1302 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

begins by reading the case file saved in the first simulation and then changing some settings.
Generally, the mesh has less prerequisites for the VBM with a floating disk. In this case, the same
grid is used for consistency.

1. If not already done, exit Fluent. Create a new working directory and copy VBM_helicopter_tu-
torial.cas and naca0015.dat to this new directory.

2. Launch the Fluent executable in the new working directory using the same launching setup as
Preparation (p. 1256).

3. Re-read the case file.

File → Read → Case…

and select VBM_helicopter_tutorial.cas.

4. Initialize the solution from inlet boundary values.

Solution → Initialization

and click the Initialize button.

Note:

Before creating the floating disk, an initial solution should be loaded or initialized.
Otherwise, Fluent will give a warning message to do so.

5. Set up the rotor parameter.

Physics → Models → More

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1303
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.22: General Disk Data Configuration Window, FDM, Fixed Pitch

a. Select Virtual Blade Model... to open the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

b. Select Floating Disk as the VBM Mode.

c. Set Rotor Root Cutout [m] to 0.0135.

d. Retain all other settings as shown in Figure 34.22: General Disk Data Configuration Window,
FDM, Fixed Pitch (p. 1304).

e. Press Create Floating Disk. Fluent will create and select the Rotor Surface named srf-fdisk-
main_rotor.

f. Click Change/Create to save the settings.

g. Click OK in the Warning dialog box that appears stating that trimming is off.

h. Click Apply to close the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog.

6. Run calculation.

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1304 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Set the Number of Iterations to 500 and click Calculate.

The convergence history of the residuals is shown in Figure 34.23: Convergence History, FDM,
Fixed Pitch (p. 1306). The convergence history of the integral of the static pressure on the
int_rotor surface is shown in Figure 34.24: Pressure Monitor Convergence History, FDM, Fixed
Pitch (p. 1306). In addition, the convergence history of the main-rotor-thrust is demonstrated in
Figure 34.25: Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History (p. 1307). As shown in the pictures, the
converging history of the current simulation using FDM is similar to that of using EDM (see
Rotor Simulation with Fixed-Pitch Using EDM (p. 1290)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1305
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.23: Convergence History, FDM, Fixed Pitch

Figure 34.24: Pressure Monitor Convergence History, FDM, Fixed Pitch

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1306 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Figure 34.25: Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History

In general, VBM simulations using FDM and EDM should yields the same results as long as the
meshes and facets on the disks are the same. In the current simulation, the converged global
rotor results are almost the same as those of EDM approach, as shown in Table 34.3: Comparison
Between Global Rotor Results Obtained Using EDM and FDM (p. 1307). The negligible discrepancies
in the results are due to the difference between the embedded and floating disk’s facets.

Table 34.3: Comparison Between Global Rotor Results Obtained Using EDM and FDM

Thrust Torque Power Roll Pitch Xp Yp

[N] [Nm] [W] Moment Moment Force Force
[Nm]
[Nm] [N] [N]
EDM 74.9496 -2.5128 552.5913 3.4064 -3.2341 2.7537 0.8662
FDM 74.9794 -2.5139 552.8382 3.4230 -3.2190 2.7604 0.8625

7. When the execution terminates, save the case and data files (VBM_helicopter_tutori-
al_FDM.cas and VBM_helicopter_tutorial_FDM.dat):

File → Write → Case & Data

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1307
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

8. Exit Fluent by selecting Exit in the File ribbon tab or by clicking the button in the top right
corner of the application. For the latter, a Warning dialog box will open to confirm, press OK
to exit Fluent.

34.1.4.5. Comparison with Experimental Results

Even though the purpose of this tutorial is to illustrate the usage of Fluent VBM and the computa-
tional grid is rather coarse to keep the execution times as low as possible, the computational results
can be compared to the experimental data for validation.

34.1.4.5.1. Rotor Simulation with Fixed Pitch

1. To re-read the case and solution files, go to:

File→ Read→ Case & Data…

and read the VBM_helicopter_tutorial.cas and VBM_helicopter_tutorial.dat

files.

2. Compare the results along the top and bottom sides of the fuselage using the XY plot panel.

Results→ Plots→ XY Plot→ New…

a. Deselect the Position on X Axis in the Options section.

b. Select Pressure and then Pressure Coefficient from the Y Axis Function pull-down menu.

c. Select Custom Field Functions… and then x-norm from the X Axis Function pull-down
menu.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1308 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

d. Select clip-bottom and clip-top in the Surfaces list.

e. Click the Load File… button and select files xnr_phi0.xy and xnr_phi180.xy con-
taining the experimental data, then click OK.

f. Click the Save/Plot button.

It is possible to change the curve style. Click the Curves... button in the Solution XY Plot
dialog box, then select the curve # and define the Line Style and Marker Style from the
options in the Curve – Solution XY Plot dialog box.

3. Compare results along the port and starboard sides of the fuselage.

a. Select the two files in the File Data list and click the Free Data button.

b. Deselect the clip-top and clip-bottom entities in the Surfaces list. Select clip-port and
clip-starboard in the Surfaces list.

c. Click the Load File… button and select the xnr_phi090.xy and xnr_phi270.xy files
containing the experimental data, the click OK.

d. Click the Save/Plot button.

Figure 34.26: Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Top and Bottom of the Fuselage (p. 1310)
shows the comparison of the numerical and experimental pressure coefficient along the top
and bottom of the fuselage. Figure 34.26: Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Top and
Bottom of the Fuselage (p. 1310) shows the comparison of the numerical and experimental
pressure coefficient distribution along the port and starboard sides of the fuselage.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1309
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.26: Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Top and Bottom of the Fuselage

Figure 34.27: Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Port and Starboard Sides of
the Fuselage

34.1.4.5.2. Rotor Simulation with Collective and Cyclic Trimming

The same procedures can be used to compare the numerical results with collective and cyclic
trimming to the experimental pressure coefficient along the fuselage. Go to:

File→ Read→ Case & Data…

and re-read the VBM_helicopter_tutorial_Co_Cy.cas and VBM_helicopter_tutori-

al_Co_Cy.dat files, then follow the same procedure outlined above.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1310 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Helicopter Tutorial

Figure 34.28: Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Top and Bottom of the Fuselage Obtained
with Collective and Cyclic Trimming (p. 1311) shows the comparison of the numerical and experi-
mental pressure coefficient along the top and bottom of the fuselage. Figure 34.29: Pressure
Coefficient Distribution Along the Port and Starboard Sides of the Fuselage Obtained with Col-
lective and Cyclic Trimming (p. 1311) shows the comparison of the numerical and experimental
pressure coefficient along the port and starboard sides of the fuselage.

Figure 34.28: Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Top and Bottom of the Fuselage
Obtained with Collective and Cyclic Trimming

Figure 34.29: Pressure Coefficient Distribution Along the Port and Starboard Sides of the
Fuselage Obtained with Collective and Cyclic Trimming

Some improvements in the agreement between the experimental and numerical results with
collective and cyclic trimming are seen at the top of the fuselage. The numerical results on the
port and starboard side have also improved considerably.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1311
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

34.1.5. Summary
This tutorial explains the usage of Fluent’s VBM for a generic helicopter case and compares the nu-
merical results with fixed blade pitch and with collective and cyclic trimming to the published exper-
imental data.

Step-by-step instructions for the Fluent and VBM set up are provided to enable you to conduct real-
istic rotorcraft simulations.

The comparison of the fixed-pitch results with the collective trimming case implicitly demonstrates
that the VBM trimming routine is stable and accurate.

Considering the coarseness of the grid, which has been tailored towards portability, simplicity and
fast turnaround of the tutorial runs, rather than accuracy, a very reasonable agreement between the
results of the simulation obtained with collective and cyclic trimming and the experimental data has
been demonstrated.

VBM simulations using FDM and EDM for the same mesh and same conditions yield the same results.

34.1.6. References
1. Liou, S.G., Komerath, N.M. and McMahon, H.M. “Velocity Measurements of Airframe Effects on a
Rotor in Low-Speed Forward Flight”, AIAA Journal of Aircraft, vol. 26, no. 4, 1989.

2. Glauert, H. “The Elements of Aerofoil and Airscrew Theory,” Second Edition, Cambridge University
Press, New York, USA, 1947.

3. Stepniewski, W.Z. and Keys, C.N., “Rotary-Wing Aerodynamics,” Dover Publications Inc., New York,
USA, 1984.

4. Leishman, J.G., “Principles of Helicopter Aerodynamics,” Cambridge University Press, New York,
USA, 2000.

5. Zori, L.A.J., Rajagopalan, R.G., “Navier-Stokes Calculation of Rotor-Airframe Interaction in Forward

Flight”, Journal of the American Helicopter Society, Vol.40, April 1995.

6. Brand, A.G., Komerath, N. and McMahon, H., “Results from Laser Sheet Visualization of a Periodic
Rotor Wake”, AIAA Journal of Aircraft, vol. 26, no. 5, 1989.

7. Liou, S.G., Komerath, N.M. and McMahon, H.M. “Velocity Field of a Cylinder in the Wake of a Rotor
in Forward Flight”, AIAA Journal of Aircraft, vol. 27, no. 9, 1990.

8. Liou, S.G., Komerath, N.M. and McMahon, H.M. “Measurements of the Interaction Between a Rotor
Tip Vortex and a Cylinder,” AIAA Journal, vol. 28, no. 6, 1990.

9. D.N. Mavris, Komerath, N.M. and McMahon, H.M. “Prediction of Aerodynamic Rotor-Airframe Inter-
actions in Forward Flight”, Journal of the American Helicopter Society, October 1989.

10. Brand, A.G., Komerath, N.M. and McMahon, H.M., “Windtunnel Data From a Rotor Wake/Airframe
Interaction Study”, Georgia Institute of Technology, US Army Research Contract No. DAAG 29-82-
K-0094, 1986.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1312 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

34.2. Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

This tutorial is divided to the following sections:
34.2.1. Introduction
34.2.2. Problem Description
34.2.3. Setup
34.2.4. Solution
34.2.5. Summary
34.2.6. References

34.2.1. Introduction
This tutorial provides guidelines for setting up and solving flow on a 6-bladed aircraft propeller using
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model (VBM). The physical propeller is replaced with an actuator disk of finite
thickness that provides the framework to simulate the thrust and torque of the actual propeller using
the momentum source terms in Fluent’s governing equations. Local flow characteristics in the actuator
disk are extracted from the 3D flow solution generated by Fluent and used by the VBM to compute
the forces acting on each blade section from airfoil look-up tables, then applied to the cells composing
the actuator disk. The unsteady propeller problem is replaced with a much simpler time-averaged
procedure that can be used very effectively for the initial design of a real propeller-driven aircraft.
Although the mesh is very coarse, the purpose of this tutorial is to illustrate the methodology for
conducting this type of simulation, rather than as a validation of the Virtual Blade Model that should
be conducted with much finer grids.

Although the VBM has been specifically developed for rotorcraft simulations, it is also applicable to
general rotating machinery (propellers, wind power, HVAC, automotive, marine, etc.), for flows typically
characterized by:

• Low-to-moderate blade loading

• Predominantly axial flow

• Negligible geometrical blockage

This tutorial will cover the following topics:

• VBM meshing requirements.

• Setting up and running a test case using the VBM.

• Running a fixed-pitch and thrust-trimmed simulation.

• Post-processing the two sets of results and interpreting the differences.

34.2.2. Problem Description

This tutorial will demonstrate the simulation of a simple propeller modeled by an actuator disk, as
shown in Figure 34.30: Simple Propeller, Modeled by an Actuator Disk (Green), Inside a Cylindrical

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1313
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Domain (p. 1315). The geometric and operating conditions are listed in Table 34.4: Propeller Geometric
Data and Operating Conditions (p. 1314).

Table 34.4: Propeller Geometric Data and Operating Conditions

Geometric Data
Tunnel dimensions 50 x 30 m
Tunnel turbulence intensity 1%
Rotor blades 6
Rotor radius 0.5 m
Cutout radius 0.15 m
Hinge offset 0m
Blade section NACA 16016 (6% camber)
Blade root chord 0.1 m
Blade tip chord 0.05 m
Disk pitch angle -90°
Disk bank angle 0°
Collective pitch angle 61.85345° (fixed)
Coning angle 0°
Longitudinal flapping angle 0°
Lateral flapping angle 0°
Blade twist -35.12931°

Operating Conditions
Design advance ratio (Jd) 1.4208
Reference pressure 97013.91 Pa
Reference temperature 284.5926 K
Reference density 1.187584 kg/m3
Inflow velocity (Vx) 84.54519 m/s
Rotational speed 3570.321 rpm

(373.8831 rad/s or 59.50536 rev/s)

Tip velocity 186.94155 m/s

The conditions in Table 34.4: Propeller Geometric Data and Operating Conditions (p. 1314) were computed
using the following definition of the advance ratio.

where

– propeller diameter (m)

– rotational speed (rev/s)

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1314 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

– rotational speed (rad/s)

– propeller axial flow velocity (m/s)

Figure 34.30: Simple Propeller, Modeled by an Actuator Disk (Green), Inside a Cylindrical Domain

Table 34.5: Geometric Characteristics of the Propeller Blade

Section r/R Chord [m] Twist [deg] Airfoil

0 0.30 0.100000 0.00000 naca16016
1 0.40 0.098922 -6.55173 naca16016
2 0.50 0.095905 -12.11207 naca16016
3 0.60 0.090733 -17.06897 naca16016
4 0.70 0.083621 -21.16379 naca16016
5 0.80 0.074353 -24.91379 naca16016
6 0.90 0.063308 -28.53448 naca16016
7 0.95 0.056519 -30.99138 naca16016
8 1.00 0.050000 -35.12931 naca16016

The geometric characteristics of the propeller blade are listed in Table 34.5: Geometric Characteristics
of the Propeller Blade (p. 1315). Figure 34.31: Radial Distribution of Blade Chord and Twist (p. 1316) shows
that the radial distributions of chord and twist are non-linear. Figure 34.32: Lift and Drag Coefficients
of the Modified NACA 16016 Airfoil (p. 1316) shows that the active range of the aerodynamic coefficients
of the modified NACA 16016 airfoil is limited to ±8˚. However, the VBM requires that they be provided
over the full ±180˚ range. At the end of the simulation, it will be good practice to verify that the
angle of attack has not exceeded the ±8˚ range across the entire actuator disk.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1315
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.31: Radial Distribution of Blade Chord and Twist

Figure 34.32: Lift and Drag Coefficients of the Modified NACA 16016 Airfoil

Two operating cases will be considered when using EDM:

• Fixed pitch

• Blade pitch angle trimming (collective) - reverse simulation

34.2.3. Setup
The following sections describe the setup steps for this tutorial:
34.2.3.1. Preparation
34.2.3.2. Mesh

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1316 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

34.2.3.3. Enabling the Virtual Blade Model

34.2.3.4. Setup Units
34.2.3.5. Operating Conditions
34.2.3.6. Physical Modeling
34.2.3.7. Materials
34.2.3.8. Boundary Conditions
34.2.3.9. Reference Values
34.2.3.10. Solution Methods and Controls
34.2.3.11. Solution Initialization
34.2.3.12. Rotor Inputs
34.2.3.13. Convergence Monitoring
34.2.3.14. Post-processing Setup

34.2.3.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the vbm_propeller_tutorial.zip file .

Unzip vbm_propeller_tutorial.zip to your working directory.

Ensure the following files are available in the working directory:

• naca16016.dat

• VBM_propeller_tutorial/VBM_propeller_tutorial.msh

2. Use the Fluent Launcher to start Ansys Fluent.

3. Select Solution in the top-left selection list to start Fluent in solution mode.

4. Select 3D for Dimension, Double Precision for Solver Options and a suitable number of
Solver Processes.

5. Select the appropriate Working Directory in the General Options panel.

6. Click Start.

34.2.3.2. Mesh
1. Read the mesh file.

File → Read → Mesh…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1317
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Select the VBM_propeller_tutorial.msh file, and click OK.

2. To display the mesh, click the following button in the ribbon.

Domain → Mesh → Display…

Deselect inflow, outer and outflow in the Surfaces list and select int_acdisk and click Display.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1318 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Since this case uses an embedded disk, the computational domain must be divided into two
separate but connected fluid domains (Physics → Zones → Cell Zones). The VBM only acts on
the cells that form the disk cell zone attached to one side of the actuator disk.

As shown in Figure 34.33: From Left to Right, the Three Components of the Disk Cell Zone:
Int_Acdisk, Int_Disk and Int_Disk:003 (p. 1319), Fluent automatically subdivides the disk cells into
three separate entities:

• int_acdisk contains the internal single-sided cell faces lying on the actuator disk surface.

• int_disk:003 contains the cell faces shared by the live and disk domains, excluding the ac-
tuator disk.

• int_disk contains the internal cell faces perpendicular to the disk.

3. To display the first two surfaces, select each in the list of Surfaces, and click Display.

4. For the third surface, however, click Adjacency in the Mesh Display dialog box to open the
Adjacency dialog box, select disk from the list of Cell Zone(s) and int_disk from the list of the
Adjacent Face Zones and then click the Display Face Zones.

Important:

If this arrangement is not respected, the VBM will not work properly.

Figure 34.33: From Left to Right, the Three Components of the Disk Cell Zone: Int_Acdisk,
Int_Disk and Int_Disk:003

Since this tutorial uses the Embedded Disk mode, the following mesh topology requirements must
be respected:

• The entire 360˚ azimuth of the propeller disk must be modeled.

• The actuator disk surface (int_acdisk) must have the interior boundary condition.

• The cells attached to one side of the disk must be marked as a separate domain (disk).

• These cells must have one complete face attached to the disk. Only hexa and prisms are al-
lowed.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1319
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

• A continuum fluid zone (live) must completely envelop the rotor zone (disk).

• The fluid zone and rotor zone must have different BC index (10 for the fluid zone and 1 for
the rotor zone).

34.2.3.3. Enabling the Virtual Blade Model

Fluent VBM can be enabled through the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box or through the Text User
Interface (TUI) by using the following text user interface command in the Fluent Console:

define/models/virtual-blade-model/enable?

Answer yes when asked to enable the Virtual Blade Model.

Note:

The VBM is only available with Dimension set to 3D.

The VBM can only be enabled when a valid Ansys Fluent case or mesh file has been set
or read.

The current compatibility of the VBM is limited as it cannot operate with multiphase or
inviscid flow. If any of these are active, Fluent will prevent the VBM from being enabled
and display a warning message via either the Console or a pop-up message.

34.2.3.4. Setup Units

Since this tutorial is in the SI system of units, and the rotor disk, blade pitch and blade flapping
angles are provided in degree, go to:

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1320 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Domain → Mesh → Units...

1. Click angle in the Quantities list and choose deg in the Units list.

2. Click the si button.

3. Close the Set Units dialog box.

34.2.3.5. Operating Conditions

Set the operating conditions.

Physics → Solver → Operating Conditions…

1. Set a value of 97013.91 Pa in the Operating Pressure box.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1321
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

2. Set a value of -1 m in the X component of the Reference Pressure Location section.

3. Click OK.

34.2.3.6. Physical Modeling

1. Configure the Fluent solver settings.

Physics → Solver → General...

a. Type → Pressure-Based

b. Velocity Formulation → Absolute

c. Time → Steady

2. Enable the energy equation.

Physics → Models → Energy

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1322 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Enable the Energy box.

3. Select the turbulence model.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1323
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

a. Select the Spalart-Allmaras (1-eqn) turbulence model.

b. Enable Strain/Vorticity – Based under Spalart-Allmaras Production.

c. Enable Curvature Correction in the Options section.

d. Click OK to accept all the other default settings and close the Viscous Model dialog box.

Note:

For vorticity-dominated flows, Vorticity-Based under Spalart-Allmaras Production

overpredicts the production of eddy viscosity in the vortex cores. Adding the strain
tensor to the vorticity reduces the production of turbulent viscosity in regions where
the measure of vorticity exceeds that of strain rate.

34.2.3.7. Materials
This simulation features a high-speed flow regime, hence compressibility must be enabled.

Physics → Materials → Create/Edit…

1. Select air as the working fluid in the Fluid Materials pull-down menu.

2. Select ideal-gas in the Density [kg/m3] pull-down menu.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1324 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

3. Click the Change/Create button.

4. Click Change/Create followed by Close.

Note:

The VBM also works with the constant density and incompressible-ideal-gas op-
tions.However, the ideal-gas option is more appropriate since rotors usually operate
in the compressible regime.

34.2.3.8. Boundary Conditions

Configure the boundary conditions.

Physics → Zones → Boundaries

1. Set the boundary conditions at the inlet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1325
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1326 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

a. Select the inflow boundary in the Task Page, ensure that its Type is velocity-inlet and click
the Edit… button.

b. In the Momentum panel of the ribbon, select the Components option from the Velocity
Specification Method pull-down menu.

c. Select Absolute in the Reference Frame pull-down menu.

d. Input the values (84.54519,0,0) m/s for the X-, Y- and Z-Velocity components, respectively.

e. In the Turbulence section, select the Turbulent Viscosity Ratio option from the Specification
Method pull-down menu and set the Turbulent Viscosity Ratio to 1.

f. In the Thermal panel of the ribbon, set a Temperature value of 284.5926 K.

g. Click Apply and close the Velocity Inlet dialog box.

2. Set the boundary condition at the outlet.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1327
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1328 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

a. Select the outflow boundary, ensure that the Type is pressure-outlet, then click the Edit…
button.

b. Select Absolute in the Backflow Reference Frame pull-down menu.

c. Set the Gauge Pressure [Pa] value to 0 Pascal.

d. In the Turbulence section, select the Modified Turbulent Viscosity option in the Specific-
ation Method pull-down menu.

e. Set a value of 0.0001 (m2/s) in the Backflow Modified Turbulent Viscosity box.

f. There is very little chance that backflow may occur, however it is good practice not to skip
this operation.

g. In the Thermal panel of the ribbon, set the Backflow Total Temperature to 288.15 K.

h. Click Apply and close the Pressure Outlet dialog box.

3. Set the Wall boundary conditions.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1329
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1330 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

a. Select the outer boundary, ensure that the Type is wall, then click the Edit… button.

b. In the Momentum panel of the ribbon, set the Shear Condition to Specified Shear, specify
0, 0, 0 for the X-, Y- and Z-Component [Pa], respectively.

c. In the Thermal panel of the ribbon, select Heat Flux in the Thermal Conditions and ensure
that the Heat Flux [W/m2] value is 0.

d. Click Apply and close the Wall dialog box.

34.2.3.9. Reference Values

Set the reference values.

Physics → Solver → Reference Values…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1331
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

1. Select inflow from the Compute from pull-down menu.

2. Set the Area value to 0.785398 m2 (disk area).

3. Set the Length [m] to 0.05 m (blade tip chord).

4. Select live from the Reference Zone pull-down menu.

5. Leave all other settings to their default values.

34.2.3.10. Solution Methods and Controls

Set the solution methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1332 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

In the Solution Methods task page, use the pull-down menus to set the following options:

1. Scheme → Coupled

2. Gradient → Green-Gauss Node Based*

3. Pressure → PRESTO!**

4. Density → Second Order Upwind

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1333
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

5. Momentum → Second Order Upwind

6. Modified Turbulent Viscosity → First Order Upwind

7. Energy → Second Order Upwind

8. Pseudo Time Method → Global Time Step

Note:

*The node-based averaging scheme is more accurate than the default cell-based
scheme, especially for unstructured meshes, and most notably for triangular and
tetrahedral meshes.

**The PRESTO! pressure discretization scheme is recommended for rotating flows.

9. Retain the default solver controls.

Solution → Controls → Controls...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1334 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

34.2.3.11. Solution Initialization

Initialize the solution from the inlet boundary values.

Solution → Initialization → Method

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1335
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

1. Select Standard and click Options... to open the Solution Initialization task page, which
provides access to further settings.

2. Select inflow from the Compute from drop-down list.

3. Set the Reference Frame to Absolute.

4. Click the Initialize button.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1336 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

34.2.3.12. Rotor Inputs

The last step before running the case is the configuration of the physical parameters of the propeller.
Set up the rotor parameters.

Physics → Models → More

1. Select Virtual Blade Model... to open the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

2. Ensure Enable VBM is enabled.

3. Select Embedded Disk as the VBM Mode.

4. Press Add under Rotor Names list to add a new rotor. A new rotor with a default name vbm-
rotor_1 with default properties will be created. These entries will be updated in the next steps.

5. Enter main_rotor in the Active Rotor Name box to change the rotor name.

6. Enter the parameters shown in Figure 34.34: General Disk Data Configuration Window (p. 1338).

7. Click int_acdisk in the list of Surfaces to select the actuator disk surface.

8. Click the Geometry button of the ribbon and enter the parameters shown in Figure 34.35: Geo-
metry Configuration Window (p. 1339).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1337
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

9. Click Change/Create to save the settings.

10. Click Apply to close the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

Note:

The Change/Create button must be clicked before moving on to the next rotor
(when present) or before pressing the Apply button. This sequence must always be
respected, even if the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box is re-opened to simply edit a
parameter.

When pressing Apply, Fluent VBM reads and pre-processes data entered in the VBM
Rotor Inputs dialog box and reports information regarding each rotor zone.

The VBM will append the .dat suffix to the airfoil file names if it is omitted in the
VBM graphical user interface.

Consult Airfoil File Format within the Fluent User's Guide for more information on
the geometry of the rotor disk and the effect of the parameters.

Figure 34.34: General Disk Data Configuration Window

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1338 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Figure 34.35: Geometry Configuration Window

34.2.3.13. Convergence Monitoring

Configure the residuals monitors that will appear in the Fluent graphics window and Console.

Solution → Reports → Residuals…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1339
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.36: Solution Residuals Configuration

1. Ensure that Plot and Print to Console options are enabled in the Options group box.

2. Enable Show Advanced Options and select absolute from the Convergence Criterion drop-
down list.

3. Set the Absolute Criteria values to 1e-6 for the energy equation and to 1e-5 for the other
equations as shown in Figure 34.36: Solution Residuals Configuration (p. 1340).

4. Click OK to close the Residual Monitors dialog box.

Additionally, you may want to monitor pressure convergence on the actuator disk int_acdisk.

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New… → Surface Report → Integral…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1340 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

1. Enter rotor_pressure in the Name box.

2. Enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console in the Create section.

3. Select Pressure… and Static Pressure with the pull-down menus in the Field Variable section.

4. Select int_acdisk in the Surfaces section.

5. Click OK to close the Surface Report Definition dialog box.

When the calculation begins, the pressure convergence history will be displayed on screen and
written in the file rotor_pressure-rfile.out.

Additionally, the convergence histories of the thrust, torque, power, moments and forces are
automatically written to the Rotor_1_Loads.dat file. If you want to see the convergence histories
of any output quantity (for example, VBM Thrust) for the rotor, Go to:

Solution → Reports → Definitions → New → VBM Report → Rotor Thrust…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1341
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

1. Enter main_rotor_thrust in the Name box.

2. Enable Report File, Report Plot and Print to Console in the Create section.

3. Select Rotor Thrust under Report Type.

4. Select Quantity under Output Type.

5. Select main_rotor in the Rotor Names list.

6. Click OK to close the VBM Report Definition dialog box.

When the calculation begins, the rotor thrust convergence history will be displayed in the Graphics
window, printed in the Console and written in main_rotor_thrust-rfile.out.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1342 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Example 34.2: The Ribbon at the Top of the Graphics Window Can Be Used to Change
the View Options Defined Above

(residual/pressure-integral/rotor-thrust convergence history)

34.2.3.14. Post-processing Setup

It's recommended to set up and save the post-processing configuration before proceeding with
the actual solution process. Nevertheless, if you prefer, you may skip this section and configure the
post-processing setup later after obtaining the solution.

34.2.3.14.1. Cutting Plane for the Velocity Distributions

Create a cutting plane through the wake of the propeller to visualize the momentum changes
produced by the actuator disk. The cutting plane will also enable a comparison of the effect of
trimming on the solution. Go to:

Results → Surface → Create → Plane…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1343
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

1. Enable Point and Normal in the Method list. This will allow the creation of an unbounded
cutting plane.

2. Enter the name plane-z=0 in the New Surface Name box.

3. Enter the coordinates of the origin of int_acdisk in the Point section: P(0) = {0,0,0}

4. Enter the components of the cutting plane Normal vector, 0,0,1 for iX, iY and iZ, respectively.

5. Click the Create button and close the Plane Surface dialog box

34.2.3.14.2. Cutting Plane Through Disk Zone for the VBM Data Distributions
Create a cutting plane through the rotor zone, parallel to the disk, such that it cuts all prismatic
elements in the rotor zone (disk). This cutting plane will be used to visualize the VBM data distri-
butions on the disk. To create this plane, go to:

Results → Surface → Create → Iso-Surface…

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1344 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

1. Enter the name disk-plane in the New Surface Name box.

2. Select Mesh… and then X-Coordinate from the Surface of Constant drop-down list.

3. Select disk in the From Zones list.

4. Set the Iso-Values to 0 m.

5. Click the Create button and close the Iso-Surface dialog.

34.2.4. Solution
The two simulations can now be executed to demonstrate the capabilities of the VBM. Before starting
the simulation, it is a good idea to save the work at this point. Go to

File → Write → Case…

and save the settings into the VBM_propeller_tutorial.cas file. Alternately, the Case & Data…
option can be used.

34.2.4.1. Propeller Simulation with Fixed-Pitch

1. For the first simulation, the propeller is operating in fixed-pitch mode without trimming. Go to:

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Set the Number of Iterations to 600 and click the Calculate button. The convergence history
of the residuals of the governing equations is shown in FFigure 34.37: Convergence History with
Fixed Pitch (p. 1346). The convergence history of the integral of the static pressure on the
int_acdisk surface is shown in Figure 34.38: Pressure Monitor Convergence History with Fixed
Pitch (p. 1346).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1345
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.37: Convergence History with Fixed Pitch

Figure 34.38: Pressure Monitor Convergence History with Fixed Pitch

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1346 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Figure 34.39: Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History

2. Save the Fluent case and data files (VBM_propeller_tutorial_FP.cas and .dat):

File → Write → Case & Data…

3. To display contours of flow velocity on the cutting plane that has been created in Cutting Plane
for the Velocity Distributions (p. 1343), go to:

Results → Graphics → Contours → New …

a. Configure the window as shown in Figure 34.40: Display the Velocity Distribution on the Z
= 0 Cutting Plane (p. 1348).

b. Click the Save/Display button to display the image in the graphics window.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1347
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.40: Display the Velocity Distribution on the Z = 0 Cutting Plane

c. Click the blue z-axis arrow in the axis triad and zoom in to see the velocity contours on
plane-z=0 near the actuator disk, as shown in Figure 34.41: Velocity Magnitude Distribution
Around the Actuator Disk, Z = 0 Cutting Plane (p. 1349).

d. To change the colormap, click Colormap Options… to open the Colormap dialog and set
the parameters (Number Format, Font Size, Colormap Size, etc) based on your preference.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1348 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Figure 34.41: Velocity Magnitude Distribution Around the Actuator Disk, Z = 0 Cutting
Plane

Figure 34.41: Velocity Magnitude Distribution Around the Actuator Disk, Z = 0 Cutting Plane (p. 1349)
shows the flow contraction by the propeller in the downstream of the propeller. The axial velocity
is increased from 84.5 to 97 at some regions.

4. To display the VBM data like angle of attack on the disk, go to:

Results → Graphics → Contours → New …

a. Ensure Node Values and Global Range are deselected in the Options group box.

Note:

The VBM variables are cell-based, therefore the Node Value check box must be
de-selected in order for the values to display correctly.

b. Re-orient the viewing position along the positive x-axis.

c. Select disk-plane in the list of Surfaces, then select the VBM Model... and desired options
from the Contours of pull-down menu.

d. Click the Save/Display button.

The contours of Angle of Attack (AoA) are shown in Figure 34.42: Angle of Attack Distribution on
the Actuator Disk (p. 1350). This is a useful visual verification that the angle of attack is within the
active region of the aerodynamic properties of the airfoil section (see Problem Description (p. 1313)).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1349
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.42: Angle of Attack Distribution on the Actuator Disk

34.2.4.2. Rotor Simulation with Pitch Trimming (Collective Trimming)

The next simulation should yield identical results to the previous one, with the exception that now
the VBM will trim the blade pitch angle (collective angle) of the propeller to match the same thrust.
It is expected that the trimming will recover the exact blade pitch angle of the fixed-pitch propeller.

Before enabling the collective trimming, the thrust coefficient of the fixed-pitch propeller needs to
be computed from the fixed-pitch solution with the following equation:

Table 34.6: Values From the Fixed-Pitch Solution (p. 1350) lists the values of the variables to insert in
the formula. The rotor thrust can be recovered from column 3 of the last line of the VBM log file
Rotor_1_Loads.csv.

is the coefficient of the dynamic pressure, set to 1 in the code. The blade tip velocity and
the reference density are taken from Table 34.4: Propeller Geometric Data and Operating Condi-
tions (p. 1314).

Table 34.6: Values From the Fixed-Pitch Solution

Variable Value
rotor thrust 761.9573 N
dynamic pressure coefficient 1
blade tip velocity 186.9415 m/s

reference density 1.187584 kg/m3

rotor diameter 1m

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1350 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

The computed thrust coefficient value CT is 0.02337572.

1. To enable collective trimming, go to:

Physics → Models → More

a. Select the Virtual Blade Model... to open the VBM Rotor Inputs dialog box.

b. Set the Collective angle to 55˚.

c. Click the Trimming button in the ribbon and enable Collective pitch.

d. Set the Update Frequency value to 10, the Damping Factor to 0.7 and enter 0.02337572
in the Desired thrust coefficient box.

e. Click the Change/Create button, then press Apply.

2. To run the calculation, go to:

Solution → Run Calculation → Run Calculation...

Enter a value of 600 in the Number of Iterations box and press the Calculate button.

This run is intended to verify that the thrust coefficient value is precise and the collective angle
printed to the Console after 600 iterations converges towards the original 61.85345-degrees
fixed-pitch blade angle.

3. When the execution terminates, save the case and data files (VBM_propeller_tutori-
al_VP.cas and .dat):

File → Write → Case & Data…

At convergence the residual history and pressure monitor history will resemble Figure 34.43: Con-
vergence History with Collective Trimming (p. 1352) and Figure 34.44: Pressure Monitor Convergence
History with Collective Trimming (p. 1352). The convergence history shown in Figure 34.45: Rotor
Thrust Monitor Convergence History (p. 1353) demonstrates the gradual increase of rotor thrust
through the adjustment of collective pitch by the VBM trim routine.

The converged rotor thrust with collective trimming is listed in the third column of the Ro-
tor_1_Loads.csv log file as 761.9573 N. At convergence, the collective angle reported on the
Fluent Console is 61.853442, compared to the fixed-pitch setting of 61.85344°.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1351
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

Figure 34.43: Convergence History with Collective Trimming

Figure 34.44: Pressure Monitor Convergence History with Collective Trimming

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1352 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Propeller Tutorial

Figure 34.45: Rotor Thrust Monitor Convergence History

34.2.5. Summary
This simple tutorial shows that Fluent VBM, which was originally written for helicopter rotor simulations,
can also be used to simulate propellers, even when the actuator disk, the propeller analogue, is not
aligned with the natural helicopter rotor disk orientation (Z-axis).

Step-by-step instructions for the Fluent and VBM set-up are provided to enable you to conduct real-
istic propeller simulations.

The comparison of the fixed-pitch results with the collective trimming case implicitly demonstrates
that the VBM trimming routine is stable and accurate.

Considering the coarseness of the grid, which has been tailored towards portability, simplicity and
fast turnaround of the tutorial runs, rather than accuracy, very reasonable results have been obtained
for both the fixed-pitch and collective trimming simulations.

34.2.6. References
1. Capitao Patrao, A., “Description and Validation of the rotorDiskSource Class for Propeller Perform-
ance Estimation,” In: Proceedings of CFD with OpenSource Software, 2017, Edited by Nilsson., H.

2. Glauert, H. “The Elements of Aerofoil and Airscrew Theory,” Second Edition, Cambridge University
Press, New York, USA, 1947.

3. Stepniewski, W.Z. and Keys, C.N., “Rotary-Wing Aerodynamics,” Dover Publications Inc., New York,
USA, 1984.

4. Leishman, J.G., “Principles of Helicopter Aerodynamics,” Cambridge University Press, New York,
USA, 2000.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1353
Fluent’s Virtual Blade Model Tutorials

5. Zori, L.A.J., Rajagopalan, R.G., “Navier-Stokes Calculation of Rotor-Airframe Interaction in Forward

Flight”, Journal of the American Helicopter Society, Vol.40, April 1995.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1354 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
Chapter 35: Fluent GPU External Aero Sedan
This tutorial is divided into the following sections:
35.1. Introduction
35.2. Prerequisites
35.3. Problem Description
35.4. Setup and Solution

35.1. Introduction
This tutorial demonstrates how to use the Fluent GPU Solver to simulate a turbulent flow around a
sedan.

This tutorial describes how to perform the following:

• Start the Fluent GPU Solver from the Fluent Launcher.

• Read a Fluent case file into the GPU Solver.

• Define models and settings for the simulation.

• Initialize and calculate the solution.

35.2. Prerequisites
This tutorial is written with the assumption that you have completed the introductory tutorials found
in this manual and that you are familiar with the Ansys Fluent outline view and ribbon structure. Some
steps in the setup and solution procedure will not be shown explicitly.

35.3. Problem Description

The problem considers the turbulent flow of air around a sedan at a free stream velocity of 30 m/s.
The sedan modeled here is shown in Figure 35.1: Problem Schematic (p. 1356).

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1355
Fluent GPU External Aero Sedan

Figure 35.1: Problem Schematic

35.4. Setup and Solution

The following sections describe the setup and solution steps for this tutorial:
35.4.1. Preparation
35.4.2. Reading the Fluent Case File Into the GPU Solver
35.4.3. Models
35.4.4. Solution

35.4.1. Preparation
To prepare for running this tutorial:

1. Download the sedan_2m.zip file .

2. Unzip sedan_2m.zip to your working directory.

3. The file, sedan_2m.cas.h5, can be found in the folder.

4. Use the Fluent Launcher to start the Fluent GPU Solver.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1356 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

5. Select Solution in the top-left selection list.

6. On the Fluent Launcher, set the Capability Level to Enterprise, then enable Native GPU Solver
under Options.

After enabling Native GPU Solver, the GPUs available on your machine will be listed under CPU
Processes

7. (optional) To use the GPU solver with multiple GPUs, enable the GPUs you would like to use
under CPU Processes.

8. Click Start.

The graphical user interface (GUI) of the Fluent GPU Solver is nearly identical to Fluent Solution
Mode, with the only difference being that some unsupported features are hidden within the GPU
Solver GUI.

35.4.2. Reading the Fluent Case File Into the GPU Solver
1. Read the Fluent case file sedan_2m.cas.h5.

File → Read → Case...

As the GPU Solver reads the case file, information about the mesh will be reported in the console
and converted settings will be reported as follows:
GPU solver defaults are activated for the following unsupported settings (3)
==================================================================================
Area Settings From To

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1357
Fluent GPU External Aero Sedan

----------------------------------------------------------------------------------
solver warped face gradient correction on off
solver residual scaling global local
initialization reference frame relative to cell zone absolute

For this tutorial, the converted settings are satisfactory.

35.4.3. Models
1. Open the Viscous Model dialog box.

Physics → Models → Viscous...

Figure 35.2: Viscous Model Dialog Box

2. In the Model group box, enable k-omega (2 eqn).

3. In the k-omega Model group box, enable GEKO.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1358 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

4. Click OK to close the Viscous Model dialog box.

35.4.4. Solution
1. Review the Solution Methods.

Solution → Solution → Methods...

Figure 35.3: Solution Methods Task Page

a. Retain the default settings.

2. Initialize the solution using standard initialization.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1359
Fluent GPU External Aero Sedan

Solution → Initialization → Options...

a. In the Solution Initialization task page, ensure that Standard Initialization is enabled.

b. From the Compute From drop-down list, select velocity-inlet-10.

c. Click the Initialize button to initialize the solution.

3. Run the calculation for 5 iterations.

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1360 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.
 Setup and Solution

Solution → Calculation → Run Calculation...

a. In the Run Calculation task page, enter 5 for Number of Iterations.

b. Click Calculate to start the calculation.

4. Reset the GPU performance meter.

Parallel → Timer → Reset

5. Rerun the calculation for 100 iterations.

Solution → Calculation → Run Calculation...

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates. 1361
Fluent GPU External Aero Sedan

a. Enter 100 for Number of Iterations, then click the Calculate button to start the calculation.

Figure 35.4: Residuals

Release 2025 R1 - © ANSYS, Inc. All rights reserved. - Contains proprietary and confidential information
1362 of ANSYS, Inc. and its subsidiaries and affiliates.